Instruction Manual

ETL505 PLC Equipment

Communications ETL540 PLC Equipment
ETL580 PLC Equipment
NSD550 TPS Equipment

ABB Power Automation

Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3

Revision history:

Edition Date
Initial edition 1999-06-25
Revised edition 1999-07-02
Revised edition 2000-01-04

Author’s address:

ABB Power Automation Ltd

Utility Communication Systems
Department NK
CH-5300 Turgi / Switzerland

Call Center: +41 845 844 844

E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.abb.ch/chpau

© ABB Power Automation Ltd

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 I

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3

About this Document

This instruction manual applies to the ETL500 Rel. 3.2 system.

We reserve all rights to this document, even in the event that a patent is issued and a different
commercial proprietary right is registered. Improper use, in particular reproduction and
dissemination to third parties, is not permitted.

This document has been carefully checked. If the user nevertheless detects any errors, he is
asked to notify us as soon as possible.

The data contained in this manual is intended solely for the product description and is not to be
deemed to be a statement of guaranteed properties. In the interests of our customers, we
constantly seek to ensure that our products are developed to the latest technological standards.
As a result, it is possible that there may be some differences between the product and the
product description or the instruction manual.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 II

1KHL015946-EN
ABB 1. Introduction

2. Safety Instructions

3. Structure and Function

4. User Interface Programme

5. Configuration and Set-up

6. Assembly and Installation

7. Commissioning

8. Operation and Maintenance

9. Troubleshooting

10. Storage, Decommissioning and Disposal

11. Options

Annex
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3

0. Contents

0. Contents.............................................................................................................................. I

1. Introduction ....................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Using the manual ..........................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Application of the ETL500 .............................................................................................1-2
1.3 Requirements to be met by the operator .......................................................................1-2
1.4 Requirements to be met by the service personnel.........................................................1-2
1.5 Guarantee provisions ....................................................................................................1-2

2. Safety Instructions .........................................................................................................2-1

2.1 Presentation of safety information .................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 In this instruction manual .......................................................................................2-1
2.1.2 On the equipment ..................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Basic principles .............................................................................................................2-2
2.3 General instructions ......................................................................................................2-2
2.4 Product-specific instructions..........................................................................................2-3

3. Structure and Function ..................................................................................................3-1

3.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Structure .......................................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Functional description .................................................................................................3-13
3.3.1 AF interface O4LE ...............................................................................................3-13
3.3.1.1 Summary ......................................................................................................3-13
3.3.1.2 Telephony .....................................................................................................3-13
3.3.1.3 Teleoperation................................................................................................3-17
3.3.1.4 External teleprotection ..................................................................................3-19
3.3.1.5 Frontplate .....................................................................................................3-20
3.3.2 Teleprotection interface G4AI...............................................................................3-21
3.3.2.1 Summary ......................................................................................................3-21
3.3.2.2 Inputs............................................................................................................3-21
3.3.2.3 Solid state outputs ........................................................................................3-22
3.3.2.4 Relay outputs................................................................................................3-22
3.3.2.5 Frontplate .....................................................................................................3-23
3.3.3 NSK 5 modem G4AK ...........................................................................................3-24
3.3.4 RF-Converter P4LQ .............................................................................................3-27
3.3.5 Alarm relay module R1BC....................................................................................3-29
3.3.6 DC-DC converter B4LE........................................................................................3-30

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 0-1

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3

3.3.7 Channel subrack P7LC........................................................................................ 3-31

3.3.8 40 W power amplifier P1LA ................................................................................. 3-31
3.3.9 Transmit filter E5LA or E5LB ............................................................................... 3-31
3.3.10 Carrier combiner P3LC or P3LD....................................................................... 3-32
3.3.11 RF hybrids P3LB or P3DA, dummy load P3LK................................................. 3-32
3.3.12 Receive filter P4LR .......................................................................................... 3-33
3.3.12.1 Introduction................................................................................................... 3-33
3.3.12.2 Circuit description ......................................................................................... 3-33
3.3.12.3 Interfaces ..................................................................................................... 3-34
3.3.13 Power supply B5LA and B5LC ......................................................................... 3-35
3.3.14 Power subrack P7LA........................................................................................ 3-35
3.3.15 5 W power amplifier P4LS with line interface G1DA ......................................... 3-36
3.3.15.1 Summary...................................................................................................... 3-36
3.3.15.2 Functional description................................................................................... 3-36
3.3.15.3 Frontplate ..................................................................................................... 3-38

4. User Interface Program - MMI500.................................................................................. 4-1

4.1 Introduction................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Installation .................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1 System requirements............................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.2 Install MMI500 ....................................................................................................... 4-2
4.3 Using MMI500 .............................................................................................................. 4-2
4.4 Communication to the ETL500 ..................................................................................... 4-2
4.4.1 Specifying a Write password.................................................................................. 4-3
4.4.2 Direct connection via cable .................................................................................... 4-3
4.4.2.1 Communication media.................................................................................... 4-3
4.4.2.2 Communication settings ................................................................................. 4-3
4.4.2.3 Logon to the equipment .................................................................................. 4-3
4.4.3 Communication via phone modems....................................................................... 4-4
4.4.3.1 Communication media.................................................................................... 4-4
4.4.3.2 Communication settings ................................................................................. 4-5
4.4.3.3 Logon to the equipment .................................................................................. 4-6
4.4.4 Communication via intranet/internet....................................................................... 4-6
4.4.4.1 Communication media.................................................................................... 4-7
4.4.4.2 Communication settings ................................................................................. 4-7
4.4.4.3 Logon to the equipment .................................................................................. 4-7
4.4.5 Connection via intranet/internet and phone modems ............................................. 4-8
4.4.5.1 Communication media.................................................................................... 4-8

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 0-2

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3

4.4.5.2 Communication settings..................................................................................4-8

4.4.5.3 Logon to the equipment ..................................................................................4-9
4.5 Element management networks ....................................................................................4-9
4.5.1 RS-485 station bus ................................................................................................4-9
4.5.2 Embedded operation channel (EOC) ...................................................................4-10
4.5.3 Network protocol ..................................................................................................4-10
4.6 Operation ....................................................................................................................4-12
4.7 Data management.......................................................................................................4-12
4.8 Compatibility ...............................................................................................................4-13
4.8.1 ETL500 releases, release numbers, version numbers, type codes.......................4-13
4.8.2 Compatibility between modules of a PLC terminal ...............................................4-14
4.8.3 Compatibility between the two ETL500 terminals of a link ....................................4-14
4.8.4 Compatibility of MMI500 to ETL500 terminals ......................................................4-14
4.8.5 Compatibility of MMI500 to configuration files ......................................................4-15
4.9 Uninstalling MMI500....................................................................................................4-16

5. Configuration and Setup................................................................................................5-1

5.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Configuration with MMI500............................................................................................5-1
5.2.1 Configure services .................................................................................................5-1
5.2.2 Configure system parameters ................................................................................5-2
5.2.3 Configure NSD550.................................................................................................5-3
5.2.4 Configure telephony ...............................................................................................5-3
5.2.5 Level settings of teleoperation ports, introduction...................................................5-3
5.2.6 Configure teleoperation port not used for transit operation.....................................5-5
5.2.7 Configure teleoperation port used for transit operation...........................................5-6
5.2.8 Configure teleoperation port used for external teleprotection .................................5-8
5.2.9 Configure internal modem G4AK ...........................................................................5-8
5.3 Use of MMI500 files ......................................................................................................5-9
5.4 Signal boosting for teleprotection devices .....................................................................5-9
5.4.1 Disconnectable and non-disconnectable ports or signals .......................................5-9
5.4.2 Priority rules for boosting .......................................................................................5-9
5.4.3 Boost ratio for the internal teleprotection device NSD550 ....................................5-10
5.4.4 External teleprotection device NSD 70.................................................................5-10
5.4.5 Boost ratio formulas for the external teleprotection device NSD 70 ......................5-10
5.5 System levels and level settings..................................................................................5-11
5.5.1 Absolute power level L [dBm].............................................................................5-11
5.5.2 Voltage level Lu [dBu] ........................................................................................5-12

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 0-3

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3

5.5.3 System power level L0 [dBm0] .......................................................................... 5-12

5.5.4 Absolute noise level on the speech channel L0p [dBm0p] ................................. 5-12
5.5.5 Conversion to another system impedance ........................................................... 5-12
5.5.6 Relative power level Lrel [dBr] ........................................................................... 5-13
5.5.7 Calculation of the absolute power level................................................................ 5-13
5.6 Level measurements .................................................................................................. 5-13
5.7 System levels in detail ................................................................................................ 5-14
5.8 The S-value ................................................................................................................ 5-15
5.8.1 Calculation of the transmitter level ....................................................................... 5-16
5.8.2 Examples............................................................................................................. 5-17

6. Assembly and Installation ............................................................................................. 6-1

6.1 Safety instructions ........................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Unpacking and transport............................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.1 Inspection upon receipt.......................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2 What to do if there is transport damage ................................................................. 6-4
6.2.3 Precautions to avoid transport damage ................................................................. 6-4
6.3 Installation .................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.1 Place of installation and ambient conditions .......................................................... 6-4
6.4 Cubicle ......................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.4.1 Grounding system ................................................................................................. 6-4
6.4.2 Installing racks in cubicles ..................................................................................... 6-5
6.4.3 External cables ...................................................................................................... 6-5
6.5 Photographs ................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.6 External Connections.................................................................................................. 6-13
6.6.1 Auxiliary Supply ................................................................................................... 6-13
6.6.2 Coaxial Cable ...................................................................................................... 6-14
6.6.3 Interfaces............................................................................................................. 6-14
6.6.3.1 AF Interface O4LE........................................................................................ 6-15
6.6.3.2 Teleprotection Interface G4AI ....................................................................... 6-18
6.6.3.3 RF Converter P4LQ...................................................................................... 6-20
6.6.3.4 Alarm Relay Module R1BC ........................................................................... 6-20
6.6.3.5 NSK5 modem G4AK..................................................................................... 6-22
6.6.3.6 Remote inquiry kit R7AP............................................................................... 6-23

7. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 7-1

7.1 Safety instructions ........................................................................................................ 7-1
7.2 Checking the line of communication ............................................................................. 7-3

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 0-4

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3

7.2.1 Return loss.............................................................................................................7-3

7.2.2 Line attenuation .....................................................................................................7-7
7.3 Commissioning of the PLC equipment ..........................................................................7-9
7.3.1 Preliminary tests and checks..................................................................................7-9
7.3.2 Tests according to the commissioning instructions.................................................7-9

8. Operation and Maintenance...........................................................................................8-1

8.1 Safety Instructions.........................................................................................................8-1
8.2 Operation ......................................................................................................................8-3
8.2.1 Normal Operation...................................................................................................8-3
8.2.2 Faulty Operation ....................................................................................................8-3
8.3 Maintenance .................................................................................................................8-4
8.3.1 Periodic Functional Checks....................................................................................8-4
8.3.1.1 Check input power supply voltage...................................................................8-4
8.3.1.2 Check alarm status for ETL500 element management networks.....................8-4
8.3.1.3 Check alarm events ........................................................................................8-4
8.3.1.4 Check status data ...........................................................................................8-4
8.3.1.5 Check frequency response .............................................................................8-5
8.3.1.6 Check AF levels ..............................................................................................8-5

9. Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Safety Instructions.........................................................................................................9-1
9.2 Fuses ............................................................................................................................9-3
9.3 Alarms...........................................................................................................................9-3
9.3.1 Alarm concept ........................................................................................................9-3
9.3.2 Alarm event recorder..............................................................................................9-6
9.3.3 Alarm polling ..........................................................................................................9-6
9.4 Warnings.......................................................................................................................9-6
9.5 Some basic checks .......................................................................................................9-8
9.6 Frequently asked questions ..........................................................................................9-8
9.7 List of alarms and corrective actions .............................................................................9-9
9.8 Replacement of faulty items ........................................................................................9-13
9.9 Dispatch for repairs .....................................................................................................9-14

10. Storage, Decommissioning and Disposal ...................................................................10-1

10.1 Safety instructions....................................................................................................10-1
10.2 Storage ....................................................................................................................10-1
10.3 Decommissioning.....................................................................................................10-2
10.4 Disposal ...................................................................................................................10-2

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 0-5

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3

11. Options.......................................................................................................................... 11-1

11.1 Basic equipment ...................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Optional equipment ................................................................................................. 11-1
11.2.1 Optional modules ............................................................................................. 11-1
11.2.1.1 AF interface type O4LE ................................................................................ 11-1
11.2.1.2 Teleprotection interface type G4AI ............................................................... 11-1
11.2.1.3 FSK-modem NSK5 type G4AK ..................................................................... 11-1
11.2.1.4 Alarm relay module type R1BC..................................................................... 11-1
11.2.1.5 Cables .......................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2.2 Optional facilities.............................................................................................. 11-2
11.2.2.1 User Interface Programme - MMI500............................................................ 11-2
11.2.2.2 Cabinet type E40A with accessories............................................................. 11-2
11.2.2.3 Personal Computer....................................................................................... 11-2
11.2.2.4 RF connection plate A9CS ........................................................................... 11-3
11.2.2.5 Maintenance tool kit...................................................................................... 11-3
11.2.2.6 Remote inquiry kit R7AP............................................................................... 11-3
11.3 NSD550 – Optional Internal Teleprotection Equipment............................................ 11-4
11.3.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 11-4
11.3.2 Intended Use of the NSD550 ........................................................................... 11-4
11.3.3 Structure of the NSD550 .................................................................................. 11-5
11.3.4 Features........................................................................................................... 11-6
11.3.5 Applications...................................................................................................... 11-8
11.3.5.1 Permissive Tripping Schemes ...................................................................... 11-9
11.3.5.2 Direct Transfer Tripping ................................................................................ 11-9
11.3.5.3 Blocking Schemes ...................................................................................... 11-10
11.3.5.4 Unblocking ................................................................................................. 11-11
11.3.5.5 Protecting Dual-Circuit Lines ...................................................................... 11-12
11.3.5.6 Protecting Single-Circuit Lines.................................................................... 11-14
11.3.5.7 Phase Segregated Line Protection ............................................................. 11-16
11.3.5.8 Relaying Tripping Signals Through Intermediate Stations........................... 11-17
11.3.6 Performance Criteria ...................................................................................... 11-18
11.3.6.1 Transmission Time ..................................................................................... 11-18
11.3.6.2 Security ...................................................................................................... 11-18
11.3.6.3 Dependability.............................................................................................. 11-19
11.3.7 Operating Principle......................................................................................... 11-24
11.3.8 Functional Description.................................................................................... 11-25
11.3.8.1 General ...................................................................................................... 11-25

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 0-6

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3

11.3.8.2 Speech Bandwidth ......................................................................................11-25

11.3.8.3 Guard Signal...............................................................................................11-25
11.3.8.4 Command Signals.......................................................................................11-26
11.3.8.5 Interference in Speech Band.......................................................................11-27
11.3.8.6 Signal Boosting; Disconnection of Speech and Data Channels...................11-27
11.3.8.7 Command Prolongation ..............................................................................11-28
11.3.8.8 Commands and Command Combinations...................................................11-28
11.3.8.9 Command Counters....................................................................................11-29
11.3.8.10 Tx Trip Duration Monitoring ......................................................................11-29
11.3.8.11 Blocking of AGC .......................................................................................11-29
11.3.8.12 Command Outputs in Link Alarm State.....................................................11-30
11.3.8.13 Cyclic Loop Test.......................................................................................11-30
11.3.8.14 Manual Loop Test.....................................................................................11-31
11.3.8.15 Local Test Mode.......................................................................................11-31
11.3.8.16 Start Inputs...............................................................................................11-32
11.3.8.17 Tx Command Acknowledge......................................................................11-32
11.3.8.18 Unblocking ...............................................................................................11-32
11.3.8.19 Rx Guard..................................................................................................11-32
11.3.8.20 Alarms......................................................................................................11-32
11.3.8.21 NSD550 in 8 kHz Operating Mode............................................................11-33
11.3.9 Event Recorder ..............................................................................................11-33
11.3.9.1 General.......................................................................................................11-33
11.3.9.2 NSD550 Command Events .........................................................................11-34
11.3.9.3 Alarm Events ..............................................................................................11-34
11.3.9.4 NSD550 Command Counters......................................................................11-35
11.3.9.5 Upload Events ............................................................................................11-35
11.3.9.6 Upload Counters .........................................................................................11-35
11.3.9.7 Reset Counter.............................................................................................11-35
11.3.9.8 Set Clock ....................................................................................................11-36
11.3.9.9 RTC Synchronization From an External Clock ............................................11-36
11.3.9.10 Views .......................................................................................................11-36
11.3.10 Configuration and Setup.................................................................................11-38
11.3.10.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................11-38
11.3.10.2 Compatibility.............................................................................................11-38
11.3.10.3 User Interface Program – MMI500............................................................11-38
11.3.10.4 First steps.................................................................................................11-39
11.3.10.5 System settings ........................................................................................11-39

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 0-7

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3

11.3.10.6 Performance ............................................................................................ 11-40

11.3.10.7 Command Rx........................................................................................... 11-40
11.3.10.8 Alarm and unblocking settings ................................................................. 11-40
11.3.10.9 Interface settings...................................................................................... 11-41
11.3.11 Commissioning .............................................................................................. 11-41
11.3.11.1 Preliminary tests and checks ................................................................... 11-42
11.3.11.2 Tests according the commissioning instructions ...................................... 11-42
11.3.12 Operation and Maintenance ........................................................................... 11-42
11.3.12.1 Normal Operation..................................................................................... 11-42
11.3.12.2 Faulty Operation ...................................................................................... 11-42
11.3.12.3 Periodic functional checks........................................................................ 11-42
11.3.13 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 11-44
11.3.13.1 Basic checks............................................................................................ 11-44
11.3.13.2 Alarm messages and their causes ........................................................... 11-44

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 0-8

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 1 Introduction

1. Introduction

The new ETL500 Power Line Carrier equipment combines new computerised
circuits and firmware with the advantages of the analogue circuits of ETL41
series to achieve high dependability and easy adaptability to all requirements in
the field of communication with power line carrier.

The ETL505, ETL540 and ETL580 are the members of the ETL500 family. They
are assembled in standard 19” racks, one with 6 ASA-units and one or two with 3
ASA-units, the first carrying the basic modules for a single or dual channel
equipment and providing space for various interfaces while the second houses
the 40 W power amplifier and associated modules.

Normally ETL500 is mounted in ABB’s standard cabinet E40A with a hinged

19” frame and all external connections are wired to the back of the cabinet,
providing easy access during installation, commissioning and maintenance. Even
if ETL500 is normally mounted in the standard cabinet type E40A, it can be
mounted in any 19” rack or cabinet providing the required protection and air
circulation.

ETL500 provides the necessary RF-filters, hybrids and coaxial connectors for
connection to the line matching and coupling devices. With a wide range of
interfaces it allows configurations and assemblies which meet the clients
individual requirements best. These configurations are documented and
explained in this manual.

1.1 Using the manual

The manual is written for service and operation personnel in the high voltage
(HV) power line environment. All existing safety instructions in the client's
environment have to be observed and only trained and instructed personnel
should work with the equipment. The manual provides the necessary instructions
for all the steps in the life-cycle of the equipment, e.g. from transport, storage,
commissioning to maintenance, decommisioning and disposal. Please refer to
the appropriate section for the particular step or function.

The different steps of transport, installation, testing and commissioning are

normally made by various people. Safety instructions are therefore included in all
the corresponding chapters and may so appear as double information.

In this manual, two types of persons dealing with the equipment are
distinguished: Service personnel and operator.

The software version referred to in this instruction manual is 'MMI500 Version

3.12'. Please refer the document '1KHL015559-EN' in the annex for compatibility
between Hardware, Firmware and Software of ETL500.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 1-1

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 1 Introduction

1.2 Application of the ETL500

The ETL500 is a Power Line Carrier (PLC) system used for communication on
power lines between power system control centres, power stations & sub-
stations. The communication services supported by the ETL500 are:
• Speech,
• Data,
• Teleoperation,
• Teleprotection

or combinations thereof as explained in section 3.

1.3 Requirements to be met by the operator

• The operator must have a general understanding of electronic and electrical
systems.
• The operator must have a basic knowledge of PLC systems and its principles.
• In order to configure and program the equipment, the operator must be
familiar with PCs under Windows environment.
• The operator is required to be reasonably careful in dealing with obvious
hazards.
• The operator is required to understand and respect all warning labels in order
to avoid any personnel injury or equipment damage.
• The operator is not allowed to perform any of the manipulations or procedures
described in the following sections:
- section 6 “Assembly and Installation”,
- section 7 “Commissioning”,
- section 9 “Troubleshooting” and
- section 10 “Storage, Decommissioning and Disposal”.

1.4 Requirements to be met by the service personnel

• Service personnel must read and understand the instruction manual before
working with the ETL500 equipment.
• The service personnel must follow the precautions for ESD protection while
handling the modules.
• The service personnel must strictly follow all precautions and warnings which
could cause personnel injury or damage to the equipment.
• It is highly recommended that the service personnel has attended a training
course on the equipment.

1.5 Guarantee provisions

The manufacturer disclaims any responsibility for hazards and material damage,
if the equipment is operated other than for its intended use as described in this
manual or if the equipment is serviced by non qualified personnel.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 1-2

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 2 Safety Instructions

2. Safety Instructions

2.1 Presentation of safety information

The ETL500 equipment itself is safe and without any risk. This is not valid for its
containment and the peripheral surrounding, like the high voltage area and lines.
Only service personnel is therefore allowed to execute all the steps and
manipulations described in this manual. Some of the operations may also be
carried out by operators, see section 1.

2.1.1 In this instruction manual

In this manual the safety instructions are marked as follows:

Information or do’s and don’ts to prevent

DANGER serious personal injury or extensive
equipment damage.

Specific information or do’s and don’ts to prevent

Caution
minor damage and operating problems.

Note: Specific information with regard to the optimum

use of the appliance.

2.1.2 On the equipment

On the Equipment, safety instructions are marked as follows:

Hazardous voltage.
DANGER Beware of electric shock.

Specific information to prevent minor damage

Caution
and operating problems.

Caution Specific information to prevent personal injury or

hot surface damage due to contact to hot surfaces.

Caution Specific information to prevent equipment

ESD damage by electrostatical discharge.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 2-1

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 2 Safety Instructions

2.2 Basic principles

The ETL equipment complies with the latest standards of engineering and the
recognised safety regulations. In spite of this, hazards could arise with
inappropriate operation of the equipment.

The ETL equipment should only be operated in fault free condition and within the
guidelines lay down in the instruction manual.

2.3 General instructions

Personnel qualification
An authorised and properly trained personnel only is
DANGER admitted to carry out programming, commissioning,
maintenance, troubleshooting and work of the
equipment.

Instruction manual
The instruction manual should be read and clearly
DANGER understood before working on the equipment.

Safety and monitoring facilities

Mechanical safety facilities such as cover plates
DANGER must not be removed or by-passed.

Alteration
Alteration of the equipment is not allowed.
DANGER

Warning labels
Precautions and indications to hazardous voltages
DANGER must be strictly observed.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 2-2

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 2 Safety Instructions

2.4 Product-specific instructions

Technical specifications
The equipment must be operated within the
DANGER technical specifications. Failure to do so may result
in personal injuries or equipment damage.

Insertion and removal of plug-in modules

Caution Neither removing nor inserting of modules is

permitted during power-up of the equipment.
Preceeding to plug in and out of modules the power
supply of the equipment has to be switched OFF.

PCB Extenders
For measuring purposes only the original PCB
DANGER extenders P4LM and P3LL, designed to work with
ETL500 equipment, must be used.

ESD protection

Caution The modules in this equipment contain devices,

ESD which can be damaged by electrostatic discharges.
Appropriate measures must be taken before
unpacking modules or withdrawing them from
equipment racks. Essential precautions to prevent
ESD damage when handling or working on modules
are grounding straps for technical personnel and the
provision of anti-static workbenches. Modules may
only be shipped either in their original packing or
installed in equipment racks.

Transportation

Caution The following assemblies must be removed from

the cabinet and packed separately during
Transportation.
Power supply unit 115/230VAC B5LC

Caution The plug-in units must be carefully but firmly

screwed into the racks to prevent them from falling
out. Separately packed modules and other loose
parts must be properly secured and suitably packed
to avoid damage.

Mechanical Installation
The equipment must be mounted in a cabinet.
DANGER

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 2-3

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 2 Safety Instructions

Cabinets, which are not secured to the floor, tip

DANGER forwards when the hinged frame is opened. Do not
open the hinged frame without precautions.

Electrical Installation
This is a Class Ι equipment as specified in
DANGER IEC60950. The equipment and the cabinet must be
earthed.
The equipment must be supplied over the “circuit
breaker for the power supply“, type B9AS.

The circuit breaker for the power supply (B9AS) of

DANGER the equipment must be switch OFF.
The circuit breakers for optional equipment in the
cabinet must be switch OFF.

The isolating terminals from the external cables

DANGER must be kept open during installation, maintenance
and before storage, decommissioning and disposal.

Faston plugs on the cables connected to the rack

DANGER P7LA must be covered with an isolation sleeve.
Unused faston connectors have to be covered.

NSK5

Caution Refer to the NSK5 instruction manual 1KHL015989

for specific information, warnings and safety
information regarding NSK5

Work on the system

Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect
DANGER cables during periods of lightning activities.

Unused slots
Unused slots in the equipment subracks must be
DANGER covered with blanking plates.

EMC
This is a Class A equipment as specified in
Caution
CISPR 22 (EN55022). In a domestic environment,
this equipment may cause radio interference. In this
case, the user may be required to take adequate
measures.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 2-4

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 2 Safety Instructions

External cables
The shields of the external cables V9OD, V9OE and
DANGER V9OF must be earthed at both cable ends using the
shield clamps supplied with the cables.

Using MMI500 software

The link gets disturbed while using the options
Caution
'Tuning & Testing', activating a testtone, simulating
alarms, measurement of frequency response &
equalization etc. of the MMI500. Appropriate
measures have to be taken especially in case
protection signal transmission is being used.

B5LC
Make sure that the power supply B5LC is
DANGER programmed to the correct voltage of 230 or
115VAC as described in 1KHL015788 before
connecting the equipment to the power source.

P1LA
Dangerous voltage at the heat sink. Do not touch
DANGER during operation.

Heat sink should not be touched with conducting

DANGER materials to avoid energy discharges and damage
of the power amplifier.

Caution Hot surface at heat sink

Hot surface

P4LQ
Dangerous voltages on the module and the cable.
DANGER Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

Connecting a load between terminals NO (normally

Caution
open) and NC (normally closed) is not allowed.
Use only one contact set NO or NC.

The power supply for alarms must be short current

Caution
and over current protected.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 2-5

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 2 Safety Instructions

R1BC
Dangerous voltages on the module and the
DANGER cable. Do not touch the module and the cable
leads.

Connecting a load between terminals NO (normally

Caution
open) and NC (normally closed) is not allowed.
Use only one contact set NO or NC.

The power supply for alarms must be short current

Caution
and over current protected.

O4LE
The phone interface on the module O4LE generates
DANGER dangerous voltage up to 100 V. Don’t use the
module without upper and lower cover plate. Do not
touch the open pins of the service phone connector,
the leads of its cable, the pins of the external cable
connector and the leads of the external cable.

G4AI
Dangerous voltages on the module and the cable.
DANGER Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

Electrical strength test

Caution Do not repeat any electrical strength tests.

Improper test methods can cause severe damage to
the equipment.
Electric strength and earth continuity tests have
been performed in the factory.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 2-6

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function

3. Structure and Function

3.1 Introduction

Transmission lines exhibit low attenuation in the carrier frequency range between
20 and 500 kHz. They are therefore a good means of communicating information
over medium to long distances (20 to 100 km, or 100 to 500 km respectively).
The maximum range of a PLC communications channel operating at
approximately 80 kHz or less can reach up to 800 km, which cannot be even
remotely matched by other means of communication at the disposal of power
companies (cables, pilot wires, normal radio or point-to-point radio) without
repeaters or repeater stations.

By installing appropriate coupling devices and line traps in the power stations and
substations communications channels can be provided, which exhibit
• extremely high mechanical rigidity and high reliability of the interconnecting
lines
• lines and terminal equipment, which belong to and is permanently under the
control of the power utility
• low, relatively constant attenuation and moderate long-duration noise level
(corona) under normal atmospheric conditions
• breakers and load-break isolators

The system includes means to combat burst noise, which virtually exclude any
possibility of false signals or tripping; thus the reliability of PLC channels is
roughly equivalent to that of the terminal equipment. In spite of the additional cost
represented by the coupling devices and line traps, especially at very high
voltage levels, the overall cost of a PLC communications system is relatively low
compared with other techniques and the cost relation becomes even more
favourable with longer distances. These are the two main reasons why many
power utilities prefer PLC for power system communication.

The PLC equipment is capable of transmitting information for a mixture of various

services such as (see Figure 3-1)
• telephony,
• teleoperation,
• data,
• teleprotection

simultaneously by combining all information into one single signal, which

occupies a predefined bandwidth in the Radio Frequency (subsequently = RF)
frequency range from typically 40 to 500 kHz, suitable for transmission via a
power line. The amount of information, which can be transmitted is limited by the
bandwidth of the RF signal, which is typically 4 kHz for a one channel equipment.
The backwards channel uses another 4 kHz, its frequency band usually being
adjacent to the one of the forward channel, see Figure 3-2a. However, the bands
can also be separated in frequency as shown in Figure 3-2b. Twice as much
information can be transmitted with a two channel equipment occupying a
bandwidth of 2x4 kHz. The frequency allocation in this case is shown in Figure
3-2c and d. In order to transmit more information than offered by a two channel

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-1

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
equipment, several PLC links can be operated in distinct frequency bands over
the same power line, sharing the coupling devices.

The standard high frequency power output of the basic ETL500 unit is 40 W. This
is for most cases adequate to ensure the required transmission quality. For
severe operating conditions with high attenuation or high noise levels - e.g. on
Extra High Voltage (EHV) lines - the output can be raised to 80 W by connecting
a second power equipment in parallel with the first. Redundancy is obtained by
coupling the two output amplifiers via an RF hybrid and supplying each from an
independent power source. For lines with low attenuation and low noise levels, a
compact power equipment capable of delivering an RF power of 5 W is also
available. Thus, three different equipment types may be distinguished:
• ETL505: 5 W terminal,
• ETL540: 40 W terminal,
• ETL580: 80 W terminal.

All types may be operated with one channel of 4 kHz bandwidth, while the 40 and
80 W terminals may also be configured for 2 channels of 4 kHz bandwidth each.
In addition, the 40 and 80 W terminals are also configurable for one channel of
8 kHz bandwidth. This mode of operation is intended for use with the digital
transmission system type AMX500, which is described in the 'Instruction Manual
AMX500' 1KHL016405. The edge frequencies of the frequency bands are always
multiples of 4 kHz.

LT
LT

CC CC

C C

FAX

M DC M
FAX

PR PC MS PAX FAX PR PC RTU FAX

C = Coupling Device MS = Master station

DC = dispatcher's console PAX = privat automatic exchange
FAX = Facsimile equipment PR = protection relay
LT = Line trap PC = personal computer
M = modem RTU = remote terminal unit
CC = coupling capacitor

Figure 3-1 ETL500 with a wide range of services

Power line carriers are used in almost all the countries of the world to transfer
information via HV transmission lines and has become an important instrument
for the management and safety of electrical power systems. Of the possible PLC
techniques, single sideband modulation with a 4 kHz spacing makes the best use
of the available frequency bands and transmitting powers. This technique has
become widely used in Europe, mainly for reasons of cost and its capability of
providing channels capable to carry speech, data and teleprotection signals
simultaneously. International recommendations for the characteristics of line

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-2

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
traps, coupling capacitors, PLC coupling devices and single sideband PLC
equipment (IEC Publications 60353, 60358, 60481 and 60495) and also for the
design of PLC links (IEC Publication 60663) have come into force. All the
relevant CCIR and ITU-T recommendations in IEC Publication 60495 were taken
into account. This ensures reliable coupling of channels at the Audio Frequency
(subsequently = AF) interfaces in power system control centres, power stations
and transformer stations between power utility PLC, normal radio, point-to-point
radio and leased back-up links.

24 kHz 4 or 8 kHz 4 or 8 kHz 500 kHz

24 kHz 4 or 8 kHz n*4 kHz 4 or 8 kHz 500 kHz

24 kHz 2*4 kHz 2*4 kHz 500 kHz

24 kHz 2*4 kHz n*4 kHz 2*4 kHz 500 kHz

bw_occ_.dsf

Figure 3-2 Single and dual channel bandwidth occupation

3.2 Structure

The ETL may be tailored to the specific needs of the application thanks to its
modular architecture. The modules are housed in one, two or three standard 19“
subracks, mounted on top of each other as shown in Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-4.
For the terminals to be operational, a minimal set of modules is needed shown
with solid lines in the block diagrams of Figure 3-5 to Figure 3-8. This set is
referred to as “basic equipment”. Depending on the information services needed

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-3

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
by the application, additional modules may be inserted into the subrack in slots
not occupied by modules of the basic equipment. In these slots one of several
types of modules may be inserted, resulting in a large variety of possible
equipment configurations.

All possible configurations for the equipment ETL505, ETL540 and ETL580 are
shown in Figure 3-3, Figure 3-4 (front- and side-views) and Figure 3-5 to Figure
3-8 (block diagrams). Optional parts are drawn in dashed lines.

Legend for the figures:

1: AF interface type O4LE (for telephony and teleoperation)
2: NSD550 teleprotection interface type G4AI
3: FSK-modem NSK5 type G4AK (FSK = Frequency Shift Keying)
4: RF-converter type P4LQ
5: Alarm relay module type R1BC
6: DC-DC-converter type B4LE
7: Channel subrack type P7LC
8: 40 W power amplifier type P1LA
9: Transmit filter type E5LA or E5LB
10: Carrier combiner type P3LC or P3LD
11: RF hybrid type P3LB or P3DA or – for testing – dummy load P3LK
12: Receive filter type P4LR
13: Power supply type B5LA or B5LC
14: Power subrack type P7LA
15: 5 W power amplifier type P4LS (including transmit and receive filters)
16: Line interface type G1DA
Slot types for channel subrack (7):
B: Basic equipment
ORF: Optional RF equipment (depending on desired RF-frequencies and -power)
OAF: Optional AF equipment (depending on desired services)

Specific interface boards 1, 2 or 3 exist to support the four services which can be
transmitted over an ETL500 link. These boards have to be inserted in the
foreseen slots OAF of the channel subrack 7. Up to seven interface boards may
be inserted in an ETL540 or ETL580 and up to five in an ETL505. The interface
modules galvanically separate the interface signals from the equipment and
transform these signals into a form suitable
- for transmission over the equipments Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) bus
and
- for Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) into the AF-channel(s), see Figure
3-9.
The FDM concept allows the available frequency band to be shared between the
teleprotection service and the other services by switching off these services
during transmission of teleprotection commands and thus making the full output
power and bandwidth of the PLC equipment available to the teleprotection. This
technique is called “boosting”.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-4

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function

13 9 10 8 14

13 9 11 8 14

6 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 12
or or or or or or or 5
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
or or or or or 7
3 3 3 3 3

9R 6R 5R 6R 6R 6R 5R 6R 3R 6R 5R 6R 6R 1 8R

B OAF B OAF ORF

Frontview Sideview
Figure 3-3 ETL540/580 Configurations

6 1 1 1 1 4 1 15
or or or or or 5
2 2 2 2 2
or or or 7
3 3 3 16

9R 6R 5R 6R 6R 6R 5R 6R 3R 6R 6R 20R

16
B OAF B OAF B

Frontview Sideview
Figure 3-4 ETL505 Configurations

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-5

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
Supply
7
P7LC
Telephony 1
14
Teleoperation 1 6 13 P7LA
O4LE B4LE B5LA/C
Ext. teleprotection
(e.g. NSD70) TDM bus

AF bus A

Data A 8
3
G4AK P1LA

Teleprotection
2 9
G4AI E5LA/B

PC

Alarm contacts 4 RF
P4LQ 11
P3LB Coax
Alarm contacts 5
cable

(optional) R1BC

Teleoperation
1
O4LE

Data B 3
G4AK 12
P4LR

AF bus B
Telephony
1
Teleoperation 1 TDM bus
O4LE
Ext. teleprotection
(e.g. NSD70)

Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram ETL540 with hybrid P3LB

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-6

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
Supply
7
P7LC
Telephony
1
Teleoperation 1 6 13
14
O4LE B4LE B5LA/C
P7LA
Ext. teleprotection
(e.g. NSD70) TDM bus

AF bus A

Data A 8
3
G4AK P1LA

Tele-
protection 2
G4AI

PC

Alarm contacts
4
P4LQ
Alarm contacts 5 RF
11 9
(optional) R1BC P3DA E5LA/B
Coax
cable

Teleoperation
1
O4LE

Data B 3
G4AK

AF bus B

Teleoperation 1 TDM bus

O4LE

Figure 3-6 Functional block diagram ETL540 with hybrid P3DA

(no receive filter required; restrictions:
- one channel of 4 kHz,
- adjacent frequency bands)

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-7

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
Supply Supply

7 Lower
rack 14 Upper
rack 14
P7LC P7LA P7LA
Telephony 1
Teleoperation 13
1 6 B5LA/C
O4LE B4LE 13
Ext. teleprotection B5LA/C
(e.g. NSD70)
TDM bus

AF bus A 8
P1LA
Data A 8
3
G4AK P1LA

9
E5LA/B
Teleprotection
2 9
G4AI E5LA/B

PC 10
P3LC/D

Alarm contacts 4
P4LQ

Alarm contacts 5 11 RF
(optional) R1BC
P3LB Coax
cable

Teleoperation
1
O4LE

Data B 3
G4AK

12
AF bus B P4LR
Telephony
1
Teleoperation 1 TDM bus
O4LE
Ext. teleprotection
(e.g. NSD70)

Figure 3-7 Functional block diagram ETL580

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-8

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function

7
P7LC
Telephony 1
Teleoperation 6 Supply
1
O4LE B4LE
Ext. teleprotection
(e.g. NSD70) TDM bus
AF bus

Data 3
G4AK

Teleoperation
1
O4LE

4
Teleprotection P4LQ
2 RF
G4AI 15 16
P4LS G1DA
Coax
cable
PC

Alarm contacts

Alarm contacts 5
(optional) R1BC

Figure 3-8 Functional block diagram ETL505

The backbone of the equipment is the digital TDM-bus over which all data
between the interface boards 1 and 2 and the RF converter board 4 is
exchanged. Interface board 3 is not equipped with a TDM-bus port and uses the
analog AF-bus for data exchange to interface board 1, which in turn forwards the
signal via TDM bus to RF converter 4. The frequency allocation of a channel is
typically as depicted in Figure 3-9. The pilot band, typically at the upper end of
the frequency band, must be kept free because it is used by the PLC equipment
for an auxiliary signal called “pilot”. The pilot serves several purposes such as
• frequency synchronisation,
• automatic gain control (AGC),
• transmission of E- and M-telephone-signalling over the link,
• embedded operation channel (EOC) of the link,
• guard signal for the integrated teleprotection equipment NSD550.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-9

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
Many possibilities exist for the frequency allocation of the services into a channel
due to
• programmable speech bandwidth,
• programmable bandwidths for data channels depending on the required data
rates,
• programmable centre frequencies for data channels,
• programmable pilot frequencies.

Figure 3-10 shows all relevant possibilities for the frequency allocation. Hatched
areas indicate frequency bands which may be occupied by other services. Any
combination of services occupying the frequency bands shown in the figure is
allowed as long as these bands do not overlap.

Aniso-
chronous
Anisochronous Data Pilot
Speech Data 600 Bd 50 Bd band

300 2000 4000 Hz

Figure 3-9 Typical frequency allocation

The FDM-signals of all interface boards 1 are fed to RF converter module 4 via
TDM bus, where the pilot signals (one for each channel) are added before the
signals are single-sideband (subsequently = SSB) modulated. If the integrated
teleprotection equipment NSD550 is present, its AF signal is then added to the
SSB-signal of channel 1, both channels combined into a single signal and
converted to the desired RF band.

In previous versions of the PLC, the AF signal was first converted into an
Intermediate Frequency (subsequently = IF) signal and then into an RF signal
using analogue modulation techniques. The reverse procedure was employed for
recovering the AF signal. It required critical analogue filters for achieving the
desired filter characteristics. However in the ETL500, the AF signal is first
converted into a digital signal (a series of 0 s and 1 s) by an analogue to digital
converter. This digital signal is accessed by a digital microcomputer referred to as
DSP (Digital Signal Processor) housed in the RF converter module type P4LQ.
Using suitable software algorithms, this digital data is manipulated by the DSP to
get an another digital data stream which when reconverted into an analogue
signal gives the same effect as if the analogue signal was SSB modulated into
RF. The reverse procedure is employed for demodulation. The advantage of this
technique is that by just changing some parameters in the software, a lot of
settings such as carrier frequencies, pilot frequencies, orientation of sidebands
etc. can be changed by software. Another important advantage is that a lot of
hardware for modulation, demodulation, filtering etc. is eliminated thereby
reducing the failure rate of the equipment and the necessary tuning efforts
drastically. Also, due to the digital nature of the involved hardware, variations due
to changes of climatic conditions (temperature, humidity) as observed with
analogue modulation techniques are virtually nonexistent.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-10

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
For the ETL540/80, the RF signal modulated by the P4LQ module is now fed to
the power subrack 14, where it is amplified by the power amplifier 8. A hybrid 11
is used to separate the transmitted RF signal from the received signal. The
transmit filter 9 allows for parallel connection of several equipment to the same
coupling device. If as hybrid 11 the type P3DA is used, the transmit filter 9 is
inserted in the 2-wire signal path thereby also serving as a filter for the receive
signal. A separate receive filter 12 is not needed in this case. However, this
configuration is limited to the following situation:
• One channel operation,
• transmit- and receive-bands adjacent (see Figure 3-2a),
• 40 W operation.

In all other cases the transmit filter 9 is inserted in the transmit signal path by
using as hybrid 11 the type P3LB. A separate receive filter 12 type P4LR is then
needed.

The output power may be doubled to 80 W by stocking a second power subrack

14 on top of the first, equipped with another 40 W power amplifier 8 and an
additional transmit filter 9. A carrier combiner module 10 then combines the
signals of both amplifiers into the 80 W output signal.

Transmit filter 9 and carrier combiner 10 exist in two versions, one for RF-
frequencies higher than and including 100 kHz (E5LA and P3LC, respectively)
and one for frequencies lower than 100 kHz (E5LB and P3LD, respectively).

For the ETL505, the power subrack 14 is replaced by the unit P4LS which is
inserted into the channel subrack 7. The module P4LS not only contains the 5 W
power amplifier, but also the transmit and receive filters for 4 kHz operation,
allowing parallel operation of several PLC links over the same line.

For supervision of the equipment, three alarm contacts are available and the
equipment status is indicated with LED’s on the front. An optional alarm relay
module 5 can be mounted in the rear which features additional 8 alarm relays,
giving a total of 11 alarm relay contacts.

For programming, testing, commissioning and in depth supervision of the

equipment, the user interface program MMI500 – a 32 bit Windows® application -
is needed, which is an integrated part of the ETL500. Access via dial-up modems
and the intranet/internet is also supported by the MMI500. For internet access,
the server program SVR500, available as an option, is required in addition to the
MMI500. See chapter 4 for more information about MMI500 and SVR500.

For the supply of the modules, the subrack 7 has to be equipped with a DC-DC-
converter 6 and - in case of ETL540/80 - each subrack 14 with a power supply
module 13. The power supply voltage is either 48 VDC, 115 VAC or 230 VAC for
ETL540/80 and 48 VDC for ETL505. Other supply voltages are possible with the
help of an external converter.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-11

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function

Hz

2000

2200

2400
2480
2520
2120

2320

2680
2720

3000

4000
2880
300

2920

3120

3320

3520

3720
1000

3600
ETL: useful AF bandwidth

ETL bandwidth with NSD550 using standard pilot as guard signal

Speech 2000 Hz
Speech 2200 Hz
Speech 2400 Hz
Speech 2600 Hz Pilot
Pilot S ta n d a r d
Speech 2800 Hz P i lo t

Speech 3000 Hz
Speech 3200 Hz
Speech 3400 Hz

NSD550 S ta n d a r d
Guard 2240 2440 Guard G u a rd
2640 o w n g u a r d NSD550
o p t io n s
3840Hz

max 28
1020

1260

2220

2460
1140

1380
1500
1620
1740
1860
1980
2100

2340

2820
2940
3060
3180

3420
3540
3660
3780
3900
2580
2700

3300
540

780
420

660

900

50 Bd ch an ne l
12 0 H z

max 14
480 720 960 1200 1440 1680 1920 2160 2400 2640 2880 3120 3360 3600 3840 10 0 Bd cha nn el
24 0 H z
max 9
540 900 1260 1620 1980 2340 2700 3060 3420 3780 20 0 Bd cha nn el
36 0 H z
max 7
20 0 Bd or
600 1080 1560 2040 2520 3000 3480 30 0 Bd cha nn el
48 0 H z
max 3
1080 2040 3000 60 0 Bd cha nn el
96 0 H z
2
1320 2760 60 0 Bd cha nn el
96 0 H z

12 00 Bd ch an ne l
1700
1700 24 00 Hz
IT U V.23

12 00 Bd ch an ne l
2860 ab ov e
sp ee ch 20 00 Hz

24 00 Bd ch an ne l
2000 32 00 Hz

Vo ice b an d
300 - 3400 m o de m < 9 60 0 Bd
30 00 Hz

AM X 500
BW = 3300 Hz up to 28 .8 kbp s

AM X 500
BW = 3100 Hz up to 28 .8 kbp s

AM X 500
BW = 2100 Hz up to 19 .2 kbp s

AM X 500
BW = 1700 Hz up to 15 .2 kbp s

AM X 500
BW = 1400 Hz up to 12 .8 kbp s

AM X 500
BW = 1000 Hz up to 8.8 kb ps

Hz
2400
2480
2000

2320

2520
2600
2680
2720

3000

4000
2120
300

2920

3600
2200

2880

3120

3320

3520

3720
1000

Figure 3-10 Use of ETL bandwidth (4 kHz)

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-12

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function

3.3 Functional description

3.3.1 AF interface O4LE

3.3.1.1 Summary

The AF interface board O4LE is a universal interface for audio frequency signals.
It supports the following applications:
1. Telephony
• Point-to-point hot line (direct phone)
• Remote subscriber
• 4-wire PAX connection with E&M signalling
• 2/4-wire PAX connection with E&M signalling and hybrid control
• E&M signalling
• Service phone
2. Teleoperation
• Transmission of audio-frequency data signals from modems
• Programmable transit filter
3. Connection of external teleprotection equipment
• External teleprotection equipment instead of or in addition to the integrated
NSD550
• Signal boosting control
4. Connection of an external Real Time Clock (RTC)
• Providing a digital synchronisation input for an external Real Time Clock.
See chapter 11 Options.

The unit is fully programmable via user interface program MMI500. All services
on one single board type O4LE can be configured to be transmitted in the first or
in the second channel.

3.3.1.2 Telephony

Each channel of the ETL can carry one telephony channel, its speech bandwidth
being programmable to 2.0, 2.2, 2.4, 2.6, 2.8, 3.0, 3.2 or 3.4 kHz. In the ETL, the
speech signal is scaled to the nominal level of 0 dBm0 (weight = 1.0) for
transmission over the link. To prevent saturation of the ETLs RF-signal in case
the level of the incoming speech signal is excessively high, the speech signal
inside the ETL is limited to a maximum level of +3 dBm0.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-13

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
3.3.1.2.1 Point to point hot line (direct phone)

ETL500 ETL500

a/b
O4LE O4LE
a/b
Direct Direct
Phone Phone

Figure 3-11 Point to point hot line

In this application, a direct connection between two phones is established. As

soon as either of the phones is picked up, the phone on the other side is ringing
intermittently until it is picked up also. In- and output speech levels and ringer
frequency are programmable. In order to improve the signal to noise ratio by up
to 10 dB on noisy links, a compander function can be enabled.

As long as the hot line is idle (both phones on hook), the service phone may
utilize the speech channel. In any case, the direct phone has priority over the
service phone.

3.3.1.2.2 Remote subscriber

ETL500 ETL500

a/b O4LE O4LE a/b

Subscriber
PAX

Figure 3-12 2-wire remote subscriber

In this application, the ETL-link is inserted in the 2-wire loop between a

subscriber phone and a PAX as shown in Figure 3-12. The O4LE on the
subscriber side of the link has to be programmed for operation mode "Remote
subscriber", while operation mode "PAX 2-wire" has to be selected for the O4LE
on the PAX side of the link. The speech levels from and to PAX and subscriber
are programmable as well as the frequency of the ringing tone on the subscriber
side. Both tone (DTMF and MFC) or pulse signalling are supported.

Alternatively, if the PAX allows connection of a remote subscriber over 4 wires

with E&M-signalling, the O4LE on the PAX side of the link can be programmed
for operation mode "4-wire". This mode of operation – shown in Figure 3-13 – is
to be preferred to that one shown in Figure 3-12 as it has only one 2-wire section
instead of two. The number of hybrids is reduced and so echo cancellation can
be improved. For further functions available on the PAX side, refer to the
following section.
ETL500 ETL500

Local/Transit
E&M, PAX Blocking
O4LE O4LE
a/b
Subscriber 4
PAX

Figure 3-13 4-wire remote subscriber

For the PAX connections described above, the compander can be enabled. The
compander improves the signal to noise ratio by up to 10 dB on a noisy link.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-14

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
As long as the subscriber loop is idle, the service phone may utilize the speech
channel. In any case, the subscriber loop has priority over the service phone.

3.3.1.2.3 4-wire PAX connection with E&M signalling

ETL500 ETL500
Local/Transit Local/Transit
E&M, PAX Blocking E&M, PAX Blocking
O4LE O4LE
4 4
PAX PAX

Figure 3-14 4-wire PAX connection with E&M

In this application, the ETL-link is inserted into a 4-wire trunk line as shown in
Figure 3-14.

Signalling is done via E- and M-wires. In order to improve the signal to noise ratio
by up to 10 dB on noisy links, a compander function can be enabled. The
compander can be activated permanently or it can be controlled by the input
"Local/Transit" driven by the PAX. A galvanically isolated relay switch-over
contact "PAX blocking" indicates, if the speech channel of the PLC link is
interrupted or distorted by excessive line noise. During these periods, E&M
signalling is not available and the speech signal is squelched. All three signals:
E-wire, M-wire and Local/Transit can be inverted independently. All signalling
wires are galvanically isolated. The PAX only needs a dry relay contact to control
M-Wire and Local/Transit input, since an extra voltage source for these inputs is
integrated at O4LE.

As long as the trunk line is idle, the service phone may utilize the speech
channel. In any case, the trunk line has priority over the service phone. To
determine whether the trunk line is busy, the states of E- and M-wires are
monitored: If at least one of these is in the active state, the trunk line is
considered busy.

3.3.1.2.4 2/4-wire PAX connection with E&M signalling and hybrid control

ETL500 ETL500

Local/Transit Local/Transit
E&M, PAX Blocking E&M, PAX Blocking
4 O4LE O4LE 4
2 2

PAX PAX

Figure 3-15 2/4-wire PAX connection with E&M and hybrid control

In this application, a 4-wire as well as a 2-wire circuit is provided. The PAX

selects one of the two circuits depending on the O4LE control input
"Local/Transit". This type of operation may be required with older PAX's that use
4-wire circuits for transit connections and 2-wire circuits for local subscriber
connections. It should be noted that the 2-wire Rx path is always connected
independent of the condition of the "Local/Transit" control line. Therefore, speech
and signalling tones can always be received at the "PAX2W" terminals. When the
circuit is busy, the E- and M-wire are active. It is also possible to control the
compander with the "Local/Transit" line. Since the best intelligibility improvement
is obtained when one compression and one expansion process takes place, the
compander is only employed in the 2-wire local subscriber stations but not in the
4-wire transit stations.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-15

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
3.3.1.2.5 E&M signalling

If the AF signal of a first ETL-link has to be forwarded to a second link via

teleoperation ports – this is called "transit operation". If also a telephony
application is forwarded, but a PAX is not connected to the transit equipment,
E&M signalling must be forwarded too. For that, this operation mode should be
selected at the transit equipments.

3.3.1.2.6 Service phone

ETL500 ETL500

a/b
O4LE O4LE a/b
Service Service
Phone Phone

Figure 3-16 Service phone

The service phone can be used in combination with all previously described
telephony operation modes. However, these modes always have priority over the
service phone.1 The phone is plugged into a socket on the front plate of O4LE.
As soon as the handset is picked up, a buzzer on O4LE in the opposite
equipment generates an intermittent audible tone. If a phone is plugged in on the
opposite O4LE, it will generate an intermittent ringing signal simultaneously. The
ringing stops as soon as the service phone on the opposite side is picked up. In-
and output speech levels and ringer frequency for the service phone are
programmable. During periods of excessive line noise, the speech signal is not
squelched in contrast to the other telephony operation modes. Compander is
always active for service phone.

3.3.1.2.7 Display E&M signalling at front LEDs

The internal state of E&M signalling wires can be monitored by uploading the
status with MMI500 or by watching the LEDs on frontpanel of O4LE. Inverting
one or both of these wires has no effect to the LEDs.

An example of a successful establishment of a connection is shown in Figure

3-17.

1
Exception: If the ETL500 is used as 1 channel equipment with a bandwidth of 8 kHz,
the service phone disconnects the AMX500 connected to AF1. A warning is generated
and displayed on O4LE.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-16

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
Local Equipment Remote Equipment
Conversation
Req Digit "2" Digit "1" ReleaseReq
M-Wire E-Wire

Ack ReleaseAck
E-Wire M-Wire

RDY-LED RDY-LED

OP-Phone OP-Phone
RDY-LED RDY-LED

Figure 3-17 State of LEDs corresponding to internal E&M

By watching the LEDs, it is easy to see whether a remote PAX is working or not.
If the remote PAX is not answering, the upper LED “RDY” won’t flash. This is
shown in Figure 3-18.

Local Equipment Remote Equipment

Req Digit "2" Digit "1" ReleaseReq
M-Wire M-Wire

E-Wire E-Wire

RDY-LED RDY-LED

OP-Phone OP-Phone
RDY-LED RDY-LED

Figure 3-18 State of LEDs showing to internal E&M when one PAX is not
working correctly

3.3.1.3 Teleoperation

3.3.1.3.1 Ports

Three galvanically isolated teleoperation 4-wire ports AF2, AF3 and AF4 are
provided. A fourth port AF1 is available if no 4-wire telephony is configured. Each
port consists of an input and an output port with an impedance of 600 Ohms. The
frequency range of the ports is between 300 and 4000 Hz. Signals within this
frequency range are transmitted transparently over the link. Each output port can
be squelched individually during periods of excessive line noise. In case of the
two channel equipment, each port can be connected individually to either one of
the two channels. Each port may be used either in mode "disconnectable" or
mode "non-disconnectable". In mode "disconnectable", the signal applied to the
input port is suppressed during the transmission of teleprotection command
signals. For more information on teleprotection, refer to section 3.3.1.4 "External
teleprotection" in this chapter, to section "NSD550 Optional internal teleprotection
equipment" in chapter 11 and to section "Signal boosting for teleprotection
devices" in chapter 5. This allows to assign more power to the teleprotection
signal during command transmission. In mode "non-disconnectable", the signal
applied to the input port is not suppressed during the transmission of
teleprotection command signals. This mode has to be chosen when the short
signal interruptions (typically less than 100 msec) caused by teleprotection
command transmission in mode "disconnectable" cannot be tolerated. As a
consequence, the available power for teleprotection command signals is reduced
accordingly.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-17

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
3.3.1.3.2 Transit filters

The frequency bands of the signals injected into the teleoperation input ports are
subject to the following restrictions:
1. Each frequency band must lie in the range from 300 to 4000 Hz.
2. The frequency bands must not overlap.
3. The frequency bands must not overlap the pilot band.
4. The frequency bands must not overlap the speech band, if speech is used.
5. The frequency bands must not overlap the NSD550 guard signal band, if
NSD550 is used with own guard signal.

Refer to Figure 3-10 for information about the frequency bands occupied by
speech, pilot or NSD550 guard.

To ensure that the signals injected into the teleoperation input ports do not violate
the above restrictions, frequency selective filters called "transit filters" can be
inserted into the input or output ports. A large number of frequency
characteristics, some of them equalized for low group delay variation, are
available for each of these transit filters, see Figure 3-19. A maximum of two
transit filters are supported when speech is configured. When no speech is
configured, up to four transit filters are supported.

SPEECH BAND

0 1 2 3 4 kHz
Figure 3-19 Transit filter cutoff frequencies selectable in steps of 60 Hz

If the AF signal of a first ETL-link has to be forwarded to a second link via

teleoperation ports – this is called "transit operation" -, the pilot signal of the first
link must not be forwarded to the second link since each link maintains its own
pilot channel independent of the others. Transit filters have to be used that pass
the desired data frequencies but block the pilots. By connecting
• E- and M-wires of the two equipment for out of band signalling,
• the serial ports (COM1) of the two equipment via Null modem for management
data,

information carried by the pilot channel can still be forwarded to the other link.
The necessary connections are indicated in Figure 3-20. Several possibilities
exist for the placement of the transit filters:

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-18

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
1. in the AF outputs of both equipment,
2. in the AF inputs of both equipment,
3. in the AF in- and outputs of both equipment.

The first possibility is the standard solution. If for some reason this is not
possible, or if noise picked up on the AF line connecting the two equipment has
to be suppressed, possibilities 2 or 3 have to be chosen. Note that each transit
filter adds its group delay response to the overall group delay response of the
links.

E TL500 E TL500

Transit- A F out A F out Transit-

filter filter
Transit- A F in A F in Transit-
O4LE O4LE
filter filter
RF E -W ire E -W ire RF
M -W ire M -W ire

P 4LQ C OM 1 N ull- C OM 1 P 4LQ

m odem

Figure 3-20 Transit connection

In the signal path of each input port, a programmable attenuator/amplifier is

provided, to adapt the signal level at the port to the internal level of the ETL500.
On the output side, a similar programmable attenuator/amplifier restores the
signal strength to the level required at the output port.

3.3.1.4 External teleprotection

Teleoperation port AF4 can be configured for connection to the external

teleprotection equipment type NSD 70. The ETL500 does not squelch the signal
coming from the opposite external teleprotection equipment during periods of
excessive line noise. An external boost input, whose polarity can be inverted if
desired, is available for this port. If this input is enabled, the NSD 70 signal fed
into port AF4 is boosted by up to 8 dB and all disconnectable input signals are
disconnected as long as the external boost input is activated. By disabling the
external boost input, no boosting and disconnecting will take place. Boosting of
the built in NSD550 teleprotection device has priority over boosting of an external
teleprotection equipment. No more than one external teleprotection equipment
can be connected per channel of the ETL500. Boosting of an external
teleprotection signal on channel 1 has priority over boosting of an external
teleprotection signal on channel 2.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-19

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function

3.3.1.5 Frontplate

"AL" LED red: Module hardware alarm

This LED is on, if a hardware alarm on the module is detected.
0 AL
"RDY" LED green: Module ready
On as long as the module is in normal operation mode.
2 R DY
Flashes slowly during hardware alarm,
3 flashes fast corresponding to E&M signalling.
"t " LED yellow: Module warning
SERV ICE- On as long as the module is not in normal operation mode and no module
PHONE alarm is present.
7 R DY
OP-PHONE:
8 E NA
"RDY" LED green: Service phone ready
On if the speech channel is available for the service phone.
"ENA" LED green: Service phone enabled
RE SET
On if the service phone is enabled on the module.
12
Flashes if the service phone is ringing.
"RESET" Push button: Reset
When pressed, the module resets and fetches configuration data from flash
EPROM.

SERV ICE-
PH ON E

Socket for the service phone.

AF
O4LE

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-20

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
3.3.2 Teleprotection interface G4AI

3.3.2.1 Summary

The teleprotection interface includes:

• four input circuits equipped with optocouplers,
• four output circuits equipped with semiconductors (referred to as "solid state
outputs"),
• two electro-mechanical output relays with change-over contacts (referred to as
"relay outputs").

All inputs and outputs are potential-free and galvanically isolated from ground
and all other circuits.

The allocation of functions for each of these circuits or relays is programmed with
the help of the user interface MMI500 (e.g. command input or a start input,
command output or alarm output).

Safety is the most important factor considered in the design of this module. For
example, there are screening plates mounted on both the soldered and the
component side. The internal signals are connected to the TDM–bus via C–type-
plug of the module. The external signals are connected via F–type-plug to the
external cable.

The input and the output circuits are protected against overvoltage and inverse
polarity.

The in-service status of the module is indicated through the ready–LED “RDY”.
Separate LEDs indicate the active status of each input, solid state output and
relay output.

The various circuit alarms of the module are summated and indicated by the red
alarm LED “AL” provided on the front plate and sent further via TDM–bus to the
RF converter.

The module can be reset by a push button on the front. Note that the equipment
is not able to send and receive commands for some seconds after reinitialization.

3.3.2.2 Inputs

The input circuits can be programmed for four battery voltage ranges by setting
corresponding jumpers. As an aid the jumper settings can be viewed in a list
which is directly printed on the component side of the module.

The ranges for the nominal battery voltage are:

24 – 47 VDC, 48 – 109 VDC, 110 – 219 VDC and 220 – 250 VDC.

The switching threshold for the input command is about 75 % of the minimum
nominal battery voltage for the chosen range.

A command is usually initiated by applying an external voltage to the input.

Alternatively, an auxiliary on-board voltage of 24 VDC is available. It can be used
to trip the input circuits by just closing an external contact. The protection relay
should provide potential–free contacts for this purpose.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-21

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
The input circuits are current limited, no external precautions have to be taken.

Each input can be programmed with the help of the user interface MMI500 for
one of the many foreseen functions, e.g.:
• Input 1: Command A
• Input 2: Command C
• Input 3: Command D
• Input 4: Start input

The input signals are transmitted to the RF converter type P4LQ via the TDM
bus. The signal processor on the G4AI module can detect component failures
and thus prevents malfunctioning of the equipment. Such failures are indicated
by the alarm LED provided on the module frontplate and are also passed on to
the P4LQ module.

3.3.2.3 Solid state outputs

The signals to activate the solid state outputs arrive from the TDM bus. The DSP
on G4AI checks these signals and when convinced about the validity, activates
the assigned solid state contact(s).

In case of over-current duration for more than 6 msec (due to short circuit or large
capacitive load), the output is blocked for about 0.75 sec. After that, the output
circuit is switched on again. This procedure is repeated and a module alarm is
generated as long as the external over-current condition or short-circuit exists.
The solid state outputs can therefore be considered as short circuit proof.

If the equipment is not powered, the solid state output switches are open.

Each output can be programmed with the help of the user interface MMI500 for
one of the many foreseen functions, e.g.:
• Output 1: Command A
• Output 2: Command D
• Output 3: Unblocking
• Output 4: NSD550 link alarm

3.3.2.4 Relay outputs

The signal processing for the relay outputs is treated the same way as in case of
the solid state outputs.

The operating contact (Normally Open - NO or Normally Closed - NC) of each

relay can be selected by a corresponding jumper.

Each relay can be programmed with the help of the user interface MMI500 for
one of the many foreseen functions, e.g.:
• Relay 1: Command A
• Relay 2: NSD550 alarm.

Although the relay contacts are of the “heavy-duty” type, external precautions
have to be taken for limiting the circuit current.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-22

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
3.3.2.5 Frontplate

"AL" LED red: Module hardware alarm

On if a hardware alarm on the module is detected.
"RDY" LED green: Module ready
0 AL
On as long as the module is in normal operation mode.
2 RDY
"t " LED yellow: Module warning
3 On as long as the module is not in normal operation mode and
!
IN1 OUT1
no module alarm is present.
IN2 OUT2 "IN1…IN4" LEDs green: Input 1, 2, 3, or 4
On as long as input 1, 2, 3 or 4 is active.
IN3 OUT3
IN4 OUT4 "OUT1…OUT4" LEDs green: Output 1, 2, 3 or 4
8 REL1
On as long as solid state output 1, 2, 3 or 4 is active.
9 REL2 "REL1, REL2" LEDs green: Relay 1, Relay 2
On as long as relay output 1 or 2 is active.
R E SET "RESET" Push button: Reset
12 When pressed, the module resets and fetches configuration
data from flash EPROM.

TPS
G4AI

Figure 3-21 Frontplate G4AI

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-23

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function

3.3.3 NSK 5 modem G4AK

Provision is made for directly inserting the programmable modem NSK5 type
G4AK into the channel rack P7LC in the same way as the other AF interfaces.
Since a separate equipment rack and auxiliary supply can be avoided, this is a
convenient method of setting up a telecontrol system.

The modems are supplied from the internal ±12.8 V. The transmitter AF signals
are suppressed while teleprotection commands are being transmitted over the
ETL link. NSK5 alarms are sent to the board P4LQ, allowing remote supervision
of the modems via MMI500. The serial interface of NSK5 is accessed via
interface cable plugged into the type C connector at the rear. Refer to chapter 6
for the correct type of cable. The modem can also be accessed for testing and
measurement purposes via the 25 pin Sub-D connector on the front.

The interconnections between the NSK5 modem G4AK and ETL can be seen
from Figure 3-22.

The features of the G4AK modem, which is designed for use with the ETL, are
given below. More detailed information can be obtained from the 'Instruction
Manual NSK5', 1KHL015989.
• The G4AK is a fully programmable Voice Frequency Telegraphy
(subsequently = VFT) channel with DIL switch settings for baud rate,
transmitter and receiver frequencies and levels.
• All channels and baud rates conforming to ITU-T recommendations R.35,
R.37, R.38A and R.38B can be programmed. In order to make the best use of
the available AF bandwidth, the 50, 100, 200, 300 and 600 Bd channels can
be set in steps of 120 Hz.
• The modem can operate together with the former VFT channels NSK3, NSK4,
NSK23 and NSK35.
• max. three 600 Bd channels in the ETL500 AF bandwidth.
• a 1200 Bd channel above the 2000 Hz speech channel or combined with other
data channels at lower frequencies.
• a 1200 Bd channel according to ITU-T V.23
• a 2400 Bd channel
• The permissible allocation of channels is shown in Figure 3-10.
Frequency bands assigned to pilot channels cannot be used for data
transmission. The hatched frequency ranges in Figure 3-10 may be used
by channels of correspondingly lower baud rates.
• The unit includes a synchronising facility and a data regenerator for reducing
isochronous distortion.
• serial data interface conforming to ITU-T V.24, V.28, V.10 with access from
the front for test purposes.
• The modem is DC isolated from the ETL equipment.

The following testing and measuring facilities are included:

• local loop test initiated by a test button on the frontplate or by the data terminal
equipment applying the corresponding control signal to the serial interface.
• transmission test for checking the bit failure rate of the entire channel initiated
by a test switch on the frontplate.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-24

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
• There are LED signals for the most important I/O signals on the frontplate.

NSK5 Modem ETL500

X1
USB c18 Slow Mute
ZB (not used by the modem)
ZA

USA a22
+V
c22

0V a24
-V
c24

PE a32
c32 P4LQ
PE
Alarm C-ALARM c20 NSK5 Alarm Alarm
Circuit supervision

alarm

Alarm 0V-AL a26 O4LE

Disconnect
c26

To
Transmitter output
TDM
5a a12 TXAF-D Bus
T1 10k ohm

TX 2
XT1 Test points
AH 1
AF AG ETL ground
1b a14

From
Receiver input
TDM
3a a20 RXAF Bus
T3

RX 2
XT3 Test points
1
AB AA ETL ground
3b a16

G5_9E_.DRW

Figure 3-22 Interconnections ETL500 and NSK5

When using the '1200 Bd above speech' or the '2400 Bd' channels, group delay
equalization of the ETL link is required. This is done by activating the allpass filter
of the appropriate channel on P4LQ. It is recommended, when working with the
allpass filter, to use the built in equalizer of the ETL in mode 'Amplitude
equalization only'. For operation of these channels over two ETL-links in a chain
(tandem operation), a special purpose lowpass filter is available on O4LE,
compensating the combined group delay distortion of both links. In this special
case, the allpass filters on P4LQ must be disabled.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-25

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function

AL
Alarm LED

TXD TXD
Transmitted data LEDs
RXD RXD
Received data LEDs
RTS DCD
Request to send and data carrier detect LEDs
TI Test LED
X6
DATA I/O

V.24 data I/O, 25 pin Sub-D connector

X7
+CT
-CT Request to send output contact
C.AL Carrier alarm relay contact
C.AL

<TTX
<TEST>
TRX> Test switch
Tx
GND Test sockets (unbalanced signals):
Rx
ETL
Transmit signal
Receive signal
LINE X8
a
1
b
a
Line connector
3
b
(not used)

FSK
G4AK

Figure 3-23 Frontplate G4AK

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-26

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function

3.3.4 RF-Converter P4LQ

The module P4LQ is the heart of the ETL500 equipment. It performs the following
main functions:
• Conversion of the signals from AF (Audio Frequency) to RF (Radio
Frequency) and vice versa for both channels.
• Hardware and software supervision for the complete equipment
• Two pilot channels offering the functions:
• EOC signalling
• E- and M-signalling, independently on both channels
• AGC (Automatic Gain Control), independently for both channels
• Frequency synchronisation
• Supervision of the quality of the received pilot signals
• Guard signal for integrated teleprotection equipment NSD550
• Automatic measurement of the frequency response of both channels with
calculation of the equalizer filters in both channels from one end
• Serial port for entering settings and for supervision by means of PC, to be
connected to the equipment either directly or via a modem link
• Signal processing for the NSD550 integrated teleprotection function (optional,
refer to chapter 11.)
• Bus-master for the ETL500 TDM-bus
• Alarm relays with switch over contacts for system alarm/cabinet alarm,
hardware alarm and link alarm

All functions are executed by three DSPs and associated peripheral circuits such
as Analog to Digital Converter (ADC), Digital to Analog Converter (DAC), Buffer,
Driver, Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART), Watchdog Device,
Random Acces Memory (RAM), Flash Electrically PROgrammable Memory
(Flash EPROM), clock oscillator, ±12V supervision, and more.

The frequency conversions AF to RF and RF to AF are implemented completely

with digital signal processing so that no analog filters, mixers and the like are
required, giving excellent thermal stability. This technique is called Direct Digital
Synthesis (DDS).

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-27

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function

0 AL "AL" LED red: Module hardware alarm

On if a hardware alarm on P4LQ is detected.
2 RDY "RDY" LED green: System ready
On if the ETL500 system is in normal operation.
3
4 AL
"t " LED yellow: System warning
On as long as the system is not in normal operation mode and no system
5 LINK
alarm is present.
6 HW
"AL" LED red: Cabinet alarm / System alarm
SYSTEM
On whenever a system alarm is present.
"LINK" LED red: Link alarm
On when the link for either channel 1 or channel 2 is disturbed.
"HW" LED red: Hardware alarm
RESET
Lights when a hardware alarm on one or more of the ETL500 modules is
12
detected.
"RESET" Push button: Module reset
When pressed, the module resets and fetches configuration data from flash
EPROM.

COM 1
"COM1" Socket for communication port (9 pin RS-232 configured as DCE)

DSP
P4LQ

Figure 3-24 Frontplate P4LQ

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-28

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
3.3.5 Alarm relay module R1BC

The alarm relay module type R1BC is mounted on the back of the backplane
P1LC of the ETL500 channel tier P7LC.

8 power relays are mounted on the alarm relay module. Each of the relays can be
programmed by jumpers on R1BC individually to one of three alarm sources:
System alarm, alarm 1 or alarm 2.

Since each of the 8 relays is connected to three terminals, it is possible to

programme the relays individually as contact open (NO: contact open in case of
alarm) or contact closed (NC: contact closed in case of alarm).

Alarms 1 and 2 mentioned above are configurable by MMI500 via dialog-box

“Alarm relays on R1BC”. There are 12 possible alarm sources for each of the
alarms 1 and 2, six of them (P4LQ alarm, Warning, System alarm, Link alarm,
Hardware alarm, NSD550 alarm) originating from the local and the corresponding
six from the remote equipment. If several alarm sources are selected for alarm 1
resp. 2, these sources are summed (e.g. combined by a logical OR-function) to
form alarm 1 resp. 2.

Programming of the jumpers on R1BC is done as follows:

- To program relay N to system alarm: insert jumper CA-N,
- To program relay N to alarm 1: insert jumper R1-N,
- To program relay N to alarm 2: insert jumper R2-N,
where N is a number between 1 and 8.

Example: If it is required that the link alarm criteria of the local and remote
equipment are to be made available as a closed and also as an open
contact in case of alarm, we program alarm 1 with the MMI500 by
crossing the 2 checkboxes associated to “Alarm 1/Local equipment/link
alarm” and “Alarm 1/Remote equipment/link alarm”. Next, we program
relays 5 and 6 to alarm 1 by inserting jumpers R1-5 and R1-6 on
R1BC. A link alarm on either equipment - local or remote - is now
indicated by a closed contact between terminals 2 and 3 of connector
X5, and as an open contact between terminals 1 and 2 of connector
X6.

The connection to the relay contacts can be made directly at the terminals of the
alarm relays module itself, or via the alarm cable V9MR on the terminal block at
the rear of the cabinet.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-29

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
Alarm 1
From P4LQ Alarm 2
System Alarm

N-CABINET-ALARM 2 X40
R1BC N-RESERVED-2 6
N-RESERVED-1 4

k5 CA-1
k1
CA-5

R2-5 R1-5 R1-1 R2-1

250V 3 NC NO NO NC 3
K1 250V
150W 2 K5 2
X1 150W
X5 1 1
2000VA 2000VA

k6 CA-2
k2
CA-6

R2-6 R1-6 R1-2 R2-2

3 3
250V NC NO NO NC
150W 2 K6 K2 2 250V
X6 X2 150W
2000VA 1 1
2000VA

k7 CA-3 k3
CA-7
R2-7 R1-7 R1-3 R2-3
250V 3 3
NC NO NO NC 250V
150W X7
2 K7 K3 2
X3 150W
2000VA 1 1 2000VA

k8 CA-4 k4
CA-8

R2-8 R1-8 R1-4 R2-4

3 3
250V NC NO NO NC 250V
150W
2 K8 K4 2
X4 150W
X8 1 1
2000VA 2000VA

R1BC_block_.DSF

Figure 3-25 R1BC Block Diagram

Caution Connecting a load between terminals 1 and 3 of connectors

X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7 or X8 on R1BC is not allowed.
Instead, connect the load either between terminals 1 and 2
or between 2 and 3 of these connectors.

3.3.6 DC-DC converter B4LE

The DC-DC converter type B4LE is used for converting the 48 VDC into ±12 VDC
and +5 VDC voltages which are required by the modules of the channel rack.
These voltages are internal to the equipment and not available externally. The
±12 VDC lines are monitored by P4LQ for undervoltage and overvoltage. The
power supply can source current for modules of both channel 1 and 2. It may be
noted that B4LE is mounted on the extreme left of P7LC. It is covered by a
dummy plate which is not attached to the B4LE.

The unit includes the following protective functions:

- inrush current limiter,
- 6.3 A fuse (slow blow) at input,
- power overload and no load protection,
- overcurrent and short circuit protection,
- overtemperature protection,
- protection against reversal of polarity (with fuse),
- overvoltage protection on the outputs.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-30

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
3.3.7 Channel subrack P7LC

The channel subrack P7LC is used to house the AF options O4LE, G4AI and
G4AK for channels 1 and 2, the DC-DC converter B4LE, the RF converter P4LQ,
the optional receive filter P4LR and the optional alarm relay module R1BC, the
latter being mounted onto the backplane in the rear. In case of ETL505, the
subrack P7LC also houses the power amplifier P4LS.

3.3.8 40 W power amplifier P1LA

The P1LA is mounted on the rear side of the channel subrack P7LA. The RF
signal in the power amplifier passes through preamplifiers to the driver circuits. A
combined current/voltage feedback ensures a minimum of distortion due to non-
linearity and a constant output impedance. The driver circuit provides the low
source impedance necessary for the correct operation of the output amplifier
stage. The signal amplified by the push-pull output stage is combined in the
output transformer, from which it goes to the high power transmitter filter
E5LA/E5LB.

3.3.9 Transmit filter E5LA or E5LB

The functions of the Tx filter are:

- It reduces spurious emissions due to non-linearity of the power amplifier.
- Its high impedance outside the transmit band enables further PLC units to be
connected in parallel.
- It protects the output amplifier from the voltage spikes on the power line caused
by power system switching, faults and lightning.

The specific band for the Tx filter can be selected using a particular capacitor
combination. Exact tuning of its coils L1 and L2 can be done using the Tx tuning
adapter P3LL and the MMI500. See document '1KHL015570' in the annex for
details. Transmit filter E5LB must be used for transmit frequencies from 24 kHz to
< 100 kHz and type E5LA for channel frequencies > 100 kHz. When the RF
hybrid P3DA is used instead of P3LB, the Tx filter also does the function of
filtering the Rx-RF signal. The situation is depicted in Figure 3-26, top. However,
this solution can only be applied, if the following conditions are fullfilled:
• Tx and Rx bands are adjacent,
• ETL540, 1 channel of 4 kHz.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-31

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function

RF-Tx-
signal
• Without Rx-RF Filter:
! Tx- and Rx- RF channels
E5LA/B
RF-Line- adjacent
P3DA signal ! 40W operation only
RF-Hybrid Tx-RF-Filter ! operation with one channel
of 4 kHz only
No receive filter required
RF-Rx-
! RF hybrid P3DA required
signal

E5LA/B
RF-Tx- • With Rx-RF Filter:
signal Tx-RF-Filter
Tx- and Rx- RF channels
arbitrary (non overlapping)
RF-Line- 40 or 80W operation
P3LB signal
one or two channel
RF-Hybrid operation
! Receive filter P4LR required
P4LR
! RF hybrid P3LB required
RF-Rx-
signal Rx-RF-Filter

Figure 3-26 The options of Rx-RF Filter and RF Hybrid

3.3.10 Carrier combiner P3LC or P3LD

The carrier combiner P3LC/P3LD is used only in case of the 80W unit ETL580.
The purpose of the carrier combiner is to sum the power outputs of the two 40W
amplifiers to give a 80W PEP output. It consists of a combiner transformer and
transmitter alarm circuit. It is mounted in place of the RF hybrid in the upper P7LA
power shelf. The P3LD is used for lower than 100 kHz and P3LC is used for
frequencies from 100 to 500 kHz.

3.3.11 RF hybrids P3LB or P3DA, dummy load P3LK

The RF hybrid is used to decouple the receiver from its own transmitter. Its use is
seen where the line attenuation is high, especially when transmitter and receiver
bands are close together. The transmitter intermodulation products at the
receiver input are correspondingly reduced by the transhybrid attenuation. The
module essentially consists of a transformer and tuned circuit, which form a
model of the transmission line impedance. The high ratio of the transformer
results in a low insertion loss between the transmitter and the line model. The
output impedance can be set to either 75 Ohms or 125 Ohms using soldered
jumpers.

The RF hybrid also houses the LED to indicate Tx alarm, the potentiometer to
adjust the receive level and also a test point to measure the RF signal after an
attenuation of 40dB. The RF hybrid P3DA can be used when the Tx and Rx
frequency bands are adjacent to each other. Else the RF hybrid P3LB along with
the additional receive filter P4LR has to be used.

The transmitter is terminated by its rated load by inserting the dummy load P3LK
in place of the RF hybrid. This then forms a local loop, which enables both
transmitter and receiver to be fully tested. The transmitter frequency band is

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-32

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
automatically converted to the receiver frequency band when the dummy load is
inserted. Also, the equalizer in the Rx signal path of the ETL500 is bypassed.

3.3.12 Receive filter P4LR

3.3.12.1 Introduction

Refer to block diagram Figure 3-27.

The receive filter is primarily for the suppression of local and parallel transmitter
signals.

The received RF-Signal Rx RF passes the Rx-Filter, after coming via the input
potentiometer of the RF-hybrid to the inputs B4 and B6 of P4LR. With the
attenuation circuit at the input, a fixed input impedance, almost independent of
the potentiometer position, for the following receive filter is achieved and
secondly it serves as compensation to the frequency-dependent attenuation of
the receiving-filter. The bandpass receive filter obtains an input selectivity and
suppresses primarily the transmitter signals of the local parallel PLC equipment.
The structure of the filter was chosen so, that together with the tuning adapter
P4LM, a simple tuning on site is possible (see Tuning Instructions Rx RF Filter
P4LR, 1KHL015117).

A decoupled test plug on the frontplate allows the testing of the filtered Rx RF
signal. With P4LQ plugged in, the level is identical to that of the filtered Rx RF
signal at the outputs B5, B7.

3.3.12.2 Circuit description

Refer to block diagram Figure 3-27.

The received RF-signal RxRF is connected to the symmetrical input of the

impedance transformer and goes asymmetrically to the receive filter.

The receive filter consists of three parts. The T-attenuation circuit is followed by a
filter with three tuned circuits and the terminating impedance circuit at the output.

The attenuation circuit and also the termination impedance are defined in
function of the channel allocation, with seven different attenuation circuits the
frequency range from 24 - 500 kHz and a bandwidth from 4 and 8 kHz is
maintained.

The receive filter consists of three resonant circuits with the coils L1, L2 and L3.
The inductivity of the individual coils can be changed by a factor of 4 with jumpers
LA to LI. The value of the inductivities as well as the programming of the series
and parallel capacities are defined as a function of the channel frequency .

The receive filter (4/8 kHz) is programmable in the range 40 - 500 kHz. For the
range 24 - 36 kHz, additional capacitors have to be assembled.

The three parts of the receive filter (attenuation circuit, filter & termination
impedance) are interconnected over the contacts A4/C4 and C27/A27. The
connection is made externally via the back plane, thus enabling the receive filter
to be isolated from the rest of the circuit. A individual circuit adjustment of the
receive filter is possible (see Tuning Instructions Rx RF Filter P4LR,

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-33

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
1KHL015117) via the inputs A2, C4 and C27, the switch S1 and the RX-
programming adapter P4LM.

The amplifier with its high noise suppression rate, feeds the filtered receiving
signal to the DSP module P4LQ. The signal amplification can be fine tuned,
resulting in throughput attenuation of 0 dB ± 1.5 dB for all filters with 4 and 8 kHz
bandwidth.

3.3.12.3 Interfaces

Testpoints on the front plate:

Rx RF / GND RF receiving signal after Rx Filter; short-circuit proof, ESD proof
(Minicoax; common ground for signal and chassis)

Signals on VME-Bus connector on X78:

RXRF-A1/B1 RF-receiving signal after hybrid P3LB
RXRF-A/B filtered RF-receiving signal to P4LQ; short-circuit proof
T-OUT Aux. contact for tuning of filter circuit 1 with P4LM
TUNE-F1 Aux. contact for tuning of filter circuit 1 with P4LM
TUNE-F2 Aux. contact for tuning of filter circuit 2 with P4LM
TUNE-F3 Aux. contact for tuning of filter circuit 3 with P4LM
V-IN Aux. contact for tuning of filter circuit 3 with P4LM
PLUG-OUT4 Monitoring “equipment plugged in”
+/-12V Supply for operation amplifier
GND Ground for signal and chassis

Programming

For the programming and adjustment of the equipment refer to "Tuning

Instructions for Rx RF Filter P4LR, 1KHL015117".

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-34

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
T1
B4 −>=600Ω L1 NORMAL L3
RXRF-A1 S1 L2
RXRF-B1
B6 TUNING

T-OUT A4
1)

TUNE-F1 C4
A2 TUNE-F3
TUNE-F2
Rx RF C27
1)

GND
RXRF-A
B5 A27 V-IN
RXRF-B
B7

GND
A8 PLUG-
OUT4

1) Connected on Backplane or on adapter P4LM, with S2 in position "Filter" GND A/B/C/14/15/16

EMI- +12 A/C/22/23

filter
-12 A/C/24/25

Figure 3-27 P4LR Receive Filter, Block Diagram

3.3.13 Power supply B5LA and B5LC

The power B5LA is used when the external power supply is 48 VDC and the
power supply B5LC is used when the external power supply is 230 VAC or
115 VAC. The power supply also houses filters for suppressing ripple and voltage
surges, ON/OFF magnetic switch and test points for measuring the input voltage
and the output 48 VDC voltage. The technical data for the power supply input is

Secure AC supply (use B5LC) 115/230V AC

+10 / -15%
50/60 Hz + 5%

Secure DC supply (use B5LA) 48V DC

+20 / -15%
ripple < 5% pp

Make sure that the power supply B5LC is programmed to the

DANGER correct voltage of 230 or 115 VAC as described in
1KHL015788 before connecting the equipment to the power
source.

3.3.14 Power subrack P7LA

The power subrack P7LA is used to house the power supply B5LA/B5LC, the Tx
filter E5LA/E5LB and the RF hybrid P3DA/P3LB, the carrier combiner

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-35

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
P3LC/P3LD or the dummy load P3LK. In addition, the power amplifier P1LA is
mounted on the rear side of P7LA. Provision is made on the P7LA for connection
of external power supply and RF coaxial cable.

3.3.15 5 W power amplifier P4LS with line interface G1DA

3.3.15.1 Summary

The module P4LS is a 5 W transceiver and designed to fulfill the IEC require-
ments for PLC transmission and teleprotection systems.

P4LS is connected to the line interface G1DA at one end and to the RF-converter
P4LQ at the other end. It is placed within the channel subrack P7LC and supplied
from the DC-DC converter B4LE. All circuits for tuning and testing of P4LS
hardware are integrated in the module, so that no extra tuning adapters are
needed.

3.3.15.2 Functional description

Figure 3-28 shows a block diagram of P4LS and G1DA.

With the potentiometer on the front of P4LS (shown on Figure 3-29) one can set
the Tx alarm threshold for the forward output power. The LED “Tx ALARM” is
activated with a hysteresis when:
• the forward power is below the Tx alarm threshold,
• the power amplifier is overloaded.

The test socket on the frontplate allows to measure the signal on the RF line
attenuated by 40 dB (i.e. 10 W corresponds to 0 dBu).

The Tx RF filter consists of capacitors given in a small compartment inside the

case of P4LS. After soldering the required capacitors in the correct holes on the
PC board, the unused capacitors must be placed back into the case of P4LS for
future use. The filter is tuned with the tuning bolts (which varies the inductance of
the coils) on the front and with the aid of MMI500. For tuning, refer to 'Tuning
instructions for Tx RF Filter P4LS <ETL500 Rel. 3>' 1KHL016256.

The attenuator at the input of the Rx RF filter is used to reduce the input level to
this filter. The attenuation is set by jumpers and depends on the number of
parallel PLC equipment connected to the same 75 Ohm line.

All elements for frequency tuning of the Rx RF filter are on the board and
programmed by jumpers. The jumper connectors can be found in the small
compartment of the case. The filter can be tuned by an inductance adjuster or
potentiometers on the PCB and with the aid of MMI500. For tuning, refer to
'Tuning instructions for Rx RF Filter P4LS <ETL500 Rel. 3>' 1KHL016255.

The line interface G1DA is used for impedance matching to the RF Line (75
Ohm) and mounted in the rear of the subrack P7LC. The transformer on G1DA
insulates the RF line from the equipment. In special cases the RF line cable can
be grounded by means of a jumper.

By setting a jumper block on line interface G1DA and with help of MMI500, the
ETL500 equipment can be brought into a local loop state. In this state

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-36

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
• the line output is loaded with 75 Ohm, so an output power measurement is
possible at the test socket 'TEST 3' on G1DA (10 W corresponds to 0 dBu).
• the Tx RF signal is fed back into the Rx RF signal path after frequency
conversion from the Tx band into the Rx band.
• the equalizer in the Rx signal path of the ETL500 is bypassed.

TXRF Power A = Normal Operation

Tx RF filter
amplifier
B = Dummy load and
RF LINE local loop back
Alarm Forward power
supervision

Attenuator RF LINE
A

RXRF A TEST 3
Rx RF filter Attenuator Protection
B

AA

2 TXFC f( Tx-Rx )
:2
5W POWER AMPLIFIER P4LS LINE INTERFACE G1DA
P4LS_Overview_.dsf

Figure 3-28 Block diagram of P4LS and G1DA

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-37

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 3 Structure and Function
3.3.15.3 Frontplate

LED "Tx Alarm"

Tx ALARM
Potentiometer for adjustment of Tx alarm
SET
Tx ALARM threshold

RF LINE
10W = 0dBu Test socket RF line, 10 W = 0 dBu

Tuning bolt for Tx RF filter coil L1

L1

Tx Rx RF
P4LS
Tuning bolt for Tx RF filter coil L2
L2

Figure 3-29 Frontplate P4LS

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 3-38

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 4 User Interface Program - MMI500

4. User Interface Program - MMI500

4.1 Introduction

The MMI500 software has been developed to program, tune, test, commission,
operate and maintain the ETL500 equipment. It is a Windows based PC software
with the user friendly features offered by the Windows environment. The program
runs under Windows 95, Windows 98 or Windows NT.

The MMI500 software supports

• Configuration of ETL500 terminals,
• Tuning & testing of the local ETL500 terminal,
• Commissioning of ETL500 links,
• Supervision of ETL500 terminals.

For most of the operations supported by the MMI500, the PC has to

communicate with the ETL500 terminal. Several possibilities exist for this
communication:
• Direct connection with a cable,
• Connection via dial-up modem,
• Connection via intranet/internet,
• Connection via intranet/internet followed by a dial-up modem.

For a description of these communication modes, refer to section 4.4. Some

functions of the MMI500 can also be used in the "Off line" mode, that is without
communication to an equipment. Data entered into the MMI500 in this mode can
be saved to file for later use or information fetched previously from equipments
and recorded to files using the MMI500 can be analyzed and visualized later with
the MMI500 in the “Off line” mode.

Caution The link gets disturbed while using certain functions offered by
the MMI500. However, when "Read access" is checked in the
"Connect" dialog box, it is not possible to activate these special
functions. Care has to be taken especially in case protection
signalling is being used.

4.2 Installation

4.2.1 System requirements

The PC on which MMI500 is to be installed should have one of the following

operating systems installed :
• Windows 95
• Windows 98
• Windows NT

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 4-1

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 4 User Interface Program - MMI500

For communication with the ETL500 via cable or modem, one of the COM ports
of the PC should be free or the PC should have internet/intranet access via
network card.

4.2.2 Install MMI500

1. Insert installation disk number 1 into the 3½" floppy disk drive of your PC.
2. From the Windows Start menu, choose Run… , enter a:\setup.exe into the
dialog box and click Ok.
3. Follow the instructions given by the installation program.

4.3 Using MMI500

To run the program MMI500, double click on the icon 'MMI500'. A window
showing the ABB logo appears and the Connect dialog box is opened on top of
it. The window can be used in two basic modes "Off line" or "On line" depending
on the entries in the Connect dialog box.
• Off line mode:
In this mode, there is no exchange of data associated with the window and an
data of an ETL500 equipment. To choose this mode, either
• Click Off line followed by OK in the Connect dialog box or
• Close the Connect dialog box or
• Press the Escape-key.
• On line mode:
In this mode, data associated with the window can be exchanged with data
of an ETL500 equipment. Consequently, in order for this mode to work, a
physical communication channel must exist between PC and equipment.
Several possibilities exist for this communication channel, which are
described in section 4.4.

With File / New, additional windows can be opened. Each of these windows can
be used in Off line or On line mode. Each window in On line mode is connected
to one ETL500 terminal. That way it is possible to connect to several terminals at
the same time. In order for this to work, physical communication channels must
exist between PC and all terminals. Terminals which are connected together for
this purpose are said to form an element management network. Refer to section
4.5 on how to build up such networks.

4.4 Communication to the ETL500

To establish the communication between MMI500 and an ETL500 terminal,

• communication media like cables, modems, network cards, servers must be
properly installed and configured,
• the communication parameters of the various devices participating in the
communication must be correctly set,
• the Logon operation must be executed using menu Equipment, click
Connect.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 4-2

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 4 User Interface Program - MMI500

4.4.1 Specifying a Write password

After having successfully connected to the equipment as described in the

following sections, it is possible to specify and download a Write password. Once
this has been done, equipment settings can't be changed without entering the
correct password at Logon.

Caution Never forget a password which has been downloaded to the

equipment. The only way to reset a forgotten password is to
send the P4LQ board of the equipment back to the supplier for
repair.

To specify or change a Write password, point to Options / Communications /

Change P4LQ Write Password, enter the old password (if any), enter the new
password, retype the new password and click OK to download the password to
the equipment.

4.4.2 Direct connection via cable

The easiest way for MMI500 to communicate with an ETL500 terminal is via
cable.

MMI500
EETL500
T L5 00
RS232 cable R3

Figure 4-1: Communication via cable

4.4.2.1 Communication media

When directly connecting the PC to the ETL500, a one-to-one cable (9 pole

female to 9 pole male) is used, provided the COM port of the PC has a 9 pole
connector. In case the COM port of the PC has a 25 pole RS-232 connector, an
adapter (25 pole female to 9 pole male) is needed. The cable distance between
the PC and the P4LQ depends upon shielding of the cable, the conductor size,
the baud rate used, cable capacitance and the EMI/EMC environment in which
the cable is installed. As per the specifications of RS-232 it can be typically 15
meters. However, it can be lower or higher depending upon the above
parameters.

4.4.2.2 Communication settings

In the MMI500, open the dialog box Options / Communications…, select Direct
connection, choose the right Port (COM1, 2, 3 or 4) and set the Timeout to
1500ms or higher. Click OK to accept the settings.

4.4.2.3 Logon to the equipment

Point to Equipment / Connect to open the Connect dialog box. Select Logon,
accepting the default value of 0 for the Equipment ID. Select Local. If
parameters have to be downloaded to the equipment, uncheck Read access
only. If a password has been downloaded into the equipment previously and if
Read/write access is desired, enter the correct Write password. If immediately

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 4-3

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 4 User Interface Program - MMI500

after logon, configuration and/or status data are to be uploaded, check the boxes
Upload configuration and/or Upload status. Finally, click OK.

The status of the communication can be deduced from the color of the circle-
button in the toolbar:
Grey: • Communication inactive (Off line mode)
Red: • MMI500 waits for an answer from the equipment. By clicking
the red circle, the communication is interrupted.
Green: • Communication ready (On line mode)

4.4.3 Communication via phone modems

MMI500 can communicate with ETL500 via phone modems.

C o n tro l c e n te r S u b s ta tio n
PSTN
MMI500 RS232 Telephone Telephone RS232
ETL500
cable Dial up line (P u b lic line Dial up cable
modem modem
S w itc h e d
T e le p h o n e
N e tw o rk )

Figure 4-2: Communication via phone modems

4.4.3.1 Communication media

4.4.3.1.1 Modems

The phone modems should be capable of transmitting at least 9600 bps.

Modems compatibel to ITU-T V.32 or higher fulfill this requirement. Also make
sure that the modems data format can be set to 8 data bits, even parity bit, one
stop bit.

4.4.3.1.2 Cables
• For the connection between modem and ETL500, a 9 pin null modem cable
has to be used:
Connector 1 (9 pin Connector 2 (9 pin male)
male)
pin pin
1 not connected
2 3
3 2
4 6
5 5
6 4
7 8
8 7
9 not connected

In case the modem has a 25 pole RS-232 connector, an adapter (25 pole
male to 9 pole female) is needed. On the ETL500, plug the cable into the
COM 1 socket on the frontplate of P4LQ.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 4-4

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 4 User Interface Program - MMI500

• For the connection between modem and PC, a 9 pole 1:1 modem cable
(female to male) is required. In case the COM port of the PC has a 25 pole
RS-232 connector, an adapter (25 pole female to 9 pole male) is needed.

4.4.3.2 Communication settings

In the dialog box Options / Communications…, select Phone modem, choose

the correct Modem and set the Timeout to 3500 ms or higher. Click OK to
accept the settings.

4.4.3.2.1 Configuration of the modems

a) Modem connected to PC:

Install this modem on the PC using Settings / Control panel / Modems.

b) Modem connected to P4LQ:

This modem has to be configured as follows:

Parameters: Modem at P4LQ:

Baud rate 9600 baud

Data bits 8

Parity even

Stop bits 1

To configure the modem, use a terminal program (e.g. hyperterminal) to send the
configuration commands to the modem. As these commands differ depending on
the type of the modems used, it is not possible to specify a common configuration
sequence for all modem types. Please refer to your modem dealer or the
example below for further information.

Example: Configuration of a ZyXEL1496 for connection to P4LQ:

The modem is to be configured to the settings given by column "Modem at P4LQ"

of the previous table with the help of the program hyperterminal. Connect the
modem to one of the COM-ports of the PC with a 9 pole 1:1 modem cable
(female to male). In case the COM port of the PC has a 25 pole RS-232
connector, an adapter (25 pole female to 9 pole male) is needed. Start
hyperterminal, select the correct COM port and set the Baudrate to 9600 Bd,
connect to the modem and type at. The modem should answer with OK. If your
modem returns garbage characters, retype at to adapt the modems autobaud
function to your baud rate. Do not send any other characters (e.g. return) before
at. This may disturb your modems autobaud functionality. If you don't get any
answer check your connections, the modem settings and try again.

Now enter the following commands to setup the modem: The modem should
always send OK to confirm your entry.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 4-5

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 4 User Interface Program - MMI500

Command: Explanation:
atz4 Load factory settings to get a defined modem setting.
ate0 Command echo off
ats0=1 Set the number of rings on which the modem will answer
automatically. S0=0 disables the auto answer.
ats15=8 Set the modem to even parity and a character length of 11 (1 start
bit , 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, 1 stop bit). The terminal program now
might receive some garbage characters, which can be ignored.
Change the communication settings of the PC to the modem using
Settings / Control panel / Modems and of hyperterminal to 9600
Baud, 8 bits, even parity, 1 stop bit. When typing at, the modem
should answer with OK.
at&w0 Save the settings to profile 0.
atz0 Load profile 0 and set profile 0 as power-on profile.

4.4.3.2.2 Configuration of MMI500

In the dialog box Options / Communications…, select Phone modem, choose

the correct Modem and set the Timeout to 3500ms or higher.

4.4.3.3 Logon to the equipment

Point to Equipment / Connect to open the Connect dialog box. Select Logon,
accepting the default value of 0 for the Equipment ID. Select Local. If
parameters have to be downloaded to the equipment, uncheck Read access
only. If a password has been downloaded into the equipment previously and if
Read/write access is desired, enter the correct Write password. If immediately
after logon, configuration and/or status data are to be uploaded, check the boxes
Upload configuration and/or Upload status.

Click the Dial button. Choose Add item and enter Station Name, Phone
Number and – if required – Country Code and Area Code for the remote
modem. After clicking Connect, the modem perfoms the necessary actions to
establish a dialing connection. As soon as the connection is made, the color of
the circle-button in the toolbar turns to green.

4.4.4 Communication via intranet/internet

MMI500 can communicate with ETL500 via internet/intranet.

M a in c o n tro l c e n te r S u b s ta tio n
In te rn e t,
MMI500 Ethernet In tra n e t, Ethernet SVR500 RS232 ETL500
connection LAN, connection connection
WAN

Figure 4-3: Communication via intranet/internet

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 4-6

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 4 User Interface Program - MMI500

4.4.4.1 Communication media

• The PC with the MMI500 acts as client and must have and internet/intranet
access via network card.
• A second PC acting as server and satisfying the requirements given in section
4.2.1, with the server program SVR500 installed. The PC should have a free
COM port and internet/intranet access.
• For the connection between server PC and modem, a 9 pole 1:1 modem cable
(female to male) is required. In case the COM port of the PC has a 25 pole
RS-232 connector, an adapter (25 pole female to 9 pole male) is needed.

4.4.4.2 Communication settings

4.4.4.2.1 Configuration of SVR500

Startup SVR500 on the server PC and click the button Settings. Set the
communication mode (Comm. mode) to Serial cable, choose the correct COM-
port and accept the default values in the other fields:
• Server port: 5111,
• Inactivity timeout: 3600 seconds,
• Baudrate: 9600 Bd,
• Timeout: 10000 seconds.

Start the server program by pressing the button Start server. By clicking the
minimize button, the SVR500 application window disappears and the icon SVR
appears instead in one of the corners of the screen. The color of the icon
changes depending on the status of the SVR500 (stopped, not connected,
connected, read/write).

4.4.4.2.2 Configuration of MMI500

In the dialog box Options / Communications…, select Internet connection,

specifiy the internet address of the server in the field Server address, which
must be a number of the form n1.n2.n3.n4 with 0 ≤ n1, n2, n3, n4 ≤ 255 or a host
name, set the Server Port to 5111 (corresponding to the entry in SVR500) and
set the Timeout to 10500ms or higher.

Optionally, by checking the box Allowed clients and clicking the Add button, a
list of client internet addresses can be specified. If this is done, the server will not
process any messages it receives from the intranet/internet unless they are
generated by one of the clients in the list. That way, unauthorized access to the
ETL500 from unknown clients is not possible.

Click OK to accept the settings.

4.4.4.3 Logon to the equipment

Refer to section 4.4.2.3: The Logon procedure is identical to the one for direct
connection via cable.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 4-7

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 4 User Interface Program - MMI500

4.4.5 Connection via intranet/internet and phone modems

MMI500 can communicate with ETL500 via internet/intranet and phone modems.

M a in c o n tro l c e n te r

MMI500
In te rn e t,
Ethernet
connection In tra n e t,
LAN,
WAN

R e g io n a l c o n tro l c e n te r
Ethernet
S u b s ta tio n connection
PSTN
RS232 Telephone Telephone RS232 SVR500
ETL500 connection Dial up line (P u b lic line Dial up connection
modem S w itc h e d modem
T e le p h o n e
N e tw o rk )

Figure 4-4: Communication via intranet/internet and phone modems

4.4.5.1 Communication media

• The PC with the MMI500 acts as client and must have an internet/intranet
access.
• A second PC acting as server and satisfying the requirements given in section
4.2.1, with the server program SVR500 installed. The PC should have a free
COM port and internet/intranet access via network card.
• Two modems compliant to the requirements given in section 4.4.3.1.1.
• For the connection between modem and server PC, a 9 pole 1:1 modem cable
(female to male) is required. In case the COM port of the PC has a 25 pole
RS-232 connector, an adapter (25 pole female to 9 pole male) is needed.
• For the connection between modem and ETL500, a 9 pin null modem cable as
described in section 4.4.3.1.2 must be used.

4.4.5.2 Communication settings

A good way of setting up a combined internet/phone modem connection to an

ETL500 is to proceed in the following steps:
- Take into operation the phone modem connection between server PC and
ETL500 by installing MMI500 on the server PC and proceeding as described
in section 4.4.3.
- Install the server program SVR500 on the server PC and configure it as
described in section 4.4.5.2.1. Configure the MMI500 on the server PC as
described in section 4.4.4.2.2 and logon to the equipment as described in
section 4.4.3.3.
- Close the MMI500 on the server PC leaving SVR500 running, configure the
MMI500 on the client PC with the same settings (also referring to section
4.4.4.2.2) and logon to the equipment as described in section 4.4.3.3.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 4-8

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 4 User Interface Program - MMI500

4.4.5.2.1 Configuration of SVR500

Startup SVR500 on the server PC and click the button Settings. Set the
communication mode (Comm. mode) to Modem (dialing), choose the correct
modem in the field Select device and accept the default values in the other
fields:
• Server port: 5111,
• Inactivity timeout: 3600 seconds,
• Timeout: 10000 seconds.

Start the server program by pressing the button Start server. By clicking the
minimize button, the SVR500 application window disappears and the icon SVR
appears instead in one of the corners of the screen. The color of the icon
changes depending on the status of the SVR500 (stopped, not connected,
connected, read/write).

4.4.5.2.2 Configuration of MMI500

Refer to section 4.4.4.2.2: The Settings are identical to the ones for
communication via intranet/internet.

4.4.5.3 Logon to the equipment

Refer to section 4.4.3.3: The Logon procedure is identical to the one for direct
connection via phone modems.

4.5 Element management networks

4.5.1 RS-485 station bus

If management access from one PC to several ETL500 terminals in a substation

is desired, the management COM ports of these terminals can be connected
together via remote inquiry kits type R7AP, thereby forming an RS-485 network,
see Figure 4-5. Of course, this network of terminals can also be reached from a
remote location according to Figure 4-1, Figure 4-2, Figure 4-3 or Figure 4-4,
replacing the single ETL500 terminals shown in these figures by the network of
terminals as depicted in Figure 4-5.

MMI500
RS232 RS485 RS232
connection bus connection E TL 50 0
R 7A P R 7A P R3

R 7A P R 7A P

RS232 RS232
connection connection

E TL 50 0 E TL 50 0
R3 R3

Figure 4-5 RS-485 station bus with R7AP

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 4-9

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 4 User Interface Program - MMI500

In order to distinguish the terminals from each other, a unique address called
"equipment ID" must be given to all terminals participating in the network. The
equipment ID is a number between 1 and 65000. It has to be configured for each
terminal prior to connecting the management ports together to form the network.

4.5.2 Embedded operation channel (EOC)

The remote equipment of an ETL500 link can always be reached without own
equipment ID via the built in embedded operation channel (EOC), which uses the
pilot signal of the ETL500 terminals thus occupying no additional bandwidth, see
Figure 4-6. However, the transmission rate of the EOC is 100 bps, which is
sufficient for alarm monitoring, but might be tedious for more sophisticated tasks
like remote measurement of signals in the terminal, which involve a much larger
amount of data than alarm monitoring.

S u b s ta tio n A S u b s ta tio n B

MMI500 RS232- EOC of

connection E T L5 00 PLC link E T L5 00
R3 R3

Figure 4-6 Embedded operation channel

In the common situation, where several links are connected in tandem (chain of
links), all terminals can be reached from either side of the chain by connecting
the management ports of the terminals together via nullmodems, see Figure 4-7.
S u b s ta tio n A S u b s ta tio n B
MMI500 RS232- EOC of RS232- RS232-
connection E T L5 00 PLC link E T L5 00 connection N u ll- connection E T L5 00
R3 R3 m od em R3

EOC of
PLC link

S u b s ta tio n D S u b s ta tio n C

RS232- EOC of RS232- RS232-

N u ll- connection E T L5 00 PLC link E T L5 00 connection N u ll- connection E T L5 00
m od em R3 R3 m od em R3

Figure 4-7

T-offs in substations can be handled by connecting the management ports of the

involved terminals via RS-232/RS-485 converters as shown in Figure 4-5.

4.5.3 Network protocol

The network protocol used by the ETL500 terminals is connectionless. This

means that all messages circulating in the network are routed to all terminals
attached to the network. Only the addressed terminal will execute the commands
contained in the message and generate an answer. Closed loops are not allowed

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 4-10

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 4 User Interface Program - MMI500

in the network. In the example of Figure 4-8, a closed loop exists between
substations A and C. All messages exchanged between substations A and C will
be transmitted over a data channel of 9600 bps as well as over the 100 bps EOC
channel of the PLC link between terminals A3 and C3. Unless the EOC of the
PLC link A3-C3 is disabled for network management by proper configuration via
MMI500 (by not checking the box Network management: EOC enabled in the
MMI500 dialogbox Configuration / System / Channel settings), the network will
not operate properly. Thus the EOC must be disabled for network management in
this case.

A further valuable feature of the ETL500 network protocol is the possibility of

connecting several PCs at various points to a network. In Figure 4-8, in addition
to the PC in the control center, another PC has been connected to the
management port of terminal B1 in substation B. The network will transport
independently all MMI500 messages between the PCs and all the terminals
attached to the network. This is achieved by entering a network address similar to
the equipment ID into the MMI500 running on the PCs. Permissible values for PC
network addresses are from 65001 to 65500, to be entered into the MMI500
dialog box Options / Communications / Address of MMI500.

For supervision of the whole network, the function Alarm polling can be used
accessible under the Network menu.

C o n tro l
C e n te r S u b s ta tio n A S u b s ta tio n B
MMI500
RS232-
connection Dial up PSTN Dial up EOC of
E TL 50 0 PLC link E TL 50 0 RS232-
modem modem
R3 R3 connection

Terminal A1 Terminal B1
R 7A P R 7A P MMI500
S u b s ta tio n C

EOC of
PLC link E TL 50 0 EOC of
R3 R 7A P E TL 50 0 PLC link E TL 50 0
R3 R3
RS485-
Terminal C1
bus
R 7A P Terminal A2 Terminal B2

N u ll-
R 7A P m od em
RS485-
bus
Data- E TL 50 0
channel
Data Data R3
(9600bps) R 7A P
comm. comm.
R 7A P
equip. equip.
Terminal B3

R 7A P R 7A P EOC of
PLC link

EOC of
PLC link
E TL 50 0 (100 bps) E TL 50 0
EOC of R3 R3
PLC link E TL 50 0
R3
Terminal C3 Terminal A3

Terminal C2

Figure 4-8 Example of an element management network

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 4-11

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 4 User Interface Program - MMI500

4.6 Operation

All functions of the MMI500 are accessible via the following 8 menu-items,
displayed at the top of the program window: 'File', 'Edit', 'View', 'Equipment',
'Configuration', 'Network', 'Window' and 'Help'.

"Off line" operation is covered mainly by the menues 'Configuration' and 'File',
while "On line" operation is addressed mainly with the menues 'Equipment' and
'Network'. The functions offered by menue 'Equipment' are only available after an
equipment has been connected to the MMI500 as described in section 4.4.

Important procedures for tuning & testing and for commissioning & maintenance
of the equipment are described in separate documents. These documents can be
found in the annex of this instruction manual.

4.7 Data management

The configuration data of the ETL500 can reside in several locations:

1. In the RAM of a PC.

2. As a data file on a floppy disc or the hard disc of a PC.

3. In the volatile RAM of the modules P4LQ, O4LE, G4AI of the ETL500.

4. In the non-volatile flash EPROM of the modules P4LQ, O4LE, G4AI of the
ETL500.

In addition to the above, a printout of the configuration data can also be taken for
storage on paper. The configuration file can be generated off line and
downloaded later into the equipment. The following figure shows the data
management in pictorial form.

MMI50
0

RAM
of Equipment
en PC Flash
Op EPROM
Up
loa et
d s
Re

ve Do
Sa wn
loa
File d
o re
Equipment St
RAM

Figure 4-9 Data-Management, Data-Flow

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 4-12

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 4 User Interface Program - MMI500

The procedures for transferring data between the locations all have distinct
names. As shown in the figure, there is no direct possibility of data transfer from
equipment EPROM to file: The operations "Reset", "Upload" and "Save" have to
be executed in sequence. To transfer data from file to EPROM, the operations
Open, Download, Store have to be called.

Due to safety reasons, the MMI500 program treats the download procedure as a
temporary operation: After a predefined timeout to be specified by the user, the
equipment automatically performs a reset operation, so that the system is
rebooted, thereby undoing all changes caused by the download operation by
fetching the complete system configuration data saved in EPROM previously.
Should faulty settings have been downloaded, resulting in loss of a PLC link, this
feature brings back the link into life automatically after the specified timeout.

4.8 Compatibility

The ETL500 system consists of

1. Hardware, consisting of a number of modules;
2. Firmware, residing on some of the modules and making the processors on
these modules execute various functions such as modulation, digital filtering
etc.;
3. PC based software MMI500, implementing the user interface for
configuration and testing of the equipment.

The compatibility aspects explained in this section are coupled to exchange of

data between two items such as modules, terminals, links, configuration files or
MMI500 programs. Compatibility regarding the exchange of operational
information like speech, teleoperation signals, teleprotection signals, … is not
addressed here.

The compatibility rules and relations for the present and all previous ETL500
releases are summarized in the document 1KHL015559 "Compatibility
requirements for ETL500".

4.8.1 ETL500 releases, release numbers, version numbers, type codes

To understand the explanations in the following sections, the terms "ETL500

release", "release number", "version number", "type code" need to be explained.

An ETL500 system release, identified by a release number, is a product of

defined functionality comprising hardware modules, firmware and software.
Firmware and software are identified with version numbers of the form NN.nn.,
e.g. 5.08 (leading zeros may be omitted). Releases are identified by release
numbers of the form RR.r, e.g. 3.1 (leading zeros may be omitted). Hardware
modules are identified with type codes consisting of 4 characters like P7LC,
G4AI or P4LQ. Sometimes, a fifth character – the revision index - is appended to
identify an upgraded version of a module. Example: P4LQA is an upgraded
version of P4LQ; P4LQB would be an upgraded version of P4LQA and so on.

Note: The information content of type codes in case of modules containing

firmware depends on the possibility to download firmware from
MMI500 into the module:
• If for a module firmware download is not possible, the type code of

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 4-13

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 4 User Interface Program - MMI500

that module identifies the hardware including the firmware

version.
Example: G4AK

• If for a module firmware download is possible, the type code of

that module identifies the hardware excluding the firmware
version. The download files for the firmware of such modules are
included on the MMI500 disc.
Example: O4LE

4.8.2 Compatibility between modules of a PLC terminal

The modules of an ETL500 terminal must belong to the same release as given by
Table 1 in document 1KHL015559.

4.8.3 Compatibility between the two ETL500 terminals of a link

The two ETL500 terminals of a link must belong to the same release. A warning
"Inconsistent firmware on local and remote equipment" will be generated by the
terminals if this rule is not respected.

4.8.4 Compatibility of MMI500 to ETL500 terminals

The compatibility relations between MMI500 and an ETL500 terminal can best be
explained referring to Figure 4-10. As shown, the compatibiliy issue is coupled to
the data transfer operations "Upload" and "Download". Testing of these
operations for the present and for past relases of ETL500 terminals is part of the
system tests carried out for each release of the ETL500 system.

Release N.N

MMI500
for Rel. N.N

Up- Down-
load load

ETL500 terminal ETL500 terminal ETL500 terminal ETL500 terminal ETL500 terminal
Rel. << N.N Rel. < N.N Rel. N.N update of Rel. N.N Rel. > N.N

MMI compatibility range

Past Present Future

Figure 4-10 MMI500 compatibility relations

Generally, an specific MMI500 version will be fully compatible to ETL500

terminals of the same release. It will have restricted compatibility (symbol "t " in
Figure 4-10; definition: see below) to a number of past releases. Updates of hard-
, firm- or software will generally inherit the compatibility relations from its

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 4-14

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 4 User Interface Program - MMI500

predecessors. Thus for each MMI500 version there is a compatibility range –

shown graphically in Figure 4-10 - containing all ETL500 releases and updates
thereof to which it is compatible (fully or restricted). It is identical to the
compatibility range mentioned in section 4.8.5. A specific MMI500 version will not
be compatible (symbol "X" in Figure 4-10) to all releases and updates thereof
which are not within the MMI compatibility range.

Restricted compatibility: In a situation of restricted compatibility, when starting

an upload or download operation, messages will sometimes be displayed
informing about some unavailable function and corrective action. One such
situation arises when new functions have been added for a new release, which
will not be known by previous releases.

Note: Inquire about the most recent MMI500 version each time new
ETL500 modules are purchased.

4.8.5 Compatibility of MMI500 to configuration files

The compatibility relations between MMI500 and a configuration file can best be
explained referring to Figure 4-11. As shown, the compatibiliy issue is coupled to
the operation "File / Open". Testing of this operation for configuration files
generated by the present and by past MMI500 versions is part of the system tests
carried out for each release of the ETL500 system.

Update of
MMI500 MMI500 MMI500 MMI500
for Release << N.N for Release < N.N for Release > N.N
for Release N.N

File/
Release N.N Save

Configuration file Configuration file Configuration file Configuration file Configuration file

File/ File/
Open Save

MMI500
for Release N.N

MMI compatibility range

Past Present Future

Figure 4-11 Compatibility relations for MMI500 configuration files

A specific MMI500 version is fully compatible to a configuration file, if all

information contained within the file can be correctly read (Operation File / Open).
It will have restricted compatibility (symbol "t " in Figure 4-11; definition: see
below) to configuration files generated by MMI500 programs of a number of past
releases. Updates of an MMI500 program will generally inherit the compatibility
relations from its predecessors. The compatibility range of a specific MMI500
version– shown graphically in Figure 4-11 – comprises all MMI500 versions
whose configuration files can be opened by that version. It is identical to the
compatibility range mentioned in section 4.8.4. A specific MMI500 version will not

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 4-15

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 4 User Interface Program - MMI500

be compatible (symbol "X" in Figure 4-11) to all MMI500 versions which are not
within the MMI compatibility range.

Restricted compatibility: In a situation of restricted compatibility, when starting

a File/Open operation, messages will sometimes be displayed informing about
some unavailable function and corrective action. One such situation arises when
existing functions have been changed for a new release, which will not be
displayed correctly by the new MMI500 program.

4.9 Uninstalling MMI500

To uninstall the MMI500 software, open the Windows Start menue and choose
Settings / Control Panel / Add/Remove programs. Al currently installed
programs are listed in the combo-box on the tab Install/Uninstall. In this combo-
box, select the version of MMI500 which has to be uninstalled and click
Add/Remove…. Click Yes on the message box which pops up to get a wizard
which guides through the uninstall operation.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 4-16

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

5. Configuration and Setup

5.1 Introduction

The configuration of the ETL equipment including AF interfaces and

teleprotection has to be done according to document 'Programming and Testing
Instructions for the ETL500 Rel. 3 Equipment' (1KHL015940-EN). The two major
steps of the procedure are: 1. Programming and 2. Testing. Each of these steps
consist of a number of substeps with associated instructions listed in the
document. Each substep is documented in a report to be filled out during the
procedure. Templates for these reports – one for programming and one for
testing - are included in the document. These reports should be kept for
reference as long as the equipment is in use.

Programming is done with the equipment not powered. Hardware programming is

made by inserting or removing jumpers, setting switches and by soldering in
components as in case of the Tx filter. Software settings are entered via the
MMI500 menue "Configuration". Usually these settings are saved to a file, which
is downloaded into the equipment later during testing of the system.

Note: The configuration download operation will only be successfull when the
system components (including the MMI500 program) are compatible .
To verify this, refer to document 'Compatibility requirements for ETL500'
(1KHL015559-EN). In case of uncertainty, use the newest available
MMI500 version.

Testing is done with the equipment powered, and all test procedures are
supported by MMI500, menue "Equipment / Tuning and Testing".

5.2 Configuration with MMI500

In this section it is explained, how to create a configuration with the MMI500 for a
ETL500 equipment. It is recommended to work through the next sections step by
step. After this you will have created a configuration, which you should store in a
file. This is described in section 5.3.

5.2.1 Configure services

In the dialog box Connect, which appears after starting up MMI500 or - if

MMI500 is already running - after selecting File / New, choose Off line /
Equipment type ETL500. Close the dialog box by pressing Ok.

Point to Configuration / Services to get a dialog box with the tabs Type,
Channel 1, Channel 2.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-1

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

First of all, on the tab Type, select the equipment type:

Type Bandwidth Channels RF-PEP
per channel (each direction) (Peak Envelope Power)
ETL505 4 kHz 1 5W
ETL540 4 kHz 1 40 W
ETL580 4 kHz 1 80 W
ETL540 4 kHz 2 40 W
ETL580 4 kHz 2 80 W
ETL540 8 kHz 1 40 W
ETL580 8 kHz 1 80 W

Subsequently, the required services

• telephony,
• teleoperation,
• FSK modems,
• teleprotection and
• event recorder

have to be specified in tab Channel 1 for single channel terminals and also in tab
Channel 2. for dual channel terminals.

Note: Configuration data entered into the three tabs Type, Channel
1 and Channel 2 of the dialog Configuration / Services must
be complete before proceeding to the settings for these
services.

Remarks:
• NSD550 is not available for channel 2;
• Teleoperation ports are 4 wire ports;
• The number of ports to be entered for NSD550 are not to be mixed up with the
number of NSD550 commands, as more than one port can be assigned to
each command;
• The number teleoperation ports doesn't include the port(s) for connecting
external teleprotection devices;
• The external real time clock synchronisation input for the event recorder is
available on the AF interface board O4LE in slot N11.

5.2.2 Configure system parameters

Point to Configuration / System to get a dialog box with the 4 tabs Equipment
identification, Channel settings, Alarm settings and Alarm relays on R1BC.

Remarks for tab Equipment identification:

• All data entered into the fields are interpreted as character strings except
Equipment address;

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-2

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

• In the field Equipment address a number between 0 and 65000 must be

entered. The default value of 0 can be used as long as just one single link is
accessible from MMI500. However, if several links are connected to a network
whose elements are to be managed from one single MMI500, unique
Equipment addresses have to be assigned to all terminals prior to
connecting them to the network, so that the terminals can be addressed
individually by MMI500. Refer to chapter 4, section "Element management
networks" for more details.

5.2.3 Configure NSD550

Point to Configuration / NSD550 to get a dialog box with the tabs System
settings, Performance, Command Rx, Alarm and unblocking settings and
Interface 1. Additional tabs Interface 2, Interface 3, … can be present
depending on the required number of NSD550 ports entered previously under
Configure services.

Remarks for tab System settings:

• As long as the Operation mode of the NSD550 is set to Off, no data can be
entered into anyone of the NSD550 configuration tabs.
• The frequency of the NSD550 own guard signal depends on the speech
bandwidth entered previously under Configure services. For a speech
bandwidth of 2600 Hz and higher, the NSD550 must use the ETL pilot as
guard signal.
• The settings of the Operation mode for Uncoded commands and Coded
commands determine the default settings in the tab Performance.

Remark for the tabs Interface 1, 2, …:

• The voltage level of the input ports on the interface modules G4AI must be
programmed by jumpers.

5.2.4 Configure telephony

Point to Configuration / Telephony to get a dialog box with tabs Channel 1

and/or Channel 2 depending on the required telephony services entered
previously under Configure services.

5.2.5 Level settings of teleoperation ports, introduction

A little background is useful when configuring a teleoperation port to understand

structure and the various tuning possibilities. Physical basics are explained in
section 5.5.

In Figure 5-1, the lifeline of an input signal is shown, entering at the terminal of
AF interface O4LE through the ETL500 up to the RF terminal, which is connected
to the coupling device. Only the input path of one teleoperation port is depicted. A
non transit application is assumed. Settings which can be done in MMI500 are
marked with a finger symbol.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-3

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

AF terminal (600 Ohm) RF terminal (75 / 125 Ohm)

ETL500 signal processing

Level in dBm System Level in dBm0 Level in dBm

(600 Ohm) (75 / 125 Ohm)
max. input level max internal level for sumsignal
Terminal
Amplifier
to RF
Adder

Max. Power (PEP) in dBm

sumsignal coupling
device
0
Input level

20 log(S-value)

Input level
Relative
Terminal

...
dBm (PEP)
0
dBm (RMS) Pilot
-6

Legend:

System Level of the input signal
is determined by selection of

: You have to configure in MMI500 'Reference signal' in MMI500!
: Selection in MMI500

Figure 5-1 Signal levels from AF terminal to RF terminal

An external device, which is not shown, sends an input level, which can be
configured in the MMI. The signal passes the terminal of the AF interface and is
present in the internal ETL500 system. Levels of external AF devices are mostly
given in dBm (600 Ω), dBm, ‘dB at 600 Ω’ or dBm (RMS), which means all the
same. In this document the unit dBm (RMS) is used. It is the average power
level. A standard true rms volt meter is measuring dBu (RMS) with a high
impedance and calculating the dBm(RMS) value considering a reference
impedance, e.g. 600 Ω, 75 Ω, … .

For the system ETL500, the rms levels have to be converted to Peak Envelope
Power levels expressed in dBm (PEP). With these PEP levels, the peak voltage
at any point in the system can be determined and compared to the allowed
maximum to avoid clipping. For conversion of rms to PEP levels, the peak to
average ratio must be known, which is characteristic for a specific type of signal:

U peak
dBm ( PEP) = dBm ( RMS ) + 20 * log( ) ,
2 *U rms
valid for 600 Ω.

For each type of signal, an associated system power level expressed in dBm0 is
defined as explained in section 5.5.3. System levels and associated weightings
are given in table Table 5-1. The following relation holds between a weighting
and the associated system level:

dBm0 ( PEP) = 20 * log( weighting ) .

The ratio between dBm (PEP) levels and dBm0 levels is called relative level and
expressed in dBr as explained in section 5.5.6. In the configuration text
generated by the MMI500, the relative level is given for each configured
teleoperation in- and output-port. The sum of the weigthings of all signals to be
transmitted by the ETL500, called the S-value, is also given in the configuration
text. Refer to section 5.8 for more information about the S-value.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-4

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

5.2.6 Configure teleoperation port not used for transit operation

From menu Configuration click ‘Configure Teleoperation, ext. Teleprotection

and G4AK Tx level’

Switch a port on:

1. Select the port you want to configure.
2. If the service(s), which run(s) over the port, can be interrupted when a
teleprotection command is transmitted or received locally: Click On –
disconnectable.
In case the service mustn’t be interrupted by a teleprotection command, click
On - non disconnetable.
3. Activate Squelch, if the ouput of port should be muted in case of low signal
to noise ratio. Typically the squelch function is activated for modem
applications.
The signal to noise ratio is calculated in the pilot channel. The limit for
activating the link alarm and for squelching the AF ports can be configured in
Configuration / System / Alarm settings.
4. For a dual channel equipment, select Channel 1 or Channel 2. The AF port
is then routed to the selected channel.

Configure input level:

From the sheet Configure Teleoperation, ext. Teleprotection and G4AK Tx

level’ click:
5. Specify signal.
6. Select the correct ‘Reference signal’. Normally this is given by external
device connected to the port.
7. Select the correct ‘Input level’ for the signal, which in the configuration
printout appears as 'Reference signal level input'. It is the output level of the
external device. Recommended values are –6.0 dBm or less.
8. Select either the unit dBm (RMS) or dBm (PEP). In the MMI500, the peak to
average ratio for many signal types are stored.
If you are not sure, you should select dBm (RMS).

Note: For non transit application, it is normally not

necessary to check additional signals in the list
‘Signals after selected filter’ of the ‘Input’ sheet!

Configure output level:

9. Click Next to configure the output port characteristics.

10. Select the Output level for your application. It is the input level of the
external device connected to the port.
11. You should also check all other signals present at the output in the list
named ‘Signals after selected filter’ of the ‘Output’-sheet. The MMI500
calculates the Max. output level and compares it with the max. output level
of the teleoperation port. However, you should also check the input capability
of your external device.
If the Max. output level is too high, you have two possibilities to solve the
problem. Either you reduce the output level or you insert an appropriate
output filter at this output port to filter away some of the signals, thus

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-5

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

reducing the number of signals to be checked in the list 'Signals after

selected filter' of the 'Output'-sheet.
12. Click Finish.

Configure an input and/or an output filter, if necessary:

From the sheet Configure Teleoperation, ext. Teleprotection and G4AK Tx

level’:
13. For an input filter, press the button Select filter in section Input filter.
14. Select Standard transit filter for a filter without group delay equalization or
select Special transit filter for a filter with group delay equalization.
15. Select the frequency range of the filter.
16. Click OK.

To configure an output filter, repeat steps 13 to 15 except that the button Select
filter to be pressed in step 13 is in section output filter instead of section input
filter.

From the sheet Configure Teleoperation, ext. Teleprotection and G4AK Tx

level’:

Configure all other teleoperation ports:

17. Repeat configuration steps 1 to 15 for all other teleoperation ports

18. Close the sheet Configure Teleoperation, ext. Teleprotection and G4AK
Tx level’ by clicking OK.

5.2.7 Configure teleoperation port used for transit operation

The procedure of configuration is very similar to procedure explained above.

Switch a port on:

1. Select the port you want to configure.
2. If the service(s), which run(s) over the port, can be interrupted when a
teleprotection command is transmitted or received locally, click On –
disconnectable.
In case the services mustn’t be interrupted by a teleprotection command,
click On - non disconnetable.

Note: You have to consider all services routed via this

port. If a teleprotection system is configured at this
equipment and the transit port is configured as
‘On – disconnectable’, all services routed via this
port are interrupted!
3. Deactivate Squelch. The squelch functionality should work nearby the port,
where the external device is connected.
4. For a dual channel equipment, select Channel 1 or Channel 2. The
selected AF port is routed to the equivalent channel. If services on both
channels have to be routed to another link, two AF ports must configured for
transit operation, one for each channel.

Configure the transit filter:

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-6

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

From the dialog Configure Teleoperation, ext. Teleprotection and G4AK Tx

level’:
5. Select filter from the Output filter section.

Note: To select an output filter is the standard solution

for a transit AF operation as described in the
functional description of O4LE, chapter 3. In any
case, the passband of the selected filter must not
include the pilot band.
6. Select Standard transit filter for a filter without group delay equalization or
select Special transit filter for a filter with group delay equalization.

Note: Preferably use a Special transit filter if one with

an appropriate passband is available! When a
special transit filter has been selected, the Allpass
filter of the associated channel should also be
activated.
To activate the Allpass filter: From the menu
Configuration click System, click Channel
settings, activate Allpass filter.
If the services to be routed via the AF port are not
sensitive to group delay distortion, as in the case
of speech, a Standard transit filter can be used.
7. Select the frequency range of the filter.
8. Click OK.

Configure input level:

From the sheet Configure Teleoperation, ext. Teleprotection and G4AK Tx

level’ click:
9. Specify signal.
10. First select a suitable ‘Reference signal’. Normally, this is the signal of the
most important service routed via this port.

Note: You have to select the same Reference signal at

the connected AF output port of the other
equipment!
11. All signals routed via this port must be selected in the list ‘Signals after
selected filter’ in the Input sheet . Signals, which are rejected by the transit
filter must not selected. E.g. don’t select the pilot!

Note: This is very important, because for every selected

signal the MMI500 reserves a certain output power
at the end amplifier. If signals entering the port are
not declared in the list, the amplifier might clip and
the operation of the PLC link will be disturbed!
12. Select the correct ‘Input level’ for the signal, which in the configuration
printout appears as 'Reference signal level input'. It is the output level of the
external device. Recommended values are –6.0 dBm or less.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-7

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

Note: This input level must be configured as output level

at the other AF port connected to this AF port of
the other equipment. It is a good rule to configure
the input and output levels of all connected AF
ports to the same value.
13. Select either the unit dBm (RMS) or dBm (PEP). MMI500 knows and
considers the peak to average ratio for many applications.
If you are not sure of selection, you should select dBm (RMS).

Note: The unit dBm (RMS) or dBm (PEP) must be

configured as unit of the output level at the other
AF port connected to this AF port of the other
equipment. It is a good rule to configure the unit of
all connected AF ports to the same value. Different
selection at the both connected AF ports can lead
to a clipping end amplifier!

Configure output level:

14. Click Next to configure the output port characteristics.

15. You have to select as Output level the input level of the connected AF port
of the other equipment.
16. You should also check all other signals in the list ‘Signals after selected
filter’ displayed in the ‘Output’ sheet , which are present at the output port.
Signals rejected by the transit filter must not be selected. E.g. don’t select the
pilot!. The Max. output level shall not exceed 4.0 dBm (PEP). If the Max.
output level is too high, you have two possibilities to solve the problem.
Either you reduce the output level or you insert an appropriate output filter at
this output port to filter away some of the signals, thus reducing the number
of signals to be checked in the list 'Signals after selected filter' of the
'Output'-sheet.
17. Click Finish.

Finish the configuration of AF ports:

18. Close the sheet Configure Teleoperation, ext. Teleprotection and G4AK
Tx level’ by clicking OK.

5.2.8 Configure teleoperation port used for external teleprotection

• If teleprotection signals are routed through input or output filters, the additional
time delay introduced by these filters in the order of ms must be taken into
account.

5.2.9 Configure internal modem G4AK

• The NSK5 modules G4AK must be programmed by jumpers according to the
NSK5 instruction manual 1KHL016075.
• The only purpose of the tab is to hand over to the MMI500 the level of the
NSK5 transmit signal set by jumpers on G4AK.
• The Rx and Tx center frequency settings are for information only and are not
stored.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-8

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

5.3 Use of MMI500 files

Data entered into MMI500 as described in section 5.2 can be saved to file. The
default extension of such files is mmi. The data can be loaded back anytime into
MMI500 from these files for modifications or for downloading to an ETL500
terminal connected to MMI500.

To save the data to file, point to File / Save or File / Save As.

To reload data from a previously stored file, open the file using File / Open.

To view the information recorded in a file after having opened it, use the View
menu.

5.4 Signal boosting for teleprotection devices

Boosting refers to increasing the strength of tripping signals in relation to the

quiescent state. In the case of PLC, this involves interrupting the transmission of
speech, modem signals in the speech band and usually also of the modem
signals in the frequency band above the speech band, so that as much as
possible of the ETL transmitter power is available for the tripping signals. This
scheme yields the maximum signal to noise ratio (SNR) at the receiver. The ratio
between the power of the boosted teleprotection signal and the power of the
unboosted signal is called boost ratio BR and is normally expressed in decibels.

5.4.1 Disconnectable and non-disconnectable ports or signals

The achievable boost ratio depends on how many of the signals to be transmitted
by the PLC link may be disconnected during the transmission of the tripping
signals. Each of the teleoperation ports of the ETL500 can either be set to
disconnectable or to non-disconnectable mode:
• The input signal path of a disconnectable port is disabled during the
transmission of tripping signals, thereby suppressing all signals entering the
PLC terminal via this port for the duration of the teleprotection command. The
signals suppressed like that are called disconnectable signals. The power of
disconnectable signals is automatically given to the teleprotection tripping
signal by the ETL500. For NSD550, signals occupying all or part of the speech
band must be disconnectable, as the speech band must be kept free for
transmission of the NSD550 tripping signals.
• The output signal path of a disconnectable port is disabled, if the NSD550
teleprotection system is transmitting or receiving a tripping signal. The output
signal path is not affected, when an external teleprotection system, like a NSD
70 is transmitting or receiving a tripping signal.
• The input and output signal paths of a non-disconnectable port are not
disabled during the transmission of tripping signals. The signals entering the
PLC terminal via this port are called non-disconnectable signals. The power
of non-disconnectable signals is not available for the teleprotection tripping
signal.

5.4.2 Priority rules for boosting

If several teleprotection devices are operated over the same ETL link, only one of
them will be boosted at the same time. The priority rules are described below:

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-9

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

Boosting for NSD 70 in channel 1 is disabled while NSD550 is boosted.

Boosting for NSD 70 in channel 2 is disabled while NSD 70 in channel 1 or
while NSD550 is boosted.

5.4.3 Boost ratio for the internal teleprotection device NSD550

The boost ratio for NSD550 is calculated automatically by MMI500.

For NSD550 operation, only signals which don’t use the speech
Caution
band (or part of it) may be non-disconnectable.

The NSD550 boost ratio BR550 is calculated using the following equation:
BR550 = max{ 2.82 , S - Snd550 },

where S and Snd550 are given by the formulas in section 5.8.1. The upper
threshold of 2.82 corresponding to 9 dB can be modified by MMI500 if desired.

The third step in the calculation of the S-value ensures that the NSD550 boost
ratio is at least 1 (0 dB).

Example:
ETL540, one channel, with speech, 2 x 100 Baud disconnectable and 1 x 200 Baud non-
disconnectable VFT channels
BR550 = max{ 2.82 , S - Snd550 }
= max{ 2.82 , [1.41 + 2*0.25 + 0.35 + 0.5] - [0.35] }
= max{ 2.82 , 2.41 }
= 2.41
= 7.6 dB.

5.4.4 External teleprotection device NSD 70

The AF signals for the NSD 70 are connected to the teleoperation port AF4 of the
universal AF interface O4LE at slot N11. If two NSD 70 are used, both with boost
functionality, an additional O4LE is necessary at slot N65. The boost command is
applied to the external boost input of the respective O4LE board. Only one
NSD 70 per channel can be boosted. The priority rules for boosting are given in
section 5.4.2.

The NSD 70 signal in the quiescent state, called the guard signal, has a system
level of -6 dBm0. Without boosting, the level of the NSD 70 tripping signal is also
-6 dBm0. The internal boosting facility of the NSD 70 has to be disabled for
operation over an ETL link. Instead, the boosting is performed by the ETL500
when the external boost input is activated. The boost ratio BR70 used by ETL500
for boosting of the NSD 70 tripping signal is calculated automatically by the
MMI500 program. The implemented formulas are given in section 5.4.5.

5.4.5 Boost ratio formulas for the external teleprotection device NSD 70

The boost ratio BR70 used by ETL500 for boosting of the NSD 70 tripping signal
is calculated automatically by the MMI500 program, using the configured levels of
all signals.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-10

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

The NSD 70 boost ratio is calculated using the following formulas:

BR70 = max{ 2.51 , 2*(S - Snd70) },

Snd70 = Snd550 + 0.5*(m6b - 1),
where S and Snd550 are given by the formulas in section 5.8.1 and
m6b = No. of ETL pilot channels plus No. of NSD550-own-guard signals.

The formulas account for the dynamic range of the NSD 70, allowing a
maximum boost ratio BR70 of 2.51 corresponding to 8 dB.
Example:
ETL540, two channels, with 1 x speech, 1 x NSD 70, 2 x 100 Baud disconnectable and 1
x 200 Baud non-disconnectable VFT channels
Snd550 = 0.35 + 0.5 = 0.85
Snd70 = Snd550 + 0.5*(2 - 1) = 0.85 + 0.5 = 1.35
S = 1.41 + 2*0.25 + 0.35 + 3*0.5 = 3.76
BR70 = max{ 2.51 , 2*(3.76 – 1.35) } = max{ 2.51 , 2*2.41 } = 2.51

5.5 System levels and level settings

The level of the RF output signal generated by the ETL equipment is given by the
AF signals applied to the active input ports of the ETL as well as some settings
like nominal RF output power. For a successful operation of the system, it is
important to correctly determine the levels of the AF signals applied to the active
input ports and to enter these levels into the MMI500 for configuration of the
system. In the ETL as it is tradition for PLC systems, signal levels are specified in
logarithmic units such as dB, dBm, dBr, dBu, dBm0, dBm0p which are explained
in the following sections. The definitions are roughly consistent with those given
in IEC 60495, but due to the digital signal processing used extensively in the
ETL500, some extensions and deviations have been necessary.

5.5.1 Absolute power level L [dBm]

1. For analog signal processing, the absolute power level L defines by how
many dB a signal strength Px is greater or smaller than the reference power
of 1 mW:
Px
L = 10 log  [dBm]
1 mW

2. For digital signal processing, where signals are represented by streams of

digits, the absolute power level L defines by how many dB a signal strength
Px is greater or smaller than the reference power of 1:

L = 20 log Px [dBm]
Although the term “power” is not meaningful for signals represented by
streams of digits, it is still used in analogy to analog signal processing.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-11

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

5.5.2 Voltage level Lu [dBu]

Depending on the situation, voltage levels might be more suitable than power
levels.

1. For analog signal processing, the voltage level Lu defines by how many
dB a signal voltage Ux is greater or less than the reference voltage U0 =
775 mV:
Ux
Lu = 20 log  [dBu]
775 mV

2. For digital signal processing, the voltage level Lu defines by how many dB
a signal X is greater or less than the unity signal:
Lu = 20 log X [dBu]
Although the term “voltage” is not meaningful for signals represented by
streams of digits, it is still used in analogy to analog signal processing.

5.5.3 System power level L0 [dBm0]

The system power level L0 is used in order to define the level of a signal in a
system regardless of the measuring point.

The dBm0 value defines by how many dB a signal is greater or less than a
reference signal, which thus is defined to have an system power level of 0 dBm0.
In the ETL, the reference signal is the nominal speech level at the two wire
output.

The system power level is a property of the signal and doesn’t depend on the
measuring point. As such, it is used to compare signals without reference to a
specified point.

5.5.4 Absolute noise level on the speech channel L0p [dBm0p]

This is basically the same as Lo, but the index "p" indicates a psophometrical
(weighted) level, which is generally defined according to ITU. This weighting is
only used in connection with the specification of noise levels on speech channels.
The equivalent noise bandwidth of the psophometrical weighting is 1.74 kHz.

5.5.5 Conversion to another system impedance

1. Analog signal processing: If the voltage level is measured at a correctly

terminated point of the system and referred to 600 Ohm, the value of Lu is
the same as the absolute power level L. The value must be converted as
follows for other impedances Z:
600 Ohm
Lu [dBu] = L [dBm] - 10 log
Z [Ohm]

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-12

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

Example: The power level at the 75 Ohm RF output of a PLC equipment is

given as 40 dBm. What is the voltage level Lu?
600 Ohm
Lu = 40 dBm - 10 log = 31 dBu
75 Ohm
Normally, power measuring instruments permit the reference impedance to be
set and the level referred to 600 Ohm can be directly read from them.

2. Digital signal processing: For signals represented by streams of digits, the

term impedance has no meaning. However, unity impedance is assumed, so
that the absolute voltage level Lu is the same as the absolute power level L:

Lu [dBu] = L [dBm]

For digital signal processing, the signals cannot be directly measured with
external instruments. Instead, a measuring utility is included in the ETL500
system, allowing to sample signals at some measuring points in the system
and displaying it graphically with help of the MMI500 program in the
frequency domain.

5.5.6 Relative power level Lrel [dBr]

The relative power level Lrel is used to define the signal levels in a system
regardless of channel loading.

The dBr value is the difference between absolute power level L and system
power level L0,
Lrel [dBr] = L [dBm] - L0 [dBm0].

The relative power level is a property of the measuring point and doesn’t depend
on the signal.

5.5.7 Calculation of the absolute power level

Where in a system the relative power level Lrel and the system power level L0
are known, the absolute power level L can be calculated by turning around the
above formula:
L [dBm] = Lrel [dBr] + L0 [dBm0]

yields the value of the absolute power level L.

5.6 Level measurements

In the ETL, decoupled test sockets allow the measurement of some internal
signal levels without influence on the signals being measured. However, the
voltage level at the test socket depends on the input impedance of the measuring
set being used. Therefore, this impedance must be specified for each test socket
of the equipment. For the ETL, input impedances ≥ 5 kOhms (sometimes referred
to as “infinite”), 75 Ohms or 50 Ohms are specified.

The decoupling circuitry of the test socket normally amplifies or attenuates the
level to be measured by an amount of Ats [dB] in order to bring it in a range

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-13

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

suitable for measurement. The power level L of the internal signal to be

measured can then be calculated from the voltage level Lu|ts at the test socket via
the relationship
L [dBm] = Ats [dB] + Lu|ts [dBu].

Example:
For the test socket on the RF hybrid, we have Ats = 40 dB and the input
impedance of the measuring set is specified to 75 Ohms or to ≥ 5 kOhms. A
measured voltage level Lu|ts of -3 dBu indicates a power level L of 40 - 3 =
37 dBm equivalent to 5 Watts at the RF connector, which is the measuring point.
If the measurement was made with the test tone of level L0 = 0 dBm0, the signal
at the RF connector is shown to have a relative level of Lrel = 37 dBr.

5.7 System levels in detail

A multi-purpose PLC equipment usually transmits different kinds of signals. For a

PLC link, the noise occurring along the HV transmission line has to be taken into
account to find out how the available power has to be distributed between the
individual signals.

In the case of white noise, the power of the noise is proportional to bandwidth. A
50 Bd VFT channel has a noise bandwidth of about 80 Hz. Compared with a
300 Hz-2400 Hz speech channel, the noise power level on a 50 Bd channel is
thus about 14 dB lower. Correspondingly, to maintain the same SNR, the signal
level of the 50 Bd channel may be chosen about 14 dB lower than the nominal
speech level. By choosing signal powers proportional to the noise bandwidths, all
the channels have the same SNR, i.e. the same reach.

Table 1 lists the system levels [dBm0] and their associated weightings used in
the ETL500. These levels are automatically set to the values given in the table
when configuring the system with MMI500 by correctly declaring
the type of AF signals for teleoperation and external teleprotection ports,
the absolute levels at the speech, teleoperation and external teleprotection ports
- as well as the signal levels of G4AK modems present in the system.

During level setting one has to respect the fact that the average (rms) power of
modem signals is about 2 dB (for asynchronous modems like NSK5) up to 10 dB
(for synchronous modems like AMX500) below the peak envelope power (PEP).

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-14

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

AF signals System levels Weighting

[dBm0] PEP
Test tone or 0 1.0
NSD550 loop test signal (without speech)
Speech with 3 dB safety margin +3 1.41
VFT channels and modems
50 or 100 Bd channel -12 0.25
200 or 300 Bd channel -9 0.35
600 Bd or 1200 Bd-above-speech channel -3 0.71
1200 Bd-V.23 or 2400 Bd channel or 0 1.0
synchronous modems up to 9600 Bd 1)
Pilot tone, NSD550-own-guard signal or -6 0.5
NSD 70 guard signal
AMX500 2 kHz +3 1.4
AMX500 4 kHz or 8 kHz +9 2.8
Other signals Weight has to be specified

Table 5-1 System levels and associated weightings

1) For single channel equipment with 2400 Bd VFT channels or with 1200 Bd-V.23 channels operated in stand
alone mode (no speech or other low speed VFT channels being used) the weighting factor can be raised to 2 in
order to fully exploit the available transmit power. The corresponding system level of +6 dBm0 takes into
account the keyed modem signal.
If in a single channel equipment a 1200 Bd-V.23 channel is operated in parallel with other low speed VFT
channels, the weighting factor 1 (as for 1200 Bd V.23 operation in dual-channel equipment) has to be used.

5.8 The S-value

The S-value is calculated automatically by MMI500. For ETL500 Rel. 3 and

higher there is no possibility to enter or tune the S-value directly.

The transmitter level setting resulting from the allocation of channel powers is
determined by simply adding the voltage weightings of the individual channels
given in Table 5-1. The MMI500 calculates this sum, called the "S value",
automatically from the configuration data with the help of the formulas given
below.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-15

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

Abbreviations:
LT [dBm]: Test tone level at the RF output across nominal load.
LT|ts [dBu]: Test tone level at the test sockets RF LINE on RF hybrid.
0 dBu corresponds to 10 W.
S = “S-value”: Sum of the voltage weighting of signals including pilot(s).
Limits:
One channel equipment: 0.5 ≤ S ≤ 3.5
Two channel equipment: 1.0 ≤ S ≤ 7.0.
The lower limits are given by the minimal equipment loading
(one resp. two pilots). In some cases, the lower limits must
be increased if an NSD550 is used. The upper limits are
dictated by the dynamic range of the equipment.
The S-value is calculated automatically by MMI500.

5.8.1 Calculation of the transmitter level

1) Sum of the voltage weighting of signals including pilot(s):

S = [n1*1.41 + n2*0.25 + n3*0.35 + n4*0.71 + n5*1.0 + n6*0.5 + n7*1.4 +

n8*2.8]

where:
n1 = No. of speech channels
n2 = No. of 50 Baud data channels plus No. of 100 Baud data channels
n3 = No. of 200 Baud data channels plus No. of 300 Baud data channels
n4 = No. of 600 Baud data channels plus No. of 1200 Bd-Above-Speech
channels
n5 = No. of 1200 Baud-V.23 plus No. of 2400 Bd data channels
n6 = No. of ETL pilot channels plus No. of NSD550-own-guard signals plus
No. of NSD 70 guard-signals
n7 = No. of AMX500 2 kHz signals
n8 = No. of AMX500 4 or 8 kHz Signals

2) Check upper limit for S:

• For one channel equipment, if S > 3.5: Reduce equipment loading by

removing some of the channels (this will decrease n1, n2, n3, n4, n5
and/or n6) until S ≤ 3.5.

• For two channel equipment, if S > 7.0: Reduce equipment loading by

removing some of the channels (this will decrease n1, n2, n3, n4, n5
and/or n6) until S ≤ 7.0.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-16

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

3) Check lower limit for S:

If no NSD550 is used, this check can be omitted. Otherwise, calculate the sum of
the levels of the non-disconnectable signals for NSD550 as follows:
Snd550 = [m2*0.25 + m3*0.35 + m5*0.71 + m6a*0.5 + m7*1.4 + m8*2.8],

where:
m2 = No. of non-disconnectable 50 Baud data channels plus
No. of non-disconnectable 100 Baud data channels
m3 = No. of non-disconnectable 200 Baud data channels plus
No. of non-disconnectable 300 Baud data channels
m4 = No. of non-disconnectable 600 Baud data channels plus
No. of non-disconnectable 1200 Bd-above-speech channels
m6a = No. of NSD 70 guard signals
m7 = No. of non-disconnectable AMX500 2 kHz signals
m8 = No. of non-disconnectable AMX500 4 or 8 kHz signals

The term “non-disconnectable” is explained in section 5.4.1.

Now if S ≤ Snd550 + 1, set S = Snd550 + 1.
In other words: S has to be increased to Snd550+1, if the sum of the weights
of the disconnectable signals is less than 1. Obviously, this can never
happen when speech is configured.

4) Transmitter test tone level LT at the RF output for a test tone of 0 dBm0:
If no speech or NSD550 is configured, this level is for calculation purposes only, as
the system might be overloaded when a test tone of 0 dBm0 is transmitted.

LT = LPEP - 20*log S [dBm]

where:
LPEP [dBm]: available transmitter power
= +37 dBm with 5 W equipment ETL505,
= +46 dBm with 40 W equipment ETL540,
= +49 dBm with 80 W equipment ETL580.

Note: The RF test tone level LT applies to channels 1 and 2.

5) Test tone level LT|ts at the test sockets on RF hybrid for a test tone of
0 dBm0:
If no speech or NSD550 is configured, this level is for calculation purposes only, as
the system might be overloaded when a test tone is transmitted.

LT|ts = LT - 40 dB [dBu].

5.8.2 Examples
Example 1:
ETL 540, one channel, with speech + 600 Bd (non-disconnectable ) + NSD550.
1) Sum of voltage weightings:
S = [1.41 + 0.71 + 0.5] = 2.62

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-17

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

2) O.k. because S < 3.5.

3) O.k. because speech is configured.
4) Transmitter test tone level LT at the RF output:
LT = LPEP - 20*log S [dBm]
LT = 46 dBm - 20*log(2.62) = 37.6 dBm
5) Test tone level LT|ts at the test socket on RF hybrid:
LT|ts = POWER T - 40 dB [dBu]
LT|ts = 37.6 dBm - 40 dB = -2.4 dBu
Example 2:
ETL 505, one channel, with NSK5 VFT channel 1200 Bd, V.23 + VFT channel 200 Bd.
1) Sum of voltage weightings
S = [1 + 0.35 + 0.5] = 1.85
2) O.k. because S < 3.5.
3) Omitted (no NSD550).
4) Transmitter test tone level LT at the RF output:
LT = 37 dBm - 20*log(1.85) = 31.7 dBm
Note: As no speech or NSD550 is configured, this level is for calculation purposes
only!
5) Test tone level LT|ts at the test socket on P4LS:
LT|ts = 31.7 dBm - 40 dB = -8.3 dBu
Note: As no speech or NSD550 is configured, this level is for calculation purposes only!
Example 3:
ETL 540 with speech + VFT 600 Baud on channel 1 and VFT channel 1200 Baud-V.23
on channel 2.
1) Sum of voltage weightings:
S = [1.41 + 0.71 + 1.0 + 2*0.5] = 4.12
2) O.k. because S < 7.0.
3) Omitted (no NSD550).
4) Transmitter test tone level LT at the RF output:
LT = 46 dBm - 20*log(4.12) = 33.7 dBm
Note: As no speech is configured for channel 2, this level is for calculation purposes
only for this channel. A test tone of 0 dBm0 may be transmitted on channel 1 instead
of speech.
5) Test tone level LT|ts at the test socket on RF hybrid:
LT|ts = 33.7 dBm - 40 dB = -6.3 dBu
Note: As no speech is configured for channel 2, this level is for calculation purposes
only for this channel. A test tone of 0 dBm0 may be transmitted on channel 1 instead
of speech.
Example 4:
ETL 540, one channel with NSK5 VFT channel 50 Bd (non-disconnectable) and NSD550.
1) Sum of voltage weightings:
S = [0.25 + 0.5] = 0.75
2) O.k. because S < 3.5.
3) Because Snd550 = 0.25, S must be increased to 1.25.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-18

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 5 Configuration and Setup

4) Transmitter test tone level LT at the RF output:

LT = 46 dBm - 20*log(1.25) = 44.1 dBm
5) Test tone level LT|ts at the test socket on RF hybrid:
LT|ts = 44.1 dBm - 40 dB = 4.1 dBu
Hint: To test the level of the modem signal, the built-in measurement facility
"Measure AF signal" of the MMI500 may be used.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 5-19

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

6. Assembly and Installation

The installation of the equipment can only be successfully accomplished, if it is

properly planned beforehand. Planning should not only take the present situation
into account; future system expansion must also be included.

6.1 Safety instructions

Personnel qualification
Authorised and properly trained personnel only is
DANGER admitted to carry out the assembly and installation
of the equipment.

Transportation

Caution The following assemblies must be removed from

the cabinet and packed separately during
Transportation.
Power supply unit 115/230VAC B5LC

Caution The plug-in units must be carefully but firmly

screwed into the racks to prevent them from falling
out. Separately packed modules and other loose
parts must be properly secured and suitably packed
to avoid damage.

Mechanical Installation
The equipment must be mounted in a cabinet.
DANGER

Cabinets, which are not secured to the floor, tip

DANGER forwards when the hinged frame is opened. Do not
open the hinged frame without precautions.

Electrical Installation
This is a Class Ι equipment as specified in
DANGER IEC 60950. The equipment and the cabinet must be
earthed.
The equipment must be supplied over the “circuit
breaker for the power supply“, type B9AS.

The circuit breaker for the power supply (B9AS) of

DANGER the equipment must be switched OFF.
The circuit breakers for optional equipment in the
cabinet must be switched OFF.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-1

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

The isolating terminals from the external cables

DANGER must be kept open during installation, maintenance
and before storage, decommissioning and disposal.

Faston plugs on the cables connected to the rack

DANGER P7LA must be covered with an isolation sleeve.
Unused faston connectors have to be covered.

The shields of the external cables V9OD, V9OE and

DANGER V9OF must be earthed at both cable ends using the
shield clamps supplied with the cables.

Work on the system

Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect
DANGER cables during periods of lightning activities.

Unused slots
Unused slots in the equipment subracks must be
DANGER covered with blanking plates.

Insertion and removal of plug-in modules

Caution Neither removing nor inserting of modules is

permitted during power-up of the equipment.
Preceeding to plug in and out of modules the power
supply of the equipment has to be switched OFF.

ESD protection

Caution The modules in this equipment contain devices,

ESD which can be damaged by electrostatic discharges.
Appropriate measures must be taken before
unpacking modules or withdrawing them from
equipment racks. Essential precautions to prevent
ESD damage when handling or working on modules
are grounding straps for technical personnel and the
provision of anti-static workbenches. Modules may
only be shipped either in their original packing or
installed in equipment racks.

B5LC
Make sure that the power supply B5LC is
DANGER programmed to the correct voltage of 230 or
115VAC as described in 1KHL015788 before
connecting the equipment to the power source.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-2

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

P4LQ
Dangerous voltages on the module and the cable.
DANGER Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

Connecting a load between terminals NO (normally

Caution
open) and NC (normally closed) is not allowed.
Use only one contact set NO or NC.

The power supply for alarms must be short current

Caution
and over current protected.

R1BC
Dangerous voltages on the module and the
DANGER cable. Do not touch the module and the cable
leads.

Connecting a load between terminals NO (normally

Caution
open) and NC (normally closed) is not allowed.
Use only one contact set NO or NC.

The power supply for alarms must be short current

Caution
and over current protected.

O4LE
The phone interface on the module O4LE generates
DANGER dangerous voltage up to 100 V. Don’t operate the
module without upper and lower cover plate. Do not
touch the open pins of the service phone connector,
the leads of its cable, the pins of the external cable
connector and the leads of the external cable.

G4AI
Dangerous voltages on the module and the cable.
DANGER Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

6.2 Unpacking and transport

6.2.1 Inspection upon receipt

Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt. Notify the
nearest ABB company or agent without delay should departures from the delivery
note, the shipping papers or the order be found.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-3

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

6.2.2 What to do if there is transport damage

Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. Where there is evidence of
transport damage, lodge a claim immediately in writing with the last carrier, notify
the nearest ABB company or agent and also ABB Power Automation Ltd, CH-
5300 Turgi, Switzerland.

6.2.3 Precautions to avoid transport damage

Insert the modules carefully but firmly into the racks so that they cannot fall out.
Modules and other loose parts that are packed separately must be packed and
secured such as to preclude damage.

6.3 Installation

6.3.1 Place of installation and ambient conditions

The room where the equipment is installed should be free of dust, the floor
covered if possible with a semiconducting plastic flooring material and cement
floors and walls should be suitably painted.

The room must be well ventilated so that the temperature is in the range +10 to
+45 °C and the relative humidity between 30 and 70 %. Lead/acid batteries must
not be in the same room.

6.4 Cubicle

The standard equipment is supplied in an ABB cubicle Type E40A. These

cubicles are equipped with a hinged frames and are suitable for installation:
• standing against a wall
• back-to-back
• side-by-side
• standing alone

A gap of 2 to 3 cm should be left between cubicles standing side-by-side to

permit single cubicles to be removed without difficulty. Leave sufficient space in
front to avoid damage when the hinged frame is opened. There must generally
be enough room for carrying out maintenance and for using the associated
instruments.

Do not install equipment cubicles in corners, which would hinder opening the
hinged frame and working on the cubicle.

Free access is especially important in the case of cubicles not equipped with a
hinged frame. Cubicles are normally erected on a pedestal or as a suite of
cubicles on a platform to facilitate cleaning of the floor and routing of cables.

6.4.1 Grounding system

The grounding system must go out radially from the station ground rail. On no
account may there be any loops that would permit circulating ground currents.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-4

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

Every cubicle must have its own ground conductor (gauge > 25 mm2) connected
by adequately rated cable lugs to the station ground rail. The ground connection
to the cubicle shall be clearly visible and made to the designated ground terminal.

For safety reasons, looping ground conductors to or from neighbouring cubicles

or other equipment is not permissible.

6.4.2 Installing racks in cubicles

While being installed, the equipment must be switched off and no external
connections may be made to it.

Pay attention when determining the cubicle layout that air can circulate freely
around the equipment and overheating cannot take place. To this end, sufficient
space as shown in the following photographs must be left between the racks.

6.4.3 External cables

Some cables are shielded. As shown in the following photographs, the shields
must be earthed at both cable ends using the shield clamps supplied with the
cables. Use plastic binders to fix the position of the cables so that the shield
clamps are not exposed to high mechanical forces caused by the cables.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-5

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

6.5 Photographs

The following photographs may be used for reference when assembling an

ETL500 equipment. The installation is shown for an E40A type cabinet, but other
installation schemes are possible.

Figure 6-1 Front View of the ETL540 equipment equipped with interfaces O4LE
(slots N11 and N65), G4AI (slots N22 and N28) and G4AK (slot N34)

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-6

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

Figure 6-2 Front view of

the ETL540 mounted in a
cabinet type E40A.

Figure 6-3 ETL540

equipment rear view

Power rack P7LA

V9MX RF cable

V9MY flatband cable

(with EMI filter)

Optional alarm
module R1BC

Channel rack P7LC,

with rear cover opened

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-7

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

Figure 6-4 Front view of

the ETL580 mounted in a
cabinet type E40A

Figure 6-5 ETL580

equipment rear view

Upper power rack P7LA

Flatband cable V9LH

Jumper cable V9LN

(3 wires)

RF connector (80 W)

Lower power rack P7LA

V9MY flatband cable

(with EMI filter)

Channel rack P7LC, with

rear cover opened

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-8

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

Figure 6-6 Side plate of

power subrack P7LA with
supply connections

Figure 6-7 Front View of the ETL505 equipment equipped with interfaces O4LE (slot
N11), G4AI (slots N22 and N28) and G4AK (slot N34)

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-9

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

Figure 6-8 The plate

A9CS for connection of
external RF coaxial cable

Figure 6-9 X01 Terminal

(collecting all internal
alarms for common
cabinet alarm)

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-10

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

Figure 6-10 The terminal

block for connection of
power supply

Figure 6-11 Terminal

block of cable V9OF for
NSD550

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-11

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

Figure 6-12 The cabinet

bottom

Figure 6-13 Krone type

terminal block used for
data or telephony
interfaces. All cables are
mechanically secured to
the earth plate by plastic
cable binders. Shield
clamps are used to
galvanically connect the
cable shields to the earth
plate.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-12

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

Figure 6-14 Earth rail

R9AL mounted in the
bottom rear of the
channel subrack P7LC.
All cables are
mechanically secured to
the earth rail by plastic
cable binders. Shield
clamps are used to
galvanically connect the
cable shields to the earth
rail.

6.6 External Connections

Cable access is normally from a cable duct beneath the cabinet. However,
suitable openings are available for fitting in the roof of the cabinet, where cables
have to enter from above. This requires the replacement of the standard roof
plates by plates fitted with dust-tight cable glands.

6.6.1 Auxiliary Supply

The auxiliary supply connections is over the circuit breaker for the power supply,
type B9AS. From the circuit breaker a cable goes to supply connections at the
top of the left-hand side plate of the power amplifier rack P7LA.

Faston plugs on the cables connected to the rack P7LA must be covered with an
isolation sleeve. Unused faston connectors have to be covered.

Description ABB Identity number

Isolation sleeve NBT 402942P0008
Cover for unused faston HESG455631P0001

The ETL500 can be equipped with the unit B5LA for 48 V DC supply or with the
unit B5LC for 115/230 V, 50/60 Hz AC supply.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-13

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

The connections will be accordingly, either to the DC or the AC terminals:

+ positive battery pole DC supply

- negative battery pole DC supply
L phase conductor of an AC supply
N neutral conductor of an AC supply
PE protective earth conductor
Symbol protective earth conductor

Make sure that the power supply B5LC is

DANGER programmed to the correct voltage of 230 or
115VAC as described in 1KHL015788 before
connecting the equipment to the power source.

6.6.2 Coaxial Cable

BNC coaxial connectors are provided on the rear of the power amplifier rack
P7LA for the RF signals. However when the ETL500 is mounted in a cabinet, the
RF signals are internally wired to a plate mounted inside the cabinet. The
external RF coaxial cable has to be connected to this plate. See photographs in
section 6.4.2.

6.6.3 Interfaces

Connections to the various interfaces are made on the connector blocks that are
normally mounted in the back of the cabinet. The following table lists the
interfaces and the corresponding cables. The table also lists the recommended
wire sizes for these connections.

Interf External Type of connector Recommended Wire size range

ace cable wire size
2 2
P4LQ V9MQ Screw type 1.5 mm Solid: 0.2 to 4.0 mm .
terminals (Phoenix) 2
Stranded: 0.2 to 2.5 mm
P4LQ R7AP LSA Plus Quick Solid 0.5 mm, Solid, one wire: 0.4 to 0.8 mm.
Connect 0.2 mm PVC
Solid, two wires: 0.4 to 0.65 mm, both
insulation
wires must have the same diameter
2 2
R1BC V9MR Screw type 1.5 mm Solid: 0.2 to 4.0 mm .
terminals (Phoenix) 2
Stranded: 0.2 to 2.5 mm
O4LE V9OD LSA Plus Quick Solid 0.5 mm, Solid, one wire: 0.4 to 0.8 mm.
*) **) Connect 0.2 mm PVC
Solid, two wires: 0.4 to 0.65 mm, both
insulation
wires must have the same diameter
2 2
G4AI V9OF Screw type 1.5 mm Solid: 0.2 to 4.0 mm .
**) terminals (Phoenix) 2
Stranded: 0.2 to 2.5 mm .

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-14

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

Interf External Type of connector Recommended Wire size range

ace cable wire size
G4AK V9OE LSA Plus Quick Solid 0.5 mm, Solid, one wire: 0.4 to 0.8 mm,
*) **) Connect 0.2 mm PVC
Solid, two wires: 0.4 to 0.65 mm, both
insulation
wires must have the same diameter

*) Another option of these cables is available in 20 meter length, which are without LSA Plus Quick
Connector. They can be used for terminating on main distribution frame.

**) These cables are shielded. The shields must be earthed at both cable ends using the shield clamps
supplied with the cables.

LSA Quick Plus quick connect is manufactured by KRONE. With this system the
connections to the AF interfaces can be made quickly without soldering. A push-
on tool (referred to as a KRONE tool), which is supplied as an accessory, permits
insulation displacement, connection and cutting of the wire at the same time. For
best results, a solid wire of 0.5 mm diameter with a PVC insulation of 0.2 mm
thickness should be used.

6.6.3.1 AF Interface O4LE

The AF universal interface module O4LE has following main functions.

– telephony
– teleoperation
– external teleprotection equipment.

The external connections are divided on two Krone connection strips.

6.6.3.1.1 Telephony

First connection strip is for telephony connections as shown in Figure 6-15.

The interface programmed for 2 wire subscriber

for point-to-point operation or
remote end subscriber or
PAX side subscriber should be connected to terminals 10a /10b.

The interface programmed for 2 Wire /4 Wire, E &M operation.

2 wire speech should be connected to terminals 8a / 8b.
4 wire speech Tx should be connected to terminals 1a / 1b.
4 wire speech Rx should be connected to terminals 2a / 2b.
M wire (terminal 4a) is activated by +ve potential provided on terminal 4b. I.e.
PAX should provide a potential free contact.
E signal should be connected between terminals 3a / 3b.
Transit connection / compander control (terminal 5a) is activated by +ve potential
provided on terminal 4b. I.e. PAX should provide a potential free contact.
PAX blocking in case of bad S/N ratio can be done by the change over relay
contacts provided. (6a, 6b and 7a)

The interface programmed for 4 Wire, E &M operation.

4 Wire speech Tx should be connected to terminals 1a / 1b.
4 Wire speech Rx should be connected to terminals 2a / 2b.
M wire (terminal 4a) is activated by +ve potential provided on terminal 4b. I.e.
PAX should provide a potential free contact.
E signal should be connected between terminals 3a / 3b.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-15

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

PAX blocking in case of bad S/N ratio can be done by the change over relay
contacts provided. (6a, 6b and 7a)

6.6.3.1.2 Teleoperation

Second connection strip is for teleoperation / external teleprotection connections

as shown in Figure 6-15.

There are four 4-wire input / output ports available: AF1, AF2, AF3 and AF4.

Port AF1 is normally used for telephony. When speech is not necessary this port
can be used for teleoperation channel.
Input – 1a / 1b (Telephony connection strip in Figure 6-15)
Output – 2a / 2b (Telephony connection strip in Figure 6-15)

Port AF2
Input – 3a / 3b (Teleoperation connection strip in Figure 6-15)
Output – 4a / 4b (Teleoperation connection strip in Figure 6-15)

Port AF3
Input – 5a / 5b (Teleoperation connection strip in Figure 6-15)
Output – 6a / 6b (Teleoperation connection strip in Figure 6-15)

Port AF4
Input – 7a / 7b (Teleoperation connection strip in Figure 6-15)
Output – 8a / 8b (Teleoperation connection strip in Figure 6-15).

External protection signalling equipment has to be connected to port AF4 only.

Boosting (terminal 9a) for external protection equipment is activated by +ve
potential provided on terminal 9b. I.e. the protection signalling equipment should
provide a potential free contact.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-16

1KHL015946-EN
 SPEECH

M-WIRE
OP-PHONE AF1-IN AF1-OUT E-WIRE M-WIRE LOCAL/ LOCAL/TRANSIT PAX PAX2W SUBSCRIBER
TRANSIT BLOCKING

ETL5..

1KHL015946-EN
K1901

AF INTERF.

EURO
O4LE
0V -24V

ABB Power Automation Ltd

A B B A B A B - + - NO NC A B A B
X4 3 4 2 X.. a16 c16 a18 c18 a12 c12 c6 c4 a6 c2 a2 a4 a14 c14 a32 c32

V9OD
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3

.1a .1b .2a .2b .3a .3b .4a .4b .5a .5b .6a .6b .7a .7b .8a .8b .9a .9b .0a .0b
X..

TELEOPERATION

Edition 2000-01-04
AF2-IN AF2-OUT AF3-IN AF3-OUT AF4-IN AF4-OUT EXT-BOOST RTC-SYNC

ETL5..
AF INTERF.
O4LE

0V +24V

A B A B A B A B A B A B - + + -
X.. a20 c20 a22 c22 a24 c24 a26 c26 a28 c28 a30 c30 a8 c8 a10 c10

Figure 6-15 Connections for AF interface O4LE

V9OD

.1a .1b .2a .2b .3a .3b .4a .4b .5a .5b .6a .6b .7a .7b .8a .8b .9a .9b .0a .0b
X..
6 Assembly and Installation

6-17
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

6.6.3.2 Teleprotection Interface G4AI

The teleprotection interface includes:

- Four input circuits equipped with optocoupler
- Four output circuits equipped with MOS – FET semiconductor
- Two output relays

These circuits are available for customer connections by means of cable V9OF,
shown in Figure 6-16.

The polarity should be observed while doing the

Caution
connections.

Input 1 Input 2
Terminal 1 (- ve potential) Terminal 3 (- ve potential)
Terminal 2 (+ ve potential) Terminal 4 (+ ve potential)

Input 3 Input 4
Terminal 5 (- ve potential) Terminal 7 (- ve potential)
Terminal 6 (+ ve potential) Terminal 8 (+ ve potential)

Output 1 Output 2
Terminal 9 (- ve potential) Terminal 11 (- ve potential)
Terminal 10 (+ ve potential) Terminal 12 (+ ve potential)

Output 3 Output 4
Terminal 13 (- ve potential) Terminal 15(- ve potential)
Terminal 14 (+ ve potential) Terminal 16 (+ ve potential)

Relay 1 Relay 2
Terminal 17 (- ve potential) Terminal 19 (- ve potential)
Terminal 18 (+ ve potential) Terminal 20 (+ ve potential)

The V9OF cable is made of following elements:

• 20 terminal-block,
• F- connecting plug,
• 25 core shielded cable ( each core 0.25 mm2).

The isolating terminals allow the testing of G4AI or the protection relays with the
cable installed. The output relay contacts are connected to the terminals by two
cores which can take a continuous current of 5 A at 45°C .

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-18

1KHL015946-EN
1KHL015946-EN
ABB Power Automation Ltd
ETL5../
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3

INPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

NSD550 (VOLT. RANGE: 24VDC...250VDC) (SOLID STATE / 2A) (HEAVY DUTY / 5A CARRY)

TPS
INTERFACE INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 RELAY 1 RELAY 2
G4AI
K1401 K1402

NO1 NO2
NC1 NC2

X.. d8 z8 d12 z12 b14 b16 d18 z18 d22 z22 b24 b26 d28 z28 d32 z32 d2 z2 b4 b6

V9OF

Edition 2000-01-04
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
X.. - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +

Figure 6-16 Connections for teleprotection interface G4AI

6 Assembly and Installation

6-19
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

6.6.3.3 RF Converter P4LQ

10
z28
NC

9
CABINET-AL

z24
C

8
K3

z26
NO

7
z14
NC

6
LINK-AL

z16
C

5
K2

z12
NO

4
NC
z8

3
HW-AL

z4
C

2
K1

NO
z6

1
V9MQ
CONVERTER

X45
ETL5..

P4LQ
(N45)
RF

X..

Figure 6-17 Connections to the alarm relays of P4LQ

Connecting a load between terminals NO (normally

Caution
open) and NC (normally closed) is not allowed.
Use only one contact set NO or NC.

6.6.3.4 Alarm Relay Module R1BC

Eight relays with switchover contact are provided. Each relay or alarm contact
can be switched to any one of three alarm busses. Each alarm bus can be
programmed in the MMI to respond to a desired combination of alarm criteria.

All alarm relays in the ETL500 equipment are picked up during a no fault
condition. This is indicated with a dashed line on the alarm contact. Example:
Terminals 1 and 2 of the V9MR are closed when no alarm is present. Terminals
2 and 3 are closed when an alarm is present. Terminals 2 and 3 are also closed
when the power to the ETL500 is switched off.
Connecting a load between terminals NO (normally
Caution
open) and NC (normally closed) is not allowed.
Use only one contact set NO or NC.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-20

1KHL015946-EN
1KHL015946-EN
ABB Power Automation Ltd
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3

ETL5..
RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 RELAY 7 RELAY 8
ALARM
RELAY SYSTEM ALARM
MODULE ALARM 1
R1BC ALARM 2

R1-1
R1-2
R1-3
R1-4
R1-5
R1-6
R1-7
R1-8

CA-1 R2-1 CA-2 R2-2 CA-3 R2-3 CA-4 R2-4 CA-5 R2-5 CA-6 R2-6 CA-7 R2-7 CA-8 R2-8

K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8

CONTACT RATING :

Edition 2000-01-04
250V / 150W / 2000VA

NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC
X1 1 2 3 X2 1 2 3 X3 1 2 3 X4 1 2 3 X5 1 2 3 X6 1 2 3 X7 1 2 3 X8 1 2 3

V9MR V9MR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
X.. X..

Figure 6-18 Connections to the alarm relay module R1BC

6 Assembly and Installation

6-21
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

6.6.3.5 NSK5 modem G4AK

..0b
c30

..0a
a30
c26

.9b
a26

.9a
c24

.8b
1
LINE
Tx

a24

.8a
2

c20

.7b
TXD
(TRANSMIT
DATA)

a20

.7a
(RECEIVED
RXD

DATA)

c18

.6b
(REQUEST
RTS

TO SEND)
a18

.6a
(CLEAR TO
CTS

SEND)
c14

.5b
(SIGNAL
SG

GROUND)
PE

a14

.5a
RCK

(RECEIVE
V.24 SIGNALS

CLOCK)
c12

.4b

(DATA
DCD

CARRIER
DETECT)
a12

.4a

(LOCAL
LL

LOOPBACK)
.3b
c8

(TEST VOLT.
TVN

NEGATIVE)
-

.3a
a8
OUT

(OUTPUT)
.2b
c6

.2a
a6

(TEST
TI

INDICATE)
.1b
c2
XB

(SOLDER PIN)
.1a
a2
XA

(SOLDER PIN)
V9OE
FSK MODEM
ETL5../
NSK5

G4AK

X..
X..

Figure 6-19 Connections for NSK5 modem G4AK

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-22

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 6 Assembly and Installation

6.6.3.6 Remote inquiry kit R7AP

The remote inquiry kit R7AP allows to connect the serial ports of a number of
ETL500 terminals to an RS-485 station bus, thereby forming an element
management network described in chapter 4 'User Interface Programme'. The
frontplate is mounted directly below the channel rack P4LC, and the special 9
pole serial cable V9KH – included in the kit – has to be inserted between ports
COM1 of P4LQ and COM N located on the frontplate of the remote inquiry kit.
The RS-485 bus is formed by connecting all TD(A) wires, all TD(B) wires and all
GND wires at the KRONE connection strip of all R7AP in a substation together.
To minimize reflections, a linear network structure should be formed instead of a
star structure as shown in Figure 6-20.

E TL 50 0 E TL 50 0 E TL 50 0 E TL 50 0 E TL 50 0 E TL 50 0 E TL 50 0 E TL 50 0
R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3 R3

R e m o te R e m o te R e m o te R e m o te R e m o te R e m o te R e m o te R e m o te
in q . kit in q . kit in q . kit in q . kit in q . kit in q . kit in q . kit in q . kit

4 4 4 4 4
4

Figure 6-20 Connections for an RS-485 station bus

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 6-23

1KHL015946-EN
1KHL015946-EN
ABB Power Automation Ltd
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3

ETL5..
REMOTE REMOTE CHANNEL
INQUIRY INQUIRY COM N COM 1 EQUIPMENT
KIT RS232/RS485 V9KH RF CONV.
RXD 2 3 TXD P7LC
R7AP CONVERTER P4LQ
TXD 3 2 RXD
DTR 4 6 DSR
RS232 COMMUNICATION
GND 5 5 GND
PORT
DSR 6 4 DTR RS232
RTS 7 8 CTS
RS485
CTS 8 7 RTS
GND

Edition 2000-01-04
TD(A) TD(B) GND GND +12V

GND

WH BU TQ VT

.1a .1b .2a .2b

X..

Figure 6-21 Connections for remote inquiry kit R7AP

6 Assembly and Installation

6-24
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 7 Commissioning

7. Commissioning

7.1 Safety instructions

Personnel qualification
Authorised and properly trained personnel only is
DANGER admitted to carry out the commissioning of the
equipment.

Mechanical Installation
Cabinets, which are not secured to the floor, tip
DANGER forwards when the hinged frame is opened. Do not
open the hinged frame without precautions.

Work on the system

Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect
DANGER cables during periods of lightning activities.

Inserting and removing of plug-in modules

Caution Neither removing nor inserting of modules is

permitted during power-up of the equipment.
Preceeding to plug in and out of modules the power
supply of the equipment has to be switched OFF.

Unused slots
Unused slots in the equipment subracks must be
DANGER covered with blanking plates.

PCB Extenders
For measuring purposes only the original PCB
DANGER extenders P4LM and P3LL, designed to work with
ETL500 equipment, must be used.

ESD protection

Caution The modules in this equipment contain devices,

ESD which can be damaged by electrostatic discharges.
Appropriate measures must be taken before
unpacking modules or withdrawing them from
equipment racks. Essential precautions to prevent
ESD damage when handling or working on modules
are grounding straps for technical personnel and the
provision of anti-static workbenches. Modules may
only be shipped either in their original packing or
installed in equipment racks.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 7-1

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 7 Commissioning

Using MMI500 software

The link gets disturbed while using the options
Caution
'Tuning & Testing', activating a testtone, simulating
alarms, measurement of frequency response &
equalization etc. of the MMI500. Appropriate
measures have to be taken especially in case
protection signal transmission is being used.

B5LC
Make sure that the power supply B5LC is
DANGER programmed to the correct voltage of 230 or
115VAC as described in 1KHL015788 before
connecting the equipment to the power source.

P1LA
Dangerous voltage at the heat sink. Do not touch
DANGER during operation.

Heat sink should not be touched with conducting

DANGER materials to avoid energy discharges and damage
of the power amplifier.

Caution Hot surface at heat sink

Hot surface

P4LQ
Dangerous voltages on the module and the cable.
DANGER Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

R1BC
Dangerous voltages on the module and the
DANGER cable. Do not touch the module and the cable
leads.

O4LE
The phone interface on the module O4LE generates
DANGER dangerous voltage up to 100 V. Don’t operate the
module without upper and lower cover plate. Do not
touch the open pins of the service phone connector,
the leads of its cable, the pins of the external cable
connector and the leads of the external cable.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 7-2

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 7 Commissioning

G4AI
Dangerous voltages on the module and the cable.
DANGER Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

7.2 Checking the line of communication

It is essential that the behaviour and characteristics of the line of communication

between the sets of PLC terminal equipment be checked prior to finally
commissioning. This is necessary to confirm the design criteria used for
engineering the system, respectively if the criteria were inaccurate, to take the
appropriate corrective action.

The line of communication comprises:

a) the coaxial cable linking the PLC equipment with the coupling device;
b) the coupling device between the remote end of the coaxial cable and the LV
side of the coupling capacitor. The coupling device includes the main coupling
filter and protective devices;
c) the line traps in the power line between the junction of the coupling capacitor
with the power line and the substation;
d) the HV power line itself as propagation medium.

7.2.1 Return loss

The return loss is a measure of the quality of impedance matching between the
PLC transmitter and the load (input impedance of the coaxial cable).

It is defined by the following equation:

 Z0 + Z 
Ar=20 log   
 Z0 - Z 

Z0 rated impedance
Z actual input impedance

A low value signifies a poor match, which results in a reduced transfer of power
from the PLC transmitter onto the transmission line. The main disadvantage,
however is the intermodulation phenomenon and associated cross-talk it causes.

The level of return loss should be measured in the equipment room at the coaxial
cable input. The instruments used and the test set-up can be seen from Figures
Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-2. A typical return loss characteristic is shown in Figure
7-3. In the case of short lines (line attenuation < 15 dB), the remote end must be
terminated at rated impedance.

The measurement of the return loss over the total bandwidth of the coupling filter
and the PLC line traps is recommended. Wherever possible, the measurements
should be carried out twice under the following conditions:
• HV transmission line grounded behind the line trap
• HV transmission line open behind the line trap

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 7-3

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 7 Commissioning

If the minimum return loss is in the range 6 to 12 dB, the value of the input
impedance should also be measured. In cases where the magnitude of the
system impedance is too low or too high, an improvement can be achieved by
changing the rated impedance of the RF hybrid (75 or 125 Ohms). Where this is
not possible, the output power must be reduced in accordance with the following
relationship to avoid non-linear distortion:

A(dB)=1/4 [12- Armin]

Minimum values of return loss < 6 dB indicate either a defective coupling or PLC
line trap, or an unacceptable property of the transmission line.

In such instances, the coupling equipment at both ends of the line must be
checked using a dummy load as follows:
1. Carefully ground the LV end of the coupling capacitor.
2. Interrupt the connection between the coupling filter and the coupling capacitor
and terminate with a dummy load as shown in Figure 7-5 or Figure 7-6.
3. Measure the return loss of the coupling filter within the rated frequency band.

The instruments and test set-up are shown in Figure 7-1 and a typical return loss
characteristic for a bandpass coupling filter in Figure 7-4.

Appreciable discrepancies between the measured results and the nominal

characteristic point to defective components and the filters must be checked
individually.

SELECTIVE LEVEL
METER SPM 32/33
Input Dummy load
impedance Rec. RN Nominal output
5 kW impedance:
e.g. 75 Ohm

O utput
im pedance Gen. RX Coaxial cable
approx. 0 kO hm to coupling unit

GENERATOR PS 33 SFZ 1

Instruments: e.g.:
1. signal generator Wandel & Goltmann PS 33
2. selective level meter Wandel & Goltmann SPM 32/33
3. impedance measuring attachment Wandel & Goltmann SFZ 1

Figure 7-1: Instruments and test circuit for measuring return loss

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 7-4

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 7 Commissioning

CF CF CF

BT

R e turn R e tu rn
lo s s lo s s
ar ar

Phase-to-ground Phase-to-phase or between line circuits

CF coupling filter
BT balancing transformer
Z0 + Z
a r = 20 log
Z0 nominal impedance Z0 - Z
Z actual input impedance
Figure 7-2: Test circuit for measuring return loss under practical
conditions with the transmission line as load

ar
Return loss ar
28 dB

26

24

22

20

18

16

14

12

10

. 200 250 300 350 400 450 kHz

Figure 7-3: Typical return loss characteristic under practical conditions

with the transmission line as load

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 7-5

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 7 Commissioning

ar

Return loss ar
20 dB
18

16

14

12

10

200 250 300 350 400 450 kHz

Figure 7-4: Typical return loss characteristic at rated load

Return loss: phase-to-ground

C'k ZL

CF

CF coupling filter

Z0 + Z
Return loss a r = 20 log
Z0 - Z
and
impedance meter Z0 rated impedance
Z actual input impedance

Figure 7-5: Test circuit using a dummy load for measuring return loss in
the case of single-phase coupling

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 7-6

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 7 Commissioning

2ZL
2) 2)
C' k C' k

1) 1)

CF CF

BT
Remarks
1) short connection
2) unscreened insulated lead
1 m above ground

Z0 + Z
ar = 20 log
Z0 - Z

Z0 rated impedance
Z actual input impedance
Return loss
meter CF coupling filter
BT balancing transformer

Figure 7-6: Test circuit using a dummy load for measuring return loss in
the case of phase-to-phase coupling

7.2.2 Line attenuation

The line attenuation should be measured over the whole frequency range of the
coupling filter and of the line traps. If possible these measurements should be
carried out with the transmission line grounded behind the line traps. The test
circuit is shown in Figure 7-7 and Figure 7-8.

Unexpectedly high attenuation or fluctuations of attenuation of several dB's within

just a few kHz would indicate a defective line trap or extremely unusual
characteristics of the line itself. It is essential that the cause be found and
corrected before the PLC equipment is finally commissioned.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 7-7

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 7 Commissioning

Line attenuation

Phase-to-ground

CF CF

R0
V1 R1

CF coupling filter V0 V0 R1
BT balancing transformer a tot = 20 log
2V1
+ 10 log
( R0 )
Figure 7-7: Test circuit for measuring line attenuation in the case of single-
phase coupling

CF CF CF CF

BT BT

R0
V1 R1

CF coupling filter V0 V0
a = 20 log
BT balancing transformer 2V1

Figure 7-8: Test circuit for measuring line attenuation in the case of phase-
to-phase coupling

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 7-8

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 7 Commissioning

7.3 Commissioning of the PLC equipment

Commissioning of the PLC equipment can commence once the measurements of

the line of transmission have produced satisfactory results. The following items
should be checked before switching on the auxiliary supply. Any discrepancies
and anomalies must be rectified without delay.

7.3.1 Preliminary tests and checks

a) Check that the cubicle is earthed in accordance with regulations.
b) Check the polarity of the auxiliary supply connections.
c) Check that the external connections go to the correct terminals in the cubicle
according to the specific drawings for the plant.
d) Check that all the internal cables are fitted and correctly inserted.
e) Check that all the units according to the specific layout diagram for the plant
are fitted and in the correct locations.

Check that all programming and settings in the units are in accordance with the
specific settings for the plant.

7.3.2 Tests according to the commissioning instructions

The equipment was carefully tested and calibrated according to document

1KHL015940-EN prior to delivery and therefore all the internal signal levels will
already be at their correct values. Thus only those settings need to be carried
out, which are influenced by the practical operating conditions on site.

The commissioning instructions are given in 1KHL015944-EN, which is available

in the annex.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 7-9

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 8 Operation and Maintenance

8. Operation and Maintenance

8.1 Safety Instructions

Personnel qualification
Authorised and properly trained personnel only is
DANGER admitted to carry out the commissioning of the
equipment.

Mechanical Installation
Cabinets, which are not secured to the floor, tip
DANGER forwards when the hinged frame is opened. Do not
open the hinged frame without precautions.

Work on the system

Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect
DANGER cables during periods of lightning activities.

Alteration
Alteration of the equipment is not allowed.
DANGER

Safety and monitoring facilities

Mechanical safety facilities such as cover plates
DANGER must not be removed or by-passed.

Inserting and removing of plug-in modules

Caution Neither removing nor inserting of modules is

permitted during power-up of the equipment.
Proceeding to plug in and out of modules the power
supply of the equipment has to be switched OFF.

Unused slots
Unused slots in the equipment subracks must be
DANGER covered with blanking plates.

PCB Extenders
For measuring purposes only the original PCB
DANGER extenders P4LM and P3LL, designed to work with
ETL500 equipment, must be used.

ESD protection

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 8-1

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 8 Operation and Maintenance

Caution The modules in this equipment contain devices,

ESD which can be damaged by electrostatic discharges.
Appropriate measures must be taken before
unpacking modules or withdrawing them from
equipment racks. Essential precautions to prevent
ESD damage when handling or working on modules
are grounding straps for technical personnel and the
provision of anti-static workbenches. Modules may
only be shipped either in their original packing or
installed in equipment racks.

Using MMI500 software

The link gets disturbed while using the options
Caution
'Tuning & Testing', activating a testtone, simulating
alarms, measurement of frequency response &
equalization etc. of the MMI500. Appropriate
measures have to be taken especially in case
protection signal transmission is being used.

B5LC
Make sure that the power supply B5LC is
DANGER programmed to the correct voltage of 230 or
115VAC as described in 1KHL015788 before
connecting the equipment to the power source.

P1LA
Dangerous voltage at the heat sink. Do not touch
DANGER during operation.

Heat sink should not be touched with conducting

DANGER materials to avoid energy discharges and damage
of the power amplifier.

Caution Hot surface at heat sink

Hot surface

P4LQ
Dangerous voltages on the module and the cable.
DANGER Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

R1BC
Dangerous voltages on the module and the
DANGER cable. Do not touch the module and the cable
leads.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 8-2

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 8 Operation and Maintenance

O4LE
The phone interface on the module O4LE generates
DANGER dangerous voltage up to 100 V. Don’t operate the
module without upper and lower cover plate. Do not
touch the open pins of the service phone connector,
the leads of its cable, the pins of the external cable
connector and the leads of the external cable.

G4AI
Dangerous voltages on the module and the cable.
DANGER Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

8.2 Operation

8.2.1 Normal Operation

The operating status of the equipment can be ascertained from the LED signals
on the front plates. In normal fault free operation, only the green stand-by LEDs
on the auxiliary supply units are lit. All the other red LEDs are for alarms and they
should be off.

In case a PC with MMI500 software is available for continuous monitoring of the

PLC equipment, the 'Alarm monitoring' option in the MMI500 can be enabled to
keep both the local and remote equipment under continuous monitoring.

8.2.2 Faulty Operation

Refer also to chapter 9 “Troubleshooting”.

A Faulty operation will be indicated by a red LED on the front plate of P4LQ. In
case there is some fault with the link or with the other modules, a red LED in the
'System' field on P4LQ lits. The description of the various alarm LEDs on P4LQ is
as follows:
• The red LED (AL) at the top: There is some problem with the hardware of
P4LQ (DSPs, Flash EPROM, UART etc.).
• The amber LED (Warning) in System field: It indicates that some remote
activity such as frequency response is pending. The link is OK.
• The red LED (Link alarm) in System field: It indicates that the link for one or
both the channels is down. This could be because of not receiving the Rx RF
at all or unsatisfactory level of the received pilot level.
• The red LED (HW alarm) in System field: It indicates that there is some
problem with the other hardware of the ETL500. The P4LQ may be functioning
OK.
• The red LED (AL, System or Cabinet alarm) in System field: It operates when
either the hardware alarm (HW) or the link alarm (Link) operates.

See chapter 9, section “List of alarms and corrective actions” for details about
causes of alarms.

In case the optional alarms module R1BC has been used, the programmed
contacts will also operate for the above criteria.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 8-3

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 8 Operation and Maintenance

The alarm polling or event recorder functions of the MMI500 can be used to see
the details of the alarms.

8.3 Maintenance

All the modules of ETL500 are subjected to a comprehensive final functional

testing after manufacturing. The complete PLC equipment is then calibrated and
tested as a unit before leaving the works.

Most functions such as generation of pilot, AF filtering, AF to RF conversion, RF

filtering before power amplifier, RF & AF channel settings etc. are performed
digitally by software using DSP. Hence these operations are not subject to
ageing. The stability of these settings and thus also of the equipment as a whole
is assured over a long period of time.

Nevertheless, testing at periodic intervals is recommended. The frequency of

testing depends very much on the operating conditions in the particular
installation, but should not be less than once every two years. The following
periodic measurements are recommended.

8.3.1 Periodic Functional Checks

It is important that the reasons for readings, which diverge widely from values
recorded during commissioning, be found, even if this means checking the entire
equipment.

Checking and testing must be carried out by qualified and authorised personnel
only, using suitable instruments. Incorrect settings can impair the proper
operation of the equipment.

8.3.1.1 Check input power supply voltage

ETL540/580: Verify that the internal power supply voltage of 48VDC on the test
point of B5LA/B5LC is within tolerance.

8.3.1.2 Check alarm status for ETL500 element management networks

To check the alarm status of a number of ETL500 terminals forming an element

management network, the function “Alarm polling” (menue Network) can be
used. The alarm status of the addressed terminals is polled in selectable intervals
and in case of any alarm, the alarm text is recorded on file and displayed on the
screen.

8.3.1.3 Check alarm events

The alarms stored by the built in event recorder of the ETL500 terminals can be
inspected. Uplaod the stored events by activating Equipment / Commissioning
and maintenance / Event recorder / Upload events.

8.3.1.4 Check status data

The status data of both the local and remote equipment can be uploaded in the
MMI500, using the function Equipment / Upload status. A printout of the status

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 8-4

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 8 Operation and Maintenance

data can be taken for documentation purpose and compared with the previous
status data.

8.3.1.5 Check frequency response

The frequency response of the link can be measured and compared with the
former measurement using MMI500. For this use the function Equipment /
Commissioning and maintenance / Frequency response. If found necessary,
the existing equalizer may be changed with the function Equipment /
Commissioning and maintenance / Select equalizer. Refer to 'Equalization
using MMI500 for the ETL500 Rel 3 equipment (1KHL015943'EN)' for details.

During frequency response measurements the link

Caution
is not operational.

8.3.1.6 Check AF levels

The MMI500 AF measurement function can be used to check the levels of the
various AF signals transferred over the ETL500 link. The function is accessible
with menue Equipment / Commissioning and maintenance / Measure AF.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 8-5

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 9 Troubleshooting

9. Troubleshooting

In case of failure of communications between the two stations of the PLC link, the
fault could either be because of the power line itself, either or both of the PLC
equipment or the coupling arrangement used. A systematic approach helps in
tracking the fault in the shortest possible time.

9.1 Safety Instructions

Personnel qualification
Authorised and properly trained personnel only is
DANGER admitted to carry out the commissioning of the
equipment.

Mechanical Installation
Cabinets, which are not secured to the floor, tip
DANGER forwards when the hinged frame is opened. Do not
open the hinged frame without precautions.

Work on the system

Do not work on the system or connect or
DANGER disconnect cables during periods of lightning
activities.

Alteration
Alteration of the equipment is not allowed.
DANGER

Safety and monitoring facilities

Mechanical safety facilities such as cover plates
DANGER must not be removed or by-passed.

Inserting and removing of plug-in modules

Caution Neither removing nor inserting of modules is

permitted during power-up of the equipment.
Preceeding to plug in and out of modules the
power supply of the equipment has to be switched
OFF.

Unused slots
Unused slots in the equipment subracks must be
DANGER covered with blanking plates.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 9-1

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 9 Troubleshooting

PCB Extenders
For measuring purposes only the original PCB
DANGER extenders P4LM and P3LL, designed to work with
ETL500 equipment, must be used.

ESD protection

Caution The modules in this equipment contain devices,

ESD which can be damaged by electrostatic discharges.
Appropriate measures must be taken before
unpacking modules or withdrawing them from
equipment racks. Essential precautions to prevent
ESD damage when handling or working on modules
are grounding straps for technical personnel and the
provision of anti-static workbenches. Modules may
only be shipped either in their original packing or
installed in equipment racks.

Using MMI500 software

The link gets disturbed while using the options
Caution
'Tuning & Testing', activating a testtone, simulating
alarms, measurement of frequency response &
equalization etc. of the MMI500. Appropriate
measures have to be taken especially in case
protection signal transmission is being used.

B5LC
Make sure that the power supply B5LC is
DANGER programmed to the correct voltage of 230 or
115VAC as described in 1KHL015788 before
connecting the equipment to the power source.

P1LA
Dangerous voltage at the heat sink. Do not touch
DANGER during operation.

Heat sink should not be touched with conducting

DANGER materials to avoid energy discharges and damage
of the power amplifier.

Caution Hot surface at heat sink

Hot surface

P4LQ
Dangerous voltages on the module and the cable.
DANGER Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 9-2

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 9 Troubleshooting

R1BC
Dangerous voltages on the module and the cable.
DANGER Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

O4LE
The phone interface on the module O4LE
DANGER generates dangerous voltage up to 100 V. Don’t
operate the module without upper and lower cover
plate. Do not touch the open pins of the service
phone connector, the leads of its cable, the pins of
the external cable connector and the leads of the
external cable.

G4AI
Dangerous voltages on the module and the cable.
DANGER Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

9.2 Fuses

Used fuses in the equipment:

B5LA: T 6.3 A/250V

B5LC (115 V): T 4 A/250V
B5LC (230 V): T 2 A/250V
B4LE: T 6.3 A/250V

9.3 Alarms

9.3.1 Alarm concept

The alarm concept of the ETL500 system is designed to

• detect and locate the sources responsible for abnormal operation of the
system, and
• provide information about the kind of problems detected.

The alarms for an ETL500 terminal are hierarchically organized, with system
alarm at the top and a variety of base alarms at the bottom of the hierarchy.
System alarm is an OR-function of link-alarm and hardware-alarm, see Table 9-1.
If for both equipments of a link these two second level alarms are known, the
source of the problem can be localized to one or several of the four major fault
areas of a link marked in Figure 9-1. Table 9-2 shows how the affected areas can
be found from the alarm information. Note that for an equipment a link alarm is
only considered to be valid when no hardware alarm is present.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 9-3

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 9 Troubleshooting

Type of System alarm, cabinet alarm

alarm (OR-function of link alarm and hardware alarm)
Link alarm Hardware alarm
Description All errors detected within the equipment
Insufficient quality All errors detected within the equipment
of the received RF except those due to insufficient quality
signal of the received RF signal
Possible Pilot-level low, Plug-Out-error,
base alarms SNR low, CRC error,
… +12 V undervoltage,
…
Possible Excessive channel Missing boards,
reasons attenuation, component damage,
excessive noise low supply voltage

Table 9-1

AF Station A Station B AF
connections: RF channel A to B connections:
telephony, telephony,
signalling, ETL500 ETL500 signalling,
teleoperation, RF channel B to A teleoperation,
fax, modem, fax, modem,
teleprotection teleprotection

Figure 9-1 The 4 major fault location areas of an ETL500 link

Equipment A Equipment B
Hardware Link Hardware Link Error caused by:
Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm
No No No No -
No No No Yes Channel A > B
No Yes No No Channel B > A
No Yes No Yes Channels B > A and A > B
Yes X No X Equipment A
No X Yes X Equipment B
Yes X Yes X Equipment A and B

Table 9-2

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 9-4

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 9 Troubleshooting

TXRF-AL
P7LA, P4LR, P4LS
Plugout 3

Plugout 4

P4LQ R1BC
Logic
Link-Alarm
G4AK
Squelch
NSK5
Alarm

Not in normal
operation mode

LED 6
HW-
Alarm
O4LE

PAX- LED 4
Blocking System-
(hard- Alarm
O4LE wired)
LED 0
Alarm Cabinet-
Alarm
T
D
M
- NSD550-
Alarm
B
u
Low level alarms HW & I/O
s
Low level
alarms
PLC HW

Low level LED 0

P4LQ-
G4AI alarms Alarm
NSD HW
NSD Alarm NSD550 Alarm
NSD HW Alarm

LED 0
G4AI NSD Link Alarm
Alarm ETL System Alarm System Alarm

Low level LED 5

alarms
Link-
NSD Link
Alarm

Low level
alarms
PLC Link
Low level alarms HW & I/O

Figure 9-2 Alarm hierarchy of an ETL500 terminal

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 9-5

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 9 Troubleshooting

9.3.2 Alarm event recorder

The event recorder is described in detail in chapter 11.

All alarm events available in the RF converter P4LQ are recorded continuously in
the nonvolatile memory (EPROM) of P4LQ with date- and timestamps supplied
by the internal real time clock (RTC) of the equipment. Events are recorded:
• each time the alarm status of P4LQ changes,
• when date and time of the RTC are set,
• when the configuration is stored to EPROM.

The RTC has an autonomy of about 24 hours. If the power supply to the
equipment is switched off for more than 24 hours, the time-stamp supplied by the
RTC will no longer be correct. Note that the RTC can be synchronised to an
external clock source via an IRIG-interface.

Up to 1000 alarm events are recorded. If this number is exceeded, the oldest
events are discarded.

9.3.3 Alarm polling

The alarm polling facility of MMI500 allows to record alarms from an ETL500
element management network in one PC. It allows to get a quick overview of the
alarm state of all connected terminals. Once a list of devices to be polled has
been entered, the alarm polling for the network can be switched on and off with
one single keystroke. With alarm polling enabled, all devices on the list are polled
by MMI500 at specified intervals (daily, hourly, every xx minutes) and the alarms
coming back – if any - written to files (one file per day) with date- and timestamps
supplied by the PC. If a device cannot be reached, a communication error will be
recorded for that device. For terminals connected via dial-up modem, a dial-up
connection is automatically established each time that these terminals have to be
polled.

Only alarms available in the RF converter P4LQ are reported via alarm polling.
These are:
• All alarms and warnings referring to errors on the P4LQ-board,
• For each configured O4LE-board: One board-alarm and –warning ,
• For each configured G4AI-board: One board-alarm and –warning ,
• One board-alarm for all G4AK-boards.

Low level alarms of O4LE and G4AI boards plugged into an equipment are
accessible only via equipment status upload.

9.4 Warnings

Warnings are used to signal that an equipment is not in normal operation state,
but otherwise working properly. Examples:
• Measurement of frequency response,
• Tuning of RF filters,
• Equipment running with temporary configuration,
•

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 9-6

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 9 Troubleshooting

• load plugged

Similar to the alarm hierarchy, a warning hierarchy is defined and shown in

Figure 9-3.

P7LA, P4LR, P4LS

TXRF-IN P4LQ R1BC
Warning

G4AK

O4LE

LED 3
O4LE
Warning

T
D System-
M Warning
-
B
u LED 3
Low level warnings s
Low level
warnings
PLC

Detail-
G4AI Warnings
NSD

ETL-
G4AI Warning
LED 3
Warning

Low level warnings

Figure 9-3 Warning hierarchy of an ETL500 terminal

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 9-7

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 9 Troubleshooting

9.5 Some basic checks

It is advisable to do the following basic checks before energising a PLC link.

This minimises the chances of a fault in the first place and also reduces the time
of troubleshooting in case there is any.
• It is essential to check the communication line (as described in chapter 7)
especially in the frequency band in which the PLC link will be used.
• In case modems are used to access the P4LQ, it essential to first check the
communications over modems before really trying to access the equipment.
Often the faults are found in wrong settings of the modem.
• Ensure that the coaxial cable is properly connected to the equipment. Check
whether the supply voltage to be applied to the equipment is correct.
• Ensure that all the modules are properly inserted in their correct slots.
• Check that the external connections are correct as per plant drawings.

9.6 Frequently asked questions

Question: The "Connect" operation is not successful. What can I do to correct

this problem?
Answer: Check all hardware and its settings forming the communication path,
starting at the PC and ending at the equipment. The section "Communication to
the ETL500" in chapter 4 gives the relevant information. If the communication
path is made up of several sections as in case of connection via modem,
intranet/internet, dedicated data channel and/or via EOC, proceed in steps,
checking the path sections in sequence starting at the side of the PC.

Question: The PLC link doesn't work. What can I do to correct this problem?
Answer: Check the alarms: If there is a hardware alarm at either side of the link,
the reason of it must be found and the problem corrected. Upload the equipment
status and study the alarm messages given by the MMI500. One single problem
can produce a number of such messages.
If for both equipments of the link no hardware alarms are reported (anymore), the
problem has to be sought in the link. Upload the equipment status and study the
alarm messages given by the MMI500. It is helpful if it is possible to restrict the
problem to one of the following 3 cases:
• 1. excessive signal attenuation,
• 2. excessive line noise,
• 3. excessive distortion.
Case 1: Check the RF settings (Configuration / System / Channel settings)
and the hardware on the RF-side. Check the tuning of the RF transmit and
receive filters and the adjustment of the Rx RF level potentiometer. Work along
the RF path: RF cables, RF terminating plate, RF coupling filter. Check the
frequency response of the line.
Case 2: The level of the line noise is given by the high voltage line itself and by
the atmospheric conditions along the line. The only way to combat the noise is to
increase the RF signal power or to reduce the RF signal bandwidth.
Case 3: Look out for other equipment parallel PLC terminals connected to the
same line. Check for signal saturation in the RF signal path.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 9-8

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 9 Troubleshooting

Question: Some alarms are present, signalled by alarm relay contacts and/or
alarm LEDs.
Answer: Upload status data to see the details about the causes of the alarms. If
both hardware and link alarms are present, first remove the cause of the
hardware alarm. After this has been done, upload system status once again and
– if a link alarm should still be present – find the cause of the link alarm. Check
whether the alarm threshold levels are appropriate.

9.7 List of alarms and corrective actions

Following is a list of alarm text messages displayed and their corresponding

explanation and fault elimination instructions (in italic). NSD550 specific alarm
messages are listed in chapter 11.

LEDs on MMI500 Alarm Text Explanation and corrective actions (the latter in italics)
P4LQ
Warning "Dummy load plugged 40 and 80 Watt equipment: A dummy load has been inserted
(t ) / RF loopback active " for test purposes, replacing the RF hybrid and interrupting the
link. When the tests are terminated, remove the dummy load
and reinsert the RF hybrid.
5 Watt equipment: The equipment operates in local loopback
mode, interrupting the link. When the tests are finished, move
the plug on G1DA from X101, LOOPBACK MODE to X100,
NORMAL OPERATION.
Warning "Warning from the P4LQ has received a warning from the 80 W power amplifier.
(t ) 80 W amplifier" One of the two 40 W amplifiers P1LA used to generate the
80 W output may be faulty. Replace the faulty modules.
Warning "LED on P4LQ: A warning (non urgent alarm) has been detected. Consult the
(t ) Warning " system status report for more information about the reason of
the warning.
Warning "Equipment not in The ETL500 is in a test mode, e.g. dummy load plugged, test
(t ) normal operation configuration active, tuning and testing.
mode"
Warning "Warning: Actual After measuring the frequency response (menu “Frequency
(t ) equalizer not response”), the actual equalizer will not be consistent with the
consistent with new new measurement. In this situation, the function “Store
measurement." configuration to EPROM” is disabled. The warning disappears
by performing a reset of P4LQ, discarding the new
measurement or by selecting the new equalizer (menu
“Equipment / Commissioning and maintenance / Select
equalizer”), discarding the old equalizer.
Warning "Inconsistent firmware Different firmware versions on local and remote equipment
(t ) on local and remote are in use. Use identical firmware in both equipments.
equipment"
Warning "Not allowed to store The present status of the equipment doesn’t allow the
(t ) the configuration to operation “Store configuration to EPROM” to be executed.
EPROM" This situation occurs after measuring the frequency response,
leaving the actual equalizer inconsistent with the new
measurement. The warning disappears by either performing a
reset of P4LQ, discarding the new measurement or by
selecting the new equalizer with the menu “Select equalizer”,
discarding the old equalizer.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 9-9

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 9 Troubleshooting

LEDs on MMI500 Alarm Text Explanation and corrective actions (the latter in italics)
P4LQ
Warning "Test configuration A test configuration is active which will be lost when the
(t ) active" associated test configuration timer runs out. Store the
configuration to EPROM, stopping the test configuration timer,
or reset P4LQ, overwriting the test configuration.
Warning "Equalizer action The frequency response measurement is in progress either
(t ) pending" from local end or remote end. The alarm will disappear when
the measurement is complete or use 'Interrupt remote activity'
option to stop the measurement.
Warning „EOC no data The embedded operation channel 1/2 couldn’t receive
(t ) received on Ch1“ expected telegrams. Make sure that identical firmware
„EOC no data versions are in use in both local and remote equipments.
received on Ch2“ Check if the quality of the receive signal in terms of SNR and
receive level is adequate. Make sure the ELT-pilot Ch1/Ch2 is
switched on in both local and remote equipments. Reset
P4LQ. If the error persists, replace P4LQ.

Warning „EOC no data send The embedded operation channel 1/2 couldn’t send
(t ) on Ch1“ telegrams. Make sure the ELT-pilot Ch1/Ch2 is switched on in
EOC no data send on both local and remote equipments. Reset P4LQ. If the error
Ch2“ persists, replace P4LQ
Warning „EOC Ch1 The transmission of data via embedded operation (EOC)
(t ) communication channel 1 or 2 is disturbed. Make sure that identical firmware
failure“ versions are in use in both local and remote equipments.
„EOC Ch2 Check if the quality of the receive signal in terms of SNR and
communication receive level is adequate. Reset P4LQ. If the error persists,
failure“ replace P4LQ.
Warning “Warning on slave Upload the status by means of MMI500 and check the
(t ) board” warning text of that specific board
Warning "Test PLC-link Some software switches on P4LQ are not set to the default
(t ) switches not set to value. Reset the equipment
default"
Hardware "Missing RF hybrid, RF hybrid, dummy load in the power rack P7LA or P4LS has
(HW) dummy load or P4LS" been removed, interrupting the link. Reinsert RF hybrid or
dummy load or P4LS.
Hardware "Missing P4LR on The receive filter P4LR on position 78 of the channel rack
(HW) position 78/P7LC" P7LC has been removed. This can degrade the performance
of the link due to reduced selectivity in the receive signal path.
Reinsert P4LR or disable P4LR presence detection in the
menu “Alarm settings” when the filter is not necessary for the
application.
Hardware "Tx alarm: Low RF The RF transmit signal measured at the RF hybrid is below
(HW) ouput level" threshold or missing. Check the transmit signal path or
readjust the alarm threshold as described in menu “Tuning
and testing / Adjust Tx RF level”.
Hardware "-12V undervoltage" Undervoltage detected on the -12V supply by P4LQ. Check
(HW) for overload on the -12V supply by removing modules
sequentially. Replace the DC-DC converter B4LE. Reset
P4LQ. If the error persists, replace P4LQ.
Hardware "-12V overvoltage" Overvoltage detected on the -12V supply by P4LQ. Replace
(HW) the DC-DC converter B4LE. Reset P4LQ. If the alarm
persists, replace P4LQ.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 9-10

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 9 Troubleshooting

LEDs on MMI500 Alarm Text Explanation and corrective actions (the latter in italics)
P4LQ
Hardware "+12V undervoltage" Undervoltage detected on the +12V supply by P4LQ. Check
(HW) for overload on the +12V supply by removing modules
sequentially. Replace the DC-DC converter B4LE. Reset
P4LQ. If the alarm persists, replace P4LQ.
Hardware "+12V overvoltage" Overvoltage detected on the +12V supply by P4LQ. Replace
(HW) the DC-DC converter B4LE. Reset P4LQ. If the alarm
persists, replace P4LQ.
Hardware "LED on P4LQ: A hardware alarm in the ETL has been detected. Consult the
(HW) Hardware alarm" system status report for more information about the reason of
the alarm.
Hardware “HW alarm on slave Upload the status by means of MMI500 and check the alarm
(HW) board” text
Hardware “TDM bus It is not possible to communicate to the slave board. Replace
(HW) communication error” the slave board
Hardware “IRIG signal lost” The signal for the external IRIG source can not be detected
(HW) anymore. Check the IRIG source and the cable connection
Hardware “Incorrect RTC date” The date information from the on-board RTC and the external
(HW) IRIG source are contradictory. Set the time of the on-board
RTC to the correct data by means of MMI500
Hardware “Set RTC date” The time of the on-board RTC has not been set until now. Set
(HW) the time of the on-board RTC to the correct time by means of
MMI500
P4LQ AL "LED on P4LQ: P4LQ- A hardware alarm has been detected on P4LQ. Consult the
hardware alarm" system status report for more information about the reason of
the alarm.
P4LQ AL "DSPA main counter The main counter of processor A on P4LQ has stopped.
alarm on P4LQ" Reset P4LQ. If the error persists, replace P4LQ.
P4LQ AL "DSPA Tx counter The transmitter counter of processor A on P4LQ has stopped.
alarm on P4LQ" Reset P4LQ. If the error persists, replace P4LQ.
P4LQ AL "DSPA Rx counter The receiver counter of processor A on P4LQ has stopped.
alarm on P4LQ" Reset P4LQ. If the error persists, replace P4LQ.
P4LQ AL “DSPC main counter The main counter of processor C on P4LQ has stopped.
alarm on P4LQ” Reset P4LQ. If the error persists, replace P4LQ.
P4LQ AL "Equalizer data The equalizer data in RAM are corrupted. Wait some minutes
corrupt" to see if the alarm disappears while the data is retransmitted
via embedded operation channel. Reset P4LQ. If the error
persists, replace P4LQ.
P4LQ AL "UART not working" The serial port on P4LQ (Com1) reports an error. Reset
P4LQ. If the error persists, replace P4LQ.
P4LQ AL "AF Tx signal is The peak amplitude of the combined AF channels 1 and 2 Tx
exceeding peak signal exceeds the allowed maximum. Verify whether the
amplitude" levels of all AF input signals applied to the active
teleoperation input ports have been set correctly and if all
signals present at these ports have been declared (menue
"Configuration / Teleoperation, ext. teleprotection, FSK
modems / Specify signals").
Link "RX pilot level alarm The RX pilot level on channel 1 is below the alarm threshold.
on channel 1" Make sure that the channel settings of both link terminals are
the same and that the receive signal quality is adequate.
Reset P4LQ. If the error persists, replace P4LQ.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 9-11

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 9 Troubleshooting

LEDs on MMI500 Alarm Text Explanation and corrective actions (the latter in italics)
P4LQ
Link "SNR alarm on The signal to noise ratio is below the alarm threshold on
channel 1" channel 1. The reason may be excessive noise on the power
line or high attenuation of the RF signal on the power line.
Link "No Rx pilot on ETL received no pilot on channel 1. Make sure that the
channel 1" channel settings of both link terminals are the same and that
the signal attenuation of the power line is as expected.
Link "Synchronisation lost" The frequency synchronisation is out of range. After an
interruption of the pilot signal, the synchronisation may be
temporarily lost. Check if the channel settings of both link
terminals are the same and if the receive signal quality is
adequate. Reset P4LQ. If the error persists, replace P4LQ.
Link "AGC blocked on The automatic gain correction (AGC) of channel 1 is blocked.
channel 1" During an interruption of the pilot signal, the AGC is
temporarily blocked. Make sure that the channel settings of
both link terminals are the same and that the receive signal
quality is adequate. Check if the AGC of channel 1 is enabled
in menue "Equipment / Commissioning and maintenance /
Test PLC link". Reset P4LQ. If the error persists, replace
P4LQ.
Link "LED on P4LQ: Link Consult the system status report for more information about
alarm" the reason of the alarm
Link "Repeated telegram The embedded operation channel 1 couldn’t receive all
errors on EOC 1" expected telegrams. Make sure that identical firmware
versions are in use in both local and remote equipments.
Link "Alarm from a G4AK An alarm is generated on at least one of the G4AK modules.
modem" Identify the faulty module(s) by removing the modules
sequentially. Replace the faulty modules.
Link "SNR alarm on The signal to noise ratio is below the alarm threshold on
channel 2" channel 2. The reason may be excessive noise on the power
line or high attenuation of the RF signal on the power line.
Link "No Rx pilot on ETL received no pilot on channel 2. Make sure that the
channel 2" channel settings of both link terminals are the same and that
the signal attenuation of the power line is as expected.
Link "Rx pilot level alarm The RX pilot level on channel 2 is below the alarm threshold.
on channel 2" Make sure that the channel settings of both link terminals are
the same and that the receive signal quality is adequate.
Reset P4LQ. If the error persists, replace P4LQ.
Link "AGC blocked on The automatic gain correction (AGC) of channel 2 is blocked.
channel 2" During an interruption of the pilot signal, the AGC is
temporarily blocked. Make sure that the channel settings of
both link terminals are the same and that the receive signal
quality is adequate. Check if the AGC of channel 2 is enabled
in menue "Equipment / Commissioning and maintenance /
Test PLC link". Reset P4LQ. If the error persists, replace
P4LQ.
Link "Channels 1 and 2 are The pilot signals of channels 1 and 2 are interchanged. Make
interchanged” sure that the same channel mode settings are used on both
local and remote terminals.
Hardware "LED on P4LQ: Consult the system status report for more information about
(HW) System alarm" the reason of the alarm.
"Unknown alarm from The ETL reports an alarm that is unknown to the MMI500.
ETL” Use matching MMI500 version.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 9-12

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 9 Troubleshooting

LEDs on MMI500 Alarm Text Explanation and corrective actions (the latter in italics)
O4LE
Warning "Configuration not The new configuration is not stored yet. Store new
(t ) stored to eprom" configuration or reset the equipment.
Warning "Service phone At least one service phone of the link is off hook and disables
(t ) switched off AMX!" the AMX. Finish the talk and put both service phones down.
Warning “Overload detected: The service phone and the subscriber are not operable,
(t ) Service phone and because of a hardware error. Reset O4LE. If the error
subscriber not persists, replace O4LE.
available”
O4LE AL "Slot mismatch" O4LE has been inserted in a wrong slot or is not properly
configured yet. Use correct slot or download correct
configuration and store the configuration to eprom.
O4LE AL “Codecs not An initialization error occurred. Reset O4LE. If the error
initialized" persists, replace O4LE.
O4LE AL "PLL not locked” An initialization error occurred. Reset O4LE. If the error
persists, replace O4LE.
O4LE AL “Init UART error" An initialization error occurred. Reset O4LE. If the error
persists, replace O4LE.
O4LE AL “Codecs have word Internal data exchange at O4LE failed. Reset O4LE. If the
mismatch" error persists, replace O4LE.
O4LE AL “Synchronization to Data exchange between the modules O4LE and P4LQ failed.
P4LQ lost" Reset System. If the error persists, generate a new valid
configuration. Check if the positions of the modules in the
rack match the slot numbers in the configuration text. Correct
the positions if necessary. Download the configuration and
store the configuration to eprom. If the error persists, remove
the modules from and reinsert them into their slots. If this
doesn't help, replace O4LE.
O4LE AL “CRC Error in Reset O4LE. If the error persists, execute a <user controlled
memory" firmware download> for this O4LE module, described in
1KHL016378, Firmware Download: <ETL500 Rel. 3>. If the
error persists again, replace O4LE.
If this error occurs repeatedly, check the cabinet and
equipment grounding as well as the electromagnetic
shielding of the system and the cables.
O4LE AL “TDM Bus error" O4LE module nor plugged in or defective. Remove the
module from and reinsert it into its slot. If the error persists,
replace O4LE.

9.8 Replacement of faulty items

As stated earlier, replacement of faulty items can be done only at module level
and not component level since surface mount technology is used for components
of most of the modules. While replacing a faulty module with a new module,
ensure that the fault is not due to some incorrect external wiring or mode of
operation. Else even the new module will go faulty. Remember to program
correct jumpers/strapping on the new module before replacement.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 9-13

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 9 Troubleshooting

9.9 Dispatch for repairs

A module identified and confirmed to be faulty should be sent for repairs to ABB.
It should be packed preferably in the original packing or in anti-static bags with
additional mechanical protection to avoid damage during transport. It should be
accompanied by a short description of the of the observed fault.

ABB is not responsible for a module which is received damaged during transport.
The financial implications of the repairs depends upon the agreement with the
client. The modules should be sent either to local ABB agent, or to

Address for repairs:

ABB Power Automation Ltd

Department NKV
Receiving Department NA-ETW /TU17
Building Roald
CH-5300 Turgi
Switzerland

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 9-14

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 10 Storage, Decommissioning and Disposal

10. Storage, Decommissioning and Disposal

10.1 Safety instructions

Personnel qualification
Authorised and properly trained personnel only is
DANGER admitted to carry out the commissioning of the
equipment.

Mechanical Installation
Cabinets, which are not secured to the floor, tip
DANGER forwards when the hinged frame is opened. Do not
open the hinged frame without precautions.

Electrical Installation

The circuit breaker for the power supply (B9AS) of

DANGER the equipment must be switch OFF.
The circuit breakers for optional equipment in the
cabinet must be switch OFF.

The isolating terminals from the external cables

DANGER must be kept open during installation, maintenance
and before storage, decommissioning and disposal.

ESD protection

Caution The modules in this equipment contain devices,

ESD which can be damaged by electrostatic discharges.
Appropriate measures must be taken before
unpacking modules or withdrawing them from
equipment racks. Essential precautions to prevent
ESD damage when handling or working on modules
are grounding straps for technical personnel and the
provision of anti-static workbenches. Modules may
only be shipped either in their original packing or
installed in equipment racks.

10.2 Storage

The specified conditions for storage are -40 … 70°C with < 70% humidity.

Storage of the cubicle should be done in the original wooden casing and
unbroken sealed plastic cover. In case storage is to be done for longer periods of
time, additional protection against rusting is required especially in humid climate.

Storage of modules should be preferably in the original packing or in antistatic

bags with additional mechanical protection.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 10-1

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 10 Storage, Decommissioning and Disposal

10.3 Decommissioning

The decommissioning of the equipment should be done in the following steps.

• First of all the application, in which the equipment is used, must be disabled.
This is of special importance when protection signalling is used.
• Switch OFF the equipment. Isolate and disconnect the external power supply
given to the equipment.
• Disconnect the external wiring of the equipment. This should be done carefully
using the plant drawings so that some other wiring does not get disconnected
by mistake.
• Disconnect the RF coaxial cable. In case the cubicle is to be dismounted,
unstrap the RF cable and remove it from the cubicle.
• In case the complete cubicle is to be dismounted, the bolts for fastening the
cubicle to the base frame or floor must be carefully removed giving support to
the cubicle at the same time. The cubicle can now be lifted and dismounted. It
is preferable to keep the cubicle in horizontal position if no external support
can be given to the cubicle in vertical position.
• In case only the ETL500 subrack is to be removed from the cubicle, first
disconnect the internal wiring and power supply between the ETL500 subrack
and the terminal blocks. Now dismount the subrack by unscrewing the screws
from the front.
• If the ETL500 subrack or its modules are to be reused, they should be handled
and packed properly following precautions for ESD protection.

10.4 Disposal

For disposal, the regional and national regulations for electrical and electronic
waste have to be observed.

The modularity of the equipment allows to separate component boards and

casing, thus giving the opportunity for recycling.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 10-2

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

11. Options

11.1 Basic equipment

The basic ETL500 equipment without any interfaces consists of

1. Channel subrack type P7LC
2. DC-DC-converter type B4LE
3. RF-converter P4LQ
4. Receive filter type P4LR (used only if TxRF and RxRF are not adjacent)
5. Power subrack type P7LA
6. Power supply type B5LA or B5LC
7. Transmit filter type E5LA or E5LB
8. RF hybrid type P3LB or P3DA (P3LB is used if P4LR is present)
9. Carrier combiner type P3LC or P3LD (for 80W, ETL580 only)
10. Power amplifier type P1LA

11.2 Optional equipment

11.2.1 Optional modules

Following are the optional modules for the ETL500. At least one of the AF options
should be chosen.

11.2.1.1 AF interface type O4LE

This is the interface for telephony (2 and 4 wire) as well as for teleoperation.

11.2.1.2 Teleprotection interface type G4AI

This is the interface module for the optional internal teleprotection equipment type
NSD550.

11.2.1.3 FSK-modem NSK5 type G4AK

The programmable modem NSK5 can be directly inserted into the channel rack
P7LC in the same way as the other AF interfaces. See section 3.3.5 for details.

11.2.1.4 Alarm relay module type R1BC

The R1BC is an optional module with relays which can be programmed to be

activated when certain local or remote alarms are present.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-1

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

11.2.1.5 Cables

Refer to section 6 for the type of the cables.

Module Cable(s)
O4LE The cable is required for external wiring of the teleoperation inputs & outputs.
The cable is also used for transit operation or to connect the
NSD 70C protection equipment.
The cable is required for external wiring of the 4W E&M circuit.
The cable is required for external wiring of the 2W port configured in subscriber
interface or PAX interface.
G4AI The cable is required for external wiring of the teleprotection signals
G4AK The cable is required for external wiring of the line and data signals of the
modem.
R1BC The cable is required for extension of contacts of the programmable relays.
P4LQ The cable is required for extension of contacts of the relays on P4LQ. For the
connection of a PC to the SUB-D connector on the front plate, an additional
1 to 1 / 9-pole cable is required or, alternatively, for connection of an external
modem to the SUB-D connector on the front plate, an additional null
modem / 9-pole cable is required.
P7LA In addition to the AC/DC power supply cable, the RF coaxial cable is also
required.
P7LC A flat cable is required for connection between P7LA and P7LC. Also a small
power supply cable is required for extension of DC supply from P7LA to P7LC.

11.2.2 Optional facilities

Following is a list of additional facilities which can be ordered with the equipment.

11.2.2.1 User Interface Programme - MMI500

The MMI500 software installation program is available on 3.5' floppy discs. It is a

Windows based software with the user friendly features of the Windows
environment. See chapter 4 for details about MMI500.

11.2.2.2 Cabinet type E40A with accessories

The ETL500 can be mounted in the E40A type of cabinet which also includes
various accessories such as rails for mounting terminal blocks, cable channels
etc.

11.2.2.3 Personal Computer

The PC on which MMI500 is to be installed should either have Windows NT,

Windows 95 or 98. Also one of the COM ports of the PC should be free for
connection to MMI500. An additional printer may be used for frequency response
plots and periodic status reports.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-2

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

11.2.2.4 RF connection plate A9CS

The RF connection plate A9CS is available in the following versions:

• For standard 75 or 125 Ohms unbalanced cable
• with the hybrid transformer A1AC
• with the 3 dB attenuator A1AD
• with the impedance transformer A1AE for 150 Ohms balanced cable
(galvanically isolated) or 50 Ohms unbalanced cable.

11.2.2.5 Maintenance tool kit

The kit contains the various accessories such as tuning adapters, tools used for
maintenance of the ETL500 equipment etc.

11.2.2.6 Remote inquiry kit R7AP

The kit contains the interface and cables needed for connecting the PC port of an
ETL500 to an RS-485 station bus. Refer to chapter 4 for a description of the RS-
485 station bus and of the possibilities for remote access to such a bus.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-3

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

11.3 NSD550 – Optional Internal Teleprotection Equipment

11.3.1 Introduction

Teleprotection equipment transmits the tripping signals from the protection

equipment in high voltage grids of electricity utilities, between power system
control centres, power stations and sub-stations. Teleprotection links using power
line carrier (PLC) channels are the most economical way of performing all the
tasks associated with transmitting tripping signals.

The full version of the teleprotection equipment NSD550 for transmitting 4

tripping commands comprises at least one additional module, the teleprotection
interface type G4AI, which is directly inserted into the power line carrier equip-
ment type ETL500. It is suitable for handling the tripping signals in blocking,
permissive and direct transfer tripping schemes. Four commands enable parallel
circuit lines to be protected with permissive tripping of the line protection and
direct transfer tripping of a compensator or the breaker back-up protection.

Since NSD550 transmits tripping signals in the speech band of the PLC channel
and speech is interrupted whilst transmission is taking place, protection signals of
long duration should be avoided.

Security, dependability and transmission time are the important characteristics of

teleprotection equipment. The performance required by direct transfer tripping,
permissive tripping and blocking schemes with respect to these parameters are
different. Essential requirements are that interference on the communications
channel may neither be interpreted as a tripping command (security) nor
inadmissibly delay the transmission of genuine tripping commands (dependability
and transmission time).

By using micro-processor techniques and digital signal processing, the NSD550

is able to ideally fulfill the high performance demands when transmitting tripping
signals via PLC.

Most of the configuration and testing of the NSD550 can be done using the
windows based software MMI500. For the same reason commissioning, testing
and maintenance also becomes easy.

The use of the NSD550 in conjunction with ETL500 and MMI500 is documented
and explained in this chapter.

11.3.2 Intended Use of the NSD550

The teleprotection equipment type NSD550 is designed as an optional interface

to be used exclusively together with PLC equipment type ETL500. It is always
assigned to the first channel in case of a dual-channel PLC.

The NSD550 fully complies with the Product Standard IEC 60834-1 for tele-
protection equipment of power systems. It further meets or exceeds the
requirements according the European EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low
Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-4

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

NSD550 is excellent for transmitting direct transfer tripping, permissive tripping,

or blocking signals via a PLC communications channel between the ends of
power transmission lines. It is not suitable for steady-state signals, because it
uses the speech band of the PLC equipment and speech is thus interrupted
whilst tripping signals are being transferred. Otherwise the duration of a
command is not a critical factor and only causes the NSD550 link alarm to
indicate that the guard (pilot) signal is missing after ten seconds (default setting).

The programmable teleprotection equipment type NSD 70C which operates at

higher frequencies than the speech band is recommended for steady-state
signals of any duration or if more than four commands have to be transmitted.
NSD 70C should be used in operating mode 1 over power line carriers, i.e. with
single tone transmission of command signals, for obtaining best practical signal-
to-noise ratio.

Depending on the application requirements, NSD550 can transmit up to four

commands with two different modes of operation, i.e. either 2 permissive + 2
direct trip, or 3 permissive + 1 direct trip commands. In both modes the
commands used for direct transfer tripping have priority over the commands used
in permissive schemes. Four commands permit, for example, the protection of
dual-circuit lines and direct tripping for reactor or breaker failure protection.

An unblocking (deblocking) output used in protection schemes with overreaching

first zones is available on the standard unit. Should the PLC channel break down,
i.e. neither guard nor active signals are being received, the two unblocking
contacts close for a preset period (e.g. 200 ms).

Application details are to be found in Section 11.3.5.

All local and remote equipment features and parameters are selected and
programmed by means of the user interface type MMI500.

11.3.3 Structure of the NSD550

The NSD550 signals are processed completely digitally by a DSP (Digital Signal
Processor) on the RF-converter type P4LQ of the basic ETL500 equipment.

The NSD550 comprises at least one teleprotection interface type G4AI. As

contact multipliers or to exploit all possible NSD550 functions, additional interface
modules can be directly plugged into reserved slots of the PLC equipment.
However the user will not be allowed to select the position of the modules. He
must only select the number of required inputs/outputs and the MMI500 will first
check the possibility of using the selected modules and then allocates the
positions for them.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-5

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

Power Supply TX Filter RF-

Hybrid
B5LA (48 VDC) E5LA P3LB
B5LC (110/230 VAC) E5LB P3DA

1 11 22 28 34 45 54 65 71 78

O4LE / G4AI / G4AK

O4LE / G4AI / G4AK

O4LE / G4AI / G4AK

O4LE / G4AI / G4AK

O4LE / G4AI / G4AK

RF-Converter P4LQ
DC-DC Converter

RX Filter P4LR
O4LE / G4AI
O4LE / G4AI
B4LE

Figure 11-1: ETL500 rack layout

11.3.4 Features

Modular design

Appropriate grouping of the functions into a signal processing module and

protection interface modules. The teleprotection interface type G4AI is inserted
into the rack type P7LC of the ETL500 PLC equipment.

Two modes of operation

Operating mode “2+2”:

2 permissive + 2 direct trip commands for redundant protection of dual-circuit
lines or duplicated protection for a single-circuit lines.
Operating mode “3+1”
3 permissive + 1 direct trip commands for phase segregated protection of
three phase lines.

Maximum of 4 commands
Duplex transmission of permissive tripping or blocking commands and direct
transfer tripping commands in protection schemes for single or dual circuit lines
including breaker failure protection.
In its minimum configuration with one teleprotection interface type G4AI, the
NSD550 can convey up to four commands in operating mode “2+2” or “3+1”.

Versatile application

The four commands of the NSD550 are grouped into non-coded signals for
blocking or permissive tripping schemes, while coded signals having priority over
non-coded signals are used for direct transfer tripping.

Transmission time and the level of security and dependability can be set for each
group of tripping signals (non-coded/coded).

Signal boosting
The best use is made of the available transmitter power to guarantee reliable
transmission of every tripping signal sequence.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-6

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

Two tripping criteria

Incorrect operation due to a single fault is prevented by processing guard and
active signals separately.

No additional bandwidth required

NSD550 requires no extra bandwidth because it uses the pilot of the PLC as
guard signal and the speech band as command channel.

Digital signal processing

Using digital signal processing technologies, the NSD550 meets the stringent re-
quirements for command transmission over PLC links even under adverse
channel conditions. Algorithms optimized for PLC channels ensure secure and
dependable operation and short transmission times.

Easy to configure and to service

A serial interface port is provided on the frontplate for connecting a PC which

enables operating and equipment information to be viewed.

Configuration, supervision and adapting to the field requirements of both the local
and remote equipment is done by means of the user interface MMI500 which
operates under the MS-Windows platform (version 95/98 or NT 4).

Integrated event recorder and trip counters

More than 2000 command start/stop and alarm events can be recorded and
stored with time stamp in a non-volatile memory. The event recorder can be
synchronized to an external time signal (e.g. GPS receiver) for accurate time
stamping. The display of events is possible in text and graphical views on the
MMI500.

In addition to the event recorder integrated trip counters for each command
support investigations in case of faults or abnormal conditions in the high voltage
network.

Universal teleprotection interface Type G4AI

The relay interface provides four opto-coupler inputs and four solid-state outputs
plus two heavy duty (electro-mechanical) relay outputs with change-over
contacts.

Each G4AI input can be set for:

• Not used (Off)
• Tx Command A, B, C or D
• Start criterion from protection relay

Each G4AI output can be set for:

• Not used (Off)
• Rx Command A, B, C or D
• Complete loss of incoming signals (“unblocking”)

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-7

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

• Rx Guard signal (present)

• Tx command A, B, C or D acknowledge
• G4AI interface alarm
• NSD alarms: system, link or hardware
• ETL: system alarm or warning

The command interfaces to the protection relays are potential-free and isolated
from ground and all other circuits. The command and alarm signals are
connected to isolating terminals (4 mm2) by cables type V9MM which plug into
the rear of the relay interfaces.

Command outputs during channel alarm

By means of the MMI500 interface, the user can program how the command
outputs respond to a channel failure, i. e. to SNR alarm or Rx level alarm:
• alarm does not influence output
• alarm sets output to quiescent state
• alarm sets coded output to quiescent state,
non-coded outputs are set to command state

Easy to test
Cyclic and manual loop tests allow in-service testing of the teleprotection
channel. Self-monitoring arrangements continuously determine the operational
status of the equipment.

Network Management

When the ETL500 equipment is integrated in a network management system,

each NSD550 can be accessed with MMI500 via a unique device number.

11.3.5 Applications

The NSD550 is designed for transferring commands in blocking, permissive

tripping and direct transfer tripping schemes. Its four commands are grouped into
non-coded signals for blocking or permissive tripping schemes, while coded
signals having priority over non-coded signals are used for direct transfer tripping.

Depending on the application requirements, NSD550 can transmit up to four

commands with two different modes of operation, i.e. either 2 permissive + 2
direct trip, or 3 permissive + 1 direct trip commands. In both modes the
commands used for direct transfer tripping have priority over the commands used
in permissive schemes.

The teleprotection interface type G4AI provides four opto-coupler inputs and four
solid-state outputs plus two heavy duty (electro-mechanical) relay outputs with
change-over contacts. The inputs / outputs on the interface module are pro-
grammable; if a command requires two output contacts, for example, both
outputs can be assigned to one interface or even to different interfaces. More
inputs / outputs are easily achieved by inserting additional relay interfaces.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-8

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

11.3.5.1 Permissive Tripping Schemes

Permissive transfer tripping is the most frequently used scheme for the protection
of transmission lines. The transfer tripping link between the protection equipment
at the ends of the line ensures that all faults can be cleared in the time of the first
zone along 100 % of the line. In a permissive scheme, the transfer tripping signal
from the NSD550 is connected in series with a local criterion (protection starting,
directional decision or phase selection) and tripping can only take place at the
receiving end, if a transfer tripping signal is being received and the local
protection relay detects a fault in the direction of the protected line. The reception
of a spurious tripping signal caused by interference on the communications
channel cannot therefore give rise on its own to unwanted tripping. On the other
hand, a delayed transfer tripping signal may mean that a fault on the line is
tripped in the time of zone 2 instead of undelayed in zone 1.

High dependability and a short transmission time therefore take priority over
security in a permissive scheme.
The following configuration and settings of the most important parameters are
recommended for all permissive transfer tripping schemes, i.e. underreaching
and overreaching distance protection and directional comparison:

Command output type: solid state

Command transmission: non-coded
Transmission time: T02 ( = 14 ms)
Security/dependability: increased dependability
Command prolongation: 0 ms

The corresponding configuration, setup and further programming instructions are

to be found in Section 11.3.10.

With the above settings, a signal-to-noise ratio of about 3 dB is necessary for

successful transmission of tripping commands. The rate of spurious commands
for noise bursts of 200 ms duration and the worst possible signal-to-noise ratio is
always less than 10-6.

11.3.5.2 Direct Transfer Tripping

Typical applications for direct transfer tripping are breaker back-up protection,
compensator protection and power transformer protection; line protection with
direct transfer tripping would be an exception. The requirements with respect to
transmission time are generally not too demanding.

In the case of direct transfer tripping, the tripping command from the tele-
protection equipment goes directly to the circuit-breaker tripping coil. Thus a
spurious tripping signal resulting either from interference or human error will
cause unwanted, usually three-phase tripping of the line and will block the
operation of any auto-reclosure relay.

A genuine transfer tripping signal, on the other hand, must on no account be lost
whether there is interference on the communications channel or not, because
then a line fault would not be isolated with correspondingly serious conse-
quences.
Extremely high security and high dependability are therefore more important than
transmission time for direct transfer tripping.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-9

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

In order to fulfil these requirements, the NSD550 uses coded tripping signals for
direct transfer commands. Coded signals provide the necessary additional
security against incorrect interpretation of speech, audio signals coupled into the
system and incorrect manipulations on the equipment.
The following configuration and settings are recommended for breaker failure
protection, compensator protection and power transformer protection (but not for
steady-state signals):

Command output type: solid state or relay

Command transmission: coded
Transmission time: T02 (= 26 ms using solid state outputs
or 34 ms using relay outputs)
Security/dependability: increased security
Command prolongation: 100 ms min.
Command outputs: set to the quiescent state in case of an alarm

The corresponding configuration, setup and further programming instructions are

to be found in Section 11.3.10.

With the above settings, a signal-to-noise ratio of about 6 dB is necessary for

successful transmission of tripping commands. The rate of spurious commands
for noise bursts of 200 ms duration and the worst possible signal-to-noise ratio is
theoretically always less than about 10-20. Since this extremely high level of
security is achieved without blocking the unit, the NSD550 is capable of tripping
without intentional delay at any time as soon as a signal-to-noise ratio of about
6 dB is regained.
The following configuration and settings are recommended for line protection with
direct transfer tripping:

Command output type: solid state

Command transmission: coded
Transmission time: T01 ( = 16 ms)
Security/dependability: increased dependability
Command prolongation: 20 ms

The corresponding configuration, setup and further programming instructions are

to be found in Section 11.3.10.

In spite of the relatively short transmission time of only 16 ms, security and
dependability are high. With the above settings, a signal-to-noise ratio of about
6 dB is necessary for successful transmission of tripping commands. The rate of
spurious commands for noise bursts of 200 ms duration and the worst possible
signal-to-noise ratio is theoretically always less than 10-8.

11.3.5.3 Blocking Schemes

In a blocking scheme no tripping signals are transmitted along the faulted line.
Instead the blocking schemes of all the surrounding healthy lines transmit signals
to their remote ends to prevent tripping of the overreaching relays there.

The protection equipment of a blocking scheme usually consists of distance

relays with overreaching first zones measuring into the line and reverse-looking
directional units. A through-fault is seen by the directional unit which sends a
signal to block the distance relay on the healthy line behind it. For a fault on the

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-10

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

line, the reverse-looking directional units at the two ends do not send blocking
signals and the overreaching first zones trip their respective circuit-breakers.

A teleprotection equipment for a blocking scheme has to fulfil only modest

requirements. An incorrect signal (fault on the protected line) cannot prevent
tripping, but only delay it. The loss or appreciable delay of the blocking signal for
a fault in the overreach section of an adjacent line will, however, cause false
tripping of the protected line.

Since the overreaching first zones of the relays have to be delayed sufficiently
long to allow time for a blocking signal to be received, a short transmission time
for the blocking signal is essential.

It follows from these considerations that a short transmission time and good
dependability are more important than security.
The following configuration and settings are recommended for a blocking line
protection scheme:

Command output type: solid state

Command transmission: non-coded
Transmission time: T01 ( = 10 ms)
Security/dependability: increased dependability
Command prolongation: 0 ms

The corresponding configuration, setup and further programming instructions are

to be found in Section 11.3.10.

With the above settings, a signal-to-noise ratio of about 6 dB is necessary for

successful transmission of blocking signals. The rate of spurious commands for
noise bursts of 200 ms duration and the worst possible signal-to-noise ratio is
always less than 10-4.

11.3.5.4 Unblocking

The standard NSD550 includes an unblocking function.

An „unblocking“ command used in directional comparison or in permissive

tripping schemes with overreaching first zone can be allocated to one or more
outputs on the relay interface module. Note that „unblocking“ commands are not
transmitted from the remote end, but automatically produced by certain types of
line faults.

Should PLC communication be almost completely lost, e.g. in the seldom case of
a phase-to-phase fault involving the phases used for PLC coupling in the
immediate vicinity of the station, or in the case of single-phase PLC coupling, the
transmission of transfer tripping signals cannot be absolutely guaranteed. Without
a tripping signal a distance relay will only trip in its second time step. The purpose
of the unblocking function is to avoid this delay. It does so by closing the
unblocking contacts of the NSD550 for 200 ms in the event of a PLC channel
failure, i.e. when the NSD550 is receiving neither guard nor tripping signals. This
"emergency" feature can be used in different ways:
- to switch the reach of the distance relay (under/overreaching first zone)

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-11

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

- as an enabling signal by connecting the unblocking output contact in parallel

with the tripping signal output of the NSD550. This is used above all in the
case of permissive overreaching blocking schemes.

One or two of the potentially-free relay outputs located on the teleprotection inter-
face type G4AI are usually configured to signal the unblocking command.

11.3.5.5 Protecting Dual-Circuit Lines

Dual-circuit lines often form important links in power systems at the higher
system voltages. The line protection is usually supported by a breaker failure
protection scheme.

An NSD550 in operating mode “2+2” with the non-coded commands set as given
in Section 11.3.5.1 and with the coded commands programmed as instructed in
Section 11.3.5.2 is sufficient for the two line protection signals and the two
breaker failure direct tripping signals. All commands can be transmitted and
received with one single teleprotection interface type G4AI.

Certain rules of priority govern the issue of tripping signals by an NSD550 using
three or four commands. It may be assumed as a general rule that direct transfer
commands set for coded transmission of tripping signals take priority over
permissive commands set for non-coded transmission of tripping signals. The
precise relationships for operating mode “2+2” are given in the following table.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-12

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

Injected commands at Commands Transmission

the transmitter input actually transmitted mode

A A non-coded
B B non-coded
A and B A and B non-coded

C C coded
D D coded
C and D C and D coded

A and D A and D coded

B and C B and C coded
A and C C coded
B and D D coded

A and B and C B and C coded

A and B and D A and D coded
A and C and D C and D coded
B and C and D C and D coded

A and B and C and D C and D coded

A and B are the two permissive commands (set for non-coded transmission of
tripping signals).
C and D are the two direct transfer commands (set for coded transmission of
tripping signals).

Important dual-circuit lines (132 kV to 400 kV) are often equipped with 1st. and
2nd. main protections supported by breaker failure protection on each circuit.
Logically, redundant communication channels should also be installed such that
the protection of both circuits remains fully intact should one set of equipment fail
due to a defect or human error, or be out of commission for servicing.

The NSD550 with its four transfer tripping signals is especially well equipped to
efficiently handle the tripping commands generated by redundant main and
breaker failure protection schemes for a dual-circuit line. An extremely reliable
overall scheme would comprise two sets of PLC and NSD550 equipment, the
NSD550's having the need of only one relay interface for four transfer tripping
signals each. A corresponding example of a redundant teleprotection scheme
can be seen in Figure 11-2 (operating mode „2+2“).

The settings for the permissive main protection commands should as given in
Section 11.3.5.1 and those for the direct tripping commands as given in Section
11.3.5.2.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-13

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

LINE 1
B PHASE

ETL500
MP1 Line 1 A
CF 1
MP2 Line 2 B

BFP Line 1 C
BFP Line 2 D NSD550

ETL500

MP1 Line 2 A CF 2
MP2 Line 1 B

C
D NSD550

LINE 2
MP1: 1st. main protection B PHASE
MP2: 2nd. main protection

BFP: breaker failure protection CF: coupling filter

+ overvoltage protection
+ compensator protection

Figure 11-2: Redundant protection of a dual-circuit line

11.3.5.6 Protecting Single-Circuit Lines

One or two signals - one for a permissive scheme and possibly a direct transfer
tripping signal - are usually sufficient when protecting lines in the low to medium
voltage range.

This task can be easily accomplished with the NSD550 using one relay interface.
Since the interface has four input and six output circuits, further functions can be
activated, e.g. start input, unblocking or redundant command output. One of the
commands is programmed to be non-coded (A) with short transmission time for
the permissive scheme and the other to be coded (D) for direct transfer tripping.
There are then two virtually independent commands available. If both commands
(A+D) are injected simultaneously, the combination is transmitted as a coded
tripping signal (refer to Section 11.3.5.5).
The following recommended settings thus result:

Command output type: solid state

Transmission of command 1 (permissive): non-coded
Transmission of command 2 (direct): coded
Transmission time for command 1: T02 ( = 14 ms)
Transmission time for command 2: T02 ( = 26 ms)
Security/dependability for command 1: increased dependability
Security/dependability for command 2: increased security
Command prolongation for command 1: 0 ms
Command prolongation for command 2: 100 ms

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-14

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

The corresponding settings and further programming instructions are to be found

in Section 11.3.10.

Important single-circuit lines (400 kV to 800 kV) are always equipped with
duplicated main protection, breaker failure protection and perhaps a generator
shutdown / load shedding facility. Two ETL500 links, each with a four-command
NSD550, are then arranged in a fully duplicated teleprotection scheme according
to Figure 11-3 (operating mode „2+2“).

Such an arrangement requires the transmission of three or four transfer tripping

signals, one permissive signal for each of the main protections, a direct transfer
tripping signal for the breaker failure scheme and perhaps a direct transfer
tripping signal for the generator shotdown / load shedding facility.

In this case the NSD550 is again equipped with one relay interface at least.
Additional interfaces may be plugged into reserved slots if more functions are to
be used.

The teleprotection interface type G4AI is used for the two main protection
commands (A, B), and for the direct tripping commands (C, D). The settings for
the permissive commands should be those given in Section 11.3.5.1 and for the
direct tripping command those given in Section 11.3.5.2.

It should be noted that the direct transfer tripping command (C) always takes
priority over the permissive command (A), i.e. when (A) and (C) are being
generated at the transmitting end, only the (C) will actually be transmitted. If the
commands B+C are injected simultaneously, the combination is transmitted as a
coded tripping signal (refer to Section 11.3.5.5). This is, however, of little
consequence in practice.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-15

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

A PHASE

ETL500
MP1 A
CF 1
MP2 B

BFP C
GSD/LS D NSD550

ETL500

A CF 2
B

C
D NSD550

B PHASE
MP1: 1st. main protection GSD: generator shot down
MP2: 2nd. main protection LS: load shedding

BFP: breaker failure protection CF: coupling filter

+ overvoltage protection
+ compensator protection

Figure 11-3 Duplicated protection for a single-circuit line

An especially high availability of the communications channel may be specified at

important power lines of the highest voltage range. A second set of PLC and
NSD550 equipment is recommended in these situations. The command inputs
and outputs of which are simply connected in parallel.

11.3.5.7 Phase Segregated Line Protection

An NSD550 with its four commands can also be used for phase-segregated
protection of a three-phase line (operating mode „3+1“). The non-coded
commands A, B and C then mean „permission to trip phase A, B, or C“; in the
event of a 2-phase or 3-phase fault, the coded command D means „permission to
trip all three phases“.

Certain rules of priority govern the issue of tripping signals by an NSD550 using
more than one command. It may be assumed as a general rule that a direct
transfer command set for coded transmission of tripping signals will be
transmitted when more than one permissive command set for non-coded trans-
mission of tripping signals are injected. The precise relationships for operating
mode “3+1” are given in the following table.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-16

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

Injected commands at Commands Transmission

the transmitter input actually transmitted mode

A A non-coded
B B non-coded
A and B D coded

C C non-coded
D D coded
C and D D coded

A and D D coded
B and C D coded
A and C D coded
B and D D coded

A and B and C D coded

A and B and D D coded
A and C and D D coded
B and C and D D coded

A and B and C and D D coded

A, B and C are the three permissive commands (set for non-coded transmission
of tripping signals).
D is the direct transfer command (set for coded transmission of tripping signals)
which is transmitted when more than one command is injected.

11.3.5.8 Relaying Tripping Signals Through Intermediate Stations

In relatively seldom cases it is necessary for protection tripping signals to be

relayed through intermediate (repeater) stations. One possibility in the repeater
station is to connect two NSD550's via teleprotection interfaces back-to-back, but
this has the disadvantage that each repeater station increases the end-to-end
transmission time by the standard channel transit time (the operating times are
connected in series).

Better performance from the transmission time point of view is achieved by

establishing a wide-band AF four-wire link between the two PLC units in the
repeater station. Occassionally pilot blocking filters are installed because of
system requirements to prevent the pilot signal from passing through the repeater
station.

The lack of pilot continuity is overcome by arranging for the NSD550 units at the
two terminal stations to generate their own guard signals using a frequency within
the band which will pass through the repeater station. The corresponding setting
information for selecting an independent guard signal is to be found in Section

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-17

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

11.3.10. This arrangement has the disadvantage that the ETL pilot signal and
superimposed data channels are only disconnected on the first line section when
a command is injected. Therefore the maximum boost level has to be carefully
calculated (adapted to the ETL500 link for the second line section).

No teleprotection interfaces may be inserted in the PLC equipment and the

NSD550 has to be switched off in the repeater station when using this operating
mode! Speech in channel 1 of the ETL500 may only be transferred between the
end stations.

11.3.6 Performance Criteria

11.3.6.1 Transmission Time

Nominal Transmission Time (T0)

The nominal transmission time T0 is the transmission time measured under

noise-free transmission conditions. It is measured with nominal signal levels at
the transmitter output and the receiver input. The ETL500 RF terminals are
connected back-to-back via an artificial line with nominal attenuation.

T0 is the time elapsed between the instant of change of state at the input
terminals of the teleprotection interface type G4AI and the instant of the
corresponding change of state at the output terminals.

The user can choose one of three programmable nominal transmission times for
the non-coded tripping signals as well as for the coded tripping signal. He can
also select one of two levels of security for the non-coded commands and the
coded commands. However all the non-coded commands will have the same
transmission time and security. The same applies to the coded commands.

Maximum Actual Transmission Time (Tac)

The maximum actual transmission time Tac is the maximum transmission time
encountered under noisy channel conditions for a defined dependability and
signal-to-noise ratio (SNR). It is measured with continuous white noise applied to
the RF input of the ETL500 receiver.

Commands which are not received within Tac are considered as lost or missed
commands (refer also to paragraph 11.3.6.3 “Dependability”).

11.3.6.2 Security

All security measurements were performed according to the procedures

prescribed in IEC 60834-1.

Security measurements: noise burst 200 ms

duration of pause 200 ms
noise bandwidth 4 kHz

Security is determined by coupling bursts of white noise of high amplitude into the
communications channel. The number of bursts injected and the number of false
commands they cause at the receiving end are counted.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-18

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

The probability of unwanted commands is then calculated according to the

following relationship:

Puc = Nuc / NB

Puc = probability of an unwanted command

Nuc = number of unwanted commands received
NB = number of noise bursts injected

11.3.6.3 Dependability

All dependability measurements were performed according to the procedures

prescribed in IEC 60834-1.

Dependability measurements: command duration 50 ms or 3 * T0

duration of pause 2 * command duration
noise bandwidth 4 kHz
continuous noise

Dependability is determined by sending a large number of commands to the

remote station. The number of commands transmitted and the number of
commands received within a specified time (normally 1.3*T0, 1.5*T0 and 2*T0)
are recorded. The lower the signal-to-noise ratio at the input of the receiving
NSD550, the fewer the commands which will be received in the prescribed time.

The following applies for a sufficiently high number of transmitted commands:

Pmc = (NT - NR) / NT

Pmc = probability of missing a command

NT = number of commands transmitted
NR = number of commands received

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-19

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

Dependability (Pmc):

Recommended setting for permissive tripping

Command A, B, A+B: Tev2, non-coded, increased dependability,

T02=14ms, mode 1 ("2+2"), ETL-pilot 3840Hz
1.00E+00

1.00E-01

<1.0T0
<1.3T0
<1.5T0
Pmc 1.00E-02
<2.0T0
<3.0T0

1.00E-03

1.00E-04
-6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8 10
SNR

Pmc = probability of missing a command T0 = nominal transmission time

SNR = signal-to-noise ratio in 4 kHz bandwidth Tac = actual transmission time

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-20

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

Dependability (Pmc):

Recommended setting for direct transfer tripping (breaker failure protection)

Command C, D, C+D: Tev2, coded, increased security,

T02=26ms, mode 1 ("2+2"), ETL-pilot = 3840Hz
1.00E+00

1.00E-01

<1.0T0
<1.3T0
<1.5T0
Pmc 1.00E-02
<2.0T0
<3.0T0

1.00E-03

1.00E-04
-4 -2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12
SNR

Pmc = probability of missing a command T0 = nominal transmission time

SNR = signal-to-noise ratio in 4 kHz bandwidth Tac = actual transmission time

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-21

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

Dependability (Pmc):

Recommended setting for direct transfer tripping (line protection)

Command C, D, C+D: Tev1, coded, increased dependability,

T01=16ms, mode 1 ("2+2"), ETL-pilot = 3840Hz
1.00E+00

1.00E-01

<1.0T0
<1.3T0
<1.5T0
Pmc 1.00E-02
<2.0T0
<3.0T0

1.00E-03

1.00E-04
-2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12
SNR

Pmc = probability of missing a command T0 = nominal transmission time

SNR = signal-to-noise ratio in 4 kHz bandwidth Tac = actual transmission time

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-22

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

Dependability (Pmc):

Recommended setting for blocking schemes

Command A, B, A+B: Tev1, non-coded, increased dependability,

T01=10ms, mode 1 ("2+2"), ETL pilot = 3840Hz
1.00E+00

1.00E-01

<1.0T0
<1.3T0
<1.5T0
Pmc 1.00E-02
<2.0T0
<3.0T0

1.00E-03

1.00E-04
-4 -2 0 2 4 6 8 10
SNR

Pmc = probability of missing a command T0 = nominal transmission time

SNR = signal-to-noise ratio in 4 kHz bandwidth Tac = actual transmission time

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-23

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

11.3.7 Operating Principle

The NSD550 uses the pilot signal of the ETL500 as a guard signal. It is
continuously evaluated on the receive side. In case of insufficient signal quality
(signal-to-noise ratio or signal level) the NSD550 initiates an alarm.

For special purpose, e.g. transit relaying of NSD550 signals in a repeater station,
a separate guard signal for the teleprotection may be programmed. It is then
located above the chosen speech frequency band (2.0, 2.2 or 2.4 kHz).

In the command state, the NSD550 cuts the guard signal (pilot and own guard)
and transmits the tripping signal within the ETL500 speech frequency band. The
tripping signal can be boosted to the maximum available transmitter power.
Speech and selected data signals (set as “disconnectable”) on both PLC
channels are interrupted during the short time of command transmission.

A start criterion from the protection relay may be used to prepare the channel for
transmission of protection signals by switching off speech in advance.

If the duration of a command transmission exceeds ten seconds, an alarm will be

given at the transmit end and the guard signal as well as speech and
superimposed data channels are switched on again.

As soon as the receiver recognizes the missing guard signal and simultaneously
detects a valid tripping signal of adequate quality, the corresponding output is
operated. Simultaneous reception or simultaneous loss of a tripping signal and
the guard tone leads to an alarm. In the latter case, the output(s) programmed for
unblocking function are activated for the preset duration (default setting: 200 ms).

At the receiver side speech is interrupted as long as a command is given to the

outputs. This prevent the command tones to be relayed for an unduly long time to
other line sections, e.g. via a switchboard.

Eight preset frequencies corresponding to the various commands or command

combinations are provided in the PLC speech frequency band. A non-coded
tripping signal is represented by a single frequency for obtaining the best
practical signal-to-noise ratio and short command transmission time in the PLC
channel. When coded signal transmission is used, the tripping signal is switched
between two discrete frequencies to give added security against speech and
interference, e.g. an audio frequency generator.
By making use of the carrier pilot for monitoring the quiescent state of the tripping
channel and the speech band for transmitting the tripping signals, the NSD550
does not require any PLC bandwidth of its own.

Signals are processed completely digitally by a signal-processor, i.e. signal

generation at the transmitting end and filtering and evaluation of the guard and
tripping signals at the receiving end. The only A/D and D/A converters are at the
RF section of the PLC equipment. Digital processing eliminates calibrating, as
well as the influences of ageing and temperature fluctuations. Adaptive
algorithms especially developed for PLC channels adjust themselves conti-
nuously to the prevailing PLC channel conditions and achieve even under worst-
case conditions the high degree of security against loss of genuine, respectively
acceptance of false tripping commands, which is essential for protection signals.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-24

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

11.3.8 Functional Description

11.3.8.1 General

The NSD550 can be operated in the 4 kHz bandwidth channel as well as in 8 kHz
bandwidth channel provided by the ETL500. In case of a dual-channel PLC it is
always assigned to the first channel.

A detailed description of the ETL500 operating principle can be found in Section

3, a detailed description of the NSD550 operating principle can be found in
Section 11.3.7.

11.3.8.2 Speech Bandwidth

The NSD550 supports all programmable speech channels (2.0, 2.2, 2.4, 2.6, 2.8,
3.0, 3.2 and 3.4 kHz) when using the ETL500 pilot as a guard signal. The trip
frequencies are always transmitted in the band 0.3 … 2.0 kHz. Adequate filtering
is performed to separate the band from superimposed teleoperation channels.

An own guard signal is only provided for the following speech channels: 2.0, 2.2
and 2.4 kHz.

To avoid additional transmission delays, the non-equalized receive signal is used

for processing the NSD550 tripping signals.

11.3.8.3 Guard Signal

Default setting for the NSD550 guard signal is the ETL500 pilot at 3840 Hz. The
disposable teleoperation band is then limited from 120 Hz above speech up to
3600 Hz.

If the ETL500 pilot signal is shifted from its default value to lower frequencies,
teleoperation channels may only be allocated with a frequency margin of
± 240 Hz from the centre of the pilot channel.

For special purpose, e.g. transit relaying of NSD550 signals in a repeater station,
a separate guard signal for the teleprotection may be programmed. It is then
located above the chosen speech frequency band. This is however possible only
for the following speech channels: 2.0, 2.2 or 2.4 kHz.

A gap of 480 Hz has to be reserved for the own guard signal of the NSD550. The
disposable teleoperation band is therefor limited from 480 Hz above speech up to
3720 Hz.

The performance figures NSD550 for security, dependability and transmission

time are equal when using an own guard signal or when using the ETL500 pilot
as a guard signal.

The nominal guard/pilot signal level is -6 dBm0.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-25

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

ETL: useful AF bandwidth

Speech 2000 Hz Teleoperation Ch. Pilot

Speech 2200 Hz Teleoperation Ch. Pilot

Speech 2400 Hz Teleop. Ch. Pilot

Speech 3400 Hz Pilot

2320 Hz 3600 Hz
NSD550 Pilotfilter 2120 Hz 2520 Hz 3840 Hz

Figure 11-4: Examples for allocation of the 4 kHz band with speech and the
ETL500 pilot as NSD550 guard signal

ETL: useful AF bandwidth

Speech 2000 Hz Guard Teleoperation Ch. Pilot

Speech 2200 Hz Guard Teleop. Ch. Pilot

Speech 2400 Hz Guard Teleop. Ch. Pilot

Speech 3400 Hz Pilot

2680 Hz 3720 Hz
2480 Hz 2880 Hz 3840 Hz

Figure 11-5: Examples for allocation of the 4 kHz band with speech and an
own NSD550 guard signal

11.3.8.4 Command Signals

The following eight preset frequencies corresponding to the commands or

command combinations also given below are provided in the PLC speech
frequency band (0.3 … 2.0 kHz). A non-coded command signal is represented by
a single frequency for obtaining the best practical signal-to-noise ratio and short
command transmission time in the PLC channel. When coded signal
transmission is used, the command signal is switched between two discrete
frequencies to give added security against speech and interference, e.g. an audio
frequency generator. Each frequency is transmitted during the time 1.3 x the
programmed evaluation time Tev.

Test signal frequency f1 427 Hz

Trip signal frequencies f2 640 Hz
f3 853 Hz
f4 1067 Hz
f5 1280 Hz
f6 1493 Hz
f7 1707 Hz
f8 1920 Hz

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-26

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

Command assignment to trip frequencies:

Op.mode "2+2" Op.mode "3+1" f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 f6 f7 f8

Test Test x
A A x
B B x
A+B C x
C x x
D D x x
C+D x x
A+D x x
B+C x x

Signal evaluation time Tev Tev1 : 4.7 ms

Tev2 : 9.4 ms
Tev3 : 18.8 ms

The nominal test/tripping signal level is 0 dBm0.

11.3.8.5 Interference in Speech Band

The NSD550 is under normal operating conditions secure against:

- speech
- sweep tones in speech band
- Test tones of the PLC equipment (generated via MMI500)
- DTMF signalling
- MFC signalling

Under certain circumstances an NSD550 alarm may arise, e.g. when a discrete
frequency of a tone generator meets a trip frequency, but no unwanted command
will be activated.

Generally speaking, modem signals have to be avoided in the speech band of

0.3 … 2.0 kHz. They should be allocated above speech or in the second channel
of the ETL500.

For compatibility with AMX500 refer to the corresponding Instruction Manual.

11.3.8.6 Signal Boosting; Disconnection of Speech and Data Channels

Boosting in connection with a PLC channel means that the power used for
transmitting transfer tripping signals is stepped up in relation to the quiescent
state (i.e. unboosted loop test signal level of 0 dBm0). During the transmission of
tripping signals, the communication of speech, teleoperation channels (set as
“disconnectable”) and modem signals superimposed on the speech in both
channels is switched off so that the total transmitter power is available for the
tripping signals. This ensures the best possible signal-to-noise ratio at the
receiving NSD550. The ratio between the powers of the boosted transfer tripping
signals and the unboosted test signal is referred to as the boost ratio and is
normally expressed in decibel (dB).

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-27

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

The boost ratio which can be achieved depends on what other PLC signals can
be switched off while tripping signals are being transmitted. This in turn is
dependent on just how many signals the PLC channel has to handle and for this
reason, the boost ratio is calculated automatically by the ETL500 after configuring
the equipment and not in the NSD550. The maximum boost level is 10 dB, it can
be decreased via MMI500 to a value between 0 dB and the possible boost ratio
established by the ETL500. It may be necessary to select some teleoperation
channels (e.g. an AMX500 in the second channel) to be “not disconnectable”.
The boost ratio is accordingly decreased by the equipment. Further information
on boosting is to be found in Section 3 in this Instruction Manual.
Note: The NSD550 loop test is performed at the test

level of 0 dBm0 and is not boosted. The loop test
is thus performed under more exacting conditions
than those of boosted transfer tripping signals.

The guard (pilot) signal level is 6 dB below the test signal level.

11.3.8.7 Command Prolongation

A command prolongation, which can be set between 0 and 3000 ms, ensures a
steady output command even in the event of discontinuations of the signal being
received.

The receiver of the NSD550 compensates the command duration without

prolongation for equal pulse width as the transmitted command at the remote
station.

Tac
Local: Prolongation
G4AI Input

Remote:
G4AI Output

Figure 11-6: Command Prolongation Time

11.3.8.8 Commands and Command Combinations

Commands for A, B, A+B (non-coded) 2

operating mode “2+2” C, D, C+D (coded) 2
C+B, D+A (coded) (special combinations)

Commands for A, B, C (non-coded) 3

operating mode “3+1” D (coded) 1

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-28

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

Priority rules:

Injected Transmitted commands Transmission mode

commands
Op.mode "2+2" Op.mode "3+1" Op.mode "2+2" Op.mode "3+1"
A A A non-coded non-coded
B B B non-coded non-coded
A+B A+B D non-coded coded
C C C coded non-coded
D D D coded coded
C+D C+D D coded coded
A+C C D coded coded
A+D A+D D coded coded
B+C B+C D coded coded
B+D D D coded coded
A+B+C B+C D coded coded
A+B+D A+D D coded coded
A+C+D C+D D coded coded
B+C+D C+D D coded coded
A+B+C+D C+D D coded coded

11.3.8.9 Command Counters

An individual counter is incremented and stored in the non-volatile memory for

each transmitted and received command as well as for the unblocking condition.
It is possible to reset the counters selectively via the MMI500. The counter range
before overflow is > 109.

11.3.8.10 Tx Trip Duration Monitoring

The duration of the commands injected at the G4AI inputs is continuously

monitored. The Tx trip duration monitor is valid for all commands in common, i.e.
for non-coded and coded commands. Alarm is given and the guard signal is
transmitted instead of the tripping signal should the command duration exceed a
predefined value (10 seconds per default, programmable via MMI500 in the
range 1 … 15 seconds). Also the boost criterion is set inactive and the interrupted
teleoperation channels are re-connected again.

Should the command combination at the input change before the Tx trip duration
alarm is given, the pick-up time is restarted from zero again.

11.3.8.11 Blocking of AGC

If the NSD550 receiver accepts the signal as a genuine tripping command (no
pilot signal and tripping signal at the proper frequency in the speech band), the
reception of speech by the ETL500 is interrupted and the automatic gain control
(AGC) in the ETL500 is blocked. The latter is necessary to prevent the ETL500

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-29

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

gain from increasing as a result of the missing pilot signal whilst tripping signals
are being received.

11.3.8.12 Command Outputs in Link Alarm State

Provision is made for the user to configure via MMI500 how the command
outputs should respond to an NSD550 link alarm (i.e. level or SNR alarm). The
following alternatives are available:

a) All command outputs assume states in accordance with current input signal
processing, i.e. they disregard the alarms (default setting).
b) All command outputs are set to their quiescent states (i.e. no trip).
c) The outputs of the commands programmed for non-coded transmission of
tripping signals are set to their active states (i.e. trip) and those for coded
transmission of tripping signals to their quiescent states.

The corresponding MMI500 settings are given in Section 11.3.10.

The responses of the command outputs according to b) and c) become effective

after an internal alarm processing time (e.g. approx. 1 second for low level alarm)
from the instant the alarm condition arises and remain so throughout the alarm
condition and for a further processing time of the same quantity after it
disappears. The pick-up time and the hold time can be further delayed by 0 …15
seconds. This might be necessary if, for example, clamping of the command
outputs should be avoided in case of recurrent noise bursts on the power line,
produced by switching operations involving slow speed isolators. The
interference so generated is characterized by high amplitude and relatively long
duration of up to 8 seconds.

Alternative a) is the default setting when the units are supplied from the works.
With this setting the NSD550 responds normally to changes in the statuses of the
input signals. It is permissible in spite of the alarm condition, because of the high
security of the direct (coded) transfer tripping signals.

Sometimes setting b) is preferred to setting a), for example, when redundant sets
of communications equipment are installed.

Setting c) is only used in seldom cases with overreaching or blocking protection

schemes having special logics and in certain instances for blocking auto-
reclosure relays.

11.3.8.13 Cyclic Loop Test

An cyclic loop test sequentially checks the integrity of the teleprotection channel.
The test signal simulates the transmission of a genuine tripping signal and is
recognized as such at the receiving end, from whence it is echoed back to the
transmitter. The test is deemed successfully, providing the transmitter receives
the echo. If it does not, the test is repeated and alarm is given should the results
of three subsequent trials be negative.

The cyclic loop test can always be activated also if no speech is configured in
channel 1. When a test signal has to be transmitted, speech and the ETL500 pilot
are switched off. All superimposed teleoperation channels remain active. If no

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-30

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

speech bandwidth is configured, the superimposed teleoperation channels set as

“disconnectable” are switched off to obtain the necessary transmitter power.

If the NSD550 uses its own guard signal, the ETL500 pilot is not switched off
whilst transmitting the loop test signal.

The loop test signal is transmitted without boosting, i.e. with a test tone level of
0 dBm0. The first cyclic loop test is sent 10 minutes after power-on the
equipment.

Providing the cyclic loop test is not set to off by the MMI500, a test signal with its
own frequency is transmitted to the opposite station and reflected back once –
depending on the programming - every 3/6/12/24 hours. The test signal is
processed in the same way as a normal tripping signal (interruption of the guard
signal and transmission of a test frequency for 30 ms; the reception of the
reflected signal must take place 15 … 100 ms after sendig it), which ensures that
all the functions required for transmitting a tripping signal are fully tested. In case
an automatically initiated test is not correctly received results in it being repeated
at intervals of about 5 minutes until either the remote station answers or a
continuous alarm is given after the third attempt. Note that, quality of the
transmission channel permitted, the loop test can be correctly executed even if
the guard signal is permanently lost. The loss of the guard signal is, however,
signalled by both ETL500 and NSD550.

The testing facilities impair in no way the ability of the equipment to respond to a
protection command, i.e. a genuine tripping command is always given priority
over all tests.

11.3.8.14 Manual Loop Test

The loop test can also be initiated manually from any station via the MMI500. The
result of the test can be viewed in a window. The actual measured transmission
time is displayed (half the value of both directions there and back, plus 1 ms
delay for one input and one ouput circuit of a teleprotection interface type G4AI,
which can not be included in this test).

The signal used for this test has the same parameters (security and dependa-
bility) as the non-coded tripping signals.

If the reflection of a manually transmitted test signal is not correctly received, it is

correspondingly displayed in the loop test window.

A manually initiated loop test is transmitted in the same way as the cyclic loop
test.

11.3.8.15 Local Test Mode

The NSD550 can be set via MMI500 to a local operating mode for checking the
relay interfaces, e.g. for measuring the command prolongation. In this operating
mode, which is indicated by the “warning” LEDs and via the MMI500 by the alarm
message "LOCAL TEST MODE", the command input signal is looped via the
TDM bus by the processor on the RF converter P4LQ back to the corresponding
command output of the local teleprotection interface type G4AI.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-31

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

During the test mode the guard signal is continuously transmitted to the opposite
station. It is noted that commands can not be transferred between the stations
when the equipment is in the local test mode.

11.3.8.16 Start Inputs

A start criterion from the protection relay may be used to prepare the channel for
transmission of protection signals by switching off speech in advance.

On the same relay interface type G4AI one input per command can be configured
as a start input. The interruption of speech is limited to 1 second, beginning with
the first start input being activated. Should no command be injected, alarm is
given after the programmed Tx trip duration alarm pick-up time and will stay as
long as the start input is active.

11.3.8.17 Tx Command Acknowledge

Each Tx command A … D can be reflected from the processing unit P4LQ to one
of the various outputs on the teleprotection interface type G4AI to acknowledge
that the corresponding command was sent. Nevertheless this is no confirmation
that the command could also be received from the opposite station.

11.3.8.18 Unblocking

At time when neither tripping nor guard signals are being received, or when the
total signal level in the 2 kHz band is lower than -14 dBm0 (unblocking level 1) or
-10 dBm0 (unblocking level 2), an unblocking impulse of a predefined duration is
generated which can be signalled by one or more outputs on the relay interface
type G4AI.

The internal signal evaluation time to detect the unblocking condition is typical
less than 20 ms. It is possible to define an additional delay via MMI500 in the
range 1 … 100 ms.

The unblocking pulse duration is set to 200 ms per default but can be varied in
the range 50 … 1000 ms.

11.3.8.19 Rx Guard

The state of the NSD550 guard/pilot receiver can be signaled by the RF

converter type P4LQ to one of the various outputs on the teleprotection interface
type G4AI. Reception of the ETL500 pilot signal or the own NSD550 guard with
adequate signal quality means that the corresponding solid state output is closed
or the coil of the selected relay contact is energized.

11.3.8.20 Alarms

Self-testing routines continuously monitor the operational status of the NSD550.

A list of alarm messages and their causes can be found in Section 11.3.13

The alarm concept of the ETL500 including NSD550 is described in Section 3.

The following criteria are continuously monitored and produce alarms:

• Guard signal level out of limits (>± 3dB from nominal)

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-32

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

• Signal-to-noise ratio to low (the threshold for the SNR alarm depends on the
setting of the nominal transmission time and the security/dependability trade-
off; 3 dB above the specified value of Pmc < 1 %)
• Cyclic loop test failure (> 3 attempts)
• Tx single component failure (from relay interface; after > 1 second)
• Rx single component failure (guard and tripping signals being either received
simultaneously or completely lost; after > 1 second)
• Tx command duration (sending the guard signal, speech and the dis-
connectable channels again after a predefined time; default 10 seconds)
• Checksum error (PROM failure; instantaneous)
• System clock error (PLC equipment not standing by; instantaneous)

Following NSD550 alarms can be signaled individually on any output of G4AI:

• G4AI alarm (hardware and TDM bus problems)
• NSD link alarm (SNR and level alarm)
• NSD hardware alarm (NSD550 related hardware problems on G4AI and
P4LQ)
• NSD alarm (summary alarm of NSD550 problems)

All NSD550 alarms can be combined and signaled as NSD550 summary alarm
on R1BC.

The alarm pick-up time and the alarm hold time can be set in the range from 1 …
15 seconds. They are valid for all alarms in common.

11.3.8.21 NSD550 in 8 kHz Operating Mode

The whole functionality of the NSD550 without restrictions is provided in 8 kHz

operating mode. The operating principle is the same as in 4 kHz operating mode,
i.e. the transmssion of the trip frequencies takes place in the band 0.3 … 2.0 kHz,
but there is no own guard signal for the NSD550 available.

For the 8 kHz operating mode refer also to the AMX500 Instruction Manual
1KHL016405.

11.3.9 Event Recorder

11.3.9.1 General

The event recorder registers special events of the ETL500 system, provides them
with an accurate time stamp and stores the information sequentially into a non
volatile memory. The resolution of the events which can be discriminated
between is 1 ms.

There are two different kind of events: the NSD550 command events and the
ETL500 and NSD550 alarm events. They are recorded into two different blocks
of the memory.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-33

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

The maximum number of events per block is 2600. If more than 2600 events per
block occur, the eldest events are deleted and the 1000 newest events of each
block are preserved.

The timing information for the event recorder is provided by the real time clock
(RTC) on the RF converter type P4LQ. The date and time is set via the user
interface MMI500. If the accuracy of the RTC is not sufficient, an external clock
can be used.

The events are displayed by means of the MMI500. There are two views
available: a text based view and a graphic view. The graphic view gives the
possibility to compare files with event information from different equipment on
one display.

11.3.9.2 NSD550 Command Events

The event recorder acquires the timing information of all commands when they
appear on the inputs and outputs of the teleprotection interface type G4AI.

The following events are recorded as NSD550 command events:

• Start time and end time of all commands transmitted
• Start time and end time of all commands received including command
prolongation.
• Start and end time of an unblocking pulse

All these events are stored in the same block. The maximum number of
command events is 2600.

To upload the command events from the ETL500 equipment use:

Equipment/Commissioning and maintenance/ Eventrecorder/Upload events

11.3.9.3 Alarm Events

The event recorder acquires the alarms as they appear on the alarm relays.
Meaning after an pick up and with an hold time.

The following events are recorded as alarm events:

• Start time, end time and time of a change in the ETL hardware alarm
• Start time, end time and time of a change in the ETL link alarm
• Start time, end time and time of a change of the NSD alarm
• Start time and end time of alarms on the optional modules (G4AI, O4LE)
• Start time, end time and time of a change of communication errors on the
TDM bus
• Time when a loop test was sent
• Time when a loop test was reflected
• Time when a loop test failed
• Time when the configuration was stored
• Time when a new date and time was set

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-34

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

• Time when the equipment started up

• Time when a command counter was set to zero
• Number of lost events in case of overload

All these events are stored in the same block. The maximum number of alarm
events is 2600.

To upload the alarm events from the ETL500 equipment use:

Equipment/Commissioning and maintenance/ Eventrecorder/Upload events

11.3.9.4 NSD550 Command Counters

All transmitted and received NSD550 commands and the number of unblocking
pulses are counted independently by command counters. The counters will
overflow after > 109 commands. They are stored in non volatile memory.

To upload the command counters from the ETL500 equipment use:

Equipment/Commissioning and maintenance/ Eventrecorder/Upload
counters

11.3.9.5 Upload Events

To upload and display the events in the user interface MMI500 use:
Equipment/Commissioning and maintenance/ Eventrecorder/Upload events

You can choose between uploading the command events or the alarm events or
both of them. Further you have the choice to read all events or only from a certain
date and thereafter. Date and time are entered in the form: DD MM JJ and HH
MM.

Uploading and processing the events can take quite some time depending on the
number of events which has to be read. You can see the progress of the
uploading in the status bar of the user interface MMI500. The upload may be
interrupted by pressing the read stop button in the tool bar.

11.3.9.6 Upload Counters

To upload the NSD550 command counters from to ETL500 into the user interface
MMI500 use:
Equipment/Commissioning and maintenance/ Eventrecorder/Upload events
See NSD550 command counters for more information.

11.3.9.7 Reset Counter

Use Equipment/Commissioning and maintenance/ Eventrecorder/Upload

events to set the NSD550 command counters back to zero. You have to be
connected to the ETL500 equipment with read and write access.
You can reset all or only selected counters.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-35

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

11.3.9.8 Set Clock

This dialogue enables you to set the Real Time Clock (RTC) on the RF converter
P4LQ. The actual time of your PC will be downloaded to the ETL500 with the
Download date/time to RTC button.

Pressing the button Upload date/time from RTC reads the date and the time
information from the ETL500 system.

You have to be connected to the ETL500 equipment with read and write access
to perform the operations mentioned above.

The RTC power supply is buffered by a capacitor. The time and date information
will be maintained for about one day.

If the accuracy of the RTC is not sufficient, an external clock can be used.

11.3.9.9 RTC Synchronization From an External Clock

An external clock source can be supplied to increase the accuracy of the ETL500
system time. The clock signal has to be provided in the IRIG-B format at TTL
compliant level and it has to be connected to the AF interface type O4LE at slot
N11 (Krone connector 10a+ 10b-).

The IRIG-B format only informs about the time and the number of days having
passed in the current year but not about the number of the year. So the date and
time has to be set once manually in the ETL500 to supply the system with
information about the current year. See set clock for the procedure about how to
set the date and time.

11.3.9.10 Views

The events are displayed by means of the MMI500. There are two views
available. A text based and a graphic view. The graphic view gives the possibility
to analyze files with event information from different equipment on one display.

Text view

There are two ways to switch to the text view. If you have already uploaded the
events, use View/Display Events to change to the event recorder text view.

If you did not upload any events so far you have to use:
Equipment/Commissioning and maintenance/ Eventrecorder/Upload events
to read the events. When the upload has finished the MMI500 software switches
to the event recorder text view.

You will see the events in chronological order. The command events and the
alarm events are listed in two different tables one below the other. The
information is listed as follows: DATE / TIME / EVENT.

By pressing the right mouse button you have the following choice:
• Extend alarms:
This will extend the alarms and give you the exact information about what
alarm condition occurred. The processing of the alarms can take some time.
The status bar will inform you about the progress.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-36

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

• Graphic view:
Switch to the graphic view. See Graphic view for more information.
• Save as ASCII:
The command events will be saved in a ASCII format file. You can specify the
name in a files select dialog box. This option is intended to have the
possibility for processing the events with a customer specific software.

Graphic view

The graphic view displays the sequence of command events in the time domain.
You can specify which events you want to see in one view. It is possible to
analyze files with event information from different equipment in one display.

You can zoom or scroll in the time domain.

The graphic view display is subdivided into 4 views (view 1 to 4). In the lower part
of each view you have the information about date and time. In the upper left
corner you see the following information:
• View number
• Time per division in Days/ Hours/ Minutes/ Seconds/ Milliseconds per division
• Zoom Mode: In/Out

First you have to set up your views. You zoom out to find the events. Then zoom
in to see information in a more detailed form.

Set up the views

Press the right mouse button/Set up views. The ‘Select events’ dialogue box
appears.
• Choose the window you want to analyze events from
• Choose view.
• Select the events from the event frame. With a left mouse click.
• Press the Add>> button.

The command now appears in the selected events frame. Repeat this procedure
to add more events to the view. It is possible to add up to four different events to
one view

If you want to analyze events of different equipment you can upload the events
and store them into a *.mmi file (File/Save as). Then open the different files
(File/open). Switch to the ‘Graphic View’ and press right mouse button/Set up
views. Now you can select files in the ‘Window‘ selection box of the ‘Select
events’ dialogue box

Zooming the Graphic View

To zoom you have to press the left mouse button in the black view area. Keep
the button pressed and move the mouse in horizontal direction.

If your zoom mode is ‘zoom in’ the resolution in the time domain will increase
otherwise in ‘zoom out’ mode it will be decreased.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-37

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

Pressing the left mouse button without moving the mouse will toggle between
the zoom mode.

Scrolling the Graphic View

To scroll you have to press the left mouse button in the grey view area with the
information about time and date. Keep the button pressed and move the mouse
in horizontal direction.

Right mouse button

By pressing the right mouse button you have the following choice:
• Set zoom mode in/out
See above
• Set up views
See above
• Set start/ end time
Set the start and the end time of your graphic view to seek for events in a
certain time span
• Scroll
See above
• Text view
Switch back to the event recorder text view.

11.3.10 Configuration and Setup

11.3.10.1 Introduction

The configuration of the NSD550 has to be done along with the ETL500
equipment by means of the user interface MMI500. In fact the configuration file
for the ETL500 (made using MMI500) also contains the settings of the NSD550
teleprotection equipment.

The configuration file is normally made “off line” and is then downloaded in to the
RF-converter P4LQ. This is explained in detail in 'Programming and Testing
Instructions for the basic ETL500' (1KHL015940-EN). In addition to this, some
jumper settings have to be made on the teleprotection interface G4AI. This is also
explained in detail in 'Programming and Testing Instructions for the basic
ETL500' (1KHL015940-EN) which is available as an appendix in section 12.

11.3.10.2 Compatibility

Before configuring the NSD550, it essential to see the compatibility between the
user interface MMI500, the firmware on the modules and the hardware for
ETL500. For this please see 1KHL015559-EN.

11.3.10.3 User Interface Program – MMI500

The user interface MMI500 version 3.0x has been developed to Configure, Test &
Commission the NSD550 along with the ETL500 equipment. It is a typical
windows based software with the user friendly features of the windows
environment. The installation can be either on Windows 95/98 or Windows NT.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-38

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

The configuration of the NSD550 along with ETL500 can be done off-line and
stored in a file which can be downloaded in to the flash EPROM on the P4LQ
module. As already explained in section 11.3.3, the firmware for the NSD550
resides on the module P4LQ of ETL500 and on the teleprotection interface G4AI.

As far as the NSD550 is concerned, the MMI500 software can be used for
• Off line and On line configuration of NSD550
• Selecting the source for the guard signal (ETL500 pilot or NSD550 own guard
signal)
• Selecting the transmission time and security for non-coded commands
• Selecting the transmission time and security for coded commands
• Tx boost level and command prolongation time
• Unblocking settings
• Tx alarm settings
• Rx alarm settings
• Automatic loop test
• Event recorder for the NSD550

The main dialog box for configuring the NSD550 can be found under
Configuration / NSD550… .

This dialog box has various sub-options: System settings, Performance

Command Rx, Alarm and unblocking settings and Interface settings (one for
each interface type G4AI). These are “tabs” and they can be selected by clicking
on the text at the top of each sheet. After entering NSD550 configuration the
current tab is System settings.

11.3.10.4 First steps

It is assumed that the basic ETL500 equipment is already configured according

the advices given earlier in this Instruction Manual.

Start the MMI500 from your Windows environment. Select the operating mode
Off line (Equipment type: ETL500) and click the OK button. As alternative when
your MMI500 is already running, select File/New and repeat the steps mentioned
before.

Select the tab Channel 1 under Configuration/Servives…and choose the

number of NSD550 input ports and solid state output ports (maximum 28
when no other modules are plugged in the channel rack of the ETL500) as well
as the number of relay outputs (maximum 14 when 7 modules G4AI are
plugged).

11.3.10.5 System settings

Select the tab Configuration/NSD550…/System settings. It is used for

selecting the operation mode, the application for the non-coded and the coded
commands, the source for the guard signal and the settings for the cyclic loop
test.

Choose the operation mode from:

Off

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-39

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

2 non-coded + 2 coded
3 non-coded + 1 coded
Choose the application for the non-coded tripping signals from:
Permissive
Blocking
Choose the application for the coded (direct) tripping signals from:
Line protection
Other (BFP, GSD, …)

The last three settings define some default values on the next tab Performance
and Command Rx: transmission time and security/dependability trade off for the
non-coded and the coded tripping signals and the prolongation times for
command A to D. But these are only recommendations as described in Section
11.3.5 “Applications”. Nevertheless the user can define other parameters
according to his application.

Either the ETL pilot can be used or a special NSD550 guard signal can be used.
The latter is only possible when speech with a bandwidth of 2000, 2200 or
2400 Hz is selected in channel 1 of the ETL500.

The tab also allows enabling the cyclic loop test and setting the test interval in
hours (3, 6, 12 or 24 hours).

11.3.10.6 Performance

One out of three possible transmission times and one out of two levels for
security/dependability can be selected for the non-coded commands and the
coded commands. However all the non-coded commands will have the same
transmission time and security/dependability level. The same applies for the
coded commands. The default settings are according to the operation mode that
was chosen in the tab System settings. However, the parameters can be
changed to meet special requirements of protection relays or applications.

11.3.10.7 Command Rx

It can be chosen, how the command outputs should respond in case of a level or
SNR alarm (= NSD link alarm):
Unaffected
Non-coded -> tripped, coded -> quiescent
Quiescent

Furthermore the command prolongation for each command can be chosen in

the range 0…3000 ms. The default settings are according to the operation mode
that was chosen in the tab System settings.

11.3.10.8 Alarm and unblocking settings

The pick-up time and the hold time for the all (NSD550) alarms which can be
signaled on any output on teleprotection interface G4AI can be programmed in
the range 1…15 seconds.

The unblocking extra delay can be programmed in the range 1…100 ms.

The unblocking pulse duration can be programmed in the range 50…1000 ms.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-40

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

The unblocking threshold can be selected to be either –10 dB or –14 dB from

nominal signal level.

When clicking on the button Advanced settings, following parameters can be

altered from the default setting:

• The Pick-up time and the Hold time for the NSD550 link alarm, i.e. the
additional delay after the alarm has been detected until the command outputs
respond according the programming (refer to Section 11.3.8.12), can be set in
the range 0…15 seconds.

• The Pick-up time for the Tx trip duration alarm can be varied in the range
1…15 seconds.

• The maximum boost ratio can be defined in the range 0…10 dB. In the same
window the actual boost ratio calculated by the MMI500 according to the
channel allocation is displayed. The maximum allowed boost ratio entered in
the text box only gets effective when the value is lower than the actual boost
ratio.

11.3.10.9 Interface settings

The MMI500 generates a tab for each teleprotection interface type G4AI which is
configured by entering the number of input and output ports needed under
Configuration/Services… in the Channel 1 tab.

For each slot where a G4AI is plugged in the inputs and outputs can be
configured according the requirements of the customer’s application.

Each input (1…4) can be selected to convey one of the following signals:
- None (off)
- Command A
- Command B
- Command C
- Command D
- Start

Each output (1…4) and each relay (1, 2) can be selected to convey one of the
following signals:

- None (off) - Rx guard - NSD alarm

- Command A - Ack Tx command A - NSD link alarm
- Command B - Ack Tx command B - NSD hardware alarm
- Command C - Ack Tx command C - ETL system alarm
- Command D - Ack Tx command D - ETL warning
- Unblocking - G4AI alarm

11.3.11 Commissioning

Since the NSD550 is a part of the ETL500 PLC system, it is obvious that the
ETL500 equipment must be commissioned before the NSD550. The ETL500 is
commissioned as per the commissioning instructions 1KHL015944-EN.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-41

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

11.3.11.1 Preliminary tests and checks

It is a good idea to check the frequency response of the PLC channel before
commissioning the NSD550. Please refer to document 'Equalization for the
ETL500 Rel. 3' (1KHL015943-EN). It is available as an appendix of this
Instruction Manual.

The equipment was carefully tested and calibrated in the works. Thus only those
settings need to be carried out, which are influenced by the practical operating
conditions on site.

11.3.11.2 Tests according the commissioning instructions

The NSD550 teleprotection must be commissioned as per the commissioning

instructions 1KHL015944-EN which is available in Section 12 as an appendix of
this Instruction Manual.

11.3.12 Operation and Maintenance

11.3.12.1 Normal Operation

During operation, the status of the equipment can be seen from the LED signals
on the front plates of the individual modules, respectively by viewing the
equipment status with the user interface MMI500.

In the quiescent state only the LED "RDY" on all modules are lit and checking the
equipment status via MMI500 produces the response "NO ALARM". An
inadmissible operating condition is signalled by the red LED "AL" on the front of
the unit concerned and the nature of the alarm can be queried via MMI500.

Send and receive command counters and an event recorder are standard
equipment. The display of both can be done by means of the MMI500. The
counters and the event log retain their information even if the supply is
interrupted because they are stored in a nonvolatile memory.

11.3.12.2 Faulty Operation

At the conclusion of manufacture the individual modules were subjected to a thor-

ough functional testing. The parameters governing the operating characteristics
are all determined by the MMI500 and are thus not subject to ageing. The
processor includes a number of self-monitoring functions which together with the
loop test performed at periodic intervals check the operation of the RF converter
module and the availability of the communications channel as a whole. Neverthe-
less, it is recommended to go through the tests listed in this section regularly. The
actual time interval between tests depends very much on local conditions, but
should not exceed two years.

11.3.12.3 Periodic functional checks

a) Checks during operation:

The ability of the equipment to function correctly can be checked by executing a

manually initiated loop test: from the Equipment menu point to Commissioning
and maintenance and click NSD550 send looptest. Providing the signal

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-42

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

transmitted by the test is received back again within the allowed time window, the
actual transmission time will be displayed. If not, a corresponding alarm message
will appear (“Manual loop test failed”).

If the loop test fails in at least two consecutive attempts, the equipment must be
taken out of service and tested according to b) below.

The "RESET" button on the modules P4LQ and

Caution
G4AI should not be pressed while executing routine
tests during normal operation, as this causes reini-
tialization of the equipment and blocks it for some
seconds. During this time no commands can be
transmitted.

b) Removing the equipment from service for testing:

1. Open all the isolating terminals to the protection.
2. Choose the menu Equipment/Tuning & testing, click the Test NSD550
button and set the local test mode by clicking Set local loop.
3. Check that the unit is indeed in the local test mode (corresponding Warning
message after uploading status “Warning: local loop active”).
4. Check the send and receive interface circuits used in relation to the
Programming and Testing Instructions in the appendix (Section 12).
5. Choose the menu Equipment/Tuning & testing, click the Test NSD550
button and set the local test mode to off by clicking Normal operation.
6. Check that the unit is indeed in the normal operation mode (no alarm and
warning messages after uploading equipment status “No alarm”; if alarm
messages appear refer to Section 11.3.13 “Troubleshooting”).
7. Initiate a manual loop test: from the Equipment menu point to Commis-
sioning and maintenance and click NSD550 send looptest.
8. Providing no failure has been observed and all the alarm signals have reset,
close the isolating terminals again.
9. Synchronize the trip counters in local and remote stations by resetting them
via MMI500 (menu Equipment/Commissioning and maintenance/Event
recorder/Reset counter -> reset all counters).

c) Checking the entire link:

If a defect cannot be located with the help of the above tests, the procedure for
commissioning the NSD550 described in the Commissioning Instructions
available as appendix (Section 12) of these Instruction Manual must be repeated
for the units at both ends of the line.

Refer to Section 11.3.13 “Troubleshooting” for the causes of alarm messages

displayed by the MMI500 after uploading equipment status and appropriate steps
to be taken.

Replace any modules found to be faulty. Repairing modules on site is not

recommended.

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-43

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

11.3.13 Troubleshooting

11.3.13.1 Basic checks

Loop test

When in operation, the unit can be tested with the aid of the loop test. The signal
used for this test has the same parameters (security and dependability) as the
non-coded commands. It can be initiated manually at any time by choosing the
Equipment menu, pointing to Commissioning and maintenance and clicking
NSD550 send looptest. It can also be executed automatically every 3, 6, 12 or
24 hours by correspondingly configuring the NSD550 in the its System settings
tab.

Local test mode

The NSD550 can be set to a local operating mode for checking the relay
interfaces, e.g. for measuring command prolongation. In this operating mode,
which is indicated by a warning message in the status display and the warning
LED on the P4LQ module, the command input signal is looped by the processor
back to the command output of the local teleprotection interface.

Event Recorder and Command Counters

The integrated event recorder and the counters for each command support
investigations in case of faults or abnormal conditions in the high voltage
network. The event recorder can be synchronized to an external GPS receiver for
accurate time stamping in all the different locations where ETL500 equipment is
used. Therefore it is possible to directly compare and analyze the logs of several
ETL500/NSD550 devices in a network where a failure occurred. The display of
events is possible in text and graphical views on the MMI500.

Refer to Section 11.3.9 for a detailed description of the event recorder.

11.3.13.2 Alarm messages and their causes

Following is a list of alarm text messages displayed and their corresponding

explanation and fault elimination instructions (in italic).

Alarms NSD550: Meaning; actions:

TDM bus communication error Any module not plugged-in or defective; check ETL
alarms and replace the revealed module

SNR alarm SNR not sufficient (threshold = 3 dB above Pmc = 1%

limit was exceeded); check line conditions or coupling
devices

Rx level alarm Level of guard out of range (±3 dB of nominal value =

6 dBm0); check AGC range of ETL500

Cyclic loop test failed more than 2 Check remote equipment for correct operation
times

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-44

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

Alarms NSD550: Meaning; actions:

Warning: cyclic looptest failed once The next cyclic loop test will be sent within 5 minutes

Warning: cyclic looptest out of range Propagation delay to long; check communication path

Eventrecorder disabled Events could not be stored, Flash Eprom might be

defective; reset equipment, if error still present ->
replace P4LQ

Guard and trip present Probably discrete frequency injected at remote end;
clear test tone at remote equipment

Hardware alarm on G4AI G4AI summary alarm; check G4AI status for detailed
information

Warning: local loop active Local test mode is activated; restore normal operating
mode via MMI500

Info: Eventrecorder changing block The eldest events are removed from the memory; no
action necessary

Alarms G4AI Meaning; actions

Single component alarm on input 1 Component defective in input 1 (2, 3, 4) circuit of

(input 2, input 3, input 4) G4AI; replace module

Command duration alarm on input 1 Duration of the injected command at input 1 (2, 3, 4)
(input 2, input 3, input 4) exceeds the predefined time span; remove the signal
from the command input (maybe an external relay
contact weld together)

TDM bus error G4AI module nor plugged in or defective; replace the
module

CRC error in program memory Program memory check failed; replace the module

Extended timeslot CRC alarm TDM bus communication disturbed or G4AI with elder
firmware version used; update firmware

Hardware error on output 1 (output Component defective in output 1 (2, 3, 4) circuit of

2, output 3, output 4) G4AI; replace module

TDM bus configuration mismatch G4AI is not properly configured yet; download correct
configuration

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-45

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3 11 Options

Warnings Meaning; actions

Shortcut on output 1 (output 2, Shortcut protection of output 1 (2, 3, 4) is active;

output 3, output 4) check terminals and remove external shortcut

Test configuration active The new configuration is not stored yet; store new
configuration or reset the equipment

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04 11-46

1KHL015946-EN
Instruction Manual ETL500 Rel. 3

ANNEX TO ETL500 REL. 3 INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Contents

Compatibility requirements 1KHL015559-EN

Tuning Instructions for RxRF Filter P4LR 1KHL015117-EN

Tuning Instructions for TxRF Filter E5LA/E5LB 1KHL015570-EN

Tuning Instruction for Rx RF Filter P4LS 1KHL016255-EN

Tuning Instruction for Tx RF Filter P4LS 1KHL016256-EN

Instruction for changing the input voltage of B5LC 1KHL015788-EN

Programming and Testing Instructions 1KHL015940-EN

Equalization using MMI500 1KHL015943-EN

Commissioning Instructions 1KHL015944-EN

Programming Schedule NSK5 Modem G4AK 1KHL016075-EN

Firmware Download 1KHL016378-EN

Anomaly List 1KHL016399-EN

Technical Data 1KHL015945-EN

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-04

1KHL015946-EN
 ABB Power Automation Ltd 1KHL015559-EN
Archive No.: Rev. Date:
Compatibility requirements for ETL500 - B 99-12-20
Responsible Department: Prepared: Approved: Distribution: Lang.: Page:
NKT 99-06-25 sig. H.P. Rytz 99-12-23 sig. H. Benninger - EN 1/3
Valid for: Derived from: Replaces: Classification-No.: File:
- - - -

Power Line Carrier Equipment: Series ETL500

Compatibility requirements for ETL500

Contents
1 Purpose of document 1
2 General 1
3 ETL500 releases 1
4 Compatibility rules 2

1 Purpose of document
To describe the compatibility requirements for the ETL500 system.

2 General
The ETL500 system consists of
1. Hardware, consisting of a number of modules;
2. Firmware, residing on some of the modules and making the processors on these modules
execute various functions such as modulation, digital filtering etc.;
3. PC based software, implementing the user interface for configuration and testing of the
equipment.

3 ETL500 releases
ABB continuously enhances the ETL500 system by upgrading hardware, firmware and software.
An ETL500 system release, identified by a release number, is a product of defined functionality
comprising hardware modules, firmware and software. Firmware and software are identified with
version numbers of the form NN.nn., e.g. 5.08 (leading zeros may be omitted). Releases are
identified by release numbers of the form RR.r, e.g. 3.1 (leading zeros may be omitted). Hardware
modules are identified with type codes consisting of 4 characters like P7LC, G4AI or P4LQ.
Sometimes, a fifth character – the revision index - is appended to identify an upgraded version of a
module. Example: P4LQA is an upgraded version of P4LQ; P4LQB would be an upgraded version
of P4LQA and so on.

Note: The information content of type codes in case of modules containing firmware
depends on the possibility to download firmware from MMI500 into the module:
• If for a module firmware download is not possible, the type code of that
module identifies the hardware including the firmware version.
Example: G4AK
• If for a module firmware download is possible, the type code of that module
identifies the hardware excluding the firmware version. The download files
for the firmware of such modules are included on the MMI500 disc.
Example: O4LE

We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to
third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © ABB Power Automation Ltd, Switzerland.
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 2/3 1KHL015559-EN

4 Compatibility rules
• Rule Nr. 1:
The modules of an ETL500 terminal and the firmware on these modules must belong to the
same release as given by Table 1.
If an equipment contains modules of different releases, it will generally not work correctly.
• Rule Nr. 2:
The two ETL500 terminals of a link must belong to the same release.
If this rule is violated, the EOC of the link will generally not work correctly. Corresponding
warning messages will be generated by MMI500.
• Rule Nr. 3:
The MMI500 software must have full or restricted compatibility to the ETL500 terminals being
connected to.
The term "restricted compatibility" is used when the functionality has been changed between
releases as long as the MMI500 program can handle these changes in a reasonable way.

Release Compatible hardware, firmware and software

ETL500 - Software MMI500 versions 1.04 up to 1.99 (for PC with Windows 3.11, 95 or NT),
- Firmware ETL500 versions 2.04 up to 2.99 on module P4LQ or P4LQA,
• Rel. - Power subrack P7LA with hardware modules P1LA, B5LA or B5LC, E5LA/B, P3LC or
1 P3LD, P3LB or P3DA,
- Channel subrack P7LC with hardware modules B4LE, P4LBA, P4LQ or P4LQA, P4LR,
cable duct R9AE and optional hardware modules O4LA, E1LA, O4LCA, O4LDA, G4AE,
G4AA, G4AC, G4AD, R1BC,
- External cables V9MQ (for P4LQ), V9MR (for R1BC), V9MU (for O4LA, P4LBA, O4LC,
G4AE), V9MN (for O4LD), V9LB (for G4AA), V9LC (for G4AC and G4AD).
- Circuit breaker B9AS.

ETL500 - Software MMI500 version 2.06 (for PC with Windows 95, 98 or NT),
Rel. 3.0 - Restricted compatibility with software MMI500 versions 3.05 or higher,
- Firmware ETL500 version 3.03 on module P4LQA,
- Firmware O4LE version 1.10 on module O4LE,
- Firmware G4AI version 1.01 on module G4AI,
- Power subrack P7LA with hardware modules P1LA, B5LA or B5LC, E5LA/B, P3LC or
P3LD, P3LB or P3DA,
- Channel subrack P7LC with hardware modules B4LE, P4LQA, P4LR, cable duct R9AE and
optional hardware modules O4LE, G4AI, G4AK, R1BC,
- External cables V9MQ (for P4LQ), V9MR (for R1BC), V9OA (for O4LE), V9OB (for G4AK)
and V9MM (for G4AI),
- Optional remote inquiry set R7AP,
- Circuit breaker B9AS.

ETL500 - Software MMI500 version 3.05 (for PC with Windows 95, 98 or NT),
Rel. 3.1 - Restricted compatibility with software MMI500 versions 2.06 and 3.12 or higher,
- Firmware ETL500 version 4.04 on module P4LQA,
- Firmware O4LE version 2.05 on module O4LE,
- Firmware G4AI version 2.01 on module G4AI,
- ETL540/580: power subrack P7LA with hardware modules P1LA, B5LA or B5LC,
E5LA or E5LB, P3LC or P3LD, P3LB or P3DA,
- Channel subrack P7LC with hardware modules B4LE, P4LQA, P4LR, cable duct R9AE and
optional hardware modules O4LE, G4AI, G4AK, R1BC,
- External cables V9MQ (for P4LQ), V9MR (for R1BC), V9OA (for O4LE), V9OB (for G4AK)
and V9MM (for G4AI),
- Optional remote inquiry set R7AP,
- Circuit breaker B9AS.
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 3/3 1KHL015559-EN

Release Compatible hardware, firmware and software

ETL500 - Software MMI500 versions 3.12 or higher (for PC with Windows 95, 98 or NT),
Rel. 3.2 - Restricted compatibility with software MMI500 versions 2.06 or 3.05,
- Firmware ETL500 version 4.10 or higher on module P4LQA,
- Firmware O4LE version 2.11 or higher on module O4LE,
- Firmware G4AI version 2.10 or higher on module G4AI,
- ETL540/580: power subrack P7LA with hardware modules P1LA, B5LA or B5LC,
E5LA or E5LB, P3LC or P3LD, P3LB or P3DA,
- Channel subrack P7LC with hardware modules B4LE, P4LQA, P4LR, P4LS with G1DA (for
ETL505 only), earth rail R9AL and optional hardware modules O4LE, G4AI, G4AK, R1BC,
- External cables V9MQ (for P4LQ), V9MR (for R1BC), V9OD (for O4LE), V9OE (for G4AK)
and V9OF (for G4AI),
- Optional remote inquiry set R7AP,
- Service telephone Q8AB,
- Circuit breaker B9AS.

Table 1
 ABB Power Automation Ltd 1KHL015117-EN
Archive No.: Rev. Date:
Tuning Instructions Rx RF Filter P4LR <ETL500 Rel. 3> B 99-06-25
Responsible Department: Prepared: Approved: Distribution: Lang.: Page:
NKT 99-06-09 NL 99-06-25 sig. H. Benninger - EN 1/13
Valid for: Derived from: Replaces: Classification-No.: File:
- HENF 600557 -

Power Line Carrier Equipment: Series ETL500

Tuning Instructions Rx RF Filter P4LR <ETL500 Rel. 3>

Contents
A.1 General............................................................................................................ 2
A.2 P4LR Programming......................................................................................... 2
A.3 Tuning the filter circuits individually ................................................................ 6
A.4 Checking the frequency response .................................................................. 7
A.5 Test circuit....................................................................................................... 9
A.6 Jumper table for 4 kHz bandwidth ................................................................ 10
A.7 Jumper table for 8 kHz bandwidth ................................................................ 12

List of equipment:
PC with Windows 95, 98 or NT
MMI500 software Rel. 3 or higher
PC P4LQ (1:1 serial RS232) cable
Tx tuning adapter P3LL HENF209668
Rx tuning adapter P4LM HENF209665
level meter SPM-32 (W&G) or equivalent
plastic tuning screw driver

Note:
• Please refer 1KHL015559 for compatibility between software MMI500, firmware and hardware of ETL500.
• Level measurements during tuning & checking frequency response of P4LR are relative as the pilot is
supressed. Hence any ordinary level meter with frequency range 10 kHz to 550 kHz can be used in principle.
It need not be selective.
• The same Rx tuning adapter P4LM used for ETL41 can be used for ETL500. However, if two shorting wires
are present on the P4LM, they must be removed. The position of these 2 shorting wires - if present - will be
across C1-C9 & C2-C10, under the sub-board.

We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to
third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © ABB Power Automation Ltd, Switzerland.
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 2/13 1KHL015117-EN

1 General
In ETL500, the Rx filter P4LR is tuned using the Rx tuning adapter P4LM, the Tx tuning adapter
P3LL and MMI500. However before starting tuning, the filter programming jumpers must be set in
accordance with the programming tables. Also additional capacitors must be fitted for channel
frequencies of 24 kHz to 36 kHz. Using MMI500, the P4LQ generates the frequencies required for
tuning the P4LR.

2 P4LR Programming
The most important part of this progamming instruction is the big table at the end of the document.
One row in the table contains the complete jumper settings for one P4LR.

2.1 Find the correct row in the table

To get the correct jumper settings, the correct row of the big table in this document must be found.
The table is first sorted by the bandwidth and then sorted by the low cutoff frequency fLo.
The bandwidth corresponds to the equipment type. The low cutoff frequency derived from channel
settings of ETL500.
The lowest frequency in the baseband of channel 1, marked with a circle, is shifted to fR1. The lowest
frequency in the baseband of channel 2, marked with a circle, is shifted to fR2. The baseband is in
the audio frequency range, fR1 and fR2 are in the radio frequency range. Depending on channel
settings remaining frequencies of baseband are above or mirror-inverted to fR1, respectively fR2. The
formular for calculating the cutoff frequency, fLo, of Rx filter is shown in the next tables, also an self-
explanatory figure of the channel setting.

For an one channel equipment with a bandwidth of 4 kHz the following channel settings are
possible. For jumper settings calculate low cutoff frequency fLo and use table on page 9-11.
Equipment Channel RF frequency range Figure table fLo
(see configuration) on
type setting in
page
MMI500
1 Channel, CH1 regular Rx frequency fB = 4kHz 9-11 fLo = fR1
Rx1: fR1 + 4 kHz
4 kHz
(default)
Rx

fLo
1 Channel, CH1 inverted Rx frequency fB = 4kHz 9-11 fLo = fR1 – 4 kHz
Rx1: fR1 – 4 kHz
4 kHz
Rx

fLo

For a two channel equipment the following channel settings are possible. For jumper settings
calculate low cutoff frequency fLo and use table on page 12-13.
Equipment Channel RF frequency range Figure table fLo
(see configuration) on
type setting in page
MMI500
2 Channel, CH1 regular, Rx frequency 12-13 fLo = fR1
fB = 8kHz
Rx1: fR1 + 4 kHz
2 * 4kHz CH2 regular, Rx2: fR2 + 4 kHz
CH1 low Rx1 Rx2

fLo
2 Channel, CH1 regular, Rx frequency 12-13 fLo = fR2
fB = 8kHz
Rx1: fR1 + 4 kHz
2 * 4kHz CH2 regular,
Rx2: fR2 + 4 kHz
CH1 high
Rx2 Rx1

fLo
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 3/13 1KHL015117-EN

2 Channel, CH1 regular, Rx frequency 12-13 fLo = fR1

fB = 8kHz
Rx1: fR1 + 4 kHz
2 * 4kHz CH2 inverted,
Rx2: fR2 - 4 kHz
CH1 low
Rx1 Rx2

fLo
2 Channel, CH1 regular, Rx frequency 12-13 fLo = fR2 – 4 kHz
fB = 8kHz
Rx1: fR1 + 4 kHz
2 * 4kHz CH2 inverted,
Rx2: fR2 - 4 kHz
CH1 high
Rx2 Rx1

fLo
2 Channel, CH1 inverted, Rx frequency 12-13 fLo = fR1 – 4 kHz
fB = 8kHz
Rx1: fR1 - 4 kHz
2 * 4kHz CH2 regular, Rx2: fR2 + 4 kHz
(default) CH1 low
Rx1 Rx2

fLo
2 Channel, CH1 inverted, Rx frequency 12-13 fLo = fR2
fB = 8kHz
Rx1: fR1 - 4 kHz
2 * 4kHz CH2 regular,
Rx2: fR2 + 4 kHz
CH1 high
Rx2 Rx1

fLo
2 Channel, CH1 inverted, Rx frequency 12-13 fLo = fR1 – 4 kHz
fB = 8kHz
Rx1: fR1 - 4 kHz
2 * 4kHz CH2 inverted,
Rx2: fR2 - 4 kHz
CH1 low
Rx1 Rx2

fLo
2 Channel, CH1 inverted, Rx frequency 12-13 fLo = fR2 – 4 kHz
fB = 8kHz
Rx1: fR1 - 4 kHz
2 * 4kHz CH2 inverted, Rx2: fR2 - 4 kHz
CH1 high
Rx2 Rx1

fLo

For an one channel equipment with a bandwidth of 8 kHz, the following channel settings are
possible. For jumper settings calculate low cutoff frequency fLo and use table on page 12-13.

Equipment Channel RF frequency range Figure table fLo

(see configuration) on
type setting in
page
MMI500
1 Channel, CH1 regular Rx frequency 12-13 fLo = fR1
fB = 8kHz
Rx1: fR1 + 8 kHz
8 kHz
(default)
Rx

fLo
1 Channel, CH1 inverted Rx frequency 12-13 fLo = fR1 – 8 kHz
fB = 8kHz
Rx1: fR1 - 8 kHz
8 kHz
Rx

fLo
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 4/13 1KHL015117-EN

2.2 Additional capacitors for very low frequencies

Channel frequencies, which are marked with ' * ' in the jumper tables, require additional capacitors.
These must be placed in positions C113, C122, C135, C144 and C157 as per the following table.

For 4 kHz bandwidth, entries of tabel on page 9:

Frequency C113 C122 C135 C144 C157

kHz [pF] [pF] [pF] [pF] [pF]
24 + 4 kHz 10000 32400 20000 32400 10000
28 + 4 kHz 10000 32400 20000 32400 10000
32 + 4 kHz / 32400 / 32400 /
36 + 4 kHz / 32400 / 32400 /

For 8 kHz bandwidth, entries of tabel on page 12:

Frequency C113 C122 C135 C144 C157

kHz [pF] [pF] [pF] [pF] [pF]
24 + 8 kHz 10000 / 24900 / 10000
28 + 8 kHz / / 10000 / /
32 + 8 kHz / / 10000 / /

2.3 Jumper subsets

In the tables for jumper setting some abbreviations are used.
The following jumpers must set for programing the coils L1, L2 and L3.
Abbreviation Jumper
La LB, LE, LH
Lb LA, LC, LD, LF, LG, LI

The following jumpers must set for programming the input resistor.
Abbreviation Jumper
D1 IE, IF
D2 IG, IH
D3 II, IK
D4 IL, IM
D5 IN, IO
D6 IA, IB
D7 IC, ID
D8 IE, IF
D9 IG, IH
Dm II, IK

2.4 P4LR Programming examples

First example for programming:

For channel 248 + 4kHz, the following jumpers must be set.
L = Lb LA, LC, LD, LF, LG, LI
D = D3 II, IK
Load OB
CAP AA,EA,AC,EC,AD,ED,AG,EG,AH,EH,BB,DB,BD,DD,BH,DH,CA,CC,CE, CG,CH
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 5/13 1KHL015117-EN

Second example for programming:

For channel 248 + 8kHz, the following jumpers must be set.
L = Lb LA, LC, LD, LF, LG, LI
D = D9 IG, IH
Load OE, OH
CAP AB,AC,AD,AG,AH,EB,EC,ED,EG,EH,BD,BE,BG,DD,DE,DG,CD,CE,CG,CH
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 6/13 1KHL015117-EN

3 Tuning the filter circuits individually

Once the Rx filter is programmed for the required frequency band, its individual circuits can be tuned
with the help of the tuning adapters P4LM, P3LL and the MMI500. The tuning frequency generated
by the P4LQ is fed into the Rx tuning adapter via the Tx tuning adapter using a coaxial cable. Refer
to 5. for the test circuit. The Rx tuning adapter provides facility for measurement and also for
switching between tuning individual circuits and checking the overall frequency response.

3.1 Steps for tuning the coils L1, L2 and L3 of P4LR

1. The Tx tuning adapter P3LL is inserted in place of the RF hybrid (P3LB / P3DA).

The RF hybrid should not be plugged on top of it.

2. The P3LL is set for the following for the entire process.
• FUNCTION :A
• Position of S1 : L2
• Position of S2 : FILTER
• Position of S3 : Don't care
• Position of LOAD : Don't care

3. The P4LM is set for the following for tuning coil L1 of P4LR
• The BNC connector OUT P3LL is connected to the BNC connector IN of P4LM
• Position of S1 : NORM
• Position of S2 : TUNE
• Position of S3 (select coil) : L1 (or L2 or L3)
• The BNC connector OUT of P4LM is connected to the I/P of level meter with preferably 75 ohm or
higher input impedance.

4. P4LR is plugged on top of P4LM and the switch on P4LR is put in position TUNING.

5. If not already done, switch on the power of the ETL500, start up the MMI500 on the PC, log on to the
local ETL500 using equipment-ID 0 and upload configuration and status of the equipment.

6. On the Equipment menu click Tuning & testing.

A warning message box appears, informing that the normal operation of the link will be interrupted.

7. Click OK to get the Tuning & testing dialog box

8. Click Tune Rx RF filter to get the Tuning Rx RF filter dialog box.

9. Click Activate fR1.

10. Tune coil L1 using a plastic screw driver till voltage at level meter is minimized.
The coil L1 is now tuned.

11. Select coil L2 (position L2 of jumper S3 on P4LM) and repeat the procedure by
clicking Activate fR2 to tune coil L2.

12. Select coil L3 (position L3 of jumper S3 on P4LM) and repeat the procedure by
clicking Activate fR3 to tune coil L3.

13. Click Deactivate frequency

14. Click Cancel

15. The switch on P4LR is put back in position NORMAL

 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 7/13 1KHL015117-EN

4 Checking the frequency response

The ripple of the passband and the selectivity of the filter are determined when checking the frequency
response. The test circuit is identical to the one for tuning the individual circuits, see also 5.

4.1 Steps to check the frequency response of P4LR

1. The Tx tuning adapter P3LL is inserted in place of the RF hybrid (P3LB / P3DA).

The RF hybrid should not be plugged on top of it.

2. The P3LL tuning adapter is set for the following for the entire process.
• FUNCTION :A
• Position of S1 : L2
• Position of S2 : FILTER
• Position of S3 : Don't care
• Position of LOAD : Don't care

3. The P4LM tuning adapter is set for the following for checking the frequency response
• The BNC connector OUT P3LL is connected to the BNC connector IN of P4LM
• Position of S1 : NORM
• Position of S2 : FILTER
• Position of S3 (i.e.select coil) : Don't care
• The BNC connector OUT of P4LM is connected to the I/P of level meter with preferably 75 ohm or
higher input impedance.

4. The P4LR module is plugged on top of P4LM and the switch on P4LR is put back in position NORMAL.
After the test, the switch should be retained in NORMAL position.

5. In the Tuning Rx RF filter dialog box, click Check Rx RF filter to get the dialog box Check filter.

6. Click Activate f0. Measure the voltage at OUT in dB and designate it as 'A'. Note that f0 is the centre
frequency of the receive band.

7. Click Activate f0 - 2kHz for a one channel 4 kHz equipment,

Click Activate f0 - 4kHz in case of a two channel equpment or an one channel 8 kHz equipment.
Measure voltage at OUT and designate it as 'C'. Limits for this messurement, which are also displayed
in the dialog box, are
(A - 0.5 dB) < C < (A + 0.5 dB).

8. Similar to step 7 click Activate f0 + 2kHz, respectively Activate f0 + 4kHz and designate the
measurement as 'B'. Limits for this messurement, which are also displayed in the dialog box, are
(A - 0.5 dB) < B < (A + 0.5 dB). Also |B - C| < 0.5 dB.

9. For a one channel 4 kHz equipment: (otherwise go on with step 10)

Click Activate f0 - 10kHz. Measure voltage at OUT. Limits for this messurement, which are also
displayed in the dialog box, are
U(OUT) < (A - 10 dB), for 24 kHz < f0 < 356 kHz and
U(OUT) < (A - 6 dB), for 356 kHz < f0 < 500 kHz.

Click Activate f0 + 10kHz. Measure voltage at OUT. Limits for this messurement, which are also
displayed in the dialog box, are
U(OUT) < (A - 10 dB), for 24 kHz < f0 < 356 kHz and
U(OUT) < (A - 6 dB), for 356 kHz < f0 < 500 kHz.
Go on with step 11.
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 8/13 1KHL015117-EN

10. For a two channel equipment or an one channel 8 kHz equipment:

Click Activate f0 – 12kHz. Measure voltage at OUT. Limits for this messurement, which are also
displayed in the dialog box, are
U(OUT < (A - 10 dB), for 24 kHz < f0 < 300 kHz and
U(OUT < (A - 6 dB), for 300 kHz < f0 < 500 kHz.

Click Activate f0 + 12kHz Measure voltage at OUT. Limits for this messurement, which are also
displayed in the dialog box, are
U(OUT) < (A - 10 dB), for 24 kHz < f0 < 300 kHz and
U(OUT) < (A - 6 dB), for 300 kHz < f0 < 500 kHz.

11. Click Deactivate frequency

12. Click Cancel

 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 9/13 1KHL015117-EN

5 Test circuit

P1LA
ON OFF L2
L1
RF Hybrid
not to be S1 FILTER P4LQ
plugged S3 TUNE
FILTER
A B S2
FUNCTION
OUT

P3LL
Ext.Coaxial Cable

S3
L1
S1
TUNING NORMAL L2
L1 IN
L3

L2 L3 OUT
SET TUNE
NORM FILTER
S1 S2
P4LR
P4LM P7LC

UOUTPUT 75Ω/∞

Notes:
1. See also the block diagram of P4LM.
2. Only for checking the signal path from P4LQ to BNC IN of P4LM switch S1 of P4LM
can put to SET. Then BNC IN of P4LM is direct connected to BNC OUT of P4LM.
3. Normaly S1 of P4LM is set to NORM.
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 10/13 1KHL015117-EN

6 Jumper table for 4 kHz bandwidth

FLo L D

AM
AG

BG
AA
AB
AC
AD

AH

AK

BA
BB
BC
BD

BH
AE

BE
AF

AL

BF
...+4 1) 2)

AI
(Pg-4)

(Pg-4)

Load

CM
EM

DG

CG
EG

DA
DB
DC
DD

DH
CA
CB
CC
CD

CH

CK
EA
EB
EC
ED

EH

EK

DE

CE
EE

DF

CF

CL
kHz

EF

EL

CI
EI
24 *) La D1 OE X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
28 *) La D1 OE X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
32 *) La D1 OE X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
36 *) La D1 OF X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
40 La D1 OF X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
44 La D1 OF X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
48 La D1 OF X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
52 La D1 OF X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
56 La D1 OF X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
60 La D1 OF X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
64 La D1 OF X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
68 La D1 OF X X X X X X X X X X X X
72 La D1 OF X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
76 La D1 OF X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
80 La D1 OG X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
84 La D1 OG X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
88 La D1 OG X X X X X X X X X X X X
92 La D1 OG X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
96 La D1 OG X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
100 La D1 OG X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
104 La D1 OG X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
108 La D1 OG X X X X X X X X X X X
112 La D1 OG X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
116 La D1 OG X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
120 La D1 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
124 La D1 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X
128 La D1 OH X X X X X X X X X X
132 La D1 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
136 La D1 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X
140 Lb D2 OA X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
144 Lb D2 OA X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
148 Lb D2 OA X X X X X X X X X X X X X
152 Lb D2 OA X X X X X X X X X X X X X
156 Lb D2 OA X X X X X X X X X X X X
160 Lb D2 OA X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
164 Lb D2 OA X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
168 Lb D2 OA X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
172 Lb D2 OB X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
176 Lb D2 OB X X X X X X X X X X X X X
180 Lb D2 OB X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
184 Lb D2 OB X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
188 Lb D2 OB X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
192 Lb D2 OC X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
196 Lb D2 OC X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
200 Lb D2 OB X X X X X X X X X
204 Lb D2 OC X X X X X X X X X X X X X
208 Lb D2 OC X X X X X X X X X X X X
212 Lb D2 OC X X X X X X X X X X X
216 Lb D2 OC X X X X X X X X X X
220 Lb D2 OC X X X X X X X X X X
224 Lb D4 OA X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
228 Lb D4 OA X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
232 Lb D4 OA X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
236 Lb D4 OA X X X X X X X X X X X X X
240 Lb D4 OA X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
244 Lb D3 OA X X X X X X X X X X X X
248 Lb D3 OB X X X X X X X X X X X X X
252 Lb D3 OC X X X X X X X X X X X X
256 Lb D3 OB X X X X X X

Note : FLo = Low cutoff frequency of filter.

.
Channel 24+4kHz to 36+4KHz needs additional capacitors in positions C113, C122, C135, C144 and C157
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 11/13 1KHL015117-EN

FLo L D

AM
AG

BG
AA
AB
AC
AD

AH

AK

BA
BB
BC
BD

BH
AE

BE
AF

AL

BF
...+4 1) 2)

AI
(Pg-4)

(Pg-4)

Load

CM
EM

DG

CG
EG

DA
DB
DC
DD

DH
CA
CB
CC
CD

CH

CK
EA
EB
EC
ED

EH

EK

DE

CE
EE

DF

CF

CL
kHz

EF

EL

CI
EI
260 Lb D4 OB X X X X X X X X X X X X X
264 Lb D4 OB X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
268 Lb D4 OB X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
272 Lb D4 OB X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
276 Lb D4 OB X X X X X X X X X X X
280 Lb D3 OC X X X X X X X X X X X X X
284 Lb D3 OC X X X X X X X X X X X
288 Lb D3 OC X X X X X X X X X X X X
292 Lb D3 OC X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
296 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X X
300 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X X
304 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X X
308 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X
312 Lb D3 OD X X X X X
316 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
320 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
324 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X X X X X X
328 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X X X X X X
332 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X X X X
336 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X X X X X
340 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X X X X
344 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
348 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X X X
352 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X X
356 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X X
360 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X X X
364 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X X X X X
368 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
372 Lb D3 OD X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
376 Lb D4 OE X X X X X X X X X X X
380 Lb D4 OE X X X X X X X X
384 Lb D4 OE X X X X X X X
388 Lb D4 OE X X X X X X X X X X X X
392 Lb D4 OE X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
396 Lb D4 OE X X X X X X X X X X X X
400 Lb D4 OE X X X X X X X X X X
404 Lb D4 OF X X X X X X X X X X X
408 Lb D4 OF X X X X X X X X
412 Lb D4 OF X X X X X X X X X X
416 Lb D4 OF X X X X X X X X X X
420 Lb D4 OF X X X X X X X X X
424 Lb D4 OF X X X X X X X X
428 Lb D4 OG X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
432 Lb D4 OG X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
436 Lb D4 OG X X X X X X X X X X X X
440 Lb D4 OG X X X X X X X X X X X X X
444 Lb D5 OF X X X X X X X X X X
448 Lb D5 OF X X X X X X X X X
452 Lb D5 OG X X X X X X X X X X X X X
456 Lb D5 OG X X X X X X X X X X X X X
460 Lb D5 OG X X X X X X X X X X X X
464 Lb D5 OG X X X X X X X X X
468 Lb D5 OG X X X X X X X X X X X
472 Lb D5 OG X X X X X X X X X
476 Lb D5 OG X X X X X X X X
480 Lb D5 OG X X X X X X X
484 Lb D5 OG X X X X X X X X X X X
488 Lb D5 OG X X X X X X X X X X X X X
492 Lb D5 OG X X X X X X X X X X X
496 Lb D5 OG X X X X X X X X X X X

Note : FLo = Low cutoff frequency of filter.

 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 12/13 1KHL015117-EN

7 Jumper table for 8 kHz bandwidth

FLo L D

AM
AG

BG
AA
AB
AC
AD

AH

AK

BA
BB
BC
BD

BH
AE

BE
AF

AL

BF
...+8 1) 2)

AI
(Pg-4)
(Pg-4)

Load

CM
EM

DG

CG
EG

DA
DB
DC
DD

DH
CA
CB
CC
CD

CH

CK
EA
EB
EC
ED

EH

EK

DE

CE
EE

DF

CF

CL
EF

EL
k Hz

CI
EI
24 *) La D6 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
28 *) La D6 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
32 *) La D6 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
36 *) La D6 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X
40 La D6 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
44 La D6 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
48 La D7 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
52 La D7 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X
56 La D7 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
60 La D7 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X
64 La D7 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X
68 La D7 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
72 La D7 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
76 La D7 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
80 La D7 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
84 La D7 OH X X X X X X X X X X
88 La D7 OI X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
92 La D7 OI X X X X X X X X X X X X X
96 La D7 OI X X X X X X X X X X X
100 La D7 OI X X X X X X X X X X X
104 La D7 OI X X X X X X X X X X X X X
108 La D7 OI X X X X X X X X X X X X
112 La D7 OI X X X X X X X X X
116 La D7 OI X X X X X X X X X X X X X
120 La D7 OI X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
124 La D8 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X
128 La D8 OH X X X X X X X X X X
132 La D8 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X
136 La D8 OH X X X X X X X X X X X X
140 Lb D9 OD OF X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
144 Lb D9 OD OF X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
148 Lb D9 OD OF X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
152 Lb D9 OC OH X X X X X X X X X X X X
156 Lb D9 OC OH X X X X X X X X X X X X
160 Lb D9 OC OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
164 Lb D9 OD OG X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
168 Lb D9 OD OG X X X X X X X X X X X X
172 Lb D9 OD OG X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
176 Lb D9 OD OG X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
180 Lb D9 OD OG X X X X X X X X X X X X
184 Lb D9 OB X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
188 Lb D9 OB X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
192 Lb D9 OB X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
196 Lb D9 OB X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
200 Lb D9 OB X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
204 Lb D9 OB X X X X X X X X X X X X X
208 Lb D9 OB X X X X X X X X X X X X
212 Lb D9 OD OI X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
216 Lb D9 OD OI X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
220 Lb D9 OD OI X X X X X X X X X X X X
224 Lb D9 OD OI X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
228 Lb D9 OD OI X X X X X X X X X X
232 Lb D9 OE OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
236 Lb D9 OE OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
240 Lb D9 OE OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
244 Lb D9 OE OH X X X X X X X X X X X X
248 Lb D9 OE OH X X X X X X X X X X X X
252 Lb D9 OE OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X
256 Lb D9 OC X X X X X X X X X X

Note : FLo = Low cutoff frequency of filter.

.
Channel 24+8kHz to 36+8KHz needs additional capacitors in positions C113, C122, C135, C144 and C157
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 13/13 1KHL015117-EN

FLo L D

AM
AG

BG
AA
AB
AC
AD

AH

AK

BA
BB
BC
BD

BH
AE

BE
AF

AL

BF
...+8 1) 2)

AI
(Pg-4)

(Pg-4)

Load

CM
EM

DG

CG
EG

DA
DB
DC
DD

DH
CA
CB
CC
CD

CH

CK
EA
EB
EC
ED

EH

EK

DE

CE
EE

DF

CF

CL
EF

EL
kHz

CI
EI
260 Lb D9 OC X X X X X X X X X X X X
264 Lb D9 OC X X X X X X X X X X X X X
268 Lb D9 OC X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
272 Lb D9 OC X X X X X X X X X X X X
276 Lb D9 OC X X X X X X X X X X X X
280 Lb D9 OC X X X X X X X X X X X X X
284 Lb D9 OC X X X X X X X X X X X X
288 Lb D9 OF OI X X X X X X X X X X
292 Lb D9 OF OI X X X X X X X X X X
296 Lb D9 OF OI X X X X X X X X X
300 Lb D9 OF OI X X X X X X X X X
304 Lb D9 OF OI X X X X X X X X
308 Lb D9 OF OI X X X X X X X X X X X
312 Lb D9 OF OI X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
316 Lb D9 OD X X X X X X X X X X X
320 Lb D9 OD X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
324 Lb D9 OD X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
328 Lb D9 OD X X X X X X X X X X X X X
332 Lb D9 OD X X X X X X X X X X X X X
336 Lb D9 OD X X X X X X X X X X X X X
340 Lb D9 OD X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
344 Lb D9 OD X X X X X X X X X X X X
348 Lb D9 OG OI X X X X X X X X X X X X
352 Lb D9 OG OI X X X X X X X X X X X X
356 Lb D9 OG OI X X X X X X X X X X X X
360 Lb D9 OG OI X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
364 Lb D9 OG OI X X X X X X X X X X X X
368 Lb D9 OG OI X X X X X X X X X X X
372 Lb D9 OE X X X X X X X X X X X
376 Lb D9 OE X X X X X X X X X X
380 Lb D9 OE X X X X X X X X X
384 Lb D9 OE X X X X X X X X X X
388 Lb D9 OE X X X X X X X X X X X
392 Lb D9 OE X X X X X X X X X
396 Lb D9 OE X X X X X X X X X X
400 Lb D9 OE X X X X X X X X X X X
404 Lb D9 OE X X X X X X X X X
408 Lb D9 OE X X X X X X X X X X
412 Lb D9 OE X X X X X X X X X X
416 Lb D9 OF X X X X X X X X
420 Lb D9 OF X X X X X X X X X
424 Lb D9 OF X X X X X X X X
428 Lb D9 OF X X X X X X X X X
432 Lb D9 OF X X X X X X X X X X X X X
436 Lb D9 OF X X X X X X X X X X X X
440 Lb D9 OF X X X X X X X X X X X
444 Lb Dm OE X X X X X X X X X X
448 Lb Dm OE X X X X X X X X X X X
452 Lb Dm OE X X X X X X X X X X
456 Lb Dm OE X X X X X X X X X X
460 Lb Dm OF X X X X X X X X X X
464 Lb Dm OF X X X X X X X X
468 Lb Dm OF X X X X X X X X
472 Lb Dm OF X X X X X X X X
476 Lb Dm OF X X X X X X X X X X
480 Lb Dm OF X X X X X X X X X X
484 Lb Dm OF X X X X X X X X X X X X
488 Lb Dm OF X X X X X X X X X X X X
492 Lb Dm OG X X X X X X X X X X X X

Note : FLo = Low cutoff frequency of filter

.
 ABB Power Automation Ltd 1KHL015570-EN
Archive No.: Rev. Date:
Tuning Instructions Tx RF Filter E5LA/E5LB <ETL500 Rel. 3> - B 99-06-25
Responsible Department: Prepared: Approved: Distribution: Lang.: Page:
NKT 99-06-15 Ry 99-06-25 sig. H. Benninger - EN 1/19
Valid for: Derived from: Replaces: Classification-No.: File:
- - - -

Powerline Carrier Equipment: Series ETL500

Tuning Instructions Tx RF Filter E5LA/E5LB <ETL500 Rel. 3>

Contents:
1 General............................................................................................................ 2
2 Capacitor combination for the required frequency band ................................. 3
3 Tuning the filter circuits individually............................................................... 15
3.1 Use the following steps in case of the 40W units. (see test circuit in 5.1) .... 15
3.2 Use the following steps in case of the 80W units. (see test circuits in 5.2) .. 15
4 Checking the frequency response on 40W or 80W unit ............................... 16
5 Test circuits ................................................................................................... 18
5.1 Test circuit for 40 W units ............................................................................. 18
5.2 Test circuits for 80 W units............................................................................ 18

List of equipment:
PC with Windows 95, 98 or NT
MMI500 software Rel. 3 or higher
PC P4LQ (1:1 serial RS232) cable
Tx tuning adapter P3LL HENF209668
Selective level meter SPM-32 (W+G) or equivalent

Note:
• Please refer 1KHL015559 for compatibility between software MMI500, firmware and hardware of ETL500.

We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to
third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © ABB Power Automation Ltd, Switzerland.
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 2/19
1KHL015570-EN

1 General
In ETL500, the Tx filter E5LA/E5LB is tuned using the Tx tuning adapter P3LL and the MMI500.
However before starting tuning, the filter has to be programmed using a capacitor combination to
get the required frequency response. The frequency response of the filter depends whether the Tx
and Rx channels are adjacent or separate and whether the equipment is single or two channel.

ETL500: 4 kHz, 1 channel.

The centre frequency of the transmitter filter is positioned between the two channels in the case of
neighbouring Tx and Rx channels (see Fig. 1).
It is tuned to the centre of the Tx channel in cases where Tx and Rx channels are not immediately
adjacent to each other (see Fig. 2).

ETL500: 8 kHz, 2 channels.

The centre frequency of the transmitter filter is always between the two Tx channels (see Fig. 3).

ETL500: 8 kHz, 1 channel.

The centre frequency of the transmitter filter is in the centre of the 8 kHz Tx channel (see Fig. 4).

fo
Filter
Fig. 1

Tx Rx
fo
Filter
Fig. 2

Tx Rx
fo
Filter
Fig. 3

Tx 2 Tx 1 Rx 2 Rx 1
fo
Filter
Fig. 4

Tx Rx
fo = center frequency of the transmitter filter
Two Tx filters are used on 80 W units (upper and lower racks) and both are tuned to the same
center frequency.

Note: Transmitter filter E5LB must be used for transmitter frequencies from 24 kHz to < 100 kHz
and type E5LA for channel frequencies > 100 kHz to 500 kHz.
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 3/19
1KHL015570-EN

2 Capacitor combination for the required frequency band

Before tuning the Tx filter using MMI500, the filter is programmed for the required frequency band
by positioning 8 condensors on the 2 PCBs Na and Nb of E5LA or E5LB. This is done as per the
following table. The frequency band is specified relative to the centre frequency fo of the Tx filter.
The 8 condensors are specified by their position on the board and their value in nF(nano
farads).e.g. 1:2, 68 means the condensor is placed between points 1 and 2 and its value is 68 nF.
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 4/19
1KHL015570-EN

Capacitor combination for E5LB with frequency range 24 to 100 kHz.

Freq. range C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8
fo + 4kHz pos., nF pos., nF pos., nF pos., nF pos., nF pos., nF pos., nF pos., nF
24 + 4, Na 1:2, 47 21:22, 68 25:26, 68 45:46, 100 61:62, 47 73:74, 22 83:84, 150 85:86, 100
24 + 4, Nb 5:6, 47 15:16, 68 27:28, 68 45:46, 100 63:64, 22 75:76, 47 83:84, 150 85:86, 100
26 + 4, Na 5:6, 47 15:16, 68 27:28, 68 45:46, 100 59:60, 22 75:76, 150 81:82, 47 85:86, 100
26 + 4, Nb 1:2, 68 21:22, 47 25:26, 100 37:38, 68 47:48, 150 55:56, 22 63:64, 47 85.86, 100
28 + 4, Na 11:12, 100 21:22, 68 45:46, 150 55:56, 22 61:62, 100 75:76, 47 83:84, 68 85:86, 47
28 + 4, Nb 3:4, 47 5:6, 100 15:16, 68 23:24, 68 33:34, 22 51:52, 100 63:64, 150 71:72, 47
30 + 4, Na 3:4, 47 15:16, 68 25:26, 22 45:46, 150 61:62, 100 73:74, 68 83:84, 47 87:88, 100
30 + 4, Nb 11:12, 100 21:22, 68 27:28, 47 45:46, 150 59:60, 68 75:76, 100 81:82, 22 85:86, 47
32 + 4, Na 1:2, 100 21:22, 47 25:26, 100 47:48, 22 59:60, 68 79:80, 150 81:82, 47 85:86, 68
32 + 4, Nb 1:2, 100 21:22, 47 27:28, 100 45:46, 150 59:60, 22 75:76, 47 81:82, 68 85:86, 68
34 + 4, Na 5:6, 68 15:16, 100 27:28, 47 45:46, 150 61:62, 68 73:74, 100 83:84, 22 85:86, 47
34 + 4, Nb 5:6, 47 15:16, 68 23:24, 150 35:36, 68 61:62, 22 79:80, 47 83:84, 100 85:86, 100
36 + 4, Na 1:2, 47 21:22, 68 27:28, 100 45:46, 150 59:60, 47 73:74, 68 81:82, 22 85:86, 100
36 + 4, Nb 3:4, 68 5:6, 100 15:16, 47 27:28, 68 45:46, 150 59:60, 100 75:76, 22 81:82, 47
38 + 4, Na 3:4, 47 15:16, 68 23:24, 100 33:34, 150 51:52, 68 63:64, 22 71:72, 47 87:88, 100
38 + 4, Nb 1:2, 47 21:22, 68 27:28, 68 45:46, 150 59:60, 100 73:74, 47 81:82, 22 85:86, 100
40 + 4, Na 5:6, 47 15:16, 100 29:30, 100 39:40, 68 45:46, 150 55:56, 22 73:74, 47 85:86, 68
40 + 4, Nb 5:6, 68 15:16, 100 27:28, 100 47:48, 68 59:60, 150 73:74, 47 81:82, 22 85:86, 47
42 + 4, Na 3:4, 47 15:16, 100 27:28, 150 45:46, 68 59:60, 47 65:66, 22 67:68, 100 87:88, 68
42 + 4, Nb 1:2, 68 21:22, 47 23:24, 68 33:34, 150 51:52, 100 63:64, 22 71:72, 47 85:86, 100
44 + 4, Na 9:10, 47 13:14, 68 17:18, 100 25:26, 22 45:46, 47 55:56, 68 73:74, 150 81:82, 100
44 + 4, Nb 1:2, 68 21:22, 47 23:24, 100 33:34, 150 49:50, 47 61:62, 22 73:74, 68 85:86, 100
46 + 4, Na 1:2, 100 21:22, 47 27:28, 22 45:46, 100 65:66, 47 67:68, 150 77:78, 68 85:86, 68
46 + 4, Nb 1:2, 68 21:22, 47 27:28, 100 45:46, 68 59:60, 47 65:66, 22 67:68, 150 87:88, 100
48 + 4, Na 5:6, 47 15:16, 68 27:28, 47 45:46, 150 59:60, 100 65:66, 22 67:68, 68 85:86, 100
48 + 4, Nb 3:4, 47 15:16, 68 27:28, 47 45:46, 100 59:60, 22 65:66, 68 67:68, 150 87:88, 100
50 + 4, Na 5:6, 47 15:16, 68 27:28, 47 45:46, 68 55:56, 22 61:62, 100 79:80, 150 85:86, 100
50 + 4, Nb 9:10, 47 13:14, 68 17:18, 100 29:30, 100 39:40, 47 45:46, 68 55:56, 150 73:74, 22
52 + 4, Na 5:6, 47 15:16, 100 23:24, 150 35:36, 100 49:50, 22 61:62, 47 73:74, 68 85:86, 68
52 + 4, Nb 3:4, 47 5:6, 100 15:16, 68 27:28, 22 45:46, 68 65:66, 100 67:68, 150 77:78, 47
54 + 4, Na 3:4, 68 15:16, 100 27:28, 68 45:46, 47 65:66, 22 67:68, 100 77:78, 150 87:88, 47
54 + 4, Nb 5:6, 47 15:16, 100 29:30, 150 41:42, 100 57:58, 68 73:74, 47 83:84, 22 85:86, 68
56 + 4, Na 1:2, 68 21:22, 47 23:24, 150 35:36, 100 47:48, 47 61:62, 68 73:74, 22 87:88, 100
56 + 4, Nb 5:6, 68 15:16, 100 23:24, 47 33:34, 150 49:50, 68 61:62, 22 73:74, 100 85:86, 47
58 + 4, Na 3:4, 47 15:16, 100 27:28, 100 35:36, 150 51:52, 68 59:60, 47 71:72, 22 87:88, 68
58 + 4, Nb 5:6, 47 15:16, 100 33:34, 22 49:50, 100 59:60, 150 65:66, 47 67:68, 68 85:86, 68
60 + 4, Na 5:6, 68 15:16, 100 23:24, 47 33:34, 22 49:50, 100 61:62, 68 73:74, 150 85:86, 47
60 + 4, Nb 3:4, 68 5:6, 100 15:16, 47 29:30, 100 61:62, 150 65:66, 22 67:68, 47 69:70, 68
62 + 4, Na 1:2, 68 21:22, 100 23:24, 47 33:34, 22 49:50, 68 61:62, 150 73:74, 100 87:88, 47
62 + 4, Nb 9:10, 47 13:14, 68 17:18, 100 23:24, 47 35:36, 150 49:50, 22 61:62, 68 73:74, 100
64 + 4, Na 5:6, 68 15:16, 100 29:30, 100 61:62, 150 65:66, 22 67:68, 68 69:70, 47 85:86, 47
64 + 4, Nb 3:4, 47 15:16, 100 27:28, 22 35:36, 150 51:52, 100 59:60, 68 71:72, 47 87:88, 68
66 + 4, Na 3:4, 47 5:6, 100 15:16, 68 29:30, 100 61:62, 47 65:66, 22 67:68, 150 69:70, 68
66 + 4, Nb 1:2, 47 21:22, 68 23:24, 150 35:36, 100 47:48, 68 61:62, 47 79:80, 22 87:88, 100
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 5/19
1KHL015570-EN

68 + 4, Na 9:10, 47 13:14, 68 17:18, 100 23:24, 100 35:36, 47 47:48, 150 61:62, 68 73:74, 22
68 + 4, Nb 5:6, 68 15:16, 100 23:24, 68 35:36, 47 47:48, 22 61:62, 150 73:74, 100 85:86, 47
70 + 4, Na 3:4, 68 15:16, 100 25:26, 22 35:36, 150 47:48, 100 55:56, 68 79:80, 47 87:88, 47
70 + 4, Nb 1:2, 47 21:22, 68 29:30, 100 61:62, 68 65:66, 22 67:68, 150 69:70, 47 87:88, 100
72 + 4, Na 1:2, 47 21:22, 68 29:30, 68 61:62, 22 65:66, 100 67:68, 150 69:70, 47 87:88, 100
72 + 4, Nb 3:4, 68 5:6, 10 15:16, 47 29:30, 100 61:62, 22 65:66, 68 67:68, 150 69:70, 47
74 + 4, Na 3:4, 47 5:6, 68 15:16, 100 23:24, 22 33:34, 150 47:48, 100 57:58, 68 73:74, 47
74 + 4, Nb 1:2, 68 21:22, 47 27:28, 150 47:48, 47 59:60, 22 73:74, 100 81:82, 68 87:88, 100
76 + 4, Na 1:2, 47 21:22, 68 23:24, 22 33:34, 47 49:50, 100 61:62, 68 73:74, 150 87:88, 100
76 + 4, Nb 3:4, 47 15:16, 100 27:28, 68 45:46, 22 55:56, 47 61:62, 100 79:80, 150 87:88, 68
78 + 4, Na 3:4, 47 15:16, 68 23:24, 22 33:34, 47 47:48, 150 57:58, 100 73:74, 68 87:88, 100
78 + 4, Nb 1:2, 47 21:22, 68 27:28, 47 45:46, 22 55:56, 100 61:62, 68 79:80, 150 87:88, 100
80 + 4, Na 1:2, 68 21:22, 47 23:24, 100 35:36, 22 47:48, 68 61:62, 150 73:74, 47 87:88, 100
80 + 4, Nb 1:2, 68 21:22, 47 23:24, 22 33:34, 47 47:48, 150 57:58, 100 73:74, 68 87:88, 100
82 + 4, Na 3:4, 47 5:6, 100 15:16, 68 29:30, 150 61:62, 47 65:66, 68 67:68, 100 69:70, 22
82 + 4, Nb 3:4, 47 5:6, 100 15:16, 68 23:24, 100 35:36, 22 47:48, 68 61:62, 150 73:74, 47
84 + 4, Na 3:4, 47 5:6, 68 15:16, 100 23:24, 68 35:36, 22 47:48, 150 61:62, 100 73:74, 47
84 + 4, Nb 3:4, 68 5:6, 100 15:16, 47 29:30, 150 61:62, 47 65:66, 68 67:68, 100 69:70, 22
86 + 4, Na 3:4, 68 15:16, 100 23:24, 47 35:36, 22 47:48, 68 61:62, 150 73:74, 100 87:88, 47
86 + 4, Nb 1:2, 68 21:22, 47 23:24, 68 35:36, 22 47:48, 150 61:62, 100 73:74, 47 87:88, 100
88 + 4, Na 3:4, 47 15:16, 100 29:30, 47 61:62, 68 65:66, 100 67:68, 150 69:70, 22 87:88, 68
88 + 4, Nb 3:4, 47 5:6, 68 15:16, 100 23:24, 47 35:36, 22 47:48, 68 61:62, 150 73:74, 100
90 + 4, Na 3:4, 68 5:6, 100 15:16, 47 29:30, 150 41:42, 100 47:48, 47 57:58, 68 73:74, 22
90 + 4, Nb 1:2, 68 21:22, 47 29:30, 150 41:42, 68 49:50, 22 61:62, 100 73:74, 47 87:88, 100
92 + 4, Na 3:4, 47 15:16, 68 23:24, 68 35:36, 47 47:48, 150 61:62, 22 79:80, 100 87:88, 100
92 + 4, Nb 3:4, 47 5:6, 68 15:16, 100 29:30, 150 41:42, 100 47:48, 47 57:58, 68 73:74, 22
94 + 4, Na 3:4, 68 15:16, 100 29:30, 68 41:42, 47 49:50, 22 61:62, 150 73:74, 100 87:88, 47
94 + 4, Nb 3:4, 68 15:16, 100 29:30, 100 41:42, 47 49:50, 22 61:62, 150 73:74, 68 87:88, 47
96 + 4, Na 1:2, 68 21:22, 47 29:30, 100 41:42, 68 47:48, 150 57:58, 47 73:74, 22 87:88, 100
96 + 4, Nb 3:4, 47 15:16, 100 29:30, 68 41:42, 47 49:50, 22 61:62, 150 73:74, 100 87:88, 68
98 + 4, Na 3:4, 68 5:6, 100 15:16, 47 23:24, 150 41:42, 100 65:66, 22 67:68, 47 69:70, 68
98 + 4, Nb 3:4, 68 15:16, 100 29:30, 150 41:42, 68 47:48, 100 57:58, 47 73:74, 22 87:88, 47
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 6/19
1KHL015570-EN

Capacitor combination for E5LA with frequency range 100 to 500 kHz.

Freq. range C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8
fo + 4kHz pos., nF pos., nF pos., nF pos., nF pos., nF pos., nF pos., nF pos., nF
100 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 37:38, 1.2 43:44, 1.5 53:54, 2.2 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 3.9
100 + 4, Nb 9:10, 10 19:20, 18 31:32, 15 37:38, 1.2 43:44, 1.5 53:54, 2.2 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 3.9
102 + 4, Na 9:10, 15 19:20, 18 31:32, 10 37:38, 1.2 43:44, 1.5 53:54, 2.2 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 3.9
102 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 37:38, 1.2 43:44, 1.5 53:54, 2.2 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 3.9
104 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 15 31:32, 10 37:38, 1.5 53:54, 2.2 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 3.9 67:68, 1.2
104 + 4, Nb 9:10, 10 19:20, 18 31:32, 15 37:38, 1.2 43:44, 1.5 53:54, 2.2 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 3.9
106 + 4, Na 9:10, 15 19:20, 18 31:32, 10 37:38, 1.5 53:54, 2.2 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 3.9 67:68, 1.2
106 + 4, Nb 19:20, 18 21:22, 15 31:32, 10 37:38, 1.5 53:54, 2.2 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 3.9 67:68, 1.2
108 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 15 31:32, 10 37:38, 1.5 53:54, 2.2 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 3.9 67:68, 1.2
108 + 4, Nb 9:10, 15 19:20, 18 31:32, 10 37:38, 1.5 53:54, 2.2 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 3.9 67:68, 1.2
110 + 4, Na 9:10, 15 19:20, 18 31:32, 10 37:38, 1.2 53:54, 2.2 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 3.9 67:68, 1.5
110 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 31:32, 10 37:38, 1.2 53:54, 2.2 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 3.9 67:68, 1.5
112 + 4, Na 9:10, 18 19:20, 15 31:32, 10 35:36, 1.2 53:54, 2.2 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 3.9 69:70, 1.5
112 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 31:32, 10 35:36, 1.2 53:54, 2.2 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 3.9 69:70, 1.5
114 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 37:38, 1.2 53:54, 1.5 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 3.9 67:68, 2.2
114 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 37:38, 1.2 53:54, 1.5 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 3.9 67:68, 2.2
116 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 35:36, 1.2 53:54, 1.5 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 3.9 69:70, 2.2
116 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 35:36, 1.2 53:54, 1.5 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 3.9 69:70, 2.2
118 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 53:54, 1.5 55:56, 2.2 57:58, 3.9 67:68, 1.2 75:76, 1.5
118 + 4, Nb 9:10, 15 19:20, 18 31:32, 10 53:54, 1.5 55:56, 2.2 57:58, 3.9 67:68, 1.2 75:76, 1.5
120 + 4, Na 9:10, 10 19:20, 18 31:32, 15 53:54, 2.2 55:56, 1.2 57:58, 3.9 67:68, 1.5 75:76, 1.5
120 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 53:54, 2.2 55:56, 1.2 57:58, 3.9 67:68, 1.5 75:76, 1.5
122 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 31:32, 10 37:38, 2.2 45:46, 3.9 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2
122 + 4, Nb 9:10, 15 19:20, 18 31:32, 10 37:38, 2.2 45:46, 3.9 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2
124 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 10 33:34, 15 37:38, 2.2 43:44, 3.9 47:48, 1.5 89:90, 1.2 95:96, 1.5
124 + 4, Nb 7:8, 18 19:20, 10 31:32, 15 37:38, 2.2 43:44, 3.9 47:48, 1.5 89:90, 1.2 95:96, 1.5
126 + 4, Na 9:10, 15 19:20, 18 31:32, 10 53:54, 1.5 55:56, 1.2 57:58, 3.9 67:68, 2.2 75:76, 1.5
126 + 4, Nb 19:20, 18 21:22, 10 33:34, 15 53:54, 1.5 55:56, 1.2 57:58, 3.9 67:68, 2.2 75:76, 1.5
128 + 4, Na 9:10, 10 19:20, 18 31:32, 15 37:38, 1.2 45:46, 3.9 51:52, 2.2 61:62, 1.5 59:60, 1.5
128 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 37:38, 1.2 45:46, 3.9 51:52, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5
130 + 4, Na 7:8, 18 19:20, 10 31:32, 15 37:38, 1.5 43:44, 3.9 47:48, 2.2 89:90, 1.5 95:96, 1.2
130 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 37:38, 1.5 43:44, 3.9 47:48, 2.2 89:90, 1.5 95:96, 1.2
132 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 35:36, 3.9 53:54, 2.2 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 1.2 69:70, 1.5
132 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 35:36, 3.9 53:54, 2.2 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 1.2 69:70, 1.5
134 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 37:38, 1.2 43:44, 3.9 47:48, 1.5 89:90, 2.2 95:96, 1.5
134 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 37:38, 1.2 43:44, 3.9 47:48, 1.5 89:90, 2.2 95:96, 1.5
136 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 15 31:32, 10 35:36, 2.2 53:54, 1.2 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 1.5 69:70, 3.9
136 + 4, Nb 19:20, 18 21:22, 15 31:32, 10 35:36, 2.2 53:54, 1.2 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 1.5 69:70, 3.9
138 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 47:48, 2.2 51:52, 1.5 57:58, 3.9 61:62, 1.2 65:66, 1.5
138 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 47:48, 2.2 51:52, 1.5 57:58, 3.9 61:62, 1.2 65:66, 1.5
140 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 37:38, 2.2 45:46, 1.5 51:52, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2
140 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 37:38, 2.2 45:46, 1.5 51:52, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2
142 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 37:38, 3.9 51:52, 2.2 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 1.5
142 + 4, Nb 9:10, 15 19:20, 18 31:32, 10 37:38, 3.9 51:52, 2.2 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 1.5
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 7/19
1KHL015570-EN

144 + 4, Na 7:8, 18 19:20, 10 31:32, 15 41:42, 3.9 47:48, 2.2 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 1.5
144 + 4, Nb 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 41:42, 3.9 47:48, 2.2 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 1.5
146 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 37:38, 2.2 45:46, 1.5 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.2
146 + 4, Nb 19:20, 18 21:22, 15 31:32, 10 37:38, 2.2 45:46, 1.5 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.2
148 + 4, Na 7:8, 18 19:20, 10 31:32, 15 41:42, 3.9 47:48, 1.2 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 2.2 95:96, 1.5
148 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 41:42, 3.9 47:48, 1.2 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 2.2 95:96, 1.5
150 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 37:38, 1.2 45:46, 2.2 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5
150 + 4, Nb 9:10, 15 19:20, 18 31:32, 10 37:38, 1.2 45:46, 2.2 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5
152 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 31:32, 10 37:38, 3.9 47:48, 2.2 69:70, 1.2 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.5
152 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 31:32, 10 37:38, 3.9 47:48, 2.2 69:70, 1.2 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.5
154 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 37:38, 3.9 47:48, 1.2 69:70, 2.2 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.5
154 + 4, Nb 7:8, 18 19:20, 10 31:32, 15 37:38, 3.9 47:48, 1.2 69:70, 2.2 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.5
156 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 41:42, 2.2 47:48, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 1.2
156 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 41:42, 2.2 47:48, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 1.2
158 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 37:38, 1.2 43:44, 1.5 47:48, 3.9 89:90, 1.5 95:96, 2.2
158 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 37:38, 1.2 43:44, 1.5 47:48, 3.9 89:90, 1.5 95:96, 2.2
160 + 4, Na 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 47:48, 3.9 51:52, 1.5 57:58, 2.2 61:62, 1.2 65:66, 1.5
160 + 4, Nb 9:10, 10 19:20, 18 31:32, 15 47:48, 3.9 51:52, 1.5 57:58, 2.2 61:62, 1.2 65:66, 1.5
162 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 37:38, 2.2 51:52, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 1.2
162 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 31:32, 10 37:38, 2.2 51:52, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 1.2
164 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 10 33:34, 15 37:38, 2.2 51:52, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 73:74, 1.5
164 + 4, Nb 19:20, 18 21:22, 15 31:32, 10 37:38, 2.2 51:52, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 73:74, 1.5
166 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 2.2 67:68, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 79:80, 1.2
166 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 55:56, 1.5 57:58, 2.2 67:68, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 79:80, 1.2
168 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 41:42, 2.2 47:48, 3.9 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 1.5
168 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 41:42, 2.2 47:48, 3.9 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 1.5
170 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 41:42, 2.2 47:48, 3.9 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.5 95:96, 1.2
170 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 41:42, 2.2 47:48, 3.9 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.5 95:96, 1.2
172 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 41:42, 1.2 47:48, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 2.2 63:64, 1.5
172 + 4, Nb 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 41:42, 1.2 47:48, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 2.2 63:64, 1.5
174 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 37:38, 2.2 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 3.9 73:74, 1.5
174 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 37:38, 2.2 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 3.9 73:74, 1.5
176 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 37:38, 2.2 47:48, 1.5 85:86, 1.5 89:90, 1.2 95:96, 3.9
176 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 37:38, 2.2 47:48, 1.5 85:86, 1.5 89:90, 1.2 95:96, 3.9
178 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 31:32, 10 47:48, 3.9 51:52, 2.2 57:58, 1.2 61:62, 1.5 65:66, 1.5
178 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 47:48, 3.9 51:52, 2.2 57:58, 1.2 61:62, 1.5 65:66, 1.5
180 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 10 33:34, 15 41:42, 2.2 47:48, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 1.5
180 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 41:42, 2.2 47:48, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 1.5
182 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 37:38, 2.2 51:52, 1.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 3.9
182 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 37:38, 2.2 51:52, 1.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 3.9
184 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 41:42, 1.5 47:48, 2.2 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 3.9
184 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 41:42, 1.5 47:48, 2.2 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 3.9
186 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 37:38, 1.5 47:48, 2.2 85:86, 1.5 89:90, 1.2 95:96, 3.9
186 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 37:38, 1.5 47:48, 2.2 85:86, 1.5 89:90, 1.2 95:96, 3.9
188 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 37:38, 2.2 49:50, 1.5 61:62, 3.9 63:64, 1.2 67:68, 1.5
188 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 31:32, 10 37:38, 2.2 49:50, 1.5 61:62, 3.9 63:64, 1.2 67:68, 1.5
190 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 31:32, 10 37:38, 2.2 49:50, 1.2 61:62, 3.9 63:64, 1.5 67:68, 1.5
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 8/19
1KHL015570-EN

190 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 37:38, 2.2 49:50, 1.2 61:62, 3.9 63:64, 1.5 67:68, 1.5
192 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 10 31:32, 15 37:38, 1.5 51:52, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 73:74, 3.9
192 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 37:38, 1.5 51:52, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 73:74, 3.9
194 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 37:38, 2.2 47:48, 1.2 69:70, 3.9 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.5
194 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 37:38, 2.2 47:48, 1.2 69:70, 3.9 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.5
196 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 15 31:32, 10 35:36, 1.2 43:44, 2.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5
196 + 4, Nb 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.2 43:44, 2.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5
198 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 15 31:32, 10 35:36, 1.2 51:52, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 2.2 69:70, 1.5
198 + 4, Nb 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.2 51:52, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 2.2 69:70, 1.5
200 + 4, Na 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 37:38, 1.5 51:52, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 1.5
200 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 37:38, 1.5 51:52, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 1.5
202 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 10 31:32, 18 41:42, 1.2 47:48, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 2.2
202 + 4, Nb 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 41:42, 1.2 47:48, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 2.2
204 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 37:38, 1.2 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 2.2 61:62, 3.9 73:74, 1.5
204 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 37:38, 1.2 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 2.2 61:62, 3.9 73:74, 1.5
206 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 35:36, 2.2 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 69:70, 3.9
206 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 69:70, 3.9
208 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 15 31:32, 10 35:36, 1.5 51:52, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 69:70, 3.9
208 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 51:52, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 69:70, 3.9
210 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 2.2 51:52, 1.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 3.9
210 + 4, Nb 19:20, 18 21:22, 15 31:32, 10 35:36, 2.2 51:52, 1.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 3.9
212 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 31:32, 10 47:48, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 2.2 63:64, 1.5 69:70, 1.2
212 + 4, Nb 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 47:48, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 2.2 63:64, 1.5 69:70, 1.2
214 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 31:32, 10 47:48, 3.9 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 2.2 63:64, 1.5 69:70, 1.5
214 + 4, Nb 21:22, 18 19:20, 10 33:34, 15 47:48, 3.9 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 2.2 63:64, 1.5 69:70, 1.5
216 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 31:32, 10 47:48, 1.5 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 2.2 65:66, 3.9
216 + 4, Nb 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 47:48, 1.5 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 2.2 65:66, 3.9
218 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 47:48, 1.2 51:52, 2.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 1.5
218 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 47:48, 1.2 51:52, 2.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 1.5
220 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 15 31:32, 10 35:36, 1.5 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.2 69:70, 2.2
220 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 1.5 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.2 69:70, 2.2
222 + 4, Na 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 47:48, 1.5 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 69:70, 1.2
222 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 47:48, 1.5 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 69:70, 1.2
224 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 35:36, 2.2 47:48, 1.5 69:70, 1.5 89:90, 1.2 95:96, 3.9
224 + 4, Nb 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 2.2 47:48, 1.5 69:70, 1.5 89:90, 1.2 95:96, 3.9
226 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.2 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 2.2
226 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 31:32, 10 35:36, 1.2 51:52, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 2.2
228 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 10 33:34, 15 35:36, 2.2 49:50, 1.5 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 69:70, 3.9
228 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 49:50, 1.5 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 69:70, 3.9
230 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.5 49:50, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 2.2 79:80, 1.2
230 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 31:32, 10 35:36, 1.5 49:50, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 2.2 79:80, 1.2
232 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 35:36, 1.5 49:50, 1.5 61:62, 2.2 69:70, 3.9 79:80, 1.2
232 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 49:50, 1.5 61:62, 2.2 69:70, 3.9 79:80, 1.2
234 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 2.2 47:48, 1.2 69:70, 1.5 89:90, 1.5 95:96, 3.9
234 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 35:36, 2.2 47:48, 1.2 69:70, 1.5 89:90, 1.5 95:96, 3.9
236 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 35:36, 1.5 51:52, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 69:70, 1.5
236 + 4, Nb 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.5 51:52, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 69:70, 1.5
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 9/19
1KHL015570-EN

238 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 69:70, 2.2 79:80, 1.5
238 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 31:32, 10 35:36, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 69:70, 2.2 79:80, 1.5
240 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 35:36, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 2.2 79:80, 1.2
240 + 4, Nb 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 2.2 79:80, 1.2
242 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 1.5 49:50, 1.5 59:60, 2.2 61:62, 1.2 69:70, 3.9
242 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 31:32, 10 35:36, 1.5 49:50, 1.5 59:60, 2.2 61:62, 1.2 69:70, 3.9
244 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 47:48, 2.2 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 3.9 69:70, 1.5
244 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 47:48, 2.2 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 3.9 69:70, 1.5
246 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.2 49:50, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 1.5 79:80, 2.2
246 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 35:36, 1.2 49:50, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 1.5 79:80, 2.2
248 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 35:36, 1.5 49:50, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 69:70, 1.5 79:80, 1.2
248 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 1.5 49:50, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 69:70, 1.5 79:80, 1.2
250 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 3.9 69:70, 2.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5
250 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 35:36, 3.9 69:70, 2.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5
252 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 35:36, 1.5 47:48, 1.2 69:70, 2.2 89:90, 3.9 95:96, 1.5
252 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 47:48, 1.2 69:70, 2.2 89:90, 3.9 95:96, 1.5
254 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 31:32, 10 35:36, 1.2 47:48, 1.5 69:70, 2.2 89:90, 3.9 95:96, 1.5
254 + 4, Nb 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 1.2 47:48, 1.5 69:70, 2.2 89:90, 3.9 95:96, 1.5
256 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 3.9 79:80, 1.2
256 + 4, Nb 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 3.9 79:80, 1.2
258 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 2.2 49:50, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 1.2 79:80, 1.5
258 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 35:36, 2.2 49:50, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 1.2 79:80, 1.5
260 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 31:32, 10 47:48, 2.2 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 1.5 69:70, 3.9
260 + 4, Nb 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 47:48, 2.2 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 1.5 69:70, 3.9
262 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 31:32, 18 35:36, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 2.2 69:70, 1.2 79:80, 1.5
262 + 4, Nb 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 3.9 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 2.2 69:70, 1.2 79:80, 1.5
264 + 4, Na 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 2.2 69:70, 3.9 85:86, 1.2 89:90, 1.5 93:94, 1.5
264 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 31:32, 10 35:36, 2.2 69:70, 3.9 85:86, 1.2 89:90, 1.5 93:94, 1.5
266 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 10 33:34, 15 47:48, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 69:70, 3.9 79:80, 1.5
266 + 4, Nb 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 47:48, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 69:70, 3.9 79:80, 1.5
268 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 35:36, 3.9 69:70, 1.5 75:76, 1.2 83:84, 2.2 87:88, 1.5
268 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 3.9 69:70, 1.5 75:76, 1.2 83:84, 2.2 87:88, 1.5
270 + 4, Na 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 3.9 69:70, 1.5 75:76, 1.2 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 2.2
270 + 4, Nb 21:22, 10 19:20, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 3.9 69:70, 1.5 75:76, 1.2 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 2.2
272 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 35:36, 3.9 69:70, 1.5 75:76, 1.2 83:84, 2.2 87:88, 1.5
272 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 3.9 69:70, 1.5 75:76, 1.2 83:84, 2.2 87:88, 1.5
274 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 69:70, 1.5 79:80, 3.9
274 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 69:70, 1.5 79:80, 3.9
276 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 69:70, 1.5 79:80, 3.9
276 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 69:70, 1.5 79:80, 3.9
278 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 49:50, 1.5 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 3.9 69:70, 2.2
278 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 31:32, 10 35:36, 1.5 49:50, 1.5 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 3.9 69:70, 2.2
280 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 31:32, 10 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 1.2 79:80, 3.9
280 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 1.2 79:80, 3.9
282 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 3.9 69:70, 1.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 2.2
282 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 31:32, 10 35:36, 3.9 69:70, 1.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 2.2
284 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 10 33:34, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 3.9 69:70, 1.5 79:80, 1.5
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 10/19
1KHL015570-EN

284 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 3.9 69:70, 1.5 79:80, 1.5
286 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 31:32, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 1.5 79:80, 1.2
286 + 4, Nb 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 1.5 79:80, 1.2
288 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 31:32, 10 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 1.5 79:80, 1.2
288 + 4, Nb 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 1.5 79:80, 1.2
290 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 1.5 79:80, 1.2
290 + 4, Nb 19:20, 18 21:22, 10 33:34, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 69:70, 1.5 79:80, 1.2
292 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 3.9 69:70, 1.2 79:80, 1.5
292 + 4, Nb 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 3.9 69:70, 1.2 79:80, 1.5
294 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 1.5 67:68, 1.2 75:76, 2.2
294 + 4, Nb 21:22, 18 19:20, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 1.5 67:68, 1.2 75:76, 2.2
296 + 4, Na 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 2.2 67:68, 1.2 75:76, 1.5
296 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 2.2 67:68, 1.2 75:76, 1.5
298 + 4, Na 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 2.2 69:70, 1.5 75:76, 1.2 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5
298 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 69:70, 1.5 75:76, 1.2 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5
300 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 69:70, 1.5 75:76, 1.2 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5
300 + 4, Nb 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 2.2 69:70, 1.5 75:76, 1.2 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5
302 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 2.2 69:70, 1.5 75:76, 1.2 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5
302 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 31:32, 10 35:36, 2.2 69:70, 1.5 75:76, 1.2 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5
304 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 10 33:34, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 1.2 75:76, 3.9
304 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 1.2 75:76, 3.9
306 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 2.2 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 1.5 67:68, 1.2 75:76, 3.9
306 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 31:32, 10 35:36, 2.2 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 1.5 67:68, 1.2 75:76, 3.9
308 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 10 33:34, 15 35:36, 2.2 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 1.5 67:68, 1.2 75:76, 3.9
308 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 2.2 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 1.5 67:68, 1.2 75:76, 3.9
310 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 2.2 69:70, 1.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5
310 + 4, Nb 19:20, 18 21:22, 10 33:34, 15 35:36, 2.2 69:70, 1.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5
312 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 10 33:34, 15 35:36, 2.2 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 3.9 67:68, 1.2 75:76, 1.5
312 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 2.2 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 3.9 67:68, 1.2 75:76, 1.5
314 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 1.2 79:80, 3.9
314 + 4, Nb 21:22, 18 19:20, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 1.2 79:80, 3.9
316 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 1.2 79:80, 3.9
316 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 1.2 79:80, 3.9
318 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 1.2 79:80, 3.9
318 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 1.2 79:80, 3.9
320 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 69:70, 1.5 79:80, 1.2
320 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 69:70, 1.5 79:80, 1.2
322 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 31:32, 10 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 3.9
322 + 4, Nb 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 3.9
324 + 4, Na 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 2.2 61:62, 3.9 69:70, 1.2 79:80, 1.5
324 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 31:32, 10 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 2.2 61:62, 3.9 69:70, 1.2 79:80, 1.5
326 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 2.2 69:70, 1.5 85:86, 1.2 89:90, 3.9 93:94, 1.5
326 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 69:70, 1.5 85:86, 1.2 89:90, 3.9 93:94, 1.5
328 + 4, Na 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 2.2 69:70, 1.5 85:86, 1.2 89:90, 3.9 93:94, 1.5
328 + 4, Nb 19:20, 18 21:22, 10 33:34, 15 35:36, 2.2 69:70, 1.5 85:86, 1.2 89:90, 3.9 93:94, 1.5
330 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 10 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 69:70, 1.5 75:76, 1.2 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 2.2
330 + 4, Nb 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 1.5 69:70, 1.5 75:76, 1.2 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 2.2
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 11/19
1KHL015570-EN

332 + 4, Na 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 3.9 67:68, 1.2 75:76, 2.2
332 + 4, Nb 19:20, 18 21:22, 10 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 3.9 67:68, 1.2 75:76, 2.2
334 + 4, Na 19:20, 18 21:22, 10 33:34, 15 35:36, 2.2 75:76, 3.9 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 1.5
334 + 4, Nb 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 2.2 75:76, 3.9 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 1.5
336 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 75:76, 3.9 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 1.5
336 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 2.2 75:76, 3.9 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 1.5
338 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 1.2 79:80, 3.9
338 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 1.2 79:80, 3.9
340 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 61:62, 3.9 63:64, 2.2 67:68, 1.2 75:76, 1.5
340 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 61:62, 3.9 63:64, 2.2 67:68, 1.2 75:76, 1.5
342 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 3.9
342 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 3.9
344 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 75:76, 3.9 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.5 95:96, 1.2
344 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 2.2 75:76, 3.9 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.5 95:96, 1.2
346 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 3.9 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 2.2
346 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 3.9 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 2.2
348 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 3.9 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 2.2
348 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 3.9 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 2.2
350 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 1.2 75:76, 1.5
350 + 4, Nb 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 63:64, 1.2 75:76, 1.5
352 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 3.9
352 + 4, Nb 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 3.9
354 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 3.9 73:74, 1.2 79:80, 1.5
354 + 4, Nb 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 3.9 73:74, 1.2 79:80, 1.5
356 + 4, Na 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 69:70, 1.5 85:86, 1.2 89:90, 3.9 93:94, 2.2
356 + 4, Nb 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.5 69:70, 1.5 85:86, 1.2 89:90, 3.9 93:94, 2.2
358 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 2.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 3.9
358 + 4, Nb 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 2.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.5 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 3.9
360 + 4, Na 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 3.9 83:84, 2.2 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 1.5
360 + 4, Nb 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 3.9 83:84, 2.2 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 1.5
362 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 3.9 67:68, 1.5 85:86, 1.2 89:90, 1.5 95:96, 2.2
362 + 4, Nb 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 3.9 67:68, 1.5 85:86, 1.2 89:90, 1.5 95:96, 2.2
364 + 4, Na 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 3.9 83:84, 2.2 87:88, 1.5 95:96, 1.2
364 + 4, Nb 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 3.9 83:84, 2.2 87:88, 1.5 95:96, 1.2
366 + 4, Na 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 3.9 83:84, 2.2 87:88, 1.5 95:96, 1.2
366 + 4, Nb 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 3.9 83:84, 2.2 87:88, 1.5 95:96, 1.2
368 + 4, Na 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 63:64, 1.2 75:76, 1.5
368 + 4, Nb 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 63:64, 1.2 75:76, 1.5
370 + 4, Na 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 63:64, 1.2 75:76, 1.5
370 + 4, Nb 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 63:64, 1.2 75:76, 1.5
372 + 4, Na 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 63:64, 1.2 75:76, 1.5
372 + 4, Nb 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 63:64, 1.2 75:76, 1.5
374 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 63:64, 1.2 75:76, 1.5
374 + 4, Nb 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 63:64, 1.2 75:76, 1.5
376 + 4, Na 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 3.9 79:80, 1.5
376 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 3.9 79:80, 1.5
378 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 2.2 61:62, 3.9 73:74, 1.2 79:80, 1.5
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 12/19
1KHL015570-EN

378 + 4, Nb 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 2.2 61:62, 3.9 73:74, 1.2 79:80, 1.5
380 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 3.9 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 1.5
380 + 4, Nb 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 3.9 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 1.5
382 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 2.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 1.5
382 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 1.5
384 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5 95:96, 1.2
384 + 4, Nb 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 2.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5 95:96, 1.2
386 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 2.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5 95:96, 1.2
386 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 2.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5 95:96, 1.2
388 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 3.9 67:68, 1.5 85:86, 1.2 89:90, 2.2 95:96, 1.5
388 + 4, Nb 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 3.9 67:68, 1.5 85:86, 1.2 89:90, 2.2 95:96, 1.5
390 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 3.9 79:80, 1.5
390 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 3.9 79:80, 1.5
392 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 3.9 79:80, 1.5
392 + 4, Nb 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.5 59:60, 1.2 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 3.9 79:80, 1.5
394 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 2.2
394 + 4, Nb 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.2 95:96, 2.2
396 + 4, Na 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.2 59:60, 2.2 61:62, 3.9 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 1.5
396 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.2 59:60, 2.2 61:62, 3.9 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 1.5
398 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.2 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5 95:96, 1.5
398 + 4, Nb 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.2 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5 95:96, 1.5
400 + 4, Na 21:22, 10 27:28, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 3.9 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 1.5
400 + 4, Nb 19:20, 18 21:22, 10 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 3.9 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 1.5
402 + 4, Na 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 2.2 95:96, 1.2
402 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 2.2 95:96, 1.2
404 + 4, Na 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 39:40, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 3.9
404 + 4, Nb 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 39:40, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 3.9
406 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 39:40, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 3.9
406 + 4, Nb 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 39:40, 2.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.2 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 3.9
408 + 4, Na 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 3.9 79:80, 1.5
408 + 4, Nb 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 3.9 79:80, 1.5
410 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.5 67:68, 2.2 85:86, 1.2 89:90, 3.9 95:96, 1.5
410 + 4, Nb 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 1.5 67:68, 2.2 85:86, 1.2 89:90, 3.9 95:96, 1.5
412 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5 95:96, 2.2
412 + 4, Nb 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 1.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5 95:96, 2.2
414 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 2.2 95:96, 1.5
414 + 4, Nb 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 1.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 2.2 95:96, 1.5
416 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 2.2 95:96, 1.5
416 + 4, Nb 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 1.2 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 2.2 95:96, 1.5
418 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 3.9
418 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 1.5 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 3.9
420 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 39:40, 1.5 59:60, 2.2 61:62, 1.2 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 3.9
420 + 4, Nb 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 39:40, 1.5 59:60, 2.2 61:62, 1.2 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 3.9
422 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 39:40, 1.5 59:60, 2.2 61:62, 1.2 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 3.9
422 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 39:40, 1.5 59:60, 2.2 61:62, 1.2 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 3.9
424 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 67:68, 2.2 85:86, 1.5 89:90, 3.9 95:96, 1.2
424 + 4, Nb 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.5 67:68, 2.2 85:86, 1.5 89:90, 3.9 95:96, 1.2
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 13/19
1KHL015570-EN

426 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.5 67:68, 2.2 85:86, 1.5 89:90, 3.9 95:96, 1.2
426 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 67:68, 2.2 85:86, 1.5 89:90, 3.9 95:96, 1.2
428 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 2.2 67:68, 1.5 85:86, 1.5 89:90, 3.9 95:96, 1.2
428 + 4, Nb 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 2.2 67:68, 1.5 85:86, 1.5 89:90, 3.9 95:96, 1.2
430 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 39:40, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.2 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 1.5
430 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 39:40, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.2 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 1.5
432 + 4, Na 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 39:40, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.2 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 1.5
432 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 39:40, 1.5 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.2 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 1.5
434 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 2.2 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 3.9
434 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 2.2 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 3.9
436 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 2.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 1.2
436 + 4, Nb 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 2.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 1.2
438 + 4, Na 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 2.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 1.2
438 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 2.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 1.2
440 + 4, Na 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 1.5
440 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 1.5
442 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 1.5
442 + 4, Nb 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 1.5
444 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 1.5
444 + 4, Nb 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 1.5
446 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 1.5
446 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 1.5 73:74, 2.2 79:80, 1.5
448 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 1.5 67:68, 1.5 85:86, 2.2 89:90, 3.9 95:96, 1.2
448 + 4, Nb 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 1.5 67:68, 1.5 85:86, 2.2 89:90, 3.9 95:96, 1.2
450 + 4, Na 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 1.5 67:68, 1.5 85:86, 2.2 89:90, 3.9 95:96, 1.2
450 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 1.5 67:68, 1.5 85:86, 2.2 89:90, 3.9 95:96, 1.2
452 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 2.2 91:92, 1.5
452 + 4, Nb 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 2.2 91:92, 1.5
454 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 1.5
454 + 4, Nb 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 1.5
456 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 1.5
456 + 4, Nb 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 1.5
458 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 2.2
458 + 4, Nb 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.5 67:68, 1.5 85:86, 2.2 89:90, 3.9 95:96, 1.2
460 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 1.5
460 + 4, Nb 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 1.5
462 + 4, Na 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 1.5
462 + 4, Nb 21:22, 10 27:28, 18 33:34, 15 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 1.5
464 + 4, Na 21:22, 10 27:28, 18 33:34, 15 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 1.5
464 + 4, Nb 19:20, 15 21:22, 18 33:34, 10 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 1.5
466 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 1.5
466 + 4, Nb 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 39:40, 1.2 59:60, 3.9 61:62, 2.2 73:74, 1.5 79:80, 1.5
468 + 4, Na 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 1.5
468 + 4, Nb 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 2.2
470 + 4, Na 25:26, 18 27:28, 10 29:30, 15 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 2.2
470 + 4, Nb 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 2.2
472 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 2.2
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 14/19
1KHL015570-EN

472 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 2.2
474 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 2.2
474 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 2.2
476 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
476 + 4, Nb 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 2.2
478 + 4, Na 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
478 + 4, Nb 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 2.2
480 + 4, Na 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
480 + 4, Nb 19:20, 10 21:22, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 3.9 75:76, 1.5 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 2.2
482 + 4, Na 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
482 + 4, Nb 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
484 + 4, Na 11:12, 10 13:14, 18 17:18, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
484 + 4, Nb 25:26, 15 27:28, 10 29:30, 18 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
486 + 4, Na 15:16, 18 17:18, 15 33:34, 10 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
486 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
488 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
488 + 4, Nb 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
490 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
490 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
492 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
492 + 4, Nb 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
494 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
494 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 18 33:34, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
496 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
496 + 4, Nb 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
498 + 4, Na 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
498 + 4, Nb 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 1.5 75:76, 2.2 83:84, 1.2 87:88, 1.5 91:92, 3.9
500 + 4, Na 15:16, 10 17:18, 15 33:34, 18 35:36, 1.2 73:74, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5 93:94, 2.2
500 + 4, Nb 25:26, 10 27:28, 18 29:30, 15 35:36, 1.2 73:74, 1.5 83:84, 3.9 87:88, 1.5 93:94, 2.2
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 15/19
1KHL015570-EN

3 Tuning the filter circuits individually

Once the Tx filter is programmed for the required frequency band, its individual circuits can be
tuned with the help of the tuning adapter P3LL and the MMI500. The DSP module P4LQ is used to
generate and inject the tuning frequency into the transmitter filter via the output amplifier stage
P1LA. The Tx tuning adapter provides facility for measuring the output amplifier level and also for
switching from tuning individual circuits to checking the overall frequency response.

3.1 Use the following steps in case of the 40W units. (see test circuit in 5.1)
1. The Tx tuning adapter is inserted in place of the RF hybrid (P3LB / P3DA) and the RF hybrid is
plugged on top of it. The Uoutput of the adapter P3LL is connected to the selective level meter in
the wideband range.

2. If not already done start the MMI500, connect to the equipment and upload the configuration.

3. For MMI500 version 1.1 or previous choose the Local menu and click Tuning & testing.
For MMI500 version 2.0 or later choose the Equipment menu and click Tuning & testing.

4. A warning dialog box appears, click OK.

5. Click Tune Tx RF filter.

6. For tuning the coil L1 set the adapter P3LL to:

• FUNCTION :A
• Position of S1 : L1, FILTER
• Position of S2 : TUNE
• Position of S3 : OFF
• Position of LOAD : LINE
click Activate f1. Using coil L1, Uoutput is tuned to a minimum or the end stop of coil L1 is
reached.

7. For tuning the coil L2 set the adapter P3LL to:

• FUNCTION :A
• Position of S1 : L2, FILTER
• Position of S2 : TUNE
• Position of S3 : OFF
• Position of LOAD : LINE
click Activate f2. Using coil L2, Uoutput is tuned to a minimum or the end stop of coil L2 is
reached.

8. Terminate the action by clicking deactivate frequency and to return to the tuning & testing
main menu by clicking Cancel.

3.2 Use the following steps in case of the 80W units. (see test circuits in 5.2)
1. The Tx tuning adapter is inserted in place of the RF hybrid (P3LB / P3DA) in the lower rack
and the RF hybrid is plugged on top of it. The Tx RF filter (E5LA/E5LB) in the upper rack must
be removed. The other units in both racks remain in place. The Uoutput of the adapter P3LL is
connected to the selective level meter in the wideband range.

2. If not already done start the MMI500, connect to the equipment and upload the configuration.

3. For MMI500 version 1.1 or previous choose the Local menu and click Tuning & testing.
For MMI500 version 2.0 or later choose the Equipment menu and click Tuning & testing.

4. A warning dialog box appears, click OK.

5. Click Tune Tx RF filter.

 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 16/19
1KHL015570-EN

6. For tuning the coil L1 in the lower rack set the adapter P3LL to:
• FUNCTION :A
• Position of S1 : L1, FILTER
• Position of S2 : TUNE
• Position of S3 : OFF
• Position of LOAD : LINE
click Activate f1. Using coil L1, Uoutput is tuned to a minimum or the end stop of coil L1 is
reached.

7. For tuning the coil L2 in the lower rack, the combiner (P3LC/P3LD) in the upper rack must be
removed. Settings on the adapter P3LL:
• FUNCTION :A
• Position of S1 : L2, FILTER
• Position of S2 : TUNE
• Position of S3 : OFF
• Position of LOAD : LINE

click Activate f2. Using coil L2, Uoutput is tuned to a minimum or the end stop of coil L2 is
reached.

8. For tuning the coil L1 in the upper rack, the Tx RF filter (E5LA/E5LB) in the lower rack must be
removed. Also remove the connections from the transmit filter to connectors X171 (black) and
X174 (orange) on the upper rack (backplane P1LA). Reinsert the combiner (P3LC/P3LD) and
the Tx RF filter (E5LA/E5LB) in the upper rack. The RF hybrid remains plugged on the Tx
tuning adapter P3LL.
Settings on the adapter P3LL:
• FUNCTION :A
• Position of S1 : L1, FILTER
• Position of S2 : TUNE
• Position of S3 : OFF
• Position of LOAD : LINE
click Activate f1. Using coil L1, Uoutput is tuned to a minimum or the end stop of coil L1 is
reached.

9. After tuning: Reinsert the connections to the connectors X171 (black) and X174 (orange) on
the upper rack (backplane P1LA).

10. For tuning the coil L2 in the upper rack, the Tx tuning adapter is inserted in place of the
combiner (P3LC/P3LD) in the upper rack and the combiner is plugged on top of it. The Tx RF
filter (E5LA/E5LB) and the RF hybrid in the lower rack must be removed.
Settings on the adapter P3LL:
• FUNCTION :A
• Position of S1 : L2, FILTER
• Position of S2 : TUNE
• Position of S3 : OFF
• Position of LOAD : LINE
click Activate f2. Using coil L2, Uoutput is tuned to a minimum or the end stop of coil L2 is
reached.

11. Terminate the action by clicking deactivate frequency and to return to the tuning & testing
main menu by clicking Cancel.

12. Now remove the tuning adapter and reinsert all the units as before.

4 Checking the frequency response on 40W or 80W unit

The frequency response check determines the range of the passband and the selectivity of the
filter. Use the following steps. If you have prior performed A.3 go to step 6.
1. The Tx tuning adapter is inserted in place of the RF hybrid (P3LB / P3DA) and the RF hybrid is
plugged on top of it. The Uoutput of P3LL is connected to the selective level meter in the
wideband range.
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 17/19
1KHL015570-EN

2. If not already done start the MMI500, connect to the equipment and upload the configuration.

3. For MMI500 version 1.1 or previous choose the Local menu and click Tuning & testing.
For MMI500 version 2.0 or later choose the Equipment menu and click Tuning & testing.

4. Read the warning dialog box and click OK.

5. On the Tuning & testing box click Tune Tx RF filter.

6. The adapter P3LL is set for the following

• FUNCTION :A
• Position of S1 : L1, FILTER
• Position of S2 : FILTER
• Position of S3 : OFF
• Position of LOAD : 75 ohms or 125 ohms

7. On the Tuning Tx RF filter box click Check Tx RF filter.

8. Click Activate fo, measure the Uoutput in dB and designate it as 'A'.

9. For checking the passband

• Click Activate fo - 4kHz and measure the Uoutput (P).
The limits or range of admittance for Uoutput are (A - 0.35 dB) < P < A.

• Click Activate fo + 4kHz and measure the Uoutput (P).

The limits or range of admittance for Uoutput are (A - 0.35 dB) < P < A.

10. For checking the selectivity

• Click Activate fo - 16kHz and measure the Uoutput (P).

The limits or range of admittance for Uoutput are

P < (A - 9.5 dB) for Tx frequencies 24 kHz to 350 kHz and
P < (A - 8.5 dB) for Tx frequencies 350 kHz to 500 kHz.

• Click Activate fo + 16kHz and measure the Uoutput (P).

The limits or range of admittance for Uoutput are

P < (A - 9.5 dB) for Tx frequencies 24 kHz to 350 kHz and
P < (A - 8.5 dB) for Tx frequencies 350 kHz to 500 kHz.

11. Terminate the action by clicking deactivate frequency and to return to the tuning & testing
main menu by clicking Cancel.

Improving the frequency response:

If it is not possible to attain the values listed in the table below and if one of the coils has reached its
end stop, then one should select an alternative connection scheme for the 1.2nF ... 3.9nF
capacitors. If the tuning coil is at its left end-stop, then the next non identical capacitor combination
for a lower frequency is to be selected. If the tuning coil is at its right end-stop, then the next non
identical capacitor combination for a higher frequency is to be selected.

Range of admittance:
finput Uoutput 75 Ω Uoutput 125 Ω
fo A A
fo + 4kHz (A - 0.35 dB) < P < A (A - 0.35 dB) < P < A
fo - 4kHz (A - 0.35 dB) < P < A (A - 0.35 dB) < P < A

Selectivity for Tx frequencies 24 kHz to 350 kHz :

finput Uoutput 75 Ω Uoutput 125 Ω
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 18/19
1KHL015570-EN

fo + 16kHz P < (A - 9.5 dB) P < (A - 9.5 dB)

Selectivity for Tx frequencies 350 kHz to 500 kHz :

finput Uoutput 75 Ω Uoutput 125 Ω
fo + 16kHz P < (A - 8.5 dB) P < (A - 8.5 dB)

5 Test circuits
The following circuit should be used for tuning the Tx RF filter using the tuning adapter P3LL and
the MMI500. The P4LQ is made to generate the required tones by the MMI500.

5.1 Test circuit for 40 W units

P1LA E5LA/B
L2 OFF ON
L1
FILTER S1

TUNE S3 P3DA/
P4LQ FILTER 75 Ohm P3LB
S2
125 Ohm
LINE
OUT

P3LL
UOUTPUT
600134A3.dsf

Fig. 5: Test circuit for tuning 40 W units. Tuning coil L1 or L2 dependent on switch S1.

5.2 Test circuits for 80 W units

P1LA P3LC/D
L2 OFF ON
L1
FILTER S1

P1LA E5LA/B TUNE S3 P3DA/

75 Ohm P3LB
S2
P4LQ 125 Ohm
LINE
OUT

P3LL
UOUTPUT
600134A4.dsf

Fig. 6: Test circuit for tuning L1 in the lower power amplifier rack.
 Revision: Language: Page:
B EN 19/19
1KHL015570-EN

P1LA

P1LA E5LA/B L2 OFF ON

P4LQ L1
FILTER S1

TUNE S3 P3DA/
75 Ohm P3LB
S2
125 Ohm
LINE
OUT

P3LL
UOUTPUT

600134A5.dsf

Fig. 7: Test circuit for tuning L2 in the lower power amplifier rack.

P1LA E5LA/B P3LC/D

L2 OFF ON
L1
FILTER S1

P1LA
TUNE S3 P3DA/
75 Ohm P3LB
S2
P4LQ 125 Ohm
LINE
OUT

P3LL
UOUTPUT
600134A6.dsf

Fig. 8: Test circuit for tuning L1 in the upper power amplifier rack.

P1LA E5LA/B
L2 OFF ON
L1
FILTER S1

P1LA TUNE S3 P3DA/

75 Ohm P3LB
P4LQ S2
125 Ohm
LINE
OUT

P3LL
UOUTPUT
600134A7.dsf

Fig. 9: Test circuit for tuning L2 in the upper power amplifier rack.
 ABB Power Automation Ltd 1KHL016255-EN
Archive No.: Rev. Date:
Tuning Instructions Rx RF filter P4LS <ETL500 Rel. 3> - -

Responsible Department: Prepared: Approved: Distribution: Lang.: Page:

NKT 99-06-09 P. Plüer 99-12-23 Rolf Pauli - EN 1/14
99-11-11 B. Busslinger
99-12-23 N. Lahner
Valid for: Derived from: Replaces: Classification-No.: File:
- - - -

Power Line Carrier Equipment: Series ETL500

Tuning Instructions Rx RF filter P4LS <ETL500 Rel. 3>

Contents
1 General............................................................................................................ 2
2 Removing the Shielding Box ........................................................................... 3
3 Programming the Rx RF filter ......................................................................... 3
4 Tuning the filter circuits individually ................................................................ 4
5 Check Rx filter................................................................................................. 6
6 Jumper settings LC filter ................................................................................. 8
7 Jumper settings for RC1 and RC2 filter ........................................................ 11
8 Jumper positions for Rx RF filter tuning........................................................ 14

List of equipment:
PC with Windows 95, 98 or NT4.0 or higher
MMI500 software Rel. 3.12 or higher
PC P4LQ (1:1 serial RS232) cable
Plastic tuning screw driver

Note:
• Please refer 1KHL015559 for compatibility between software MMI500, firmware and hardware of ETL500.
• For complete operation, the transceiver P4LS need also a tuning of the Tx filter section. The tuning
procedure for the Tx filter described in document 1KHL016256 is given in the appendix of the instruction
manual.

We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to
third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © ABB Power Automation Ltd, Switzerland.
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 2/14
1KHL016255-EN

1 General
In ETL500, the Tx and Rx filter of the P4LS are tuned in the equipment using the module P4LS and
the MMI500. However before starting tuning, the filter programming jumpers must be set to get the
required frequency response.

1.1 Lower frequency fLO

The lower frequency, fLO, of the receive filter is always positioned at the lowest used frequency of
the Rx channel. In the figure below the lower frequency, fLO, and the bandwidth of the Rx filter are
illustrated for all possible configurations for an one channel ETL500 equipment with a bandwidth of
4 kHz. The transmit and receive channel can be adjacent or separated, the channel mode can be
configured as regular or inverted.
f LO
Filter

Rx Tx
Filter

Rx Tx

f LO
Filter

Rx Tx
Filter

Rx Tx

figure 3: fLO = lower frequency of Rx filter for different configurations

 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 3/14
1KHL016255-EN

2 Removing the Shielding Box

To remove the black shielding box, first loosen the four screws, two at the top and two at the
bottom on the front panel of module P4LS for pulling out the module from rack. Then pull out P4LS
from rack, remove the six screws at the side walls of the black shielding box. Eight screws more
must be removed at the front panel. There position is figured out in the following figure.

1. Loosen screws

Tx ALARM
SET
Tx ALARM 4. Remove screws

2. Pull out P4LS

3. Remove six screws
on the side walls at
black sheelding box
RF LINE
10W = 0dBu

4. Remove screws

L1

Tx Rx RF
P4LS

L2 4. Remove screws

1. Loosen screws

figure 4: Position of screws for removing the shielding box of P4LS:

3 Programming the Rx RF filter

The most important part of this document are the jumper setting tables. First determine the lower
frequency fLO of the Rx filter described in chapter 1.1. Remove P4LS from rack and remove its
black shielding box described in chapter 2. Then set all jumpers of the LC filter section referring to
the table in chapter 6 on page 8 ff. Also set all jumpers of the RC1 and RC2 filter section referring
to the table in chapter 7 on page 11 ff. For information on the jumpers for testing (T?) see figure 5.
Afterwards start the tuning process.
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 4/14
1KHL016255-EN

Note: The frequency band is specified relative to the lower frequency fLO of the Rx
filter, see chapter 1.1 in this document.

4 Tuning the filter circuits individually

Once the Rx filter jumpers are set for the required frequency band, its individual circuits can be
tuned with the help of the P4LQ module and the MMI500. The tuning frequencies generated by the
P4LQ are fed directly into the P4LS, measured by the P4LQ and displayed by the MMI500.

4.1 Connect to the equipment and download configuration

The equipment is accessed by the MMI500 using a 1:1 serial RS232 cable between the P4LQ and
COM port of PC. The equipment identification and necessary channel settings are noted.
1. Switch off the equipment, pull out P4LS from rack and remove its black shielding box as
described in chapter 2, page 3. Then insert the P4LS into rack and switch on the
equipment.
2. Start the MMI500. This opens automatically the Connect dialog box. Click OK.
3. Select in the Configuration menu Services. This opens the Configure services dialog
box.
4. Select the ETL505 radio button and click OK.
5. On the Configuration menu select System. This opens the System configuration
dialog box.
6. Select channel settings tab.
7. Select the correct Tx frequency and Rx frequency in the RF field.

Note: The Tx frequency in MMI is the lower or upper cutoff frequency of Rx filter,
depending on channel mode. In this document and above all in the tables at
the end of document, the lower frequency fLo of Rx band is used. See also
chapter 1.1 in this document.
8. Click OK.
9. On the Equipment menu select Connect. This opens the Connect dialog box.
10. Select Logon, Equipment ID, with ID 0.
11. Select Read & Write access
12. Click OK.
13. On the Equipment menu click Download configuration. Click Yes, OK and Yes in the
following message boxes.
14. Also store the configuration to eprom by answering the corresponding message box with
Yes. Wait until store to eprom successful appears in the status bar.

4.2 Tune the Rx RF filter

The MMI500 is connected to the equipment as described above.
1. On the Equipment menu select Tuning & testing. Click OK in the following message
box. This opens the Tuning & testing dialog box.
2. Click Tune Rx RF Filter. This opens the Tune Rx RF Filter dialog box.

4.2.1 Tune LC section

1. In the Tune Rx RF Filter dialog box select Tune LC section. This opens the Tune LC
section dialog box.
2. Switch off the equipment, pull out P4LS.
3. Set the jumpers on the P4LS as displayed in the field Status & progress information.
4. Insert P4LS into rack again and switch on the equipment.
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 5/14
1KHL016255-EN

5. Click Start measurement. This starts an automatic reference level measurement.

Please wait until the measured level appears.
6. Follow the instructions in the field Status & progress information and adjust the level in
the field Level (f0) [dB] to a maximum, slowly rotating the adjustor of the coil T1.
Remember: positive values are higher than negatives (-3.5 < -3 < 1.5 < 2).
7. Select Stop measurement.
8. Click Cancel. This closes the Tune LC section dialog box.

4.2.2 Tune RC1 section

1. In the Tune Rx RF Filter dialog box click Tune RC1 section.
2. Switch off the equipment and pull out P4LS.
3. Set the jumpers on the P4LS as displayed in the field Status & progress information.
4. Turn the potentiometer CT completely counterclockwise.
5. Insert P4LS into rack again and switch on the equipment.
6. Click Tune center frequency. Please wait until the measured level appears. Follow the
instructions in the field Status & progress information and adjust the level in the field
Level (f0 RC1) [dB] to a maximum, slowly rotating the potentiometer CS.
7. Select Stop measurement.
8. Click Tune Quality.
9. Tune potentiometer CT carefully until all three values in the field Range for tune quality
[dB] are inside the range. Tune the three values to symmetrical range if possible. The
potentiometer has to be tuned very slowly because of the sequential measurement of the
three values.

Note: It could again be necessary to rotate the potentiometer CS very slightly.

Note: If the quality tuning ranges could not be achieved nevertheless, rotate CT a
quarter clockwise, click Stop measurement and restart tuning with step 6.

10. Select Stop measurement.

11. Click Cancel.

4.2.3 Tune RC2 section

1. In the Tune Rx RF Filter dialog box click Tune RC2 section.
2. Switch off the equipment and pull out P4LS.
3. Set the jumpers on the P4LS as displayed in the field Status & progress information.
4. Turn the potentiometer DT completely counterclockwise.
5. Insert P4LS into rack again and switch on the equipment.
6. Click Tune center frequency. Please wait until the measured level appears. Follow the
instructions in the field Status & progress information and adjust the level in the field
Level (f0 RC1) [dB] to a maximum, slowly rotating the potentiometer DS.
7. Select Stop measurement.
8. Click Tune Quality.
9. Tune potentiometer DT carefully until all three values in the field Range for tune quality
[dB] are inside the range. Tune the values to symmetrical range if possible. The
potentiometer has to be tuned very slowly because of the sequential measurement of the
three values.

Note: It could again be necessary to rotate the potentiometer DS very slightly.

 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 6/14
1KHL016255-EN

Note: If the quality tuning ranges could not be achieved nevertheless, rotate DT a
quarter clockwise, click Stop measurement and restart tuning with step 6.

10. Select Stop measurement.

11. Click Cancel.

5 Check Rx filter
The Rx filter check must be done after tuning LC, RC1 and RC2 section.

5.1 Preparation before Checking the Rx RF filter

If the check is not done immediately after tuning the Rx RF filter sections as described in
chapter 4.2, the following preparations must be done before.
1. Switch off the equipment, pull out P4LS from rack and remove its black shielding box as
described in chapter 2, on page 3.
2. Switch on the equipment.
3. Start MMI500. If MMI500 is already running, open a new file by clicking New from the
menu File. This opens the Connect dialog box.
4. Select Logon, Equipment ID, with ID 0.
5. Select Read & Write access.
6. Select Upload configuration.
7. Click OK.
8. On the Equipment menu select Tuning & testing. Click OK in the following message
box. This opens the Tuning & testing dialog box.
9. Select Tune Rx RF filter.

5.2 Procedure for Checking the Rx RF filter

1. In the Tune Rx RF Filter dialog box select Check Rx filter.
2. Switch off the equipment if it’s still switched on and pull out P4LS.
3. Set the jumpers on the P4LS as displayed in the field Status & progress information.
4. Insert P4LS into rack and again switch on the equipment.
5. Select Start filter check. Follow the instructions in the field Status & progress
information until all measured values are passed.
6. Select Stop measurement.
7. Click Cancel.
8. Click Cancel in the Tune Rx RF filter dialog box. This performs a reset on the module
P4LQ.
9. Switch off the equipment, pull out P4LS.
10. Set the jumpers as displayed in the following message box.
11. If the tuning procedure of Tx RF filter is also finished, mount the shielding box. Do it in
reverse order to the opening process described in chapter 2, on page 3.
Also insert the removed modules into rack and cover all unused slots with front plates.
12. Insert P4LS back into the rack and again switch on the equipment.
13. Click OK.
14. In the Tuning & testing dialog box click Cancel.

5.3 If the Rx RF filter check failed

If it is not possible to attain the limits as listed in the Check Rx filter dialog box, it is recommended
to follow this procedure:
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 7/14
1KHL016255-EN

1. Check the correct jumper settings according to the table in chapter 6, on page 8 ff, and
according to the table in chapter 7, on page 11 ff.
2. Repeat complete tuning procedure as described in chapter 4.
3. Repeat checking procedure as described in chapter 5.

Note: For correct operation of the power amplifier P4LS, the Tx filter section must
also be tuned. The tuning procedure for the Tx filter is described in document
1KHL016256. It is also found in the appendix of this instruction manual.
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 8/14
1KHL016255-EN

6 Jumper settings LC filter

LC filter
fLO BC BD BE BF BH BI BK BL BM BN BO BP BQ BR BA BA BA BA BA BA BB BB BB BB BB BB BB BB
kHz 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

40 - X - - X X X - X X - - X X X X X X - X X X X - - X X -
44 - X - - X - X X X X X - - - X X X X - - X X X - - X X -
48 - X - - X - - X X X - X X X X X X X - - X X X - - X - X
52 - X - - X - - - - X - - - X X X X - X X X X X - - X - X
56 - X - - - X X X X - X - - - X X X - X X X X X - - X - X
60 - X - - - X X - X - - - X - X X X - X - X X X - - X - X
64 - X - - - X - X X X - X - - X X X - X - X X X - - X - -
68 - X - - - X - X - X - - X X X X X - - X X X X - - X - -
72 - X - - - X - - X - X X X - X X - X X X X X X - - X - -
76 - X - - - X - - - - X - X X X X - X X - X X X - X - X X
80 - X - - - - X X - X X X X - X X - X X - X X X - X - X X
84 - X - - - - X X - - X X - X X X - X - X X X X - - - X X
88 - X - - - - X - X X - - - X X X - X - - X X X - X - X -
92 - X - - - - X - X - - X - X X X - - X X X X X - - - X -
96 - X - - - - X - - X - X X - X X - - X - X X X - X - - X
100 - X - - - - X - - - X - X X X X - - - X X X X - - - - X
104 - X - - - - X - - - - - X - X X - - - - X X X - X - - -
108 - X - - - - - X X X X - - X X - X X X X X X - - - X X X
112 - X - - - - - X X X - X - - X - X X X X X X - X - X X -
116 - X - - - - - X X - X X - - X - X X - X X X - - - X X -
120 - X - - - - - X X - - X X - X - X X - - X X - - - X - X
124 X - - - - X - X X X - X X - X X X - X - X X X - - X - -
128 - X - - - - - X - X X - - - X - X - X - X X - - - X - -
132 - X - - - - - X - X - X - - X - - X X X X X - X - - X X
136 - X - - - - - X - X - - - X X - - X X - X X - - - - X X
140 - X - - - - - X - - X X - - X - - X - - X X - - - - X -
144 - X - - - - - X - - X - - X X - - - X X X X - - X - - X
148 - X - - - - - X - - - X X - X - - - X - X X - - X - - -
152 X - - X - - X X X X X - - - X X X - - - X X X - X - X X
156 X - - X - X - - - - - X - - X X - X X - X X X - - - X X
160 X - - - - - X X - X - - - X X X - X - X X X X - - - X -
164 - X - - - - - - X X - - - X - X X - X X X - X - - X - -
168 X - - X - - X X - - X - X - X X - X - X X X X - X - X -
172 X - - - - - X - X X - - - - X X - X - - X X X - - - - X
176 - X - - - - - - X - X - X X - X - X - - X - X - X - - X
180 X - - - - - X - X - - - - X X X - - X X X X - X - X X X
184 - X - - - - - - X - X - - - - X - - - X X - - X - X X -
188 X - - - - - X - - X - - - - X X - - X - X X - X - X X -
192 - X - - - - - - X - - X - X - - X X X - X - - X - X - -
196 X - - X - - X - - X - - - X X X - - X - X X X - - - - -
200 - X - - - - - - - X X X X X - - X - X X X - - - X - X -
204 X - - - - - - X X X X X X X X X - - - - X X - - - X - X
208 - X - - - - - - - X X X - - - - - X - - - X X - - X X -
212 - X - - - - - - - X X - X - - - - - - X - X X - - X - X
216 - X - - - - - - - X X - X - - - - - - X - X X - - X - -
220 X - - - - - - X X X - - - - X - X X X - X X - - - - X X
224 X - - X - - - X X X - - X X X - X X X X X X - X - X - -
228 X - - - - - - X X - X - - X X - X X - X X X - X - - - X
232 X - - - - - - X X - - X X - X - X X - - X X - - - - - X
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 9/14
1KHL016255-EN

LC filter
fLO BC BD BE BF BH BI BK BL BM BN BO BP BQ BR BA BA BA BA BA BA BB BB BB BB BB BB BB BB
kHz 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

236 X - - X - - - X X - X - - X X - X X - X X X - X - - X X
240 X - - X - - - X X - - X X - X - X X - - X X - - X - X X
244 X - - - - - - X - X X - X - X - X - X - X - X - - X X X
248 X - - X - - - X X - - - - - X - X - X X X X - - - - X -
252 X - - X - - - X - X X - X X X - X - X X X X - X - - - X
256 X - - X - - - X - X X - - - X - X - X - X X - - - - - X
260 X - - X - - - X - X - X X - X - X - - X X X - - X - - -
264 X - - X - - - X - X - - X X X - - X X X X X - - - - - -
268 X - - - - - - X - - X X - - X - - X - X X - X - - - X -
272 X - - - - - - X - - X - X - X - - X - - X - X - X - - -
276 X - - X - - - X - - X X - X X - - X - X X - X - - X X -
280 X - - X - - - X - - X - X X X - - X - - X - X - - X - X
284 X - - - - - - X - - - X - X X - - - X - X - - X - X - -
288 X - - - - - - - X X X - X - X - - - - X X - - X - - X X
292 X - - - - - - - X X X - - X X - - - - - X - - X - - X -
296 X - - X - - - X - - - X - - X - - - - X X - X - X - X -
300 X - - - - - - - X X - X X - - X X X X - - X X - - X X X
304 X - - X - - - X - - - - X - X - - - - - X - X - - - - X
308 X - - - - - - - X X - X - - - X X X - X - X X - - X - -
312 X - - - - - - - X X - - X X - X X X - - - X X - - - X X
316 X - - X - - - - X X - X - - - X X X - X X - - X - X - X
320 X - - - - - - - X X - - - - - X X - X - - X - - - X X X
324 X - - - - - - - X - X X X - - X X - - X - X - - - X - X
328 X - - - - - - - X - X X - X - X - X X X - X - - X - X X
332 X - - - - - - - X - X X - - - X - X X - - X - - X - - X
336 X - - - - - - - X - X X - - - X - X X - - - X - - X X X
340 X - - X - - - - X - X X - X - X - X X X X - - - X - - -
344 X - - - - - - - X - X - X - - X - X - - - - X - X - X -
348 X - - - - - - - X - X - - X - X - - X X - - X - - - - -
352 X - - - - - - - X - X - - - - X - - X - - - - - - X - X
356 X - - - - - - - X - - X X X - X - - - X - - - X - - X -
360 X - - X - - - - X - X - - X - X - - X X - X X - X - X -
364 X - - X - - - - X - X - - - - X - - X - - X X - - - - X
368 X - - X - - - - X - X - - - - X - - X - - X - - - X X X
372 X - - X - - - - X - - X X X - X - - - X - X - X - X - X
376 X - - X - - - - X - - X X - - X - - - - - X - X - X - -
380 X - - X - - - - X - - X - X - - X X X X - X - - X - X X
384 X - - X - - - - X - - X - - - - X X - X - X - - - - X -
388 X - - X - - - - X - - X - - - - X X - X - X - - X - - -
392 X - - X - - - - X - - - X X - - X - X X - - X - - X X X
396 X - - X - - - - - X X X X X - - X - X X - - X - - X - X
400 X - - X - - - - X - - - X - - - X - X - - - X - - X - -
404 X - - X - - - - - X X X X - - - X - X - - - X - X - X X
408 X - - X - - - - X - - - - X - - X - - X - - X - X - X X
412 X - - X - - - - - X X X - X - - X - - X - - X - X - X -
416 X - - X - - - - X - - - - - - - - X X X - - X - - - X -
420 X - - X - - - - - X X X - - - - - X X X - - X - X - - X
424 X - - X - - - - - X X - X X - - - X - X - - X - X - - X
428 X - - X - - - - - X X - X X - - - X X - - - X - - - - X
432 X - - X - - - - - X X - X - - - - X - - - - X - X - - -
436 X - - X - - - - - X X - X - - - - X - - - - - - - X X X
440 X - - X - - - - - X X - - X - - - - X X - - - X - X X -
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 10/14
1KHL016255-EN

LC filter
fLO BC BD BE BF BH BI BK BL BM BN BO BP BQ BR BA BA BA BA BA BA BB BB BB BB BB BB BB BB
kHz 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

444 X - - X - - - - - X X - - X - - - X - - - - - - - X X -
448 X - - X - - - - - X X - - X - - - X - - - - - - - X - X
452 X - - X - - - - - X X - - - - - - - X - - - - - - X - X
456 X - - X - - - - - X X - - - - - - - X X - - - - - X - -
460 X - - X - - - - - X - X X X - - - - - X - - - - - X - -
464 X - - X - - - - - X - X X X - - - - X - - - - X - - X X
468 X - - X - - - - - X - X X - - - - - - - - - - X - - X X
472 X - - X - - - - - X - X X - - - - - - - - - - X - - X -
476 X - - X - - - - - X - X X - - - - - - - - - - - - - X -
480 X - - X - - - - - X - X - X - - - - - - - - - - - - X -
484 X - - X - - - - - X - X - X - - - - - - - - - - X - - X
488 X - - X - - - - - X - X - X - - - - - - - - - - X - - -
492 X - - X - - - - - X - X - - - - - - - - - - - - X - - -
496 X - - X - - - - - X - X - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
500 X - - X - - - - - X - X - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 11/14
1KHL016255-EN

7 Jumper settings for RC1 and RC2 filter

RC1 filter RC2 filter
fLO CA CC CE CG CI CO CP CQ CN CM CL CR DA DC DE DG DI DO DP DQ DN DM DL DR
kHz CB CD CF CH CK DB DD DF DH DK
40 X - X X X X X X X - - - X - X - X X X X X - - X
44 X X - - X X X X X - - - X - X X X X X X X - - X
48 X X - X - X X X X - - - X X - - - X X X X - - X
52 X X - X X X X X X - - - X X - - X X X X X - - -
56 X X X - X X X X X - - X X X - X - X X X X - - -
60 X X X - X X X X X - - - X X - X X X X X X - - X
64 X X X X - X X X X - - X X X X - - X X X X - - X
68 X X X X - X X X X - - - X X X - X X X X X - - X
72 X X X X - X X X X - - - X X X - X X X X X - - -
76 - X X - - - X - - X - X X X X X - X X X X - - X
80 - X X - X - X - - X - - X X X X - X X X X - - X
84 - X X X X - X - - X - - X X X X - X X X X - - -
88 X - - - - - X - - X - X - X - - - - X - - X - -
92 X - - X - - X - - X - X - X - X - - X - - X - -
96 X - - X - - X - - X - - - X X X - - X - - X - X
100 X - X - X - X - - X - X - X X X - - X - - X - -
104 X - X X - - X - - X - X X - - - - - X - - X - X
108 X - X X - - X - - X - X X - - - X - X - - X - X
112 X - X X - - X - - X - - X - - X - - X - - X - X
116 X X - - - - X - - X - X X - - X X - X - - X - X
120 X X - - - - X - - X - - X - X - - - X - - X - X
124 X X - - X - X - - X - X X - X - X - X - - X - X
128 X X - - X - X - - X - - X - X X - - X - - X - X
132 X X - X - - X - - X - X X - X - X - X - - X - -
136 X X - X - - X - - X - - X - X X X - X - - X - X
140 X X - X X - X - - X - X X - X X - - X - - X - -
144 X X - X X - X - - X - X X - X X X - X - - X - -
148 X X - X X - X - - X - - X X - - - - X - - X - X
152 X X X - - - X - - X - X X X - - - - X - - X - -
156 X X X - - - X - - X - X X X - - X - X - - X - X
160 X X X - X - X - - X - X X X - - X - X - - X - -
164 X X X - X - X - - X - X X X - X - - X - - X - X
168 X X X - X - X - - X - - X X - X - - X - - X - X
172 X X X - X - X - - X - - X X - X - - X - - X - -
176 X X X - X - X - - X - - X X - X - - X - - X - -
180 X X X X - - X - - X - X X X - X X - X - - X - X
184 X X X X - - X - - X - X X X - X X - X - - X - -
188 X X X X - - X - - X - X X X - X X - X - - X - -
192 X X X X - - X - - X - - X X X - - - X - - X - X
196 X X X X - - X - - X - - X X X - - - X - - X - X
200 X X X X - - X - - X - - X X X - - - X - - X - -
204 - X X - X - - X - - X X X X X - X - X - - X - X
208 - X - X X - - X - - X - X X X - X - X - - X - X
212 - X X - - - - X - - X - X X X - X - X - - X - -
216 - X X X X - - X - - X X X X X - X - X - - X - -
220 - X X X - - - X - - X - X X X - X - X - - X - -
224 - X X X X - - X - - X - X X X - X - X - - X - -
228 - X X X X - - X - - X - X X X X - - X - - X - X
232 X - - - - - - X - - X X X X X X - - X - - X - X
236 X - - - - - - X - - X X X X X X - - X - - X - X
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 12/14
1KHL016255-EN

RC1 filter RC2 filter

fLO CA CC CE CG CI CO CP CQ CN CM CL CR DA DC DE DG DI DO DP DQ DN DM DL DR
kHz CB CD CF CH CK DB DD DF DH DK
240 X - - - X - - X - - X X X X X X - - X - - X - X
244 X - - - - - - X - - X - X X X X - - X - - X - -
248 X - - X - - - X - - X X X X X X - - X - - X - -
252 X - - - X - - X - - X - X X X X - - X - - X - -
256 X - - X X - - X - - X X X X X X - - X - - X - -
260 X - - X - - - X - - X - X X X X - - X - - X - -
264 X - X - - - - X - - X X X - - X - - - X - - X -
268 X - - X X - - X - - X - X - X - - - - X - - X X
272 X - X - X - - X - - X X X - - X X - - X - - X -
276 X - X - - - - X - - X - X - X - X - - X - - X X
280 X - X X - - - X - - X X X - X - X - - X - - X X
284 X - X - X - - X - - X - X - X - - - - X - - X -
288 X - X - X - - X - - X - X - X X - - - X - - X X
292 X - X X X - - X - - X X X - X - X - - X - - X -
296 X - X X X - - X - - X X X - X - X - - X - - X -
300 X - X X - - - X - - X - X - X X X - - X - - X X
304 X - X X - - - X - - X - X - X X - - - X - - X -
308 X - X X X - - X - - X - X - X X - - - X - - X -
312 X - X X X - - X - - X - X - X X - - - X - - X -
316 X X - - - - - X - - X X X - X X X - - X - - X -
320 X X - - - - - X - - X X X - X X X - - X - - X -
324 X X - - - - - X - - X - X X - - - - - X - - X X
328 X X - - - - - X - - X - X X - - - - - X - - X X
332 X X - - X - - X - - X X X X - - - - - X - - X -
336 X X - - X - - X - - X X X X - - - - - X - - X -
340 X X - - X - - X - - X X X X - - - - - X - - X -
344 X X - - X - - X - - X - X X - - X - - X - - X X
348 X X - - X - - X - - X - X X - - X - - X - - X X
352 X X - - X - - X - - X - X X - - X - - X - - X X
356 X X - X - - - X - - X X X X - - X - - X - - X -
360 X X - X - - - X - - X X X X - - X - - X - - X -
364 X X - X - - - X - - X X X X - X - - - X - - X X
368 X X - X - - - X - - X - X X - X - - - X - - X X
372 X X - X - - - X - - X - X X - X - - - X - - X X
376 X X - X - - - X - - X - X X - X - - - X - - X X
380 X X - X X - - X - - X X X X - X - - - X - - X -
384 X X - X X - - X - - X X X X - X - - - X - - X -
388 X X - X X - - X - - X X X X - X - - - X - - X -
392 X X - X X - - X - - X X X X - X X - - X - - X X
396 X X - X X - - X - - X - X X - X X - - X - - X X
400 X X - X X - - X - - X - X X - X X - - X - - X X
404 X X - X X - - X - - X - X X - X X - - X - - X X
408 X X X - - - - X - - X X X X - X X - - X - - X -
412 X X X - - - - X - - X X X X - X X - - X - - X -
416 X X X - - - - X - - X X X X - X X - - X - - X -
420 X X X - - - - X - - X X X X X - - - - X - - X X
424 X X X - - - - X - - X X X X X - - - - X - - X X
428 X X X - - - - X - - X - X X X - - - - X - - X X
432 X X X - X - - X - - X X X X X - - - - X - - X X
436 X X X - X - - X - - X X X X X - - - - X - - X X
440 X X X - X - - X - - X X X X X - - - - X - - X -
444 X X X - X - - X - - X X X X X - X - - X - - X X
448 X X X - X - - X - - X X X X X - X - - X - - X X
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 13/14
1KHL016255-EN

RC1 filter RC2 filter

fLO CA CC CE CG CI CO CP CQ CN CM CL CR DA DC DE DG DI DO DP DQ DN DM DL DR
kHz CB CD CF CH CK DB DD DF DH DK
452 X X X - X - - X - - X - X X X - X - - X - - X X
456 X X X - X - - X - - X - X X X - X - - X - - X X
460 X X X - X - - X - - X - X X X - X - - X - - X X
464 X X X - X - - X - - X - X X X - X - - X - - X X
468 X X X - X - - X - - X - X X X - X - - X - - X -
472 X X X - X - - X - - X - X X X - X - - X - - X -
476 X X X - X - - X - - X - X X X - X - - X - - X -
480 X X X X - - - X - - X X X X X - X - - X - - X -
484 X X X X - - - X - - X X X X X - X - - X - - X -
488 X X X X - - - X - - X X X X X - X - - X - - X -
492 X X X X - - - X - - X X X X X - X - - X - - X -
496 X X X X - - - X - - X X X X X - X - - X - - X -
500 X X X X - - - X - - X X X X X X - - - X - - X X
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 14/14
1KHL016255-EN

8 Jumper positions for Rx RF filter tuning

TM, TN, TL, TO

TE, TF, TG

TH, TI, TK

TA, TB, TY
TC, TD

TV, TW

TR, TP, TQ
TT, TS, TU

figure 5: Position of jumpers relevant for tuning and testing the RF filters
 ABB Power Automation Ltd 1KHL016256-EN
Archive No.: Rev.- Date:-
Tuning Instructions Tx RF Filter P4LS <ETL500 Rel. 3>
- - -
Responsible Department: Prepared: Approved: Distribution: Lang.: Page:
NKT 99-06-09 P. Plüer 99-12-23 Rolf Pauli - EN 1/17
99-11-11 B. Busslinger
99-12-23 N. Lahner
Valid for: Derived from: Replaces: Classification-No.: File:
- - - -

Power Line Carrier Equipment: Series ETL500

Tuning Instructions Tx RF filter P4LS <ETL500 Rel. 3>

Contents
1 General............................................................................................................ 2
2 Removing the Shielding Box ........................................................................... 4
3 Programming the Tx RF filter .......................................................................... 4
4 Tuning the filter circuits individually ................................................................ 5
5 Check Tx RF filter ........................................................................................... 6
6 Capacitor combination for P4LS ..................................................................... 9
7 Jumper positions for Tx RF filter tuning ........................................................ 17

List of equipment:

PC with Windows 95, 98 or NT 4.0 or higher

MMI500 software Version 3.12 or higher
PC P4LQ (1:1 serial RS232) cable
Screw driver
Level meter

Note:
• Please refer to 1KHL015559 for compatibility between software MMI500, firmware and hardware of ETL500.
• For complete operation, the transceiver P4LS need also a tuning of the Rx filter section. The tuning
procedure for the Rx filter described in document 1KHL016255 is given in the appendix of the instruction
manual.

We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to
third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © ABB Power Automation Ltd, Switzerland.
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 2/17
1KHL016256-EN

1 General
In the ETL505 system, the integrated Tx filter in the P4LS is tuned with help of program MMI500.
However before start tuning, the Tx filter has to be programmed using a capacitor combination in
order to get the required frequency response.

1.1 Center frequency f0

The center frequency, f0, of the transmitter filter is always positioned in the center of the TX
channel. In the figure below the center frequency and the bandwidth of the Tx filter are illustrated
for all possible configurations for an one channel ETL500 equipment with a bandwidth of 4 kHz.
The transmit and receive channel can be adjacent or separated, the channel mode can be
configured as regular or inverted.
f0
Filter

Tx Rx
Filter

Tx Rx

f0
Filter

Tx Rx
Filter

Tx Rx

figure 1: Center frequency f0 of the Tx filter for different configurations:

 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 3/17
1KHL016256-EN

1.2 Block diagram Tx RF filter

L1 CS1 CS2 L2

IN OUT
CP

figure 2: Block diagram Tx RF filter of P4LS:

1.3 Delivered capacitors used for programming the filter frequencies

Number of CS1, CS2 DC - Working Voltage Raster unit

pieces Series capacitors
4 1.5 nF 1600 V or 2000 V 22.5 mm
2 2.2 nF 1600 V or 2000 V 22.5 mm
2 3.3 nF 1600 V or 2000 V 22.5 mm
2 4.7 nF 1600 V or 2000 V 22.5 mm
2 15 nF 1000 V, 1250 V or 1600 V 22.5 mm
2 33 nF ** 1000 V or 1250 V 22.5 mm
2 47 nF ** 630 V or 1000 V 22.5 mm

Number of CP DC - Working Voltage Raster unit

pieces Parallel capacitors
1 6.8 nF 1250 V, 1600 V or 2000 V 22.5 mm
1 10 nF 2000 V 27.5 mm
1 33 nF ** 1000 V, 1250 V or 1600 V 27.5 mm
1 47 nF ** 630 V, 1000 V or 1250 V 27.5 mm
1 68 nF 630 V or 1000 V 27.5 mm
1 150 nF 400 V or 630 V 27.5 mm
1 220 nF 400 V or 630 V 27.5 mm

Note: Note the different raster units for marked (**) capacitors CS and CP with
33 nF and 47 nF capacity.
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 4/17
1KHL016256-EN

2 Removing the Shielding Box

To remove the black shielding box, first loosen the four screws, two at the top and two at the
bottom on the front panel of module P4LS for pulling out the module from rack. Then pull out P4LS
from rack, remove the six screws at the side walls of the black shielding box. Eight screws more
must be removed at the front panel. There position is figured out in figure 3:

1. Loosen screws

Tx ALARM
SET
Tx ALARM 4. Remove screws

2. Pull out P4LS

3. Remove six screws
on the side walls at
black sheelding box
RF LINE
10W = 0dBu

4. Remove screws

L1

Tx Rx RF
P4LS

L2 4. Remove screws

1. Loosen screws

figure 3: Position of screws for removing the shielding box of P4LS:

3 Programming the Tx RF filter

Before tuning the Tx filter using MMI500, the filter is programmed for the required frequency band
by soldering max. 15 capacitors, max. five for each tuning capacitance named CP, CS1 and CS2.
It is recommended to sort the delivered or unsoldered capacitors first by raster and then by
capacity value in nF. Then build two sorted groups in accordance with the two tables in chapter 1.3
Remove P4LS from rack and remove its black shielding box as described in chapter 2. Determine
the center frequency f0 in accordance with chapter 1.1 and select the corresponding row in the
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 5/17
1KHL016256-EN

table of chapter 6, page 9, ff. There all necessary capacitors are specified by their position on
board and their value in nF (nano farads). The capacitors have to be soldered at P4LS into these
defined positions.

Note: The frequency band is specified relative to the center frequency f0 of the Tx
filter, check chapter 1.1 in this document.

The shaded rows in the table show the calculated theoretical values of capacitor combinations
CS1, CS2 and CP. CS1 with position 1xx, CS2 with position 2xx and CP with position xx are equal
in value of capacitance.
The necessary value of capacitance is built by a parallel or series connection of selected
capacitors. The jumpers needed for tuning and testing (T?) are shown in figure 4 on page 16.

Caution: Remove blue wire plugged at jumpers TO and TR, if present. This wire is not
used any longer. Its position is shown at figure 4: on page 17.

4 Tuning the filter circuits individually

Once the Tx filter is programmed for the required frequency band, this means all needed capacitors
are soldered in, its individual circuits can be tuned with the help of MMI500. The DSP module
P4LQ is used to generate and inject the tuning frequencies into the transmitter filter via the
amplifier stage. The module P4LS provides facility for measuring the output amplifier level and also
for switching from tuning individual circuits to checking the overall frequency response.

4.1 Connect to the equipment and download configuration

The equipment is accessed by the MMI500 using a 1:1 serial RS232 cable between the P4LQ and
COM port of PC. The equipment identification and necessary channel settings are noted.
1. Switch off the equipment, pull out P4LS from rack and remove its black shielding box as
described in chapter 2, page 2.
2. Remove all modules and front plates on the right side of main module P4LQ.
3. Start the MMI500. This automatically opens the Connect dialog box. Click OK.
4. On the Configuration menu select Services. This opens the Configure services dialog
box.
5. Select the ETL505 radio button and click OK.
6. On the Configuration menu select System. This opens the System configuration
dialog box.
7. Click the channel settings tab.
8. Select the Tx frequency and Rx frequency in the RF field.

Note: The Tx frequency in MMI is the lower or upper cutoff frequency of Tx filter,
depending on channel mode. In this document and above all in the table at
the end of document, the center frequency f0 of Tx band is used. See also
chapter 1.1 in this document.

9. Click OK.
10. Switch on the equipment without a plugged P4LS.
11. On the Equipment menu click Connect. This opens the Connect dialog box.
12. Select Logon, Equipment ID, with ID 0.
13. Select Read & Write access.
14. Click OK.
15. On the Equipment menu click Download configuration. Click Yes and OK in the
following message boxes.
16. Store the configuration to eprom by answering the corresponding message box with Yes.
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 6/17
1KHL016256-EN

4.2 Tune the Tx RF filter

The MMI500 is connected to the equipment as described above.
1. On the Equipment menu select Tuning & testing. Click OK in the following message
box. This opens the Tuning & testing dialog box.
2. Click Tune Tx RF filter. This opens the Tune Tx RF filter dialog box.

4.2.1 Tune L1 section

1. Remove and set the jumpers on the P4LS as displayed in the field Tune L1.
2. Switch off the equipment insert P4LS into the rack and switch on the equipment again.
3. Click Tune L1 section. This starts the reference measurement used for the tuning
process. Please wait until the measured Rx RF level appears.
4. Adjust the level in the field Measured Rx RF Level [dB] to a minimum, rotating the
adjustor of the coil L1 at the front panel.
5. Click Stop measurement.

4.2.2 Tune L2 section

1. Switch off the equipment and pull out P4LS.
2. Remove and set the jumpers on the P4LS as displayed in the field Tune L2.
3. Insert P4LS into rack and switch on the equipment.
4. Click Tune L2 section. This starts the reference measurement used for the tuning
process. Please wait until the measured Rx RF level appears.
5. Adjust the level in the field Measured Rx RF Level [dB] to a minimum, rotating the
adjustor of the coil L2 at the front panel.
6. Click Stop measurement.

5 Check Tx RF filter
The Tx RF filter check is optional but recommended. For these measurements a level meter is
necessary. It has to be connected to the small connector X103 on the G1DA, which is a small
module screwed from back into the rack below the backplane. The level meter measures with an
high input impedance, referenced to 600 Ω. Also the plug in connector at the module G1DA must
1
be set to X101, LOOP BACK TEST .

5.1 Preparation before Checking the Tx RF filter

If the check is not done immediately after tuning, described in chapter 4, the following preparations
must be done.
1. Switch off the equipment, pull out P4LS from rack and remove its black shielding box as
described in chapter 2, page 4.
2. Switch on the equipment.
3. Start MMI500. If MMI500 is already running, open a new file by clicking New from the
menu File. This opens the Connect dialog box.
4. Select Logon, Equipment ID, with ID 0.
5. Select Read & Write access.
6. Select Upload configuration.

1
The level meter can also be connected to the connector X102 (G1DA) in parallel to a 75 Ω termination
instead of connecting to X103. In this case the plug in connector remains at X100,
NORMAL POSITION.

Note: The maximum power at X102 could be as high as 5 W (37 dBm @75 Ω)!
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 7/17
1KHL016256-EN

7. Click OK.
8. On the Equipment menu click Tuning & testing. Click OK in the following message box.
This opens the Tuning & testing dialog box.
9. Click Tune Tx RF filter.

5.2 Procedure for Checking the Tx RF filter

1. Click Check Tx RF filter. This opens the Check Tx RF filter dialog box.
2. Switch off the equipment pull out P4LS.
3. Set the jumpers on the P4LS as displayed in the field Status & progress information.
4. Insert P4LS into rack and switch on the equipment again.
5. Click Activate f0. Connect a level meter to the connector X103 and move the plug in
connector from X100, NORMAL OPERATION to X101, LOOP BACK TEST. Measure the
output level [dBu]. Enter the value in the field Measured level.
6. Click Activate f0-2kHz. This displays the range levels for the filter frequencies to be
checked. Measure the level at X103 and compare it with the predefined range.
7. Click Activate f0+2kHz. Measure the level at X103 and compare it with the predefined
range.
8. Click Activate f0-16kHz. Measure the level at X103 and compare it with the predefined
range.
9. Click Activate f0+16kHz. Measure the level at X103 and compare it with the predefined
range.
10. Click Cancel.
11. In the Tune Tx RF filter dialog box click Cancel. A message box appears.
12. Switch off the equipment and pull out P4LS.
13. Set the jumpers as displayed in the message box.
14. If the tuning procedure of Rx RF filter is also finished, mount the shielding box. Do it in
reverse order to the opening process described in chapter 2, page 4 .
Also insert the removed modules into rack and cover all unused slots with front plates.
15. Insert P4LS into rack.
16. Switch on the equipment again.
17. Click OK. This performs a reset on the P4LQ.
18. Move the plug in connector at G1DA from X101, LOOP BACK TEST to X100,
NORMAL OPERATION.

5.3 If the Tx RF filter check failed

If it is not possible to attain the limits listed in the Check Tx RF filter dialog box used before and if
one of the trimming screws of coils L1 or L2 has reached its end stop or is getting loose, it is
recommended to do the following procedure:
1. Check capacitor correct setting and soldering.
If capacitor setting and soldering is correct, then an alternative connection scheme should select
for the series capacitors CS1 and CS2. The capacitor combination of CP is retained.
2. If the tuning screw for coil L1 or L2 is getting loose, you should select for CS1 and CS2
the capacitor combination for the next lower frequency. The value for capacitance of CP
is retained. Use table in chapter 6.
3. If the tuning screw for coil L1 or L2 is at its right end-stop, you should select for CS1 and
CS2 the capacitor combination for the next higher frequency. The value for capacitance
of CP is retained. Use table in chapter 6.
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 8/17
1KHL016256-EN

Note: For correct operation of the power amplifier P4LS, the Rx filter section must
also be tuned. The tuning procedure for the Rx filter described in document
1KHL016255 is given in the appendix of instruction manual.
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 9/17
1KHL016256-EN

6 Capacitor combination for P4LS

6.1 Capacitor combination for P4LS with frequency range 42 to 118 kHz

P4LS TX-Filter 5W
f0 name Series Capacitors values and positions Parallel Capacitors values and positions
[kHz]
CS-value 2.2 nF 3.3 nF 15.0 nF 33.0 nF 47.0 nF CP-value 33.0 nF 47.0 nF 68.0 nF 150.0 nF 220.0 nF

CS1 80.000 nF 125/126 137/138

42 CP 286.35 nF 23/24 75/76 35/36 61/62 83/84
CS2 80.000 nF 225/226 237/238
CS1 64.200 nF 125/126 137/138 163/164
46 CP 259.59 nF 27/28 45/46 61/62 73/74 83/84
CS2 64.200 nF 225/226 237/238 263/264
CS1 53.500 nF 125/126 137/138 163//164 175/176
50 CP 239.97 nF 23/24 61/62 49/50 73/74 83/84
CS2 53.500 nF 225/226 237/238 263/264 275/276
CS1 45.114 nF 167/168 165/166 161/162 183/184 145/146
54 CP 221.73 nF 75/76 61/62 83/84 45/46
CS2 45.114 nF 267/268 265/266 261/262 283/284 245/246
CS1 38.500 nF 125/126 137/138 163/164
58 CP 207.67 nF 75/76 23/24 35/36 83/84 61/62
CS2 38.500 nF 225/226 237/238 263/264
CS1 33.000 nF 125/126
62 CP 191.00 nF 27/28 45/46 61/62 83/84 73/74
CS2 33.000 nF 225/226
CS1 29.247 nF 183/184 125/126 161/162 173/174 145/146
66 CP 181.49 nF 61/62 73/74 23/24 83/84 49/50
CS2 29.247 nF 283/284 225/226 261/262 273/274 245/246
CS1 25.753 nF 127/128 183/184 159/160 173/174 145/146
70 CP 170.51 nF 23/24 61/62 49/50 83/84 73/74
CS2 25.753 nF 227/228 283/284 259/260 273/274 245/246
CS1 22.895 nF 159/169 127/128 145/146 181/182
74 CP 162.17 nF 81/82 25/26 45/46 73/74
CS2 22.895 nF 259/260 227/228 245/246 281/282
CS1 20.481 nF 161/162 127/128 145/146
78 CP 153.21 nF 83/84 27/28 61/62 73/74 45/46
CS2 20.481 nF 261/262 227/228 245/246
CS1 18.300 nF 125/126 137/138
82 CP 145.63 nF 25/26 81/82 45/46 73/74
CS2 18.300 nF 225/226 237/238
CS1 16.871 nF 183/184 175/176 145/146 161/162
86 CP 139.09 nF 23/24 75/76 83/84 35/36 61/62
CS2 16.871 nF 283/284 275/276 245/246 261/262
CS1 15.215 nF 183/184 167/168 161/162 165/166 145/146
90 CP 131.94 nF 75/76 83/84 61/62 45/46
CS2 15.215 nF 283/284 267/268 261/262 265/266 245/246
CS1 13.809 nF 167/168 183/184 145/146 161/162 165/166
94 CP 126.79 nF 75/76 83/84 61/62 45/46
CS2 13.809 nF 267/268 283/284 245/246 261/262 265/266
CS1 12.664 nF 167/168 165/166 145/146 127/128 181/182
98 CP 121.96 nF 61/62 23/24 33/34 45/46 81/82
CS2 12.664 nF 267/268 265/266 245/246 227/228 281/282
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 10/17
1KHL016256-EN

P4LS TX-Filter 5W
f0 name Series Capacitors values and positions Parallel Capacitors values and positions
[kHz]
CS-value 2.2 nF 3.3 nF 15.0 nF 33.0 nF 47.0 nF CP-value 33.0 nF 47.0 nF 68.0 nF 150.0 nF 220.0 nF

CS1 11.633 nF 159/160 173/174 123/124 133/134

102 CP 117.10 nF 27/28 45/46 59/60 81/82
CS2 11.633 nF 259/260 273/274 223/224 233/234
CS1 10.749 nF 161/162 173/174 123/124 133/134 149/150
106 CP 112.44 nF 27/28 73/74 81/82 59/60
CS2 10.749 nF 261/262 273/274 223/224 233/234 249/150
CS1 9.964 nF 161/162 173/174 181/182 123/124 135/136
110 CP 108.52 nF 25/26 73/74 81/82 45/46
CS2 9.964 nF 261/262 273/274 281/282 223/224 235/236
CS1 9.232 nF 135/136 161/162 149/150 123/124 173/174
114 CP 104.69 nF 67/68 45/46 65/66 27/28 59/60
CS2 9.232 nF 235/236 261/262 249/150 223/224 273/274
CS1 8.595 nF 161/162 123/124 173/174 135/136
118 CP 101.01 nF 61/62 73/74 49/50 33/34 23/24
CS2 8.595 nF 261/262 223/224 273/274 235/236

6.2 Capacitor combination for P4LS with frequency range 122 to 498 kHz

P4LS TX-Filter 5W
f0 name Series Capacitors values and positions Parallel Capacitors values and positions
[kHz]
CS-value 1.5 nF 1.5 nF 2.2 nF 3.3 nF 4.7 nF CP-value 6.8 nF 10.0 nF 33.0 nF 47.0 nF 68.0 nF

CS1 8.000nF 125/126 137/138

122 CP 97.388nF 75/76 61/62 45/46 83/84
CS2 8.000nF 225/226 237/238
CS1 7.511nF 161/162 135/136 183/184 123/124 175/176
126 CP 94.188nF 75/76 61/62 45/46 83/84
CS2 7.511nF 261/262 235/236 283/284 223/224 275/276
CS1 7.000nF 125/126 137/138 163/164
130 CP 91.436nF 73/74 45/46 27/28 59/60 83/84
CS2 7.000nF 225/226 237/238 263/264
CS1 6.637nF 145/146 183/184 175/176 161/162
134 CP 88.900nF 81/82 45/46 73/74 25/26
CS2 6.637nF 245/246 283/284 275/276 261/262
CS1 6.209nF 181/182 145/146 173/174 125/126
138 CP 86.255nF 45/46 61/62 25/26 83/84 73/74
CS2 6.209nF 281/282 245/246 273/274 225/226
CS1 5.854nF 173/174 183/184 125/126 145/146 161/162
142 CP 83.820nF 23/24 35/36 75/76 83/84 61/62
CS2 5.854nF 273/274 283/284 225/226 245/246 261/262
CS1 5.534nF 183/184 125/126 161/162 173/174 145/146
146 CP 81.397nF 75/76 23/24 35/36 61/62 83/84
CS2 5.534nF 283/284 225/226 261/262 273/274 245/246
CS1 5.232nF 183/184 125/126 173/174 145/146 161/162
150 CP 79.218nF 75/76 61/62 83/84 45/46
CS2 5.232nF 283/284 225/226 273/274 245/246 261/262
CS1 4.939nF 183/184 175/176 145/146 161/162
154 CP 77.001nF 61/62 73/74 23/24 49/50 83/84
CS2 4.939nF 283/284 275/276 245/246 261/262
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 11/17
1KHL016256-EN

P4LS TX-Filter 5W
f0 name Series Capacitors values and positions Parallel Capacitors values and positions
[kHz]
CS-value 1.5 nF 1.5 nF 2.2 nF 3.3 nF 4.7 nF CP-value 6.8 nF 10.0 nF 33.0 nF 47.0 nF 68.0 nF

CS1 4.700nF 125/126

158 CP 75.237nF 61/62 45/46 67/68 65/66 83/84
CS2 4.700nF 225/226
CS1 4.437nF 181/182 125/126 159/160
162 CP 73.353nF 73/74 45/46 27/28 83/84 59/60
CS2 4.437nF 281/282 225/226 259/260
CS1 4.255nF 167/168 165/166 183/184 145/146 161/162
166 CP 71.605nF 61/62 35/36 23/24 83/84
CS2 4.255nF 267/268 265/266 283/284 245/246 261/262
CS1 4.034nF 125/126 173/174 181/182 145/146
170 CP 69.898nF 81/82 45/46 25/26 73/74
CS2 4.034nF 225/226 273/274 281/282 245/246
CS1 3.845nF 161/162 167/168 183/184 165/166 145/146
174 CP 68.000nF 25/26
CS2 3.845nF 261/262 267/268 283/284 265/266 245/246
CS1 3.666nF 161/162 167/168 183/184 145/146 165/166
178 CP 65.917nF 61/62 27/28 83/84 73/74 45/46
CS2 3.666nF 261/262 267/268 283/284 245/246 265/266
CS1 3.495nF 145/146 173/174 183/184 161/162 127/128
182 CP 65.349nF 73/74 45/46 83/84 59/60 27/28
CS2 3.495nF 245/246 273/274 283/284 261/262 227/228
CS1 3.343nF 181/182 145/146 125/126 173/174
186 CP 63.800nF 25/26 37/38 63/64
CS2 3.343nF 281/282 245/246 225/226 273/274
CS1 3.208nF 127/128 181/182 159/160 145/146 173/174
190 CP 62.328nF 81/82 25/26 45/46 73/74
CS2 3.208nF 227/228 281/282 259/260 245/246 273/274
CS1 3.084nF 173/174 123/124 183/184 149/150 161/162
194 CP 60.791nF 25/26 81/82 59/60
CS2 3.084nF 273/274 223/224 283/284 249/250 261/262
CS1 2.950nF 181/182 159/160 125/126
198 CP 59.714nF 67/68 61/62 65/66 83/84 45/46
CS2 2.950nF 281/282 259/260 225/226
CS1 2.842nF 161/162 183/184 145/146 167/168 165/166
202 CP 58.934nF 61/62 67/68 65/66 83/84 45/46
CS2 2.842nF 261/262 283/284 245/246 267/268 265/266
CS1 2.732nF 125/126 145/146 173/174 181/182
206 CP 57.555nF 61/62 67/68 45/46 83/84 65/66
CS2 2.732nF 225/226 245/246 273/274 281/282
CS1 2.637nF 125/126 181/182 159/160
210 CP 56.151nF 61/62 45/46 27/28 83/84 73/74
CS2 2.637nF 225/226 281/282 259/260
CS1 2.528nF 145/146 181/182 123/124 133/134 161/162
214 CP 54.992nF 81/82 45/46 73/74 25/26
CS2 2.526nF 245/246 281/282 223/224 233/234 261/262
CS1 2.442nF 183/184 123/124 161/162 173/174 149/150
218 CP 54.151nF 61/62 23/24 73/74 83/84 49/50
CS2 2.442nF 283/284 223/224 261/262 273/274 249/250
CS1 2.346nF 183/184 123/124 135/136 161/162
222 CP 53.239nF 45/46 67/68 65/66 83/84 61/62
CS2 2.346nF 283/284 223/224 235/236 261/262
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 12/17
1KHL016256-EN

P4LS TX-Filter 5W
f0 name Series Capacitors values and positions Parallel Capacitors values and positions
[kHz]
CS-value 1.5 nF 1.5 nF 2.2 nF 3.3 nF 4.7 nF CP-value 6.8 nF 10.0 nF 33.0 nF 47.0 nF 68.0 nF

CS1 2.252nF 127/128 167/168 165/166 145/146 181/182

226 CP 52.258nF 23/24 61/62 49/50 83/84 73/74
CS2 2.252nF 227/228 267/268 265/266 245/246 281/282
CS1 2.182nF 159/160 145/146 127/128 181/182
230 CP 51.048nF 81/82 59/60 25/26
CS2 2.182nF 259/260 245/246 227/228 281/282
CS1 2.099nF 173/174 149/150 161/162 123/124 133/134
234 CP 50.424nF 73/74 57/58 41/42 83/84 29/30
CS2 2.099nF 273/274 249/250 261/262 223/224 233/234
CS1 2.029nF 123/124 159/160 173/174 133/134
238 CP 49.420nF 45/46 25/26 83/84 61/62 73/74
CS2 2.029nF 223/224 259/260 273/274 233/234
CS1 1.962nF 127/128 167/168 181/182 145/146 165/166
242 CP 48.656nF 73/74 83/84 45/46 59/60 27/28
CS2 1.982nF 227/228 267/268 281/282 245/246 265/266
CS1 1.904nF 127/128 181/182 167/168 145/146 165/166
246 CP 48.046nF 75/76 61/62 83/84 45/46
CS2 1.904nF 227/228 281/282 267/268 245/246 265/266
CS1 1.834nF 173/174 133/134 149/150 161/162 123/124
250 CP 47.154nF 75/76 23/24 83/84 35/36 61/62
CS2 1.834nF 273/274 233/234 249/250 261/262 223/224
CS1 1.782nF 159/160 127/128 145/146 167/168 165/166
254 CP 46.294nF 83/84 27/28 45/46 59/60 73/74
CS2 1.782nF 259/260 227/228 245/246 267/268 265/266
CS1 1.725nF 145/146 161/162 127/128
258 CP 45.534nF 83/84 27/28 61/62 73/74 45/46
CS2 1.725nF 245/246 261/262 227/228
CS1 1.677nF 173/174 149/150 133/134 123/124 161/162
262 CP 45.037nF 67/68 61/62 83/84 45/46 65/66
CS2 1.677nF 273/274 249/250 233/234 223/224 261/262
CS1 1.624nF 161/162 145/146 127/128
266 CP 44.591nF 75/76 83/84 61/62 45/46
CS2 1.624nF 261/262 245/246 227/228
CS1 1.571nF 161/162 127/128 145/146
270 CP 43.471nF 61/62 73/74 83/84 23/24 49/50
CS2 1.571nF 261/262 227/228 245/246
CS1 1.522nF 127/128 181/182 145/146 167/168 165/166
274 CP 42.730nF 61/62 83/84 27/28 45/46 27/28
CS2 1.522nF 227/228 281/282 245/246 267/268 265/266
CS1 1.478nF 173/174 149/150 123/124 133/134 161/162
278 CP 42.200nF 45/46 25/26 73/74 81/82
CS2 1.478nF 273/274 249/250 223/224 233/234 261/262
CS1 1.446nF 135/136 161/162 173/174 149/150 123/124
282 CP 41.433nF 81/82 45/46 25/26 73/74
CS2 1.446nF 235/236 261/262 273/274 249/250 223/224
CS1 1.403nF 133/134 161/162 123/124 173/174 149/150
286 CP 40.850nF 45/46 27/28 73/74 81/82 59/60
CS2 1.403nF 233/234 261/262 223/224 273/274 249/250
CS1 1.361nF 135/136 161/162 173/174 123/124 149/150
290 CP 40.354nF 61/62 83/84 35/36 23/24
CS2 1.361nF 235/236 261/262 273/274 223/224 249/250
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 13/17
1KHL016256-EN

P4LS TX-Filter 5W
f0 name Series Capacitors values and positions Parallel Capacitors values and positions
[kHz]
CS-value 1.5 nF 1.5 nF 2.2 nF 3.3 nF 4.7 nF CP-value 6.8 nF 10.0 nF 33.0 nF 47.0 nF 68.0 nF

CS1 1.320nF 123/124 133/134

294 CP 39.800nF 25/26 37/38
CS2 1.302nF 223/224 233/234
CS1 1.280nF 135/136 149/150 161/162 123/124 173/174
298 CP 39.243nF 45/46 67/68 83/84 65/66 61/62
CS2 1.280nF 235/236 249/250 261/262 223/224 273/274
CS1 1.269nF 161/162 127/128 145/146
302 CP 38.689nF 67/68 83/84 65/66 45/46 61/62
CS2 1.269nF 261/262 227/228 245/246
CS1 1.213nF 135/136 161/162 123/124 173/174 149/150
306 CP 38.129nF 73/74 27/28 81/82 59/60
CS2 1.213nF 235/236 261/262 223/224 273/274 249/250
CS1 1.178nF 161/162 173/174 123/124 135/136
310 CP 37.588nF 67/68 65/66 27/28 81/82 45/46
CS2 1.178nF 261/262 273/274 223/224 235/236
CS1 1.142nF 161/162 123/124 173/174 135/136
314 CP 37.107nF 83/84 67/68 65/66 61/62 45/46
CS2 1.142nF 261/262 223/224 273/274 235/236
CS1 1.127nF 161/162 173/174 123/124 135/136 181/182
318 CP 36.646nF 23/24 61/62 33/34 81/82 45/46
CS2 1.127nF 261/262 273/274 223/224 235/236 281/282
CS1 1.095nF 135/136 149/150 123/124 161/162 173/174
322 CP 36.128nF 25/26 81/82 45/46 73/74
CS2 1.095nF 235/236 249/250 223/224 261/262 273/274
CS1 1.071nF 167/168 177/178 165/166 129/130 169/170
326 CP 35.642nF 25/26 45/46 73/74 81/82
CS2 1.071nF 267/268 277/278 265/266 229/230 269/270
CS1 1.047nF 123/124 149/150 133/134 161/162 173/174
330 CP 35.106nF 73/74 25/26 81/82 45/46
CS2 1.047nF 223/224 249/250 233/234 261/262 273/274
CS1 1.024nF 123/124 133/134 149/150 161/162 173/174
334 CP 34.751nF 73/74 27/28 81/82 45/46 59/60
CS2 1.024nF 223/224 233/234 249/250 261/262 273/274
CS1 0.999nF 161/162 173/174 123/124 135/136
338 CP 34.591nF 25/26 81/82 59/60
CS2 0.999nF 261/262 273/274 223/224 235/236
CS1 0.978nF 161/162 123/124 173/174 181/182 135/136
342 CP 33.909nF 67/68 65/66 45/46 27/28 59/60
CS2 0.978nF 261/262 223/224 273/274 281/282 235/236
CS1 0.942nF 123/124 173/174 161/162 135/136
346 CP 33.429nF 73/74 59/60 33/34 23/24
CS2 0.942nF 223/224 273/274 261/262 235/236
CS1 0.919nF 161/162 123/124 173/174 135/136
350 CP 33.019nF 27/28 73/74 59/60 81/82
CS2 0.919nF 261/262 223/224 273/274 235/236
CS1 0.897nF 123/124 161/162 135/136 173/174
354 CP 32.605nF 67/68 27/28 65/66 81/82 45/46
CS2 0.897nF 223/224 261/262 235/236 273/274
CS1 0.884nF 161/162 123/124 135/136 173/174
358 CP 32.218nF 25/26 81/82 59/60
CS2 0.884nF 261/262 223/224 235/236 273/274
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 14/17
1KHL016256-EN

P4LS TX-Filter 5W
f0 name Series Capacitors values and positions Parallel Capacitors values and positions
[kHz]
CS-value 1.5 nF 1.5 nF 2.2 nF 3.3 nF 4.7 nF CP-value 6.8 nF 10.0 nF 33.0 nF 47.0 nF 68.0 nF

CS1 0.870nF 161/162 123/124 173/174 135/136

362 CP 31.839nF 73/74 59/60 33/34 23/24
CS2 0.870nF 261/262 223/224 273/274 235/236
CS1 0.846nF 145/146 165/166 167/168
366 CP 31.445nF 45/46 67/68 65/66 59/60 27/28
CS2 0.646nF 245/246 265/266 267/268
CS1 0.841nF 167/168 129/130 177/178 165/166 169/170
370 CP 31.144nF 61/62 23/24 45/46 33/34 81/82
CS2 0.841nF 267/268 229/230 277/278 265/266 269/270
CS1 0.810nF 177/178 129/130 167/168 165/166 169/170
374 CP 30.650nF 61/62 45/46 23/24 81/82 33/34
CS2 0.810nF 277/278 229/230 267/268 265/266 269/270
CS1 0.788nF 167/168 129/130 177/178 169/170 165/166
378 CP 30.364nF 67/68 83/84 45/46 61/62 65/66
CS2 0.788nF 267/268 229/230 277/278 269/270 265/266
CS1 0.780nF 161/162 123/124 135/136 173/174
382 CP 29.989nF 25/26 81/82 45/46 73/74
CS2 0.780nF 261/262 223/224 235/236 273/274
CS1 0.767nF 161/162 173/174 129/130 141/142 149/150
386 CP 29.690nF 23/24 33/34 45/46 61/62 81/82
CS2 0.767nF 261/262 273/274 229/230 241/242 249/250
CS1 0.743nF 167/168 129/130 169/170 177/178 165/166
390 CP 29.328nF 61/62 45/46 27/28
CS2 0.743nF 267/268 229/230 269/270 277/278 265/266
CS1 0.743nF 167/168 129/130 169/170 177/178 165/166
394 CP 29.014nF 51/52 69/70 81/82 33/34 23/24
CS2 0.743nF 267/268 229/230 269/270 277/278 265/266
CS1 0.708nF 177/178 129/130 169/170 167/168 165/166
398 CP 28.637nF 23/24 61/62 81/82 45/46 33/34
CS2 0.708nF 277/278 229/230 269/270 267/268 265/266
CS1 0.702nF 145/146 165/166 167/168
402 CP 28.293nF 45/46 61/62 23/24 81/82 33/34
CS2 0.702nF 245/246 265/266 267/268
CS1 0.686nF 123/124 135/136 161/162 173/174
406 CP 28.021nF 67/68 65/66 27/28 45/46 59/60
CS2 0.686nF 223/224 235/236 261/262 273/274
CS1 0.676nF 123/124 135/136 161/162 173/174
410 CP 27.700nF 25/26 81/82 45/46 73/74
CS2 0.676nF 223/224 235/236 261/262 273/274
CS1 0.660nF 123/124 135/136 161/162 173/174
414 CP 27.320nF 83/84 61/62 67/68 65/66 45/46
CS2 0.660nF 223/224 235/236 261/262 273/274
CS1 0.647nF 145/146 167/168 165/166
418 CP 27.082nF 23/24 61/62 45/46 81/82 33/34
CS2 0.647nF 245/246 267/268 265/266
CS1 0.635nF 129/130 169/170 177/178 167/168 165/166
422 CP 26.888nF 61/62 83/84 45/46 67/68 65/66
CS2 0.635nF 229/230 269/270 277/278 267/268 265/266
CS1 0.631nF 161/162 129/130 141/142 149/150 173/174
426 CP 26.586nF 45/46 67/68 27/28 65/66 59/60
CS2 0.631nF 261/262 229/230 241/242 249/250 273/274
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 15/17
1KHL016256-EN

P4LS TX-Filter 5W
f0 name Series Capacitors values and positions Parallel Capacitors values and positions
[kHz]
CS-value 1.5 nF 1.5 nF 2.2 nF 3.3 nF 4.7 nF CP-value 6.8 nF 10.0 nF 33.0 nF 47.0 nF 68.0 nF

CS1 0.611nF 145/146 165/166 167/168

430 CP 26.188nF 25/26 81/82 59/60
CS2 0.611nF 245/246 265/266 267/268
CS1 0.611nF 129/130 141/142 157/158 173/174
434 CP 25.915nF 83/84 61/62 67/68 45/46 65/66
CS2 0.611nF 229/230 241/242 257/258 273/274
CS1 0.579nF 129/130 141/142 161/162 173/174 149/150
438 CP 25.642nF 45/46 61/62 23/24 33/34 81/82
CS2 0.579nF 229/230 241/242 261/262 273/274 249/250
CS1 0.579nF 129/130 141/142 161/162 173/174 149/150
442 CP 25.397nF 61/62 83/84 23/24 49/50 73/74
CS2 0.579nF 229/230 241/242 261/262 273/274 249/250
CS1 0.561nF 129/230 141/142 161/162 149/150 173/174
446 CP 25.106nF 61/62 27/28 45/46
CS2 0.561nF 229/230 241/242 261/262 249/250 273/274
CS1 0.559nF 145/146 167/168 165/166
450 CP 24.815nF 49/50 61/62 33/34 73/74 23/24
CS2 0.559nF 245/246 267/268 265/266
CS1 0.541nF 129/130 141/142 157/158 173/174
454 CP 24.417nF 83/84 61/62 45/46 67/68 65/66
CS2 0.541nF 229/230 241/242 257/258 273/274
CS1 0.541nF 129/130 141/142 157/158 173/174
458 CP 24.417nF 83/84 61/62 45/46 67/68 65/66
CS2 0.541nF 229/230 241/242 257/258 273/274
CS1 0.523nF 129/130 141/142 149/150 161/162 173/174
462 CP 24.033nF 67/68 27/28 81/82 45/46 65/66
CS2 0.523nF 229/230 241/242 249/250 261/262 273/274
CS1 0.523nF 129/130 141/142 149/150 161/162 173/174
466 CP 23.776nF 67/68 45/46 59/60 27/28 65/66
CS2 0.523nF 229/230 241/242 249/250 261/262 273/274
CS1 0.500nF 129/130 141/142 157/158 173/174
470 CP 23.497nF 45/46 67/68 27/28 59/60 65/66
CS2 0.500nF 229/230 241/242 257/258 273/274
CS1 0.500nF 129/130 141/142 157/158 173/174
474 CP 23.367nF 61/62 73/74 33/34 23/24 49/50
CS2 0.500nF 229/230 241/242 257/258 273/274
CS1 0.500nF 129/130 141/142 157/158 173/174
478 CP 23.049nF 73/74 49/50 23/24 61/62 33/34
CS2 0.500nF 229/230 241/242 257/258 273/274
CS1 0.478nF 129/130 141/142 157/158 173/174
482 CP 22.830nF 49/50 73/74 23/24 61/62 33/34
CS2 0.478nF 229/230 241/242 257/258 273/274
CS1 0.478nF 129/130 141/142 157/158 173/174
486 CP 22.602nF 51/52 69/70 23/24 81/82 33/34
CS2 0.478nF 229/230 241/242 257/258 273/274
CS1 0.478nF 129/130 141/142 157/158 173/174
490 CP 22.328nF 83/84 73/74 23/24 49/50 61/62
CS2 0.478nF 229/230 241/242 257/258 273/274
CS1 0.434nF 123/124 141/142 165/166 167/168 169/170
494 CP 22.130nF 73/74 49/50 33/34 23/24 61/62
CS2 0.434nF 223/224 241/242 265/266 267/268 269/270
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 16/17
1KHL016256-EN

P4LS TX-Filter 5W
f0 name Series Capacitors values and positions Parallel Capacitors values and positions
[kHz]
CS-value 1.5 nF 1.5 nF 2.2 nF 3.3 nF 4.7 nF CP-value 6.8 nF 10.0 nF 33.0 nF 47.0 nF 68.0 nF

CS1 0.434nF 123/124 141/142 165/166 167/168 169/170

498 CP 21.886nF 83/84 61/62 35/36 23/24
CS2 0.434nF 223/224 241/242 265/266 267/268 269/270
 Revision: Language: Page:

- EN 17/17
1KHL016256-EN

7 Jumper positions for Tx RF filter tuning

TM, TN, TL, TO

TE, TF, TG

TH, TI, TK

TA, TB, TY
TC, TD

TV, TW

TR, TP, TQ

Remove blue wire!

TT, TS, TU

figure 4: Position of jumpers relevant for tuning and testing the RF filters
 ABB Power Automation Ltd 1KHL015788-EN
Archive No.: Rev. Date:
Instruction for changing the input voltage of B5LC - - -
Responsible Department: Prepared: Approved: Distribution: Lang.: Page:
NKT 98-01-23 sig. R. Pauli 98-01-29 sig. T. Ruckli - EN 1/2
Valid for: Derived from: Replaces: Classification-No.: File:
- - - -

Power Line Carrier Equipment: Series ETL500

Instruction for changing the input voltage of B5LC

Contents
1 Purpose of document ...................................................................................... 1
2 Safety instructions........................................................................................... 1
3 Changing from 230 VAC to 115 VAC.............................................................. 2
4 Changing from 115 VAC to 230 VAC.............................................................. 2

1 Purpose of document
This document describes, how to change the input voltage of the AC power supply type B5LC from
230 VAC to 115 VAC or vice versa.

2 Safety instructions

Hazardous voltage.
DANGER Beware of electric shock.
Unplug the part from the mains before opening

Caution Follow the instruction below carefully and do not

modify anything.

Caution Wrong programming can damage the part and the equipment.
Check if programmed input voltage of the part
is equal to the mains voltage.
Verify the programming information on the
right side of the part.

Caution Operate the part only in the condition specified

by the manufacturer.

We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to
third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © 1999 ABB Power Automation Ltd, Switzerland.
 Revision: Language: Page:
- EN 2/2 1KHL015788-EN

3 Changing from 230 VAC to 115 VAC

1) Unplug the part from the equipment

2) Remove the cover on top with four screws
3) Remove the inserted wire bridge X14-X15 for 230 VAC
4) Remove the two fuses F1 and F3
5) Add in two wire bridges X13-X14 and X15-X16 for 115 VAC
6) Add in two new fuses F1 and F3 4Amp. slow blow ABB part no. XN 400018P0022
7) Close the part by adding the cover and fix it with the four screws
8) Mark the 115 VAC box on the right side of the part with a pen.

4 Changing from 115 VAC to 230 VAC

1) Unplug the part from the equipment

2) Remove the cover on top with four screws
3) Remove the inserted wire bridges X13-X14 and X15-X16 for 115 VAC
4) Remove the two fuses F1 and F3
5) Add in wire bridge X14-X15 for 230 VAC
6) Add in two new fuses F1 and F3 2Amp. slow blow ABB part no. XN400018P0019
7) Close the part by adding the cover and fix it with the four screws
8) Mark the 230 VAC box on the right side of the part with a pen.
 ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHL015940-EN
Archive No.: Rev. Date:
Programming and Testing Instructions: <ETL500 Rel. 3> - D 02-09-16
Responsible Department: Prepared: Approved: Distribution: Lang.: Page:
UTAKT 99-07-19 N. Lahner 02-09-16 H. Benninger - EN 1/38
99-10-05 B. Busslinger
99-10-05 P. Plüer
99-12-23 R. Pauli
Valid for: Derived from: Replaces: Classification-No.: File:
- - - -

Powerline Carrier Equipment: Series ETL500

Programming and Testing Instructions: <ETL500 Rel. 3>

This document describes programming and testing of powerline carrier equipment ETL505, ETL540 and
ETL580, including the teleprotection system NSD550.

Contents:

A Programming Instructions for the ETL500 Rel. 3 Equipment ...................... 3

A.1 General......................................................................................................... 3
A.2 Settings for basic equipment ETL540/580 ................................................... 3
A.3 Settings for basic equipment ETL505 .......................................................... 4
A.4 Settings for alarm unit R1BC, if present....................................................... 5
A.5 Settings for NSD550 interface G4AI, if present ........................................... 5
A.6 Settings for G4AK (NSK5), if present........................................................... 5
A.7 Create a configuration for the equipment using the MMI500....................... 6
A.8 Check interfaces in the rack P7LC............................................................... 6
B Testing Instructions for the ETL500 Rel. 3 Equipment. ............................... 7
B.1 General......................................................................................................... 7
B.2 Check power supply (ETL540/580).............................................................. 7
B.3 Connect to the equipment, download configuration and prepare for tuning
& testing ....................................................................................................... 8
B.4 Change configuration, if necessary.............................................................. 8
B.5 Transmitter ETL540/580 .............................................................................. 8
B.6 Receiver ETL540/580 ................................................................................ 10
B.7 Transmitter and Receiver ETL505 ............................................................. 11
B.8 Equalization for ETL505............................................................................. 13
B.9 Testing of R1BC, if present ........................................................................ 13
B.10 Configure Real Time Clock (RTC) ............................................................. 14
B.11 Testing of NSD550 with interface G4AI, if present .................................... 14
B.12 Testing of G4AK, if present ........................................................................ 16
B.13 Testing of O4LE, if present ........................................................................ 17
B.14 Documentation ........................................................................................... 22
B.15 Manual reset............................................................................................... 22
Sheet ETL500 System Settings...............................................................................A1 - A4
Sheet ETL500 System Test report ....................................................................... B1 - B12

Test conditions:
· Temperature range: 10 °C to 45 °C.
· The connections for the tests can be made either at the test sockets on the front of the
equipment or at the terminals.

We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to
third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © ABB Switzerland Ltd, Switzerland.
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 2/38 1KHL015940-EN

Basic test equipment

PC with Windows 95, 98 or NT
MMI500 software
PCóP4LQ (1:1 serial RS-232) cable
Digital multimeter ABB Metrawatt M2012 or equivalent
Level meter True RMS with a frequency range up to 500 kHz
Dummy load P3LK, only for ETL540/580 HENF 331084

Optional test equipment

Level generator PS-33 (W&G) or equivalent
Selective level meter SPM-32 (W&G) or equivalent
Storage oscilloscope Tektronix 2430A or similar
Tx tuning adapter P3LL HENF 209668
Rx tuning adapter P4LM HENF 209665
Modem tester DMT-1 (W&G) or equivalent
RS-232 interface tester DV-24 (W&G) or similar

Notes:
· This document is part of instruction manual 1KHL015946.

F ·
·
Please refer to 1KHL016075 for programming of the module G4AK.
Please refer 1KHL015559 for compatibility between software MMI500, firmware and hardware
of ETL500.

Designations and abbreviations used:

Designation Meaning
___________ Measured value
[ ... ] Programmed value
[ ]D Preferred setting (default)
[X ] Test passed or jumper is set
[ ] Not tested or jumper is not set
B5LA Module type
Def. Default value
equ. Equipment
fLo Lower frequency, usually meant as low cutoff frequency
LED Light Emitting Diode found on the front panel
MM500 User Interface for ETL500 running on a PC
N11, …, N71 Position in rack. Slot number N11, …, N71
Rx Receiver
Tx Transmitter
PC Personal Computer
W&G Wavetek, Wandel and Goltermann
X11, …, X71 Position in rack. Equivalent to N11, …, N71
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 3/38 1KHL015940-EN

A Programming Instructions for the ETL500 Rel. 3 Equipment

A.1 General
All RF channel settings, all settings of telephony- and teleoperation-ports, most settings of the
integrated teleprotection system NSD550 are performed with the configuration program MMI500.
Typically this data are configured off-line and stored as a file on a disk. All these settings are
loaded from a file and downloaded to the equipment. The most important settings are the RF Tx
and Rx carrier. A few settings have to be adjusted with the equipment e.g. the Tx RF level. Most of
these tuning, testing and adjustment procedures are supported by the MMI500.
First some hardware settings of the analogous passive modules, like the Tx-Filter and the Rx-Filter
must be done. When hardware settings, like jumpers and solder bridges must be set, refer to the
named documents and use settings, which are specified in chapter ‘system settings’ at the end of
this document on page A1.
Follow conscientiously, step by step this instruction and the equipment will work properly!

A.2 Settings for basic equipment ETL540/580

A.2.1 Power supply

Check type of power supply: If the provided input voltage is nominal 48 VDC, the power supply
B5LA must be present. If the provided input voltage is nominal 115 VAC or 230 VAC, power supply
B5LC must be present.
In case of AC supply check required jumpers, located inside of B5LC, referring to document
1KHL015788.

Caution Before switching ON for the first time, check the wiring of protective earth and
power supply polarity. Also check the voltage source for the power supply.

A.2.2 Output amplifier stage

The programming of the output amplifier stage depends on the version of the equipment.
In the case of an 80 W equipment, two output amplifier stages are used. Both are of the P1LA type
and are referred to as upper (u) and lower (l) racks. Wiring of the two shelves is described in
chapter 6, ‘Assembly and Installation’, of the instruction manual, 1KHL015946.
The operating range of the transmitter supervision circuit is set in relation to the transmitter level
T(RF) with the aid of jumper CH (test tone level at the test socket on RF hybrid LT|ts ³ -10 dBu) or
CL (LT|ts < -10 dBu) and potentiometer R116. This setting is carried out when the installation is
being tested.

A.2.3 Programming the Tx RF filter

The transmitter filter type E5LB is used for the range 24 - 100 kHz and type E5LA for the range
100 - 500 kHz. Position the capacitors as described in steps A.1 and A.2 of 1KHL015570-EN.
Two power shelves with identically tuned filters are connected in parallel in case of ETL580.

A.2.4 Cable impedance and standard tuning of RF hybrid

The cable impedance is set (75 or 125 W) on the RF hybrid unit P3LB or P3DA. Also put the
jumpers for standard tuning of P3LB.

A.2.5 Programming the Rx RF filter

In case of an single channel equipment with an output power of 40 W and a configuration, where
the Tx and Rx frequencies are adjacent, it is possible to use the RF hybrid unit P3DA without the
separate Rx filter, P4LR.
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 4/38 1KHL015940-EN

Otherwise the Rx filter P4LR and the RF hybrid P3LB is required. This is the standard solution,
because it is more flexible. Set jumpers on P4LR as described in document 1KHL015117-EN.

A.3 Settings for basic equipment ETL505

A.3.1 Power supply

Check the voltage source for the ETL505 equipment. The provided input voltage for ETL505 should
be nominal 48 VDC.

Caution Before switching ON for the first time, check the wiring of protective earth and
power supply polarity. Also check the voltage source for the power supply.

A.3.2 Programming the Tx RF filter

The transmit filter is integrated in the P4LS. Position the capacitors as described in chapter 1 to
chapter 3 of document ‘Tuning Instruction Tx RF filter P4LS’, 1KHL016256-EN.

A.3.3 Programming the Rx RF filter

The receive filter is integrated in the P4LS. Set jumpers on P4LS as described in chapter 1 to
chapter 3 of document ‘Tuning Instruction Rx RF filter P4LS’, 1KHL016255-EN.

A.3.4 Programming the Rx RF level jumpers

In order to prevent saturation in the active Rx filter of the P4LS, it is necessary to set jumpers of the
attenuator correctly to get maximum system performance. The settings are mostly influenced by
parallel transmitters on the same coupling device.

Arrangement Gap = 8 kHz Gap = 12 kHz Gap = 16 kHz

of transmitters between transmitters between transmitters between transmitters
X=5W X = 40 W X=5W X = 40 W X = 5 W X = 40 W
- - 5W - - no parallel transmitters, set jumpers AA and AC, remove AB
- X 5W - - AB, AC AB, AC AB, AC AB, AC AB, AC AB, AC
- - 5W X - AB, AC AB, AC AB, AC AB, AC AB, AC AB, AC
- X 5W X - AB, AC none AB, AC none AB, AC AC
- X 5W X X AB, AC none AB, AC none AB, AC none
X X 5W X - AB, AC none AB, AC none AB, AC none
X - 5W - - AA AB, AC AA AB, AC AB, AC AB, AC
- - 5W - X AA AB, AC AA AB, AC AB, AC AB, AC
X - 5W - X AB, AC AC AB, AC AB, AC AB, AC AB, AC
X X 5W - X AB, AC none AB, AC none AB, AC AC
X - 5W X X AB, AC none AB, AC none AB, AC AC
X X 5W X X AC none AB, AC none AB, AC none

Remarks to the table above:

· Gap is the frequency distance between transmitters on the same coupling device. A gap of
8 kHz is the minimal allowed distance between two transmitters, a multiple gap of 12 kHz is
preferred by the planning guide.
· Parallel transmitters are identified in this table by their maximum output power.
· The symbols in the arrangement notation have following meaning:
‘5W’ represents always the actual ETL505 transmitter.
‘X’ means, that there is a parallel transmitter with the selected frequency gap and
output power.
‘–‘ means, that there is no parallel transmitter with the selected frequency gap.
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 5/38 1KHL015940-EN

· For example, the arrangement (X – 5W – –) with spacing of 8 kHz can also be interpreted as
(– X 5W – –) with a spacing of 16 kHz.

1. Set jumpers AA, AB and AC according to the table above. They are to be found on the
module P4LS, when the black shielding box is removed.

A.3.5 Grounding cable shield of RF line

Depending on the grounding concept of the customer, the cable shield of the RF line can be
grounded at ETL505 by inserting solder bridge AA on line interface G1DA. G1DA is a small module
mounted in the back of the rack.
Normally the cable shield is floating at ETL505 and on the other end grounded at the RF termina-
ting plate.

A.4 Settings for alarm unit R1BC, if present

The jumpers R1-1 to R1-8, R2-1 to R2-8 and jumpers CA-1 to CA-8 for control of the eight relays
on R1BC are programmed according to client specific setting instructions as well as the software
settings for Alarm 1 and Alarm 2 described in the instruction manual, 1KHL015946, chapter A.5,
‘Configuration and Setup’.

A.5 Settings for NSD550 interface G4AI, if present

The programming has to be done for each G4AI module listed in the configuration (set up with the
configuration program MMI500) under ‘Modules and assemblies in the rack P7LC‘.
Preparation for programming:
Switch off the ETL500 supply and pull out the G4AI modules from the rack P7LC. Remove the
cover of G4AI at component side to set the jumper plugs.

A.5.1 Nominal input voltage

The input circuits can be set to operate in one of the following nominal voltage ranges:
· 24 VDC … < 48 VDC jumper plugs x.A, (x = 1, …, 4)
· 48 VDC … < 110 VDC jumper plugs x.B
· 110 VDC … < 220 VDC jumper plugs x.C
· 220 VDC … 250 VDC jumper plugs x.D

A.5.2 Tripping of the inputs

The tripping inputs can be activated by using:
· contact and battery voltage jumper plugs x.E1 and x.E2, (x = 1, …, 4)
· contact only jumper plugs x.F1 and x.F2
If the contact only setting is used, the nominal input voltage programming has to be set to the input
voltage range of 24 VDC … < 48 VDC, jumper plugs x.A, (x = 1, …, 4).

A.5.3 Relay contacts

The relay outputs can be programmed as normally open or normally closed contacts.

A.5.4 Concluding work

Mount the cover of the G4AI modules at component side.

A.6 Settings for G4AK (NSK5), if present

Many jumper settings can be easily calculated with MMI500:
1. Open the file with the configured G4AK.
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 6/38 1KHL015940-EN

2. On the Configuration menu, click Configure teleoperation, ext. teleprotection and

G4AK Tx level and than click the G4AK Nxx tab. Nxx corresponds to the slot number in
the rack.
3. Check the button Recommended for.
4. Select the bandwidth of your modem by choosing the Tx center frequency and Rx
center frequency and set calculated jumpers AF-AH, CA-CF and switches of S1, S2 and
S3 on G4AK.
Normally step 5 can be skipped.
5. Only if you like an other system level as recommended, you have two posibilities:

F Note: Tuned or jumpered system level on G4AK must correspond to configured

dBm0 value in MMI500!

· Check the button Custom, choose the new system level [dBm0] and set
new calculated jumpers CA-CF.
· Alternative, check the button Custom, tuned with potentiometer R80,
choose the new system level [dBm0] and set jumper CF. Now tuning of Tx
level must be done by trimming potentiometer R80, refer to ‘FSK modem
type NSK5 instruction manual’, 1KHL015989)
6. Click OK.

The meaning of the calculated and all other jumpers, switches and wire bridges on G4AK are
described in the ‘FSK modem type NSK5 instruction manual’, 1KHL015989 and in the
‘programming schedule NSK5 modem G4AK’, 1KHL016075.

A.7 Create a configuration for the equipment using the MMI500

Create a configuration for your equipment with MMI500. How to do this, is described in the
instruction manual, 1KHL015946, section 5, ‘configuration and setup’.
If a preconfigured file exist, load this file. Make sure, that you have opened the right file by
displaying the configuration text on screen and check the entries of ‘Equipment identification’.

A.8 Check interfaces in the rack P7LC

In MMI500 display the configuration text on screen or use a printout of the configuration, created
with MMI500.
To display the configuration in MMI500:
1. On the View menu, click Display configuration. A list showing the interface boards
appears together with the positions (slots) where these have to be inserted it into the
channel rack P7LC.

A.8.1 Check position of interfaces

Check, if all required interfaces are present and inserted at the correct position in the channel rack
as given by the list.

A.8.2 Check presence of spare plates

The front of the rack should completely covered. Check, if all spare plates are present.
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 7/38 1KHL015940-EN

B Testing Instructions for the ETL500 Rel. 3 Equipment.

B.1 General
Most of the testing for the ETL500 system can be done with assistance of MMI500. In case of
some adjustments like Tx RF level, Rx RF level etc. the permissible limits are calculated by the
MMI500 and displayed in the dialog boxes.
The pilot signal is QPSK modulated to accommodate both Signaling & Embedded Operations
Channel. As a result the level of the pilot signal changes continuously due to which its exact level
cannot be measured. It is however kept at least 6 dB below the tuning tone, on condition that
default settings for the tuning tone are active.
The Tx filters E5LA or E5LB and Rx filter P4LR (if used) are assumed to be tuned before testing.
A attenuator with a minimum attenuation of 15 dB is inserted between two equipments to simulate
a power line. For testing, the attenuation between the two equipments is kept as follows:

Max. output Equipment type Attenuation Switches of standard ‘80 Watt-

power (PEP) attenuator’ (Minimum = 15 dB)
+3 dB +6 dB +10 dB +20 dB
5W ETL505, single channel 21 dB x
40 W ETL540, single channel 31 dB x x
80 W ETL580, single channel 34 dB x x x
40 W ETL540, double channel 25 dB x
80 W ETL580, double channel 28 dB x x

Test conditions:
Temperature range: 20° C to 35° C.
The connections for the tests can be made at the terminals of the equipment.

B.1.1 Visual checks before switching ON the equipment.

Check the wiring of protective earth to the equipment. Check, if a

DANGER 2
protective earth wire of at least 25 mm has been connected visibly to
the earth bolt of the cubicle.

Caution Check power supply polarity and voltage.

In case of an AC supply, jumpers, located inside of B5LC, had to be set, see
document ‘Instruction for changing the input voltage of B5LC’, 1KHL015788.

In case of battery supply: Check if the positive pole (+) of the battery is grounded. If it is, place an
earth jumper to the positive pole of the cubicle supply.

F Note: Now switch on the equipment.

B.2 Check power supply (ETL540/580)

Check the auxiliary supply voltage on B5LA / B5LC. In case of 80 W units, the supply voltage for
both the upper rack and lower rack must be checked.
There is no access to the internal DC voltages generated by B4LE for the channel subrack.
However in case these voltages go outside their limit, it will be indicated by a hardware alarm.
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 8/38 1KHL015940-EN

B.3 Connect to the equipment, download configuration and prepare for tuning &
testing
1. Start the MMI500, open the preconfigured file and connect to the equipment as described
in the instruction manual, 1KHL015946, chapter 4, section ‘Communication to the
ETL500’.
2. From the Equipment menu, click Download configuration. Compatibility checks are
now performed to verify if downloaded services can handled by the equipment. Three
grades of compatibility are possible:
· Full compatibility: The download operation is possible without restrictions. Go on with
step 3
· Restricted compatibility: The download operation is possible with some alterations of
the settings to be downloaded. Message windows will report each of these alterations.
It is a good idea in this case to change the settings responsible for the reported
alterations or to update the firmware of the system as described in document
‘Firmware Download ETL500 Rel. 3’, 1KHL016378.
· No compatibility: The download operation is not possible due to incompatibility
between MMI500 and hardware/firmware. Correct the problem by getting compatible
versions for MMI500, hardware and firmware as given by document 1KHL015559.
Perhaps it is necessary to update the firmware of the system as described in
document ‘Firmware Download ETL500 Rel. 3’, 1KHL016378. Afterwards restart the
programming and testing procedure.
· No compatibility: The download operation is not possible due to missing functions in
the hardware/firmware. This problem can be cured by changing the settings
responsible for the reported incompatibility. Otherwise start a firmware update
referring to document ‘Firmware Download ETL500 Rel. 3’, 1KHL016378.
3. If the download operation is possible, a message box appears, which informs you that the
link will be cut off for a few seconds.
Click Yes
4. The the Testconfiguration time dialog box has been opened.
Click OK.
5. The MMI500 now compares the equipment identification from the file with the
identification in the equipment. If it is different, a warning message box appears.
Click OK. This starts the download configuration process.
6. A dialog box informs you, that the configuration has not been stored in the nonvolatile
flash EPROM and asks you if you want to do so.
Click Yes.
The configuration data are now stored in the flash EPROMS. This process needs up to
some minutes. Please wait until the color of the stop button in the toolbar changes from
red to gray. The actual status of the process is displayed in the status bar.
7. From the equipment menu, click Tuning & testing. This opens a dialog box which
informs you, that activating tests in the following dialog boxes may cause malfunctions of
the PLC-link.
8. Click OK and the Tuning & testing dialog box appears.

B.4 Change configuration, if necessary

In case of configuration parameters have to be changed, refer to section 5 of the instruction
manual, chapter 'Configuration and Setup'.

B.5 Transmitter ETL540/580

The frequency in the AF band when converted in to the RF band will have an additional offset of
150 Hz. This has been done to simplify the filtering by DSP. The frequency shift when reconverted
to the AF band will be restored.
If only one power subrack P7LA is present: Check the setting of output power in the configuration
text.
1. On menu View, click Display configuration.
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 9/38 1KHL015940-EN

The entry ‘RF setting: PEP’ in the MMI500 configuration text must not be higher than 46 dBm.
If this is not the case:
Change the output level to 46 dBm or lower (menu Configuration / System / Channel
settings), download the changed configuration and store it into eprom of equipment as
follows:
2. In menu Configuration / System / Channel settings, change the value of Max. power
(PEP) to 46 dBm or lower.
3. In menu Equipment, click Download configuration.
4. Read the following message boxes and answer the questions with Yes and Ok.

B.5.1 Tune Tx RF filter

The Tx filter is tuned with help of the Tx tuning adapter P3LL in accordance with steps A.3 and A.4
of the tuning instructions 1KHL015570-EN.

B.5.2 Adjust Tx RF level

The Tx RF level is adjusted using the MMI500.
1. In the Tuning & testing dialog box click Adjust Tx RF level. This opens the Adjust Tx
RF level dialog box.
2. Remove the remote equipment by disconnecting the coaxial cable. The local equipment
has to be terminated with 75 or 125 W, depending on the application.
3. Click Activate tuning tone.
4. Measure RF test tone level in dBm on the RF hybrid (P11 – P13) with a level meter with
high input impedance set to a reference of 600 W. Adjust the value in the Tx level RF
field, download it with Activate tuning tone and measure the test tone level again.
Continue, until the measurement is according to the permissible value displayed in the
dialog box. If the selective level meter is connected to the terminated RF line (X175 on
P1LA) use 75 or 125 W reference to measure the value.

B.5.3 Adjust Tx alarm threshold level

The Tx alarm level threshold is adjusted using the MMI500, the jumper CH/CL and the
potentiometer on the amplifier P1LA.
1. In the Tuning & testing dialog box click Adjust Tx RF level.
2. Set the jumper CH/CL to the position as described in the Adjustment of Tx alarm level
comment field of the Adjust Tx RF level dialog box.
3. Turn the potentiometer R116 on P1LA fully clockwise. The red LED is then OFF.
4. Click Activate Tx alarm level.
This reduces the tuning tone level (Activate tuning tone) by -12.9 dB in a single channel
version and -15.9 dB in a two channel version. The red LED adjacent to the
potentiometer is still OFF. Now adjust the potentiometer R116 very slowly in the
anticlockwise direction till the red LED adjacent to it just goes ON. This LED is duplicated
as Tx Alarm LED on the RF hybrid. In case of 80 W equipment the red LED on the
combiner also lights.
5. Tx alarm indication
During the alignment process above check the Tx alarm indication. Alarm condition:
check that Tx alarm LED on the hybrid (also on the combiner in case of 80 W equipment)
lights. After the programmed delay time, the Hardware alarm in System field of P4LQ
operates. The relay contacts on the cable V9MQ Pin 2-3 are closed.
6. Click Deactivate tuning tone. The LEDs go OFF and the contacts open after the
programmed delay.
Note: Exact measurement of the programmed delay times is not essential.
7. Click Cancel.
8. Click Yes in the following message box, if you modified the Tx RF level,
click No, if you didn’t modified the Tx RF level.
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 10/38 1KHL015940-EN

B.6 Receiver ETL540/580

B.6.1 Tune Rx RF filter

The tuning is done with help of the Rx and Tx tuning adapters P4LM and P3LL in accordance with
the tuning instructions described in the document ‘Tuning Instructions for Rx RF Filter P4LR
<ETL500 Rel 3>’, 1KHL015117.

B.6.2 Adjust Rx RF level

The Rx RF level is adjusted using the MMI500.
1. In the Tuning & testing dialog box click Adjust Rx RF level.
2. Disconnect the RF line coaxial cable of the local equipment and plug out the Rx filter
P4LR.
3. In the dialog box enter the environment settings
4. Enter the line attenuation (test field ® attenuation of the artificial line).
5. If you are using the hybrid P3DA select Hybrid P3DA check box.
6. Click Start measurement.
7. The actual Rx RF level is displayed in the Measured level field. The rated Rx RF level is
displayed above this field.
8. Adjust the Rx level potentiometer on the RF hybrid (P3LB or P3DA) to the rated level as
close as possible. The Tx Alarm LED on the hybrid may light during this measurement.
9. Click Stop measurement.
10. Click Cancel.
11. Restore the link by connecting the RF line coaxial cable and plug in the Rx filter P4LR.

B.6.3 Tune RF hybrid P3LB, if present

This test is only necessary for high performance measurements, for a custom approval of the
equipment or for long power lines with high signal attenuation.

F Note: The tuning is not necessary while using the RF hybrid type P3DA.

A special adjustment is needed for tuning the trans-hybrid loss when the RF hybrid type P3LB is
used. The RF line coaxial cable is connected to the equipment. The PCB extender type I9BK or the
Tx tuning adapter P3LL is inserted in place of the RF hybrid P3LB and the RF hybrid is plugged on
top of it.

The settings on P3LL if used are:

· Function: B
· Position of S1: L1, FILTER
· Position of S2: FILTER
· Position of S3: LINE
· Position of LOAD: LINE

Tuning the hybrid using the MMI500.

1. On the Equipment menu click Tuning & testing. This opens the Tuning & testing dialog
box.
2. Click Tune RF hybrid. This opens the Tune RF hybrid dialog box.
3. Check the jumper setting on the hybrid: RA, CE, CD, LO.
In accordance to the impedance of the line coupling system, check solderbridge CM 75 W
and wire bridge is on 75 W respectively solderbridge is open and wire bridge is on 125 W.
4. Click Start measurement. The configuration of the P4LQ is temporary modified by the
MMI500 for this measurement. The modification and initialisation of these configuration
takes some time. Please wait until the measured Rx RF level appears in the dialog box
and doesn’t vary.
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 11/38 1KHL015940-EN

F 5.
Note: It might be possible, that the operator phone of remote equipment is
ringing during the measurement. It has no effect on the measurement.

The MMI500 selectively measures the level of the RF signal from the own transmitter.
This level is set to a minimum with the aid of a balancing network (resistor R10 (RA/RP),
the potentiometer R8, the inductors LA – LN and the capacitors CA – CL) described
below.
6. Reduce the measured Rx RF level using potentiometer R8 until a first minimum is
reached. If a minimum cannot be reached with the jumper in position RA, the effective
resistor R8 can be increased by setting jumper to position RP.
7. Search for the next minimum using jumpers LA – LN, starting with LA.
If, however, jumper LA does not produce any reduction, set Jumper LO. (LA has the
smallest inductance and LN the largest).

F 8.
Note: Only one L jumper (LA – LN) may be inserted at any one time

If a minimum could be achieved with LA to LN, reduce the measured Rx RF level

again to the next minimum using potentiometer R8. Further improvement can be
achieved using small values of C (jumpers CA, CB or CC). C jumpers may be inserted in
parallel.
This concludes the tuning of the hybrid.
Click Stop measurement.
This performs a reset on the equipment to reload the original settings from the flash
EPROM.
9. If no minimum could be achieved with LA to LN, reduce the level using jumpers CA –
CN until the next minimum is reached (CA has the smallest and CN the largest
capacitance). C jumpers may be inserted in parallel.
Conclude the tuning by adjusting R8 for the next minimum.
Click Stop measurement.
This performs a reset on the equipment to reload the original settings from the flash
EPROM.

B.6.4 Link alarm indication

The link alarm is triggered by interrupting the RF connection (disconnecting the RF line coaxial
cable). After the programmed delay time the link alarm relay on P4LQ operates. The relay contacts,
terminals 5 and 6 at P4LQs external cable, are closed. Now restore the RF connection. The Alarm
LED’s goes OFF and the contacts will open after the programmed delay.

B.7 Transmitter and Receiver ETL505

The frequency in the AF band when converted in to the RF band will have an additional offset of
150 Hz. This has been done to simplify the filtering by DSP. The frequency shift when reconverted
to the AF band will be restored.
Check the setting of output power in the configuration text.
1. On menu View, click Display configuration.
The entry ‘RF setting: PEP’ in the MMI500 configuration text must not be higher than 37 dBm.
If this is not the case:
Change the output level to 37 dBm or lower (menu Configuration / System / Channel
settings), download the changed configuration and store it into eprom of equipment as
follows:
2. In menu Configuration / System / Channel settings, change the value of Max. power
(PEP) to 37 dBm or lower.
3. In menu Equipment, click Download configuration.
4. Read the following message boxes and answer the questions with Yes and Ok.
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 12/38 1KHL015940-EN

B.7.1 Tune Tx RF filter

The Tx filter is tuned with help of MMI500 and an external level meter in accordance with chapter 4
of the ‘Tuning Instructions Tx RF filter P4LS <ETL500 Rel. 3>’, 1KHL016256-EN. The procedure
for checking the amplitude response is described in the same document chapter 5.

B.7.2 Adjust Tx RF level

The Tx RF level is adjusted using the MMI500 and an external level meter.
1. In the Tuning & testing dialog box click Adjust Tx RF level. This opens the Adjust Tx
RF level dialog box.
2. Remove the remote equipment by disconnecting the coaxial cable. The local equipment
has to be terminated with 75 W.
3. Connect the level meter to ETL505. Two possible test points exists. Either measure RF
test tone level on the connector at the front panel of P4LS, named ‘RF LINE’. In this case
the level meter with high input impedance should measure dBu or dBm to a reference of
600 W. Or the level meter is connected to the terminated RF line at X102 on G1DA, which
is a small module screwed from back into the rack below the backplane. In this case the
level meter should measure dBm to a reference of 75 W.
4. Click Activate tuning tone.
5. Adjust the value in the Tx level RF field, download it with Activate tuning tone and
measure the test tone level again. Retry step 5, until the measurement is according to the
permissible value displayed in the dialog box.

B.7.3 Adjust Tx alarm threshold level

The Tx alarm level threshold is adjusted using the MMI500 and the potentiometer on the frontpanel
of P4LS.
1. In the Tuning & testing dialog box click Adjust Tx RF level. This opens the Adjust Tx
RF level dialog box.
2. In the Adjust Tx RF level dialog box, click Activate Tx alarm level.
This reduces the tuning tone level (Activate tuning tone) by –12.9 dB.
3. Turn the potentiometer on front panel of P4LS, named ‘SET TX ALARM’ as far
anticlockwise as the red LED, named ‘TX ALARM’, is OFF.
4. Now adjust the potentiometer on front panel of P4LS, named ‘SET TX ALARM’, very
slowly in the clockwise direction till the red LED adjacent to it just goes ON.
5. Check Tx alarm indication
After the programmed delay time, the Hardware alarm, LED named ‘HW’, in System field
of P4LQ operates. The relay contacts on the cable V9MQ Pin 2-3 are closed.

F 6.
Note: Exact measurement of the programmed delay times is not essential

Click Deactivate tuning tone. The LED on P4LS and the LED, named ‘HW’, on P4LQ go
OFF and the contacts open after the programmed delay.

F 7.
Note:

Click Cancel.
Exact measurement of the programmed delay times is not essential

8. Click Yes in the following message box, if you modified the Tx RF level,
click No, if you didn’t modified the Tx RF level.

B.7.4 Tune Rx RF filter

The Rx filter is tuned with help of MMI500 in accordance with chapter 4 of the ‘Tuning Instructions
Rx RF filter P4LS’, 1KHL016255-EN. The procedure for checking the amplitude response is
described in the same document chapter 5.
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 13/38 1KHL015940-EN

B.7.5 Adjust Rx RF level

F Note: The Rx RF level is already programmed with jumpers according to chapter A.3.4.

The reprogramming is only needed, if a change in the arrangement of equipments on

the same RF line appears. In this case see chapter A.3.4.

B.8 Equalization for ETL505

Refer to 1KHL015943 ‘Equalization using MMI500 for the ETL500 Rel. 3 equipment’. The
document is put into a short instruction printed in sections B.8.1and B.8.2.

B.8.1 Measure frequency response

It is assumed, that the RF tuning of the remote equipment is already finished. If it isn’t finished,
tune the remote equipment.
The link works and all alarms are cleared.
In accordance with document ‘Equalization using MMI500 <ETL500 Rel. 3>’, 1KHL015943,
measure the frequency response.
1. In the menu Equipment, click Commissioning and maintenance, click Frequency
response, click Channel 1.
2. In the following message box click OK and wait until measurement is done. The dialog
box Select equalizer appears.

B.8.2 Select Equalizer

To get the dialog box Select equalizer: In menu Equipment, Commissioning and maintenance,
click Select Equalizer, click Channel 1. In accordance with just mentioned document, select an
equalizer.
1. Select the new equalizer:
In field New equalizer, activate checkbox Amplitude response equalisation only.
2. If an external teleprotection signal, e.g. from a NSD70 equipment is fed into a
teleoperation port of O4LE, select type None or Short in dialog box Select equalizer in
field New equalizer to get low group delay.
In other cases, select in the dialog box Select equalizer in field New equalizer type
Middle or Long.
3. View the amplitude response by clicking View. If the amplitude response is acceptable
download the viewed equalizer settings. In the dialog box Select equalizer select in field
New equalizer the type again, check Amplitude response only again and click
Download.
4. Wait until channel calculation is finished.
5. Answer the following message box with Yes and store the equalizer setting into eprom by
clicking Yes again.
6. Press the Reset button on the front plate of P4LQ.

B.9 Testing of R1BC, if present

For testing the R1BC, refer the client specific setting instructions. Depending upon the programmed
criteria, activate the required alarms using the following table. Check the contact closure of the
programmed relays on R1BC. Restore the link after this test is completed.

Alarm on R1BC Action to enforce the alarm

P4LQ alarm This alarm cannot be enforced.
Warning LED on P4LQ Activate a testtone in the ‘Adjust Tx RF level’ dialog box
Link alarm Disconnect the RF line coaxial cable
Hardware (HW) alarm Press ‘Activate Tx alarm level’ in the ‘Adjust Tx RF level’
dialog box
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 14/38 1KHL015940-EN

System alarm (i.e. cabinet alarm) Enforce either Link alarm or HW alarm

B.10 Configure Real Time Clock (RTC)

The real time clock has to be set to the actual date and time for proper operation of the
eventrecorder.

B.10.1 Setting real time clock

1. Setting the date and time using the MMI500.
2. On the Equipment menu, click Commissioning and maintenance, click Eventrecorder
and click Set Clock.
3. In the Real Time Clock (RTC) dialog box check if the PC time and PC date is correct.
4. Click Download date/time to RTC
This sets the RTC to the given date and time.
5. Click Upload date/time from RTC
The date and time displayed at Read RTC date & time part of the Real Time Clock (RTC)
box should be the same as when the button was clicked.
6. Click Cancel

B.10.2 Testing external real time clock synchronisation (if available)

The external synchronisation having IRIG-B format has to be connected to the O4LE port inserted
into slot N11. Terminal 0a-0b, teleoperation, of O4LE external cable is used.
Testing the external synchronisation using MMI500:
Set the time on the PC running MMI500 a few hours back/forward
On the Equipment menu point to Commissioning and maintenance menu point to
Eventrecorder and click Set Clock.
Click Download date/time to RTC. This sets the RTC to the wrong time.
Click Upload date/time from RTC. The date and time displayed at Read RTC date & time part of
the Real time Clock (RTC) box should be correct and not correspond to the PC-date/time setting.
Click Cancel.
Set the time on the PC back to the correct time

B.11 Testing of NSD550 with interface G4AI, if present

Designations and abbreviations used:

Designation Meaning
(T.22/..1) Connector 1 of terminal block connected to rack position N22

B.11.1 Inputs

How to activate an input command depends on the jumper settings on G4AI.

· G4AI input programmed as ‘contact and battery voltage’:
Inject a signal at input port with the voltage level U1 according to the jumper settings on
G4AI (24VDC, 48VDC, 110VDC, 220VDC)
· G4AI input programmed as ‘contact only’:
Short circuit the input port
The way to activate the input port is the same for a Tx command input and a start input.
Activate the input port and check, if the IN LED lights.

B.11.2 Outputs
Depending upon the programmed criteria, activate the required action using the following table.
Check the contact closure of the programmed outputs on G4AI.
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 15/38 1KHL015940-EN

Set the link back to an alarm free operation after this test.

Output on G4AI Action to enforce the output

Rx Command Inject a tx command at the corresponding input at the remote
station
Unblocking Disconnect the RF line coaxial cable
No rx guard Disconnect the RF line coaxial cable
Ack_Command Inject a tx command at the corresponding input
NSD link alarm Disconnect the RF line coaxial cable
NSD alarm Disconnect the RF line coaxial cable
NSD hardware alarm Inject a continuous tx command > 10sec
ETL system alarm Disconnect the RF line coaxial cable
ETL warning Establish a local loop. For ETL540/580 insert dummy load P3LK
instead of hybrid P3DA respectively P3LB. For ETL505 set
jumper plug on G1DA from X100, NORMAL OPERATION, to
X101, LOCAL LOOP TEST.
G4AI alarm Send a continuous tx command > 10sec

B.11.3 NSD550 loop test

The NSD550 is tested by issuing a loop test via MMI500.
In the Commissioning & maintenance … dialog box click NSD550 send loop test.
If the loop test is successful, a dialog box indicating the loop test time (TLink) appears. It depends on
the setting of the transmission time for uncoded commands for the NSD550.
Click OK to close the dialog box.

B.11.4 Command transmission time

Check the transmission time of the NSD550 commands over the linklink, e.g. by means of an
oscilloscope.

How to activate an input command depends on the jumper settings on G4AI.

· G4AI input programmed as ‘contact and battery voltage’:
Inject a signal at input port with the voltage level U1 according to the jumper settings on
G4AI (24VDC, 48VDC, 110VDC, 220VDC)
· G4AI input programmed as ‘contact only’:
Short circuit the input port
Transmit at few commands with a command / pause duration of about 100ms / 1000ms and
measure the actual transmission time for the command from the local station to the remote station.

F Note: The nominal transmission time as given in the instruction manual shall serve
as a guideline for the mean value of several commands.

B.11.5 Reset counters

After NSD550 testing reset the counters by using MMI500.
From the Equipment menu point to Commissioning and maintenance menu point to
Eventrecorder and click Reset counter.
In the Reset Counter box click check box Reset all counters
Click OK
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 16/38 1KHL015940-EN

B.12 Testing of G4AK, if present

Designations and abbreviations used:

Designation Meaning
CTS Clear To Send – G4AK modem output signal (X6 pin 5)
DCD Data Carrier Detect – G4AK modem output signal (X6 pin 8)
DTR DTE ready – G4AK modem input signal (X6 pin 20)
fc Center frequency
fs Frequency shift (deviation from center frequency)
mark G4AK: low voltage level; lower frequency shift; logic 1
RTS Request To Send – G4AK modem input signal (X6 pin 4)
RXD Received Data – G4AK modem output signal (X6 pin 3)
S3:10 Position 10 on Dual In Line switch S3
S1:5/6 Positions 5 and 6 on Dual In Line switch S1
space G4AK: high voltage level; higher frequency shift; logic 0
TVN Test Voltage Negative – G4AK modem output signal (X6 pin 10)
TVP Test Voltage Positive – G4AK modem output signal (X6 pin 9)
TXD Transmitted Data – G4AK modem input signal (X6 pin 2)
X2 Connector on back of modem G4AK
X6 RS-232 data connector on front panel of modem G4AK

B.12.1 Check LED’s

B.12.2 Local loopback test

1. Press switch TEST on the front panel in direction TTX and then TRX.
2. Wait 3 seconds. Check DCD LED and TI LED.
3. Press switch TEST again in direction TTX to stop test.

B.12.3 Transmitter functional tests, mark

Local modem:
1. Disconnect cable from X2,
2. Connect the DMT-1 to X6,
3. Switch on DTR and RTS,
4. Transmit a mark frequency (logical 1),
5. Check reaction of system.

B.12.4 Transmitter functional tests, space

Local modem:
1. - Transmit a space frequency (logical 0).

B.12.5 Receiver functional tests, mark

Remote modem (in remote station):
1. Inject a sine wave signal into jack, named Tx, on the front plate of G4AK,
2. Set the generators frequency to fc(Rx) – fs(Rx),
3. Set the generators output signal level to the carrier off level +15 dB,
4. Check reaction of system.

B.12.6 Receiver functional tests, center

Remote modem (in remote station):
1. Increase the generators frequency slowly until RXD LED lights.
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 17/38 1KHL015940-EN

B.12.7 Receiver functional tests, sensitivity

Remote modem (in remote station):
1. Set the generators frequency to fc(Rx) – fs(Rx).
2. Reduce the level until DCD LED extinguishes.

B.13 Testing of O4LE, if present

B.13.1 Service phone

Only a functional test must be done. The buzzer, the ringing of the connected service phone, and
the audibility between the two service phones will be tested.

B.13.2 Hot line direct phone

The following tests must be done only, if the operation mode ‘Hot line direct phone’ is configured.
1. A functional test must be done to check the ringer. Connect on both sides of link a phone,
make a call from one side to remote and vice versa.
2. Check the Output level of speech:
Use coupling bridges similar to that, shown in figure 1. The resistor R should be chosen
to 500 W, included the resistance of the two coils. If the coupling bridge has polarity.
Check first polarity at appropriate external cable, terminal telephony, 0a-0b.
3. Feed a 800 Hz tone, with the configured level from remote side into remote equipment.
Take a measurement of the output level at the local equipment. It should be in ±1 dB
range of the configured output level from the local equipment.
Termninal, telephony

EUT:
Connector X2

O4LE
remote 5.5 H R

110 µF
110 µF Audio Analyzer
A32 0a 5.5 H
C32 0b Generator Analyzer

110 µF
Terminal, telephony

EUT:
Connector X2

O4LE
local 5.5 H R

110 µF
110 µF
A32 0a 5.5 H
C32 0b

110 µF

SUBSCR_Mess3.dsf

figure 1

B.13.3 ‘Remote subscriber’, remote is pax 2-wire

The following tests must only be done, if the operation mode ‘Remote subscriber’ is configured at
the local equipment and the operation mode ‘Pax 2-wire’ is selected at the remote equipment.
1. A functional test must be done to check the ringer. Connect a phone, at local equipment
and feed into remote PAX2W connection a ringing tone with 25 Hz and about 25 VAC.
Connect a 2.2 kW resistor between PAX2W input and generator! The generator needn’t
be programmed with a special ringing sequence. Now the phone should ring in a typical
sequence.
2. Check the Output level of subscriber:
Use coupling bridges similar to that, shown in figure 2. The resistor R should be chosen
to 500 W, included the resistance of the two coils. If the coupling bridge has polarity.
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 18/38 1KHL015940-EN

Check first polarity at external cable of appropriate O4LE, terminal telephony, 0a-0b and
observe polarity of external voltage source.

Terminal, telephony
EUT:

Connector X2
O4LE
remote 5.5 H R = 2k2

110 µF
110 µF Audio Analyzer
A14 8a 5.5 H
C14 8b Generator Analyzer

110 µF
U = 50 V

Terminial, telephony
EUT:
Connector X2

O4LE
local 5.5 H R

110 µF
110 µF
A32 0a 5.5 H
C32 0b

110 µF

SUBSCR_Mess4.dsf

figure 2
3. Feed a 800 Hz tone, with the configured level from remote side into remote equipment.
Take a measurement of the output level at the local equipment. It should be in 1 dB range
of the configured output level from the local equipment.

B.13.4 ‘Remote subscriber’, remote is pax 4-wire

The following tests must only be done, if the operation mode ‘Remote subscriber’ is configured at
the local equipment and the operation mode ‘Pax 4-wire’ is selected at the remote equipment.
1. A functional test must be done to check the ringer. Connect a phone, at local equipment
and activate M-WIRE at the remote equipment. If M-WIRE is configured as ‘inverted’,
contacts at terminal, telephony, 4a-4b must be opened, otherwise closed. The phone
should ring in a typical sequence.
2. Check the Output level of subscriber:
Instead of phone use a coupling bridge similar to that, shown in figure 2 below. The
resistor R should be chosen to 500 W, included the resistance of the two coils. If the
coupling bridge has polarity. Check first polarity at terminal, telephony, 0a-0b. At remote
side generator can be direct connected to AF1-IN, at terminal, telephony, 1a-1b. M-WIRE
should be activated.
3. Feed a 800 Hz tone, with the configured level from remote side into remote equipment.
Take a measurement of the output level at the local equipment. It should be in 1 dB range
of the configured output level from the local equipment.

B.13.5 Pax 2-wire

The following tests must only be done, if the operation mode ‘Pax 2-wire’ is configured at the local
equipment.
1. Check the Output level of pax 2-wire interface:
Use coupling bridges similar to that, shown in figure 3. The resistor R should be chosen
to 500 W, included the resistance of the two coils. If the coupling bridge has polarity.
Check first polarity at appropriate, telephony, 0a-0b and observe polarity of external
voltage source.
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 19/38 1KHL015940-EN

Terminal, telephony
EUT:

Connector X2
O4LE
remote 5.5 H R

110 µF
110 µF Audio Analyzer
A32 0a 5.5 H
C32 0b Generator Analyzer

110 µF

Terminal, telephony
EUT:

Connector X2
O4LE
local 5.5 H
R = 2k2

110 µF
110 µF
A14 8a 5.5 H
C14 8b

110 µF
U = 50 V

PAX2W_Mess5.dsf

figure 3
2. Feed a 800 Hz tone, with the configured level from remote side into remote equipment.
Take a measurement of the output level at the local equipment. It should be in 1 dB range
of the configured output level from the local equipment.
3. Check PAX-BLOCKING relay. In normal operation contacts at terminal, telephony, 6b-7a
should be closed and contacts 6a-6b should be open. Check it.
Switch off the remote equipment, after the programmed delay time the link alarm occurs.
Now contacts at terminal, telephony, 6b-7a should be open and contacts 6a-6b should be
closed. Check it.
4. Check PAX-BLOCKING relay. In normal operation contacts at terminal, telephony, 6b-7a
should be closed and contacts 6a-6b should be open.
Switch off the remote equipment, after the programmed delay time the link alarm occurs.
Now contacts at terminal, telephony, 6b-7a should be open and contacts 6a-6b should be
closed.

B.13.6 Pax 4-wire, remote is pax 4-wire

The following tests must only be done, if the operation mode ‘Pax 4-wire’ is configured at the local
equipment and the operation mode ‘Pax 4-wire’ is selected at the remote equipment.
1. Toggling the M-WIRE at remote equipment, E-WIRE output should toggle simultaneously
at local equipment. Note, E-WIRE is a switching contact without inherent voltage source
and without polarity.
2. Activate M-WIRE at both equipments. If M-WIRE is configured as ‘inverted’, contacts at
terminal, telephony, 4a-4b must be opened, otherwise closed.
3. Feed a 800 Hz tone, with the configured level from remote side into remote equipment.
Take a measurement of the output level at the local equipment. It should be in 1 dB range
of the configured output level from the local equipment.
4. Check PAX-BLOCKING relay. In normal operation contacts at terminal, telephony, 6b-7a
should be closed and contacts 6a-6b should be open.
Switch off the remote equipment, after the programmed delay time the link alarm occurs.
Now contacts at terminal, telephony, 6b-7a should be open and contacts 6a-6b should be
closed.

B.13.7 Pax 4-wire, remote is ‘Remote subscriber’

The following tests must only be done, if the operation mode ‘Pax 4-wire’ is configured at the local
equipment and the operation mode ‘Remote subscriber’ is selected at the remote equipment.
1. Toggling the hook contact of remote equipment, E-WIRE output should toggle
simultaneously at local equipment. Switching of hook contact can simulated by closing
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 20/38 1KHL015940-EN

the subscriber contacts at terminal, telephony, 0a-0b. Note, E-WIRE is a switching

contact without inherent voltage source and without polarity.
2. Check the Output level of speech:
Instead of subscriber, use coupling bridge similar to that, shown in figure 1. The resistor
R should be chosen to 500 W, included the resistance of the two coils. If the coupling
bridge has polarity. Check first polarity at terminal, telephony, 0a-0b.
3. Activate M-WIRE at local equipments. If M-WIRE is configured as ‘inverted’, contacts at
terminal, telephony, 4a-4b must be opened, otherwise closed.
4. Feed a 800 Hz tone, with the configured level from remote side into remote equipment.
Take a measurement of the output level at the local equipment. It should be in 1 dB range
of the configured output level from the local equipment.
5. Check PAX-BLOCKING relay. In normal operation contacts at terminal, telephony, 6b-7a
should be closed and contacts 6a-6b should be open.
Switch off the remote equipment, after the programmed delay time the link alarm occurs.
Now contacts at terminal, telephony, 6b-7a should be open and contacts 6a-6b should be
closed.

B.13.8 Pax 4/2-wire

The following tests must only be done, if the operation mode ‘Pax 4/2wire’ is configured at both
ends of the link.
1. Toggling the M-WIRE at remote equipment, E-WIRE output should toggle simultaneously
at local equipment. Note, E-WIRE is a switching contact without inherent voltage source
and without polarity.
2. Activate M-WIRE at both equipments. If M-WIRE is configured as ‘inverted’, contacts at
terminal, telephony, 4a-4b must be opened, otherwise closed.
Note: It is assumed, that LOCAL/TRANSIT is deactivated.
3. Feed a 800 Hz tone, with the configured level from remote side into AF1-IN of remote
equipment.
4. Take a measurement of the output level at AF1-OUT of the local equipment. It should be
in 1 dB range of the configured output level from the local equipment.
5. Take a measurement of the output level at P2W-OUT of the local equipment. It should be
in 1 dB range of the configured output level from the local equipment.
6. Activate LOCAL/TRANSIT at remote equipment. . If LOCAL/TRANSIT is configured as
‘inverted’, contacts at terminal, telephony, 5a-4b must be opened, otherwise closed.
7. Feed a 800 Hz tone, with the configured level from remote side into P2W-IN of remote
equipment. Note, the input levels of AF1-IN and P2W-IN are normally configured
different.
8. Take a measurement of the output level at P2W-OUT of the local equipment. It should be
in 1 dB range of the configured output level from the local equipment.
9. Check PAX-BLOCKING relay. In normal operation contacts at terminal, telephony, 6b-7a
should be closed and contacts 6a-6b should be open.
Switch off the remote equipment, after the programmed delay time the link alarm occurs.
Now contacts at terminal, telephony, 6b-7a should be open and contacts 6a-6b should be
closed.

B.13.9 Transit mode for E&M wire

The following tests must only be done, if the operation mode ‘Transit mode for E&M wire’ is
configured at the local equipment.
1. Toggling the M-WIRE at remote equipment, E-WIRE output should toggle simultaneously
at local equipment. Note, E-WIRE is a switching contact without inherent voltage source
and without polarity.

B.13.10 Testing the teleoperation ports

For testing the teleoperation ports, first nominal signal levels must be fed into the teleoperation
input port with a level generator. The output level at the other side of the link must then be
measured and compared to the nominal output level. An example of a link configuration is given
below.
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 21/38 1KHL015940-EN

First method:
This method only works, if identical Reference signal and identical level unit for the reference
signal, dBm (RMS) or dBm (PEP) is selected on both sides of link.
1. Determine the correct input level fed into the remote equipment.
The Reference signal level input, listed in the configuration printout of the remote
equipment should be fed into AFx-IN of the remote equipment.
2. Determine expected output level of AFx-OUT of local equipment.
The Reference signal level output of AFx-OUT of the local equipment is the expected
output level.
3. Take the measurement with a selective level meter.

Second method:
This method works with any configuration of AF ports, which are switched on.
1. Determine the correct input level fed into the remote equipment.
The Reference signal level input, listed in the configuration printout of the remote
equipment should be fed into AFx-IN of the remote equipment.
2. Calculate expected output level of AFx-OUT of local equipment.
L(out)local = L(in) remote - L( Relativ Input Level) remote + L( Relativ Output Level)local
3. Take the measurement with a selective level meter.

Example:
Applying the first method to the configuration given below, a sinus with –9.0 dBm is fed into remote
equipment. The tone is expected with –6.0 dBm at AFx-OUT of local equipment.
Applying the second method to the configuration given below, a sinus with –9.0 dBm is fed into
remote equipment. Calculating the expected output level at local equipment with the formula above
results to:
Lout = -9.0 dBm – (-4.00 dBr) + (-1.00 dBr)
The expected output level Lout is just as applying the first method –6.0 dBm.

Equipment REMOTE
TELEOPERATION
Port AFx: Disconnectable at CH1
Squelch: Disabled
Reference signal: 600 Bd FSK
Reference signal level input: -9.00 dBm (RMS)
Reference signal level output: -9.00 dBm (RMS)
Weight of port: 0.71
Max. output level: -7.00 dBm (PEP)
Relative input level: -4.0 dBr
Relative output level: -4.0 dBr
Input filter: None
Output filter: None

Equipment LOCAL
TELEOPERATION
Port AFx: Disconnectable at CH1
Squelch: Disabled
Reference signal: 600 Bd FSK
Reference signal level input: -6.00 dBm (RMS)
Reference signal level output: -6.00 dBm (RMS)
Weight of port: 0.71
Max. output level: -4.00 dBm (PEP)
Relative input level: -1.0 dBr
Relative output level: -1.0 dBr
Input filter: None
Output filter: None

B.13.11 Teleoperation port AF1

If the port AF1 is not used for a telephony application. Also if the port is switched to ’On –
disconnectable’ or ‘On – non disconnectable’, take the measurement, described in B.13.10.
 Revision: Language: Page:
D EN 22/38 1KHL015940-EN

B.13.12 Teleoperation port AF2

If the port is switched to ’On – disconnectable’ or ‘On – non disconnectable’, take the
measurement, described in B.13.10.

B.13.13 Teleoperation port AF3

If the port is switched to ’On – disconnectable’ or ‘On – non disconnectable’, take the
measurement, described in B.13.10.

B.13.14 Teleoperation port AF4

If the port is switched to ’On – disconnectable’ or ‘On – non disconnectable’, take the
measurement, described in B.13.10.

B.13.15 Teleoperation AF4 used for ext. Teleprotection

After measurement of B.13.14 is done.
1. Recalculate expected output level of AF4-OUT by adding the NSD70 boost value,
shown in the configuration printout.
2. Activate the EXT-BOOST input at the remote equipment. If EXT-BOOST is configured as
‘inverted’, contacts at terminal, teleoperation, 9a-9b must be opened, otherwise closed.
3. Take the measurement at AF4-OUT of local equipment.

B.14 Documentation
After the testing is complete, take a printout of the configuration and status data.
1. Click the green Upload arrow in the toolbar with the left mouse button. This starts the
upload configuration and upload status from the equipment. The status is displayed in the
window.
2. From the File menu, click Print. This prints the status data.
3. From the View menu, click Display configuration.
4. From the File menu, click Print.
Save the ‘mmi’ file on a disk with the Serial No. of ETL coded in the file name.
E.g.HE400327B0.MMI:
From the File menu, click Save As. Use Save As to save the active document to disk under a new
name. All settings you have made while working in the document will be saved to the new file,
including the last measured AF and the frequency response.

B.15 Manual reset

Press the reset button on the front plate of P4LQ and wait until all alarms disappear.
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 System Settings EN A1/A4 HE

Item to be Selected
No. Function Rack or programmed or alternative Remarks
module fitted or setting

A.1 General

A.2 Settings for basic equipment

ETL540/80

A.2.1 Power supply

upper* lower
Select B5LA for 48 VDC B5LA [ ] [ ]D
Select B5LC for 115 VAC B5LC 2 jumpers 115V [ ] [ ] D Refer to
Select B5LC for 230 VAC B5LC jumper 230V [ ] [ ] D 1KHL015788

A.2.2 Output amplifier stage

For 40W, ETL540 P1LA BB, DD, EE, FF [ ]D
For 80W, ETL580 P1LA upper BB, DD, EE, FF [ ] upper rack
P1LA lower BB [ ] lower rack

A.2.3 Programming the Tx RF filter

upper* lower
Tx filter 100 – 500 kHz E5LA fTx=____ +4kHz [ ] [ ] D See Tx filter
Tx filter 24 – 100 kHz E5LB fTx=____ +4kHz [ ] [ ] D instruction
1KHL015570-EN

A.2.4 Cable impedance & standard

tuning
75 W RF hybrid 75 W, CM [ ]D
125 W RF hybrid 125 W [ ]
Standard tuning for P3LB P3LB RA, CD, CE, [ ] Fine tuning during
LO commissioning
[ ]
A.2.5 Programming the Rx RF filter
Bandwidth = 4 kHz P4LR [ ] See Rx filter
Bandwidth = 8 kHz P4LR [ ] instruction
1KHL015117-EN
Low cuttoff frequency P4LR fLo=______ kHz

A.3 Settings for basic equipment

ETL505

A.3.1 Power supply

Check voltage source for ETL505 nom. 48 VDC [ ]

A.3.2 Programming the Tx RF filter 40 – 500 kHz

Center frequency P4LS f0=____ +2 kHz See TX filter
Capacitors soldered in P4LS [ ] instruction
1KHL016256-EN

*
‘upper’ und ‘lower’ stands for upper rack / lower rack and applies to 80 W equipment ETL580 only.
© ABB Switzerland Ltd Form 1KHL015940-EN
Rev. D
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 System Settings EN A2/A4 HE

Item to be Selected
No. Function Rack or programmed or alternative Remarks
module fitted or setting

A.3.3 Programming the Rx RF filter 40 – 500 kHz

Low cutoff frequency, set jumpers P4LS fLo=______ kHz See Rx filter
Jumpers set P4LS [ ] instruction
1KHL016255-EN

A.3.4 Adjust Rx RF level

Jumpers set P4LS AA [ ]D
AB [ ]
AC [ ]D

A.3.5 Grounding cable shield of RF line

Solder bridge set G1DA AA [ ]

A.4 Settings for alarm unit R1BC, if

present
Relay 1 controlled by Alarm 1 R1BC R1-1 [ ]
Relay 1 controlled by Alarm 2 R2-1 [ ]
Relay 1 controlled by System Alarm CA-1 [ ]D
Relay 2 controlled by Alarm 1 R1BC R1-2 [ ]D
Relay 2 controlled by Alarm 2 R2-2 [ ]
Relay 2 controlled by System Alarm CA-2 [ ]
Relay 3 controlled by Alarm 1 R1BC R1-3 [ ]
Relay 3 controlled by Alarm 2 R2-3 [ ]D
Relay 3 controlled by System Alarm CA-3 [ ]
Relay 4 controlled by Alarm 1 R1BC R1-4 [ ]
Relay 4 controlled by Alarm 2 R2-4 [ ]
Relay 4 controlled by System Alarm CA-4 [ ]D
Relay 5 controlled by Alarm 1 R1BC R1-5 [ ]
Relay 5 controlled by Alarm 2 R2-5 [ ]
Relay 5 controlled by System Alarm CA-5 [ ]D
Relay 6 controlled by Alarm 1 R1BC R1-6 [ ]D
Relay 6 controlled by Alarm 2 R2-6 [ ]
Relay 6 controlled by System Alarm CA-6 [ ]
Relay 7 controlled by Alarm 1 R1BC R1-7 [ ]
Relay 7 controlled by Alarm 2 R2-7 [ ]D
Relay 7 controlled by System Alarm CA-7 [ ]
Relay 8 controlled by Alarm 1 R1BC R1-8 [ ]
Relay 8 controlled by Alarm 2 R2-8 [ ]
Relay 8 controlled by System Alarm CA-8 [ ]D

© ABB Switzerland Ltd Form 1KHL015940-EN

Rev. D
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 System Settings EN A3/A4 HE

Item to be
No. Function Rack or programmed or Selected alternative or setting Remarks
module fitted

A.5 Settings for NSD550

Interface G4AI, if present

A.5.1 Nominal input voltage

Input 1 G4AI Jumper plug N11 N22 N28 N34 N54 N65 N71
24VDC … < 48VDC 1A [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
48VDC … < 110VDC 1B [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
110VDC … < 220VDC 1C [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
220VDC … 250VDC 1D [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] D
Input 2 G4AI Jumper plug N11 N22 N28 N34 N54 N65 N71
24VDC … < 48VDC 2A [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
48VDC … < 110VDC 2B [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
110VDC … < 220VDC 2C [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
220VDC … 250VDC 2D [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] D
Input 3 G4AI Jumper plug N11 N22 N28 N34 N54 N65 N71
24VDC … < 48VDC 3A [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
48VDC … < 110VDC 3B [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
110VDC … < 220VDC 3C [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
220VDC … 250VDC 3D [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] D
Input 4 G4AI Jumper plug N11 N22 N28 N34 N54 N65 N71
24VDC … < 48VDC 4A [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
48VDC … < 110VDC 4B [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
110VDC … < 220VDC 4C [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
220VDC … 250VDC 4D [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] D

A.5.2 Tripping of the inputs

Input 1 G4AI Jumper plug N11 N22 N28 N34 N54 N65 N71
contact and battery voltage 1E1, 1E2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] D
* 1F1, 1F2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
contact only
Input 2 G4AI Jumper plug N11 N22 N28 N34 N54 N65 N71
contact and battery voltage 2E1, 2E2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] D
contact only * 2F1, 2F2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Input 3 G4AI Jumper plug N11 N22 N28 N34 N54 N65 N71
contact and battery voltage 3E1, 3E2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] D
contact only * 3F1, 3F2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Input 4 G4AI Jumper plug N11 N22 N28 N34 N54 N65 N71
contact and battery voltage 4E1, 4E2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] D
contact only * 4F1, 4F2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

*
only possible if jumper plugs set for input voltage range 24 VDC … < 48 VDC (e.g. 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A)
© ABB Switzerland Ltd Form 1KHL015940-EN
Rev. D
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 System Settings EN A4/A4 HE

Item to be
No. Function Rack or programmed or Selected alternative or setting Remarks
module fitted

A.5.3 Relay contacts

Relay 1 contacts G4AI Jumper plug N11 N22 N28 N34 N54 N65 N71
Normally open NO1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] D
Normally closed NC1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Relay 2 contacts G4AI Jumper plug N11 N22 N28 N34 N54 N65 N71
Normally open NO2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] D
Normally closed NC2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

A.5.4 Cover at component side N11 N22 N28 N34 N54 N65 N71
Mounted G4AI [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

A.6 Settings for G4AK (NSK5), if

present
Separate protocols for each G4AK N22 N28 N34 N54 N71
module [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

A.7 Configure the equipment MMI500 [ ]

using the MMI500

A.8 Check interfaces in the

channel rack

A.8.1 Check position of interfaces P7LC [ ]

All interfaces present and at
correct positions

A.8.2 Check presence of spare P7LC [ ]

plates.
Front of rack is completely
covered

© ABB Switzerland Ltd Form 1KHL015940-EN

Rev. D
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 System Test Report EN B1/B12 HE

Test Permissible Test

No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

B.1 General

B.1.1 Visual checks

Correct wiring of protective earth P7LA, P7LC PE wired [ ]
Correct wiring of power supply P7LA, P7LC polarity ok [ ]
Equipment connected to adequate [ ]
voltage source

B.2 Check power supply

(ETL540/580) upper* lower
B.2.1 Battery supply 48V DC B5LA (BAT-0V) -46 to –56 V DC [ ] [ ]D
B.2.2 Mains supply 230V AC B5LC (UR-0V) -46 to –52 V DC [ ] [ ]D
B.2.3 Mains supply 115V AC B5LC (UR-0V) -46 to –52 V DC [ ] [ ]D
B.2.4 Ripple on 48V DC B5LA (BAT-0V) <1 V rms [ ] [ ]D
B.2.5 Ripple on UR (Mains) B5LC (UR-0V) <1 V rms [ ] [ ]D

B.3 Connect to the equipment,

download configuration and
prepare for tuning & testing
Connect to the equipment Check communication [ ]
between PC & P4LQ
Download configuration Download successful [ ]
Activate the Tuning & testing dialog Prepare Tuning & [ ]
box testing

B.4 Change configuration, if

necessary

B.5 Transmitter ETL540/580

Check if only one rack P7LA is MMI500 configuration £ 46 dBm [ ]
present text: ‘RF setting: PEP’

B.5.1 Tune Tx RF filter

upper* lower
Dialog box 'Tune Tx RF filter' E5LA/E5LB [ ] [ ]D

B.5.2 Adjust Tx RF level

Dialog box: Adjust Tx RF level RF hybrid (P11 - P13) value [ ]
Click Activate test tone indicated in
dialog box

*
‘upper’ und ‘lower’ stands for upper rack / lower rack and applies to 80 W equipment ETL580 only.
© ABB Switzerland Ltd Form 1KHL015940-EN
Rev. D
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 System Test Report EN B2/B12 HE

Test Permissible Test

No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

B.5.3 Adjust Tx alarm threshold level

Dialog box: Adjust Tx RF level LED [ ]
Activate Tx alarm, set jumper off à on
CH/CL and adjust potentiometer
R116 on P1LA till LED on it just
lights
Tx alarm indication: RF hybrid & P3LC/D in LED to be ON [ ]
Click Activate Tx alarm level case of 80W
State of HW alarm relay after Pins 2-3 of V9MQ cable Closed [ ]
programmed delay.
Click Deactivate test tone RF hybrid & P3LC/D in LED to be [ ]
case of 80W OFF
State of HW alarm relay after Pins 2/3 of V9MQ cable Open [ ]
programmed delay.

B.6 Receiver ETL540/580

B.6.1 Tune Rx RF filter P4LR, if present

Dialog box 'Tune Rx RF filter' P4LR, P3LL, P4LM see document [ ]
1KHL015117

B.6.2 Adjust Rx RF level

Dialog box: Tuning & testing…
Dialog box: Adjust Rx RF level Dialog box Value dBu [ ]
indicated in
Disconnect RF cable (also P4LR if dialog box.
used) & press 'Start measurement'.
Adjust Rx level pot on RF hybrid.

B.6.3 Tune RF hybrid P3LB, if present

Tuned Default
Dialog box: Tune RF hybrid Dialog box Tuned / [ ] [ ]D
default setting

B.6.4 Link alarm indication

Activate link alarm by interrupting Link alarm LED on LED to be ON [ ]
RF connection. P4LQ
State of Link alarm relay after Terminals 5-6 at P4LQs Closed [ ]
programmed delay. external cable
Deactivate link alarm by restoring Link alarm LED on LED to be [ ]
the link. P4LQ OFF
State of link alarm relay after Terminals 5-6 at P4LQs Open [ ]
programmed delay. external cable

© ABB Switzerland Ltd Form 1KHL015940-EN

Rev. D
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 System Test Report EN B3/B12 HE

Test Permissible Test

No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

B.7 Transmitter and receiver ETL505

B.7.1 Tune Tx RF filter

Tuning procedure: MMI500 [ ]
Dialog box: Tune Tx RF filter

Checking procedure: ‘RF-LINE’ on front all passed [ ]

Dialog box: Tune Tx RF filter panel or
X102 on G1DA

B.7.2 Adjust Tx RF level

Dialog box: P4LS Adjust Tx RF ‘RF-LINE’ on front value [ ]
level panel or X102 on indicated in
Click Activate test tone G1DA dialog box

B.7.3 Adjust Tx alarm threshold level

Dialog box: Adjust Tx RF level LED [ ]
Click Activate Tx alarm level and off à on
adjust potentiometer ‘SET TX
ALARM’ on P4LS till LED on it just
lights
Tx alarm indication: LED ‘TX ALARM’ on LED to be ON [ ]
Click Activate Tx alarm level P4LS
State of HW alarm relay after Pins 2-3 of V9MQ cable Closed [ ]
programmed delay.
Click Deactivate test tone LED ‘TX ALARM’ on LED to be [ ]
P4LS OFF
State of HW alarm relay after Pins 2/3 of V9MQ cable Open [ ]
programmed delay.

B.7.4 Tune Rx RF filter

Tuning procedure: MMI500 [ ]
Dialog box: Tune Rx RF filter

Checking procedure: MMI500 all passed [ ]

Dialog box: Tune Rx RF filter

B.7.5 Adjust Rx RF level

Jumper set P4LS AA [ ]D
AB [ ]
AC [ ]D

© ABB Switzerland Ltd Form 1KHL015940-EN

Rev. D
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 System Test Report EN B4/B12 HE

Test Permissible Test

No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

B.8 Equalization for ETL505

B.8.1 Measure frequency response

Chan. 1
In menu equipment, MMI500 [ ]
Commissioning and maintenance,
click Frequency response > click
Channel 1

B.8.2 Select Equalizer

Chan. 1
In menu equipment, MMI500 [ ]
Commissioning and maintenance,
click Select Equalizer, click
Channel 1, click ……
Manual reset P4LQ front plate [ ]

B.9 Testing of R1BC, if present

Activate alarms as programmed on Corresponding N/C Closed [ ]
R1BC. contacts on R1BC.
Deactivate alarms as programmed Corresponding N/C Open [ ]
on R1BC. contacts on R1BC.

B.10 Configure Real Time Clock (RTC)

B.10.1 Setting real time clock

Menu: Equipment, Commissioning
and maintenance, Eventrecorder,
Set clock
Download date / time to RTC Dialog box Actual time [ ]
and date

B.10.2 Testing external real time clock

synchronization (if available)
Menu: Equipment, Commissioning
and maintenance, Eventrecorder,
Set clock
Download date/time to RTC Dialog box Wrong time
Upload date/time from RTC Dialog box Correct time [ ]

© ABB Switzerland Ltd Form 1KHL015940-EN

Rev. D
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 System Test Report EN B5/B12 HE

Test Permissible Test

No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

B.11 NSD550 / G4AI, if

present

B.11.1 Inputs
Input 1 IN1 Terminal, U1, see N22 N28 N34 N54 N71
Activate Input 1 (T…/1) – (T.../2) System settings V DC [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Check LED IN1 LED IN1 ON
Input 2 IN2 Terminal, U2, see N22 N28 N34 N54 N71
Activate Input 2 (T…/3) – (T.../4) System settings V DC [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Check LED IN2 LED IN2 ON
Input 3 IN3 Terminal, U3, see N22 N28 N34 N54 N71
Activate Input 3 (T…/5) – (T.../6) System settings V DC [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Check LED IN3 LED IN3 ON
Input 4 IN4 Terminal, U4, see N22 N28 N34 N54 N71
Activate Input 4 (T…/7) – (T.../8) System settings V DC [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Check LED IN4 LED IN4 ON

B.11.2 Outputs
Enforce action for Terminal, N22 N28 N34 N54 N71
OUT1. (T…/9) – (T.../10) Closed [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Check Output 1, OUT1: LED OUT1 ON
Check LED OUT1
Enforce action for Terminal, N22 N28 N34 N54 N71
OUT2. (T…/11) – (T.../12) Closed [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Check Output 2, OUT2: LED OUT2 ON
Check LED OUT2
Enforce action for Terminal, N22 N28 N34 N54 N71
OUT3. (T…/13) – (T.../14) Closed [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Check Output 3, OUT3: LED OUT3 ON
Check LED OUT3
Enforce action for Terminal, N22 N28 N34 N54 N71
OUT4. (T…/15) – (T.../16) Closed [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Check Output 4, OUT4: LED OUT4 ON
Check LED OUT4
Enforce action for Terminal, Refer G4AI N22 N28 N34 N54 N71
relay 1 (T…/17) – (T.../18) programming [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
REL1 close/open LED REL1 ON
Check LED REL1
Enforce action for Terminal, Refer G4AI N22 N28 N34 N54 N71
relay 2 (T…/19) – (T.../20) programming [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
REL2 close / open LED REL2 ON
Check LED REL2

B.11.3 NSD550 loop test

Check Actual MMI500 < 1.3*T0 ms
transmission time TLink ___________
Menu: Equipment,
Commissioning and
maintenance, NSD550
send loop test

© ABB Switzerland Ltd Form 1KHL015940-EN

Rev. D
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 System Test Report EN B6/B12 HE

Test Permissible Test

No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

B.11.4 Command
transmission time
Command A Terminal: Refer MMI500
Tx command A (T22/1) – (T22/2) [ ] Mean value
(T…/...) – (T.../…) [ ] £T0 ms ___________
Rx command A (T22/9) – (T22/10) [ ]
(T…/...) – (T.../…) [ ]
Command B Terminal: Refer MMI500
Tx command B (T22/3) – (T22/4) [ ] Mean value
(T…/...) – (T.../…) [ ] £T0 ms ___________
Rx command B (T22/11) – (T22/12) [ ]
(T…/...) – (T.../…) [ ]
Command C Terminal: Refer MMI500
Tx command C (T22/5) – (T22/6) [ ] Mean value
(T…/...) – (T.../…) [ ] £T0 ms ___________
Rx command C (T22/13) – (T22/14) [ ]
(T…/...) – (T.../…) [ ]
Command D Terminal: Refer MMI500
Tx command D (T22/7) – (T22/8) [ ] Mean value
(T…/...) – (T.../…) [ ] £T0 ms ___________
Rx command D (T22/15) – (T22/16) [ ]
(T…/...) – (T.../…) [ ]

B.11.5 Reset counters

Menu: Equipment, MMI500 All counters = 0 [ ]
Commissioning and
maintenance,
Eventrecorder, Reset
all counters, OK:

B.12 Testing of G4AK, if

present

B.12.1 LED’s on modem N22 N28 N34 N54 N71

TXD LED G4AK front plate on [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
RXD LED G4AK front plate on [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Alarm LED (only if G4AK front plate on [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
solder bridge DC is in)

B.12.2 Local loopback test N22 N28 N34 N54 N71

DCD LED G4AK front plate continuously on [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
TI LED G4AK front plate on [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

© ABB Switzerland Ltd Form 1KHL015940-EN

Rev. D
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 System Test Report EN B7/B12 HE

Test Permissible Test

No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

B.12.3 Transmitter, mark N22 N28 N34 N54 N71

TXD LED G4AK front plate on [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
RXD LED G4AK front plate on [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Frequency Tx Jack ‘Tx’ at G4AK fc(Tx) – fs(Tx) ±3 Hz [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
front plate
Tx level Jack ‘Tx’ at G4AK Tx level setting dBu [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
front plate +0 / -3

B.12.4 Transmitter, space N22 N28 N34 N54 N71

Frequency Tx Jack ‘Tx’ at G4AK fc(Tx) + fs(Tx) ±3 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
front plate

B.12.5 Receiver, mark N22 N28 N34 N54 N71

Alarm LED G4AK front plate off [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
RXD LED G4AK front plate on [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
DCD LED G4AK front plate on [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

B.12.6 Receiver, center N22 N28 N34 N54 N71

frequ.
Center frequency Signal generator fc(Rx) ± 20 Hz [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

B.12.7 Receiver, sensitivity N22 N28 N34 N54 N71

Rx sensitivity Jack ‘Rx’ at G4AK Carrier off level dBu [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
front plate setting ±3

B.13 Testing of O4LE

B.13.1 Service Phone. mark if configured: N11 N65

[ ] [ ]
Pick up the phones and Service phone, at front Remote service N11 N65
talk. panel phone rings, [ ] [ ]
buzzer drones,
talk is possible

B.13.2 Hot line direct phone Mark if configured: N11 N65

[ ] [ ]
Pick up the phone, wait, Direct phone Remote direct N11 N65
pick up remote phone phone rings until [ ] [ ]
phone is picked
up.
Measure Output level. Feed into rem. equ. at Configured Output dBm
Feed 800 Hz with terminal, telephony 0a- level ±1 dB (600 W) N11: ___________
configured input level of 0b (Def.: -7.0 dBm)
remote subscriber (Def.: Measure at terminal, N65: ___________
0.0 dBm). telephony 0a-0b

© ABB Switzerland Ltd Form 1KHL015940-EN

Rev. D
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 System Test Report EN B8/B12 HE

Test Permissible Test

No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

B.13.3 Remote subscriber. At Mark if configured: N11 N65

remote equ. is [ ] [ ]
Pax 2-Wire
Test Ringer: Feed Feed into rem. equ. at Subscriber must N11 N65
ringing voltage (25 VAC, terminal, telephony ring [ ] [ ]
25 Hz, R = 2.2 kW) into 8a-8b
remote PAX 2-Wire
Measure Output level. Feed into rem. equ. at Configured Output dBm
Feed 800 Hz with terminal, telephony level ±1 dB (600 W) N11: ___________
configured input level of 8a-8b (Def.: -7.0 dBm)
remote PAX.(Def.: Measure at terminal, N65: ___________
-7.0 dBm) telephony 0a-0b

B.13.4 Remote subscriber. At mark if configured: N11 N65

remote equ. is [ ] [ ]
Pax 4-wire
Test Ringer: Activate at Remote Subscriber must N11 N65
Activate M-WIRE of equ. at terminal, ring [ ] [ ]
remote Pax 4-wire. telephony 4a-4b
Measure Output level. Feed into rem. equ. at Configured Output dBm
Feed 800 Hz with terminal, telephony level ±1 dB (600 W) N11: ___________
configured input level of 1a-1b (Def.: -7.0 dBm)
remote PAX.(Def.: Measure at terminal, N65: ___________
-3.5 dBm) telephony 0a-0b

B.13.5 Pax 2-wire mark if configured: N11 N65

[ ] [ ]
Measure Output level. Feed into rem. equ. at Configured Output dBm
Feed 800 Hz with terminal, telephony level ±1 dB (600 W) N11: ___________
configured input level of 0a-0b (Def.: 0.0 dBm)
remote subscriber.(Def.: Measure at terminal, N65: ___________
0.0 dBm) telephony 8a-8b
PAX-BLOCKING normal Measure at terminal, 6a-6b is open N11 N65
telephony 6a-6b, 6b-7a 6b-7a is closed [ ] [ ]
PAX-BLOCKING Measure at terminal, 6a-6b is closed N11 N65
blocked telephony 6a-6b, 6b-7a 6b-7a is open [ ] [ ]
Switch off remote equ.,
wait about 30 sec.

© ABB Switzerland Ltd Form 1KHL015940-EN

Rev. D
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 System Test Report EN B9/B12 HE

Test Permissible Test

No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

B.13.6 Pax 4-wire. At remote Mark if configured: N11 N65

equ. is Pax 4-wire [ ] [ ]
Test E-Wire: Terminal, telephony E-Wire must N11 N65
Close and open at 3a-3b toggle [ ] [ ]
Remote equ. at terminal,
telephony 4a-4b
Measure Output level. Feed into rem. equ. at Configured Output dBm
Feed 800 Hz with terminal, telephony level ±1 dB (600 W) N11: ___________
configured input level of 1a-1b (Def.: -3.5 dBm)
remote PAX (Def.: Measure at terminal, N65: ___________
-3.5 dBm). telephony 2a-2b
(Activate at terminal,
telephony 4a-4b on both
equ.)
PAX-BLOCKING normal Measure at terminal, 6a-6b is open N11 N65
telephony 6a-6b, 6b-7a 6b-7a is closed [ ] [ ]
PAX-BLOCKING Measure at terminal, 6a-6b is closed N11 N65
blocked telephony 6a-6b, 6b-7a 6b-7a is open [ ] [ ]
Switch off remote equ.,
wait about 30 sec.

B.13.7 Pax 4-wire. At remote mark if configured: N11 N65

equ. is Remote [ ] [ ]
subscriber
Test E-Wire: Terminal, telephony E-Wire must N11 N65
Toggle hook of phone. 3a-3b toggle [ ] [ ]
(Close and open at
Remote equ. at terminal,
telephony 0a-0b)
Measure Output level. Feed into rem. equ. at Configured Output dBm
Feed 800 Hz with terminal, telephony level ±1 dB (600 W) N11: ___________
configured input level of 0a-0b (Def.: -3.5 dBm)
remote subscriber.(Def.: Measure at terminal, N65: ___________
0.0 dBm) telephony 2a-2b
PAX-BLOCKING normal Measure at terminal, 6a-6b is open N11 N65
telephony 6a-6b, 6b-7a 6b-7a is closed [ ] [ ]
PAX-BLOCKING Measure at terminal, 6a-6b is closed N11 N65
blocked telephony 6a-6b, 6b-7a 6b-7a is open [ ] [ ]
Switch off remote equ.,
wait about 30 sec.

© ABB Switzerland Ltd Form 1KHL015940-EN

Rev. D
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 System Test Report EN B10/B12 HE

Test Permissible Test

No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

B.13.8 Pax 4/2-wire mark if configured: N11 N65

[ ] [ ]
Test E-Wire: Terminal, telephony E-Wire must N11 N65
Close and open at 3a-3b toggle [ ] [ ]
Remote equ. at terminal,
telephony 4a-4b
Measure Output level of Feed into rem. equ. at Configured Output dBm
AF1. terminal, telephony level ±1 dB (600 W) N11: ___________
Feed 800 Hz with 1a-1b (Def.: -3.5 dBm)
configured input level of Measure at terminal, N65: ___________
remote PAX (Def.: telephony 2a-2b
-3.5 dBm).
Activate at terminal,
telephony 4a-4b on both
equ..
Measure Output level of Feed into rem. equ. at Configured Output dBm
PAX2W. terminal, telephony level ±1 dB (600 W) N11: ___________
Feed 800 Hz with 1a-1b (Def.: -7.0 dBm)
configured input level of Measure at terminal, N65: ___________
remote PAX (Def.: telephony 8a-8b
-3.5 dBm).
(Activate at terminal,
telephony 4a-4b on both
equ.)
Test Local/Transit: Feed into rem. equ. at Configured Output dBm
Measure Output level at terminal, telephony level ±1.5 dB (600 W) N11: ___________
AF1. 8a-8b (Def.: -7.0 dBm)
Feed 800 Hz with Measure at terminal, N65: ___________
configured input level of telephony 8a-8b
remote PAX2W (Def.:
-0.0 dBm).
Activate at terminal,
telephony 5a-4b of
remote equ..
(Activate at terminal,
telephony 4a-4b on both
equ.)
PAX-BLOCKING normal Measure at terminal, 6a-6b is open N11 N65
telephony 6a-6b, 6b-7a 6b-7a is closed [ ] [ ]
PAX-BLOCKING Measure at terminal, 6a-6b is closed N11 N65
blocked telephony 6a-6b, 6b-7a 6b-7a is open [ ] [ ]
Switch off remote equ.,
wait about 30 sec.

B.13.9 Transit mode for mark if configured: N11 N65

E&M wire [ ] [ ]
Test E-Wire: Terminal, telephony E-Wire must N11 N65
Close and open at 3a-3b toggle [ ] [ ]
Remote equ. at terminal,
telephony 4a-4b

© ABB Switzerland Ltd Form 1KHL015940-EN

Rev. D
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 System Test Report EN B11/B12 HE

Test Permissible Test

No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

B.13.10 Testing the

teleoperation ports

B.13.11 Teleoperation AF1, if mark if configured: N11N22N28N34N54N65N71

not used for Telephony [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fed input level, [dBm], Expected Output Measured Output level
@ 800 Hz at AF1-IN of level at AF1-OUT at AF1-OUT
remote.
N11: ___________ Feed into rem. equ. at N11: ______ ±1 dBm N11: ___________
terminal, telephony
N22: ___________ N22: ______ ±1 (600 W) N22: ___________
1a-1b
N28: ___________ N28: ______ ±1 N28: ___________
Measure at terminal,
N34: ___________ telephony 2a-2b N34: ______ ±1 N34: ___________
N54: ___________ N54: ______ ±1 N54: ___________
N65: ___________ N65: ______ ±1 N65: ___________
N71: ___________ N71: ______ ±1 N71: ___________

B.13.12 Teleoperation AF2 mark if configured: N11N22N28N34N54N65N71

[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fed input level, [dBm], Expected Output Measured Output level
@ 800 Hz at AF2-IN of level at AF2-OUT at AF2-OUT
remote.
N11: ___________ Feed into rem. equ. at N11: ______ ±1 dBm N11: ___________
terminal, teleop. 3a-3b
N22: ___________ N22: ______ ±1 (600 W) N22: ___________
Measure at terminal,
N28: ___________ N28: ______ ±1 N28: ___________
teleop. 4a-4b
N34: ___________ N34: ______ ±1 N34: ___________
N54: ___________ N54: ______ ±1 N54: ___________
N65: ___________ N65: ______ ±1 N65: ___________
N71: ___________ N71: ______ ±1 N71: ___________

B.13.13 Teleoperation AF3 mark if configured: N11N22N28N34N54N65N71

[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fed input level, [dBm], Expected Output Measured Output level
@ 800 Hz at AF3-IN of level at AF3-OUT at AF3-OUT
remote.
N11: ___________ Feed into rem. equ. at N11: ______ ±1 dBm N11: ___________
terminal, teleop. 5a-5b
N22: ___________ N22: ______ ±1 (600 W) N22: ___________
Measure at terminal
N28: ___________ N28: ______ ±1 N28: ___________
teleop. 6a-6b
N34: ___________ N34: ______ ±1 N34: ___________
N54: ___________ N54: ______ ±1 N54: ___________
N65: ___________ N65: ______ ±1 N65: ___________
N71: ___________ N71: ______ ±1 N71: ___________

© ABB Switzerland Ltd Form 1KHL015940-EN

Rev. D
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 System Test Report EN B12/B12 HE

Test Permissible Test

No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

B.13.14 Teleoperation AF4 mark if configured: N11N22N28N34N54N65N71

[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fed input level, [dBm], Expected Output Measured Output level
@ 800 Hz at AF4-IN of level at AF4-OUT at AF4-OUT
remote.
N11: ___________ Feed into rem. equ. at N11: ______ ±1 dBm N11: ___________
terminal, teleop. 7a-7b
N22: ___________ N22: ______ ±1 (600 W) N22: ___________
N28: ___________ Measure at terminal, N28: ______ ±1 N28: ___________
teleop. 8a-8b
N34: ___________ N34: ______ ±1 N34: ___________
ext. Boost not active.
N54: ___________ N54: ______ ±1 N54: ___________
N65: ___________ N65: ______ ±1 N65: ___________
N71: ___________ N71: ______ ±1 N71: ___________

B.13.15 Teleoperation AF4 mark if configured: N11 N65

used for ext. [ ] [ ]
Teleprotection
Test EXT-BOOST: Activate at remote equ.
at terminal, teleop.
9a-9b.
Fed input level, [dBm], Feed into rem. equ. at Expected Output Measured Output level
@ 800 Hz at AF4-IN terminal, teleop.7a-7b level at AF4-OUT at AF4-OUT
N11: ___________ Measure at terminal, N11: ______ ±1 dBm N11: ___________
teleop. 8a-8b
N65: ___________ N65: ______ ±1 (600 W) N65: ___________

B.14 Documentation
Make a printout of [ ]
equipment
configuration and status
data.
Save the 'mmi' file on [ ]
disk with Serial No. of
ETL coded in the file
name,
e.g. HE400327B0.MMI
[ ]
B.15 Manual reset P4LQ front plate

Company _________________________________

Department _________________________________

Date: _________________________________

Signed: _________________________________

Visa: _________________________________

© ABB Switzerland Ltd Form 1KHL015940-EN

Rev. D
 ABB Power Automation Ltd 1KHL015943-EN
Archive No.: Rev. Date:
Equalization using MMI500 <ETL500 Rel.3> - - -
Responsible Department: Prepared: Approved: Distribution: Lang.: Page:
NKT 99-06-09 B. Busslinger 99-06-25 sig. H. Benninger - EN 1/7
Valid for: Derived from: Replaces: Classification-No.: File:
- - - -

Power Line Carrier Equipment: Series ETL500

Equalization using MMI500 <ETL500 Rel.3>

Contents
1 Purpose of document ...................................................................................... 2
2 Abbreviations and Definitions ......................................................................... 2
3 Equalizer concept............................................................................................ 2
3.1 None (no equalizer)......................................................................................... 2
3.2 Short equalizer ................................................................................................ 2
3.3 Medium equalizer............................................................................................ 3
3.4 Long equalizer................................................................................................. 3
4 Establish a new equalizer ............................................................................... 4
5 Equalize a channel.......................................................................................... 4
6 Change the length or mode of a running equalizer......................................... 5
7 Remote equalizer manipulation ...................................................................... 6
8 Rules if external teleprotection in the selected channel is used ..................... 6
9 Recommended procedure to equalize a channel ........................................... 6
10 Recommended procedure to change the equalizer length ............................. 7

List of equipment:
PC with Windows 95, 98 or NT.
MMI500 software.
PC P4LQ (1:1 serial RS232) cable.

Note:
• Please refer 1KHL015559 for compatibility between software MMI500, firmware and hardware of ETL500.

We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to
third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © ABB Power Automation Ltd, Switzerland.
 Revision: Language: Page:
- EN 2/7 1KHL015943-EN

1 Purpose of document
This document describes the equalization process for the equipment ETL500 Rel. 3, supported by
the PC program MMI500.

2 Abbreviations and Definitions

PLC link: Two ETL500 terminals using a power line for signal transmission.
Local/Remote: To distinguish between the two terminals of a PLC link, one of them is referred
to as 'local equipment', the other one as 'remote equipment'. Both directions of
a link are equalized separately.

Note: To access the remote equipment, log ON using the equipment address of the
remote equipment. This is especially applicable for sections A.4, A.5, A.9 &
A.10.

Channel: An ETL500 PLC link offers one or two AF channels for transmission of signals.
Each channel is equalized seperately.
Equalizer: A filter that flattens the amplitude and/or group delay response of a channel.

3 Equalizer concept
The ETL500 has an integrated equalizer separately for each configured channel. There is no
equalizer available in 8 kHz mode. Two operation modes are available: Amplitude equalisation only
and a combined amplitude with group delay equalisation. The resulting amplitude response of each
channel (with the selected equalizer and none) can be viewed with the MMI500 software before
activation and during operation without interrupting services on the link. It is possible to change
later an active equalizer with amplitude equalisation only to one with combined amplitude and
group delay equalisation and vice versa (with short interruption of the link). Instructed personnel
can choose between 4 possible equalizer settings: None (no equalizer), short, medium or long
equalizer.

3.1 None (no equalizer)

The equalizer is bypassed. This setting is working during first powerup of the ETL500 equipment
until instructed personnel measures the channel and chooses another equalizer. There is no added
system delay. This is the best possible value for the system group delay. Note that the button
“Amplitude response equalisation only” has no effect in this case.

3.2 Short equalizer

The short equalizer equalizes the amplitude response with a minimum of additional group delay.
This additional group delay can be viewed in the “Select equalizer” box. If “Amplitude response
equalisation only” is selected, no additional group delay equalizer is activated. The resulting
amplitude response is acceptable. If “Amplitude response equalisation only” is not selected, a
combined amplitude and group delay equalizer is activated. Due to the additional group delay
equalizer, the equalized channel amplitude response could have quite a ripple. Group delay
distortion up to 1 ms can be equalized. Please note that the additional group delay equalizer must
only be activated if there is a modem present on that channel and the performance is better than
with the “allpass filter for group delay equalisation” in the System Configuration -> Channel
Settings. The default setting is “Amplitude response equalisation only” enabled.
Always check the amplitude response of the short equalizer in the pilot channel if used in
conjunction with external protection system before activation through instructed personnel.
 Revision: Language: Page:
- EN 3/7 1KHL015943-EN

3.3 Medium equalizer

The medium equalizer equalizes the amplitude response with additional group delay. This
additional group delay can be viewed in the “Select equalizer” box. If “Amplitude response
equalisation only” is selected, no additional group delay equalizer is activated. The resulting
amplitude response is good . If “Amplitude response equalisation only” is not selected, a combined
amplitude and group delay equalizer is activated. Due to the additional group delay equalizer, the
equalized channel amplitude response could have quite a ripple. Group delay distortion up to 1.5
ms can be equalized. Please note that the additional group delay equalizer must only be activated
if there is a modem present on that channel and the performance is better than with the “allpass
filter for group delay equalisation” in the Configuration / System / Channel Settings. The default
setting is “Amplitude response equalisation only” enabled.
Always check the amplitude response of the medium equalizer in the pilot channel if used in
conjunction with external protection system before activation through instructed personnel.

3.4 Long equalizer

The long equalizer equalizes the amplitude response with additional group delay. This additional
group delay can be viewed in the “Select equalizer” box. If “Amplitude response equalisation
only” is selected, no additional group delay equalizer is activated. The resulting amplitude
response is excellent . If “Amplitude response equalisation only” is not selected, a combined
amplitude and group delay equalizer is activated. Due to the additional group delay equalizer, the
equalized channel amplitude response can have a ripple. Group delay distortion up to 2 ms can be
equalized. Please note that the additional group delay equalizer must only be activated if there is a
modem present on that channel and the performance is better than with “Allpass filter for group
delay equalisation” enabled in Configuration / System / Channel Settings. The default setting is
“Amplitude response equalisation only” enabled.
Always check the amplitude response of the long equalizer in the pilot channel if used in
conjunction with external protection system before activation through instructed personnel.
 Revision: Language: Page:
- EN 4/7 1KHL015943-EN

4 Establish a new equalizer

To establish a new equalizer, use the following step by step procedure:
1. Measure the frequency response of the channel to equalize (Equipment / Commissioning &
maintenance / Frequency response).
2. Check the equalized frequency response with the 'View' button in 'Select Equalizer' of the
desired channel. If you are not satisfied with all new equalizers, repeat the measurement. If you
decide not to change the running equalizer, perform a 'Reset' in the 'Equipment' menu.
3. Calculate and activate the chosen equalizer with the 'Download' button in 'Select Equalizer'.
4. Store the new configuration in the EPROM. The MMI will automatically make this proposition
when the equalizer has changed.
5. Perform a system reset (function 'Reset' in the 'Equipment' menu).

Note: • External protection equipment, voice, teleoperation and modems will be

automatically disconnected during the channel measurement.

• You always have to perform a system reset to go back to normal

function, when the the function 'Frequency Response' has been used.
Due to the system reset, the link transmission will be interrupted
completely for a moment.

• Due to sporadic noise and other disturbance during measurement, the

measured channel response can be quite noisy. In this case it is advised
to repeat the channel measurement. During measurement of the
channel, each appearing sporadic noise could jam the measurement.

• Depending on the configured alarm pick-up and setup time some alarms
could appear for a short moment during channel measurement.

• During channel measurement, NSD550 teleprotection commands can

still be transmitted without further delay. The measurement will be
cancelled as soon as NSD500 commands are transmitted. If this
happens, the measurement must be repeated.

5 Equalize a channel
In this section the letter ‘X’ names the channel to equalize. This could be channel 1 or channel 2.
Do not mix up the channel during the whole equalization process. The selected channel from the
remote to the connected ETL500 system will be equalized. Please note that equalizing a channel
over the EOC network or on the remote side may take several 10 minutes.

Make a connect with write access to the desired ETL500 equipment and upload the configuration.
Select in the menu bar 'Equipment' / 'Commissionning and maintenance' / 'Channel X'. A
dialog box appears telling the user that he is going to disable the system. By pressing the Cancel
button, no channel measurement will be started. By selecting the “Yes” button, a channel
measurement on channel X from the remote to the local ETL500 terminal will be started. This is
also the last chance to abort an equalizer selection process without resetting the P4LQ and
interrupting normal service.

Note: During measurement of the frequency response of the selected channel, voice, data and
external protection is automatically switched off for about one minute. Corresponding alarms may
appear. Protection signal transmission is only possible with NSD550.

After up to 5 minutes, the measurement is finished and the following dialog box 'Equipment' /
'Commissioning and maintenance' / 'Select equalizer' / 'Channel X' automatically appears. The
 Revision: Language: Page:
- EN 5/7 1KHL015943-EN

amplitude response of the link from remote equipment to the connected ETL500 can be viewed for
channel X .

With the help of the ‘Select equalizer’ dialog box, it is possible to select the best possible equalizer
for a specific purpose. When this dialog box first appears, the active equalizer is easily recognised
in the 'Actual equalizer' field. The equalizer delay describes the additional delay added by the
equalizer. The less the better for external protection applications. Please note that the NSD550 is
working independely from this equalizer delay. The average ripple describes the average ripple left
in the complete AF band by the equalizer. By selecting the desired equalizer before pressing the
'View' button, the frequency response is visible with and without the equalizer.

In order to return to the 'Select Equalizer' dialog box, select 'Equipment' / 'Commissionning and
maintenance' / 'Select equalizer' / 'Channel X' again. It is possible to repeat this procedure again
and again.

If the amplitude response with the equalizer is quite 'noisy', the measurement went wrong due to
sporadic noise on the high voltage line during the measurement. In this case repeat the
measurement by selecting 'Equipment' / 'Commissionning and maintenance' / 'Frequency
response' / 'Channel X'.

Note: It is not possible to store system configuration to EPROM after a frequency

response measurement has been performed until an equalizer based on the
new measurement is activated or until the new measurement is discarded.
The warning LED will be lighted to indicate this state. To discard the new
measurement, perform a system reset with 'Equipment' / 'Reset'.

Cancel a new equalizer: If after several measurements all new equalizers have worse results than
the actual equalizer, it is better to leave the old equalizer unchanged by performing a 'Equipment' /
'Reset'. After the reset, the last saved equalizer is active (usually this one before measurement
started). During a reset, the link will be interrupted on both channels.

Activate a new equalizer: After finding a new equalizer suitable, select the new desired equalizer in
'Equipment' / 'Commissionning and maintenance' / 'Select Equalizer' / 'Channel X'. Then
press the Download button. A dialog box appears which warns the user of an interruption of the
link for one second. By pressing ‘Yes’, the selected equalizer will be activated. After up to 1 minute
the MMI opens a dialog box with the message of a successful activation.
Please note that the new equalizer setting is not yet stored in the EPROM. The MMI guides the
user directly to the point to store the actual configuration on P4LQ (including equalizer settings) to
EPROM. The corresponding dialog box pops up automatically after any change of the equalizer
settings. Please note that storing the configuration to EPROM is later also possible by selecting
‘Equipment’/’Store configuration to EPROM’. The new equalizer must be stored to EPROM or –
if not satisfied with the new equalizer performance – the system reset in order to restore the old
equalizer (last stored) settings.
After a successful 'Store configuration to EPROM', it is important to perform a 'Equipment' /
'Reset' for proper function of the equipment.

For testing, it is not necessary to save the new equalizer setting. Please note that after a reset of
the P4LQ, the last saved equalizer setting will be active.

6 Change the length or mode of a running equalizer

During normal operation, it is always possible to change the length of the actual active equalizer. It
is also possible to change the actual equalizer mode from ‘Amplitude response equalisation
only’ to a combined amplitude and group delay equalisation and vice versa. On the channel where
the equalizer is changed, a short AF distortion appears during change. Please note that this may
lead to a short interruption of services on the whole ETL500 link, not only the affected channel.
 Revision: Language: Page:
- EN 6/7 1KHL015943-EN

It is always possible with 'Equipment' / 'Commissioning and maintenance' / 'Select equalizer' /

'Channel X' to view the frequency response of the active equalizer on the selected channel and all
other equalizer settings with or without additional group delay equalisation. Select the desired
equalizer to view and press the 'View' button. By pressing 'Cancel' it is possible to close this
window.

Change the equalizer length or equalizer mode: Select the desired equalizer with the correct group
delay equalisation setting and press the 'Download' button. If there is really a changement in the
equalizer configuration, a dialog box may appear which warns the user of an interruption of the link
for one second. By pressing ‘Yes’, the selected equalizer will be activated. After up to 1 minute the
MMI opens a dialog box with the message of a successful activation.

Please note that the new equalizer setting is not yet stored in the EPROM. The MMI guides the
user directly to the point to store the actual configuration on P4LQ (including equalizer settings) to
EPROM. The corresponding dialog box pops up automatically after any change of the equalizer
settings. Please note that storing the configuration to EPROM is later also possible by selecting
‘Equipment’/’Store configuration to EPROM’. The user must store the new equalizer to EPROM
or – if not satisfied with the new equalizer performance – a system reset in order to restore the old
equalizer (last stored) settings.
After a successful 'Store configuration to EPROM', it is important to perform a 'Equipment' /
'Reset' for proper function of the equipment.

For testing, it is not necessary to save the new equalizer setting. Please note that after a reset of
the P4LQ, the last saved equalizer setting will be activated.

7 Remote equalizer manipulation

Equalizing a channel or change the equalizer mode or setting can also be done on the remote
ETL500 equipment or anywhere else in the ETL500 network. Using the EOC (in most cases) for
remote access can take several 10 minutes for a complete equalizer operation. Be patient. It is
recommended only to equalize the remote equipment, not ETL500 further away in a ETL500 EOC
network. In this case a complete channel equalisation will take around 20 minutes.
Connect to the desired ETL500 station with the corresponding equipment ID or with the remote
button. Don’t forget to set the write access with the correct password. Then follow the procedure
described in chapter A2 and A3 depending on the desired equalizer action. Nothing will be different
except of the longer waiting periods until the nessessary data is transmitted over the 100 bps EOC.

8 Rules if external teleprotection in the selected channel is used

If external teleprotection is used on a channel, following additional points must be considered and
understood before equalizing this channel:

Caution During frequency response measurement, the transmission path between

external teleprotection equipment will be automatically interrupted without
further warnings. For the duration of the measurement, no teleprotection
commands can be transmitted.

Select the shortest possible equalizer (smallest additional added delay) with flat amplitude
response in the external teleprotection channel. If possible use ‘Amplitude response equalisation
only’.

9 Recommended procedure to equalize a channel

1. Logon to the desired ETL500 using the MMI500 dialog Equipment / Connect with Read &
Write access enabled, correct Equipment ID, correct password and with the checkbox
‘Upload configuration’ selected.
 Revision: Language: Page:
- EN 7/7 1KHL015943-EN

2. Start channel measurement with 'Equipment' / 'Commissioning and maintenance' / 'Frequency

response' / 'Channel X'
3. Wait until the window 'Equipment' / 'Commissioning and maintenance' / Select equalizer /
'Channel X' automatically appears
4. View the frequency response of each equalizer with the 'View' button. By default, ‘Amplitude
response equalisation only’ is active. With 'Equipment' / 'Commissioning and
maintenance' / 'Select equalizer' / 'Channel X', it is possible to go back into the ‘Select
equalizer’ dialog box.
5. If the channel measurement is noisy, repeat the measurement with 'Equipment' /
'Commissioning and maintenance' / 'Frequency response' / 'Channel X' and go back to to
point 4
6. If the user don’t want to select a new equalizer, perform an 'Equipment' / 'Reset' in order to
perform a system reset. Afterwards the last stored equalizer to EPROM is active again.
7. Select with 'Equipment' / 'Commissioning and maintenance' / 'Select Equalizer' /
'Channel X' the new desired equalizer with the desired group delay equalisation mode and
press the 'Download' button
8. Wait until the new equalizer is active and store this configuration to EPROM (MMI500 asks
automatically)
9. Perform an 'Equipment' / 'Reset' manually.
10. Exit

10 Recommended procedure to change the equalizer length

1. Logon to the desired ETL500 using the MMI500 dialog Equipment / Connect with Read &
Write access enabled, correct Equipment ID, correct password and with the checkbox
‘Upload configuration’ selected.
2. Perform a 'Equipment' / 'Commissioning and maintenance' / Select equalizer / 'Channel X' on
the desired channel
3. View the frequency response of the desired equalizer with the 'View' button. It is also possible
to change only the group delay equalizer mode. With 'Equipment' / 'Commissioning and
maintenance' / 'Select equalizer' / 'Channel X', it is possible to go back into the ‘Select
equalizer’ dialog box.
4. If the user doesn’t want to select another 'Actual equalizer', press Cancel and exit
5. Select with 'Equipment' / 'Commissioning and maintenance' / 'Select Equalizer' /
'Channel X' the actual desired equalizer with the desired group delay mode and press the
'Download' button
6. Wait until the new equalizer is active and store the new configuration to EPROM (MMI500 asks
for this automatically)
7. Exit
 ABB Power Automation Ltd 1KHL015944-EN
Archive No.: Rev. Date:
Commissioning Instructions: <ETL500 Rel. 3> - C 02-02-01
Responsible Department: Prepared: Approved: Distribution: Lang.: Page:
NKT 99-07-19 N. Lahner 02-02-01 H. Benninger - EN 1/28
99-10-05 B. Busslinger
99-10-05 P. Plüer
99-12-23 R. Pauli
Valid for: Derived from: Replaces: Classification-No.: File:
- - - -

Power Line Carrier Equipment: Series ETL500

Commissioning Instructions: <ETL500 Rel. 3>

This document describes the commissioning of powerline carrier equipment ETL505, ETL540 and ETL580,
including the teleprotection system NSD550.

Contents

C Commissioning Instructions....................................................................... 3
C.1 General ...................................................................................................... 3
C.2 Power supply for channel rack P7LA......................................................... 4
C.3 Connect to equipment, upload configuration............................................. 4
C.4 Changing configuration, if necessary ........................................................ 4
C.5 Transmitter ETL540/580............................................................................ 5
C.6 Receiver ETL540/580................................................................................ 6
C.7 Transmitter and Receiver ETL505............................................................. 8
C.8 Equalization ............................................................................................... 9
C.9 Configure alarm settings............................................................................ 9
C.10 Testing of R1BC, if present ..................................................................... 10
C.11 Configure Real Time Clock (RTC)........................................................... 10
C.12 Testing of NSD550 with interface G4AI, if present.................................. 11
C.13 Testing of G4AK, if present ..................................................................... 12
C.14 Testing of O4LE, if present...................................................................... 13
C.15 Documentation......................................................................................... 16
C.16 Manual reset ............................................................................................ 16
Sheet ETL500 Commissioning Report.......................................................C1 - C2

Test conditions:
· Temperature range: 10 °C to 45 °C.
· The connections for the tests can be made either at the test sockets on the front of the
equipment or at the terminals.

We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to
third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © ABB Power Automation Ltd, Switzerland.
 Revision: Language: Page:
C EN 2/28 1KHL015944-EN

Basic test equipment:

PC with Windows 95, 98 or NT
MMI500 software
PCóP4LQ (1:1 serial RS-232) cable
Digital multimeter ABB Metrawatt M2012 or equivalent
Level meter True RMS with a frequency range up to 500 kHz
Dummy load P3LK, only for ETL540/580 HENF 331084

Optional test equipment:

Level generator PS-33 (W&G) or equivalent
Selective level meter SPM-32 (W&G) or equivalent
Modem tester DMT-1 (W&G) or equivalent
Storage oscilloscope Tektronix 2430A or similar
Tx tuning adapter P3LL HENF 209668
Rx tuning adapter P4LM HENF 209665
RS-232 interface tester DV-24 (W&G) or similar

Notes:
· This document is part of instruction manual 1KHL015946.

F ·
·
Please refer to 1KHL016075 for programming of the module G4AK.
Please refer 1KHL015559 for compatibility between software MMI500, firmware and hardware
of ETL500.

Designations and abbreviations used:

Designation Meaning
___________ Measured value
[ ... ] Programmed value
[ ]D Preferred setting (default)
[X ] Test passed or jumper is set
[ ] Not tested or jumper is not set
B5LA Module type
Def. Default value
equ. Equipment
fLo Lower frequency, usually meant as low cutoff frequency
LED Light Emitting Diode found on the front panel
MMI500 User interface for ETL500 running on a PC
N11, …, N71 Position in rack. Slot number N11, …, N71
Rx Receiver
Tx Transmitter
PC Personal Computer
W&G Wavetek, Wandel and Goltermann
X11, …, X71 Position in rack. Equivalent to N11, …, N71
 Revision: Language: Page:
C EN 3/28 1KHL015944-EN

C Commissioning Instructions

C.1 General
Most of the commissioning tests (including fully automatic equalization) for the ETL500 system can
be done with the help of PC based software MMI500. It is assumed, that all assembled Tx filters
and Rx filter are tuned. Under normal conditions only level adjustments will be done during
commissioning. It is required to work through the document ‘Programming and Testing
Instructions’, 1KHL015940, which is dispatched along with the equipment, before starting the
commissioning.
In case of some adjustments like Tx RF level, Rx RF level etc. the permissible limits are calculated
by the MMI500 and displayed in the dialog boxes.
The pilot signal is QPSK modulated to accommodate both Signaling & Embedded Operations
Channel. As a result, the level of the pilot signal changes continuously (by about 3 dB) due to
which its exact level cannot be measured. However it is kept at least 6 dB below the ‘Tuning tone’
level, default settings for ‘Tuning tone’ assumed.
The equipment must be tested using a standard cable impedance or in local loop mode before
connecting the equipment via the coupling device to the power line.
The local loop can be achieved or interrupted with the following operation:

ETL540/580 ETL505
Insert instead of hybrid P3LB or Remove jumper plug from X100,
local loop operation P3DA the dummy load P3LK. NORMAL OPERATION and set
this jumper plug to X101, LOOP-
1
BACK-TEST, at module G1DA .
Remove dummy load P3LK. Remove jumper plug from X100,
interrupt local loop NORMAL OPERATION and X101,
LOOP-BACK-TEST, at module
G1DA.
Insert hybrid P3LB or P3DA. Set jumper plug to X100
normal operation NORMAL OPERATION at G1DA
Connect RF-cable to X175 at
P1LA. Connect RF-cable to X103, RF-
LINE; at module G1DA.

F Note: After local loop operation is established, wait until link is synchronized,
displayed by the LED ‘Link Alarm’ is going off.

Caution Activating a Tuning tone, simulating alarms, get the equipment to local loop
operation, etc. disturbs the link.

C.1.1 Checking the line of communication

It is essential that the behaviour and characteristics of the line of communication between the sets
of PLC terminal equipment be checked as described in the instruction manual, 1KHL015946,
chapter 7, 'Commissioning'.

1
G1DA is a small module screwed from back into the rack below the backplane.
 Revision: Language: Page:
C EN 4/28 1KHL015944-EN
C.1.2 Visual checks before switching ON the equipment.

Check the wiring of protective earth to the equipment. Check, if a

DANGER 2
protective earth wire of at least 25 mm has been connected visibly to
the earth bolt of the cubicle.

Caution Depending on the grounding concept of the customer, the cable shield of the
RF line can be grounded at ETL505 by inserting solder bridge AA on line
interface G1DA. G1DA is a small module mounted in the back of the rack.

Default is, that the cable shield is floating at ETL505 and on the other end
grounded at the RF terminating plate.

Caution Check power supply polarity and voltage.

In case of an AC supply, jumpers, located inside of B5LC, had to be set, see
document ‘Instruction for changing the input voltage of B5LC’, 1KHL015788.

In case of battery supply: Check if the positive pole (+) of the battery is grounded. If it is, place an
earth jumper to the positive pole of the cubicle supply.

F Note: Switch the equipment ON now.

C.2 Power supply for channel rack P7LA

Check the auxiliary supply voltage. In case of 80 W units, the supply voltage for both the upper
rack and lower rack must be checked.
There is no access to the internal DC voltages generated for the equipment. However in case
these voltages are outside their limit, it will be indicated by a hardware alarm.

C.3 Connect to equipment, upload configuration

The equipment is accessed by the MMI500 using a 1:1 serial RS-232 cable between the P4LQ and
COM port of PC. The equipment identification and necessary channel settings are noted.
1. Start the MMI500, open the preconfigured file and connect to the equipment as described
in the instruction manual, 1KHL015946, chapter 4, section ‘Communication to the
ETL500’.
2. On the File menu click New. This opens the Connect dialog box.
3. Click Logon, Equipment ID, with ID 0.
4. Click Read & Write access
5. Click Upload configuration
6. Click OK. This opens a MMI500 child window.

C.4 Changing configuration, if necessary

In case of configuration parameters have to be changed, refer to of the instruction manual,
1KHL015946, chapter 5 'Configuration and Setup'.

C.4.1 Reducing Output Power, if necessary

At step C.1.1 return loss of line was determined in the used frequency range. The least return loss
in the used frequency range is noted as Ar min.
If the return loss of line is worse than 12 dB, output power must be reduced. Only in this case:
1. Calculate the reduction of output power, noted as Ared

Ar min
Ared = 3 - ,
4
Ar min and Ared in [dB].
 Revision: Language: Page:
C EN 5/28 1KHL015944-EN
2. Determine the new value for max output power by using the table

Equipment type Max output power reduced:

ETL505, 5W Max power (PEP) = 37 dBm - Ared

ETL540, 40 W Max power (PEP) = 46 dBm - Ared

ETL580, 80 W Max power (PEP) = 49 dBm - Ared

3. On the Configuration menu click System... and then click the Channel settings tab.
Enter the new value in the Max. power (PEP) field.
4. Click OK.
5. On the Equipment menu click Download configuration
6. Store configuration to the eprom. On the Equipment menu click Store configuration to
eprom. Answer all dialogs with Yes or OK.

C.5 Transmitter ETL540/580

The Tx RF level and the Tx alarm threshold levels were adjusted during final testing in the works.
They need to be changed only if the return loss is too low.

C.5.1 Adjust Tx RF level

The Tx RF level is adjusted using the MMI500.
1. In the Tuning & testing dialog box click Adjust Tx RF level. This opens the Adjust Tx
RF level dialog box.
7. Remove the remote equipment by disconnecting the coaxial cable. The local equipment
has to be terminated with 75 or 125 W, depending on the application.
8. Click Activate tuning tone.
9. Measure RF test tone level on the RF hybrid (P11 – P13) with a level meter in dBm to a
reference of 600 W. Adjust the value in the Tx level RF field, download it with Activate
tuning tone and measure the test tone level again. Continue, until the measurement is
according to the permissible value displayed in the dialog box. If the selective level meter
is connected to the terminated RF line (X175 on P1LA) use 75 or 125 W reference to
measure the value.

C.5.2 Adjust Tx alarm threshold level, if output power was modified

The Tx alarm level threshold is adjusted using the MMI500, the jumper CH/CL and the
potentiometer on the amplifier P1LA.
1. On the Equipment menu click Tuning & testing.
2. Click Adjust Tx RF level.
3. Set the jumper CH/CL to the position as described in the Adjustment of Tx alarm level
comment field of the Adjust Tx RF level dialog box.
4. Move the potentiometer R116 on P1LA completely in the clockwise direction. The red
LED is then OFF.
5. Click Activate Tx alarm level.
This reduces the tuning tone level (Activate tuning tone) by -12.9 dB in a single channel
version and -15.9 dB in a two channel version. The red LED adjacent to the
potentiometer is still OFF. Now adjust the potentiometer R116 very slowly in the
anticlockwise direction till the red LED adjacent to it just goes ON. This LED is duplicated
as Tx Alarm LED on the RF hybrid. In case of 80 W equipment the red LED on the
combiner also lights.
6. Tx alarm indication
During the alignment process above check the Tx alarm indication. Alarm condition:
check that Tx alarm LED on the hybrid (also on the combiner in case of 80 W equipment)
lights. After the programmed delay time, the Hardware alarm in System field of P4LQ
operates. The relay contacts on the cable V9MQ Pin 2-3 are closed.
 Revision: Language: Page:
C EN 6/28 1KHL015944-EN
7. Click Deactivate tuning tone. The LEDs go OFF and the contacts open after the
programmed delay.

F 8.
Note: Exact measurement of the programmed delay times is not essential.

Click Cancel.
9. Click Yes in the following message box, if you modified the Tx RF level,
click No, if you didn’t modified the Tx RF level.

C.6 Receiver ETL540/580

C.6.1 Adjust Rx RF level

The Rx RF level is adjusted using the MMI500.
1. On the Equipment menu point to Commissioning & maintenance and click Adjust
RxRF level. This opens the Adjust Rx RF level dialog box.
2. Disconnect the RF line coaxial cable of the local equipment.
Plug out the Rx filter P4LR.

F 3.
Note: It is really necessary to disconnect the RF line coaxial cable of the local
equipment as well as to plug out the Rx filter P4LR!!!

Enter the line attenuation.

4. Select neighbouring transmitters with frequency spacing of 8 kHz (none, 1 or 2)
5. If you are using the hybrid P3DA select Hybrid P3DA check box.
6. Click Start measurement.
7. The actual Rx RF level is displayed in the Measured level field. The rated Rx RF level is
displayed above this field.
8. Adjust the Rx level potentiometer on the RF hybrid (P3LB or P3DA) to the rated level as
close as possible.

F Note: The Tx Alarm LED on the hybrid may light during this measurement.

9. Click Stop measurement.

10. Click Cancel.
11. Restore the link by connecting the RF line coaxial cable and plug in the Rx filter P4LR.

C.6.2 Connect the RF cable to the ETL500

Now connect the RF cable to the ETL500.
If the remote equipment is operational, all alarms of the local equipment should be OFF in a few
seconds.

C.6.3 Tune RF hybrid P3LB

A special adjustment is needed for tuning the trans-hybrid loss when the RF hybrid type P3LB is
used.

F Note: The tuning is not necessary while using the RF hybrid type P3DA.

Preparations:
The RF line coaxial cable is connected to the equipment. The PCB extender type I9BK or the Tx
tuning adapter P3LL is inserted in place of the RF hybrid P3LB and the RF hybrid is plugged on top
of it.
 Revision: Language: Page:
C EN 7/28 1KHL015944-EN
The settings on P3LL if used are:
· Function: B.
· Position of S1: L1, FILTER.
· Position of S2: FILTER
· Position of S3: LINE.
· Position of LOAD: LINE

Tuning the hybrid using the MMI500.

1. On the Equipment menu click Tuning & testing. This opens the Tuning & testing
dialog box.
2. Click Tune RF hybrid. This opens the Tune RF hybrid dialog box.
3. Check the jumper setting on the hybrid: RA, CE, CD, LO.
In accordance to the impedance of the line coupling system, check solderbridge CM 75 W
and wire bridge is on 75 W respectively solderbridge is open and wire bridge is on 125 W.
4. Click Start measurement. The configuration of the P4LQ is temporary modified by the
MMI500 for this measurement. The modification and initialization of these configuration
takes some time. Please wait until the measured Rx RF level appears in the dialog box
and doesn’t vary.

F 5.
Note: It might be possible, that the operator phone of remote equipment is ringing
during the measurement. It has no effect on the measurement.

The MMI500 selectively measures the level of the RF signal from the own transmitter.
This level is set to a minimum with the aid of a balancing network (resistor R10 (RA/RP),
the potentiometer R8, the inductors LA – LN and the capacitors CA – CL) described
below.
6. Reduce the measured Rx RF level using potentiometer R8 until a first minimum is
reached. If a minimum cannot be reached with the jumper in position RA, the effective
resistor R8 can be increased by setting jumper to position RP.
7. Search for the next minimum using jumpers LA – LN, starting with LA.
If, however, jumper LA does not produce any reduction, set Jumper LO. (LA has the
smallest inductance and LN the largest).

F 8.
Note: Only one L jumper (LA – LN) may be inserted at any one time.

If a minimum could be achieved with LA to LN, reduce the measured Rx RF level

again to the next minimum using potentiometer R8. Further improvement can be
achieved using small values of C (jumpers CA, CB or CC). C jumpers may be inserted in
parallel.
This concludes the tuning of the hybrid.
Click Stop measurement.
This performs a reset on the equipment to reload the original settings from the flash
EPROM.
9. If no minimum could be achieved with LA to LN, reduce the level using jumpers CA –
CN until the next minimum is reached (CA has the smallest and CN the largest
capacitance). C jumpers may be inserted in parallel.
Conclude the tuning by adjusting R8 for the next minimum.
Click Stop measurement.
This performs a reset on the equipment to reload the original settings from the flash
eprom.

C.6.4 SNR Pilot and SNR Channel [2 kHz]

Check signal to noise ratio (SNR):
1. In menu Equipment click Upload status.
2. Check the limits for signal to noise ratio (SNR), of the pilot and the channel.
 Revision: Language: Page:
C EN 8/28 1KHL015944-EN
C.7 Transmitter and Receiver ETL505

C.7.1 Adjust Tx alarm threshold level, if output power was modified

The Tx alarm level threshold is adjusted using the MMI500 and the potentiometer on the front
panel of P4LS.
2. On the Equipment menu click Tuning & testing.
3. Click Adjust Tx RF level.
4. Remove the remote equipment by disconnecting the coaxial cable. The local equipment
has to be terminated with 75 W.
5. In the P4LS Adjust Tx RF level dialog box click Activate Tx alarm level.
This reduces the tuning tone level (Activate tuning tone) by –12.9 dB.
3. Turn the potentiometer on front panel of P4LS, named ‘SET TX ALARM’ as far
anticlockwise as the red LED, named ‘TX ALARM’, is OFF.
4. Now adjust the potentiometer on front panel of P4LS, named ‘SET TX ALARM’, very
slowly in the clockwise direction till the red LED adjacent to it just goes ON.

Check Tx alarm indication

1. After the programmed delay time, the Hardware alarm, LED named ‘HW’, in System field
of P4LQ operates. The relay contacts on the cable V9MQ Pin 2-3 are closed.

F 2.
Note: Exact measurement of the programmed delay times is not essential

Click Deactivate tuning tone. The LED on P4LS and the LED, named ‘HW’, on P4LQ go
OFF and the contacts open after the programmed delay.

F 3.
Note:

Click Cancel.
Exact measurement of the programmed delay times is not essential

4. Click Yes in the following message box, if you modified the Tx RF level,
click No, if you didn’t modified the Tx RF level.

C.7.2 Adjust Rx RF level

The Rx RF level is adjusted using the MMI500. The level must be set dependent on the
transmitters connected in parallel to the same line coupling device.
1. In the Tuning & testing dialog box click Adjust Rx RF level.
2. In the dialog box Adjust Rx Rf level (jumper setting calculator), select the output
power of parallel transmitters connected in parallel on the same coupling device. Then
select the frequency spacing between the Tx frequencies of the parallel transmitter.
Afterwards select the arrangement of these transmitters.
If there are no parallel transmitters on the same coupling device, leave the box Power in
field Parallel transmitters to none.
The symbols in the arrangement notation have following meaning:
‘5W’ represents always the actual ETL505 transmitter
‘X’ means that there is a parallel transmitter with the selected frequency gap and
output power.
‘–‘ means, that there is no parallel transmitter with the selected frequency gap.
3. Verify setting of jumper AA, AB and AC on P4LS.

F Note: Opening of the black shielding box is described in chapter 2 of

document ‘Tuning Instructions Rx RF filter P4LS <ETL500 Rel. 3>‘,
1KHL016255.
4. Click Cancel.
 Revision: Language: Page:
C EN 9/28 1KHL015944-EN
C.7.3 Connect the RF cable to the ETL505
Connect the RF cable to the ETL505.
If the remote equipment is operational, all alarms of the local equipment should be OFF in a few
seconds.

C.7.4 SNR Pilot and SNR Channel [2 kHz]

Check signal to noise ratio (SNR):
1. In menu Equipment click Upload status.
2. Check the limits for signal to noise ratio (SNR), of the pilot and the channel.

C.8 Equalization
Refer to 1KHL015943 ‘Equalization using MMI500 for the ETL500 Rel. 3 equipment’. The
document is put into a short instruction, printed in the following chapters C.8.1 and C.8.2.

F Note: The equalization routine can also be done at the remote equipment via
embedded EOC communication.

C.8.1 Measure frequency response

It is assumed, that the RF tuning of the remote equipment is already finished. If it isn’t finished,
tune the remote equipment.
The link works and all alarms are cleared.
In accordance with document ‘Equalization using MMI500 <ETL500 Rel. 3>’, 1KHL015943,
measure the frequency response.
1. In the menu Equipment, click Commissioning and maintenance, click Frequency
response, click Channel 1 respectively Channel 2.
2. In the following message box click OK and wait until measurement is done. The dialog
box Select equalizer appears.

C.8.2 Select Equalizer

To get the dialog box Select equalizer: In menu Equipment, Commissioning and maintenance,
click Select Equalizer, Channel 1 respectively Channel 2. In accordance with just mentioned
document, select an equalizer.
1. Select the new equalizer:
In field New equalizer, activate checkbox Amplitude response equalisation only.
2. If an external teleprotection signal, e.g. from a NSD70 equipment is fed into a
teleoperation port of O4LE, select type None or Short in dialog box Select equalizer in
field New equalizer to get low group delay
In other cases, select in the dialog box Select equalizer in field New equalizer type
Middle or Long.
3. View the amplitude response by clicking View. If the amplitude response is acceptable
download the viewed equalizer settings. In the dialog box Select equalizer select in field
New equalizer the type again, check Amplitude response only again and click
Download.
4. Wait until channel calculation is finished.
5. Answer the following message box with Yes and store the equalizer setting into eprom by
clicking Yes again.
6. Press the Reset button on the front plate of P4LQ.

C.9 Configure alarm settings

1. On the Equipment menu click Upload status.
2. On the Configuration menu click System... and then click the Alarm settings tab.
3. Modifications for channel 1:
Set the Alarm threshold in the field Pilot level channel 1 approximately to the following
value:
 Revision: Language: Page:
C EN 10/28 1KHL015944-EN

Alarm threshold = Actual pilot level – 15 dB. The actual pilot level is displayed in the
same field.
Set the Alarm threshold in the field SNR level channel 1 to the desired value.
Set the Blocking threshold in the field AGC blocking level channel 1 approximately to
the following value:
Blocking threshold = Alarm threshold – 10 dB.
4. Modifications in case of a two channel equipment:
Set the Alarm threshold in the field Pilot level channel 2 approximately to the following
value:
Alarm threshold = Actual pilot level – 15 dB. The actual pilot level is displayed in the
same field.
Set the Alarm threshold in the field SNR level channel 2 to the desired value.
Set the Blocking threshold in the field AGC blocking level channel 2 approximately to
the following value:
Blocking threshold = Alarm threshold – 10 dB.
5. Click OK.
6. On the Equipment menu click Download configuration.
7. Click Yes, OK and Yes in the following message boxes (default buttons).

C.10 Testing of R1BC, if present

Depending upon the programmed criteria, activate the required alarms using the following table.
Check the contact closure of the programmed relays on R1BC. Set the link back to an alarm free
operation after this test.

Alarm on R1BC Action to enforce the alarm

P4LQ alarm This alarm cannot be enforced.
Warning LED on P4LQ Activate a testtone in the 'Adjust Tx RF level' dialog box
Link alarm Disconnect the RF line coaxial cable
Hardware (HW) alarm Press 'Activate Tx alarm level' in the 'Adjust Tx RF level' dialog
box
System alarm (i.e. cabinet Enforce either Link alarm or HW alarm
alarm)

C.11 Configure Real Time Clock (RTC)

The Real Time Clock (RTC) has to be set to the actual date and time for proper operation of the
eventrecorder.

C.11.1 Setting the real time clock

Setting the date and time using the MMI500.
1. On the Equipment menu point to Commissioning and maintenance, point to
Eventrecorder and click Set Clock.
2. In the Real Time Clock (RTC) dialog box check if the PC time and PC date is correct.
3. Click Download date/time to RTC
This sets the RTC to the given date and time.
4. Click Upload date/time from RTC
The date and time displayed at Read RTC date & time part of the Real Time Clock
(RTC) box should be the same as when the button was clicked.
5. Click Cancel

C.11.2 Testing external real time clock synchronisation, if available

The external synchronisation having IRIG-B format has to be fed to the O4LE of slot N11. Connect
the signal to the external cable of slot N11 at terminal teleoperation, 0a-0b.
Testing the external synchronisation using MMI500.
 Revision: Language: Page:
C EN 11/28 1KHL015944-EN
1. Set the time on the PC running MMI500 a few hours back/forward
2. On the Equipment menu point to Commissioning and maintenance menu point to
Eventrecorder and click Set Clock.
3. Click Download date/time to RTC
This sets the RTC to the wrong time.
4. Click Upload date/time from RTC
The date and time displayed at Read RTC date & time part of the Real time Clock (RTC)
box should be correct and not match to the PC-date/time setting.
5. Click Cancel
6. Set the time on the PC back to the correct time

C.12 Testing of NSD550 with interface G4AI, if present

Designations and abbreviations used:

Designation Meaning
(T.22/..1) Connector 1 of terminal block connected to rack position N22

The NSD550 transmission time is tested by sending a loop test over the link.
NSD550 with interfaces G4AI is tested by applying test commands at the G4AI inputs and measure
these test commands at the G4AI outputs.
To get back the input commands at the outputs of the local equipment, a local loop is necessary.
The local loop can be achieved according to chapter C.1.
Make a printout of the actual configuration of the equipment using the MMI500 and test all G4AI
inputs and outputs.

C.12.1 Loop test transmission time over power line

The NSD550 loop test transmission time is checked using the MMI500.
1. From the Equipment menu point to Commissioning and maintenance and click NSD550
send loop test
The actual transmission time for the NSD550 loop test over the link and back is measured, half the
value, transmission time for one-way, will displayed in a message box, named TLink in the
‘Commissioning report.

F Note: Transmission times of twice the nominal transmission time for uncoded
tripping signals as given in the instruction manual shall serve as a guideline
for the upper limit.

C.12.2 Command transmission time

Check the transmission time of the NSD550 commands, getting the equipment in the local loop
operation, according to chapter C.1

How to activate an input command depends on the jumper settings on G4AI.

· G4AI input programmed as 'contact and battery voltage’:
Inject a signal at input port with the voltage level U1 according to the jumper settings on
G4AI (24VDC, 48VDC, 110VDC, 220VDC)
· G4AI input programmed as 'contact only’:
Short circuit the input port

Transmit at few commands with a command / pause duration of about 100ms / 1000ms and
measure the nominal transmission time (Tnominal) of the local looped command.

F Note: The measured transmission time (Tnominal) does not include the channel delay.
 Revision: Language: Page:
C EN 12/28 1KHL015944-EN

F Note: The nominal transmission time as given in the instruction manual shall serve
as a guideline for the mean value of several commands.

After transmission time measurement restore the link. To get the link to normal operation, see
chapter C.1.

C.12.3 Reset counters

After NSD550 testing reset the counters by using MMI500.
1. From the Equipment menu point to Commissioning and maintenance menu point to
Eventrecorder and click Reset counter.
2. In the Reset Counter box click check box Reset all counters.
3. Click OK.

C.13 Testing of G4AK, if present

Designations and abbreviations used:

Designation Meaning
CTS Clear To Send – G4AK modem output signal (X6 pin 5)
DCD Data Carrier Detect – G4AK modem output signal (X6 pin 8)
DTR DTE ready – G4AK modem input signal (X6 pin 20)
fc Center frequency
fs Frequency shift (deviation from center frequency)
mark G4AK: low voltage level; lower frequency shift; logic 1
RTS Request To Send – G4AK modem input signal (X6 pin 4)
RXD Received Data - G4AK modem output signal (X6 pin 3)
S3:10 Position 10 on Dual In Line switch S3
S1:5/6 Positions 5 and 6 on Dual In Line switch S1
space G4AK: high voltage level; higher frequency shift; logic 0
TVN Test Voltage Negative – G4AK modem output signal (X6 pin 10)
TVP Test Voltage Positive – G4AK modem output signal (X6 pin 9)
TXD Transmitted Data – G4AK modem input signal (X6 pin 2)
X2 Connector on back of modem G4AK
X6 RS-232 data connector on front panel of modem G4AK

C.13.1 Check LED’s

C.13.2 Transmitter functional tests

Local modem:
1. Disconnect cable from X2,
2. Connect the DMT-1 to X6,
3. Switch DTR and RTS on,
4. Transmit a mark frequency (logical 1),
5. Check reaction of system.

C.13.3 Receiver functional tests, mark

Remote modem:
1. Disconnect cable from X2
 Revision: Language: Page:
C EN 13/28 1KHL015944-EN
2. Connect the interface tester to X6
3. On X6 connect DTR and RTS to TVP.
Local modem:
4. Switch RTS off,
5. Check reaction of system.

C.13.4 Receiver functional tests, space

Remote modem:
1. On X6 connect TXD to TVP (in addition to DTR and RTS from previous test),
2. Check reaction of system.

C.13.5 Distortion test

Remote modem:
1. Remove connection on X6,
2. Press switch TEST on the front panel in direction TTX on the remote modem to start a
transmit test.
Local modem:
3. If the regenerator is on then switch it off (S3:1),
4. Set the DMT-1 on a 511 test pattern and to the correct baud rate,
5. Take the measurement of the isochronous distortion.
Remote modem:
6. Press switch TEST on the front panel in direction TTX on the remote modem to end the
transmit test.

C.13.6 Restoring the original state

1. If the regenerator was on before the tests then switch it back on (S3:1).
2. If removed then re-connect cables to X2.

C.14 Testing of O4LE, if present

The AF interface O4LE is tested by applying a test signal at the input ports and measure this signal
at the output ports. To get the input signals at the local output ports a local loop is necessary. The
local loop is established according to C.1.
Make a printout of the actual configuration of the equipment using the MMI500 and test all ports,
which are not in the off state.

C.14.1 Service phone

The following tests must only be done, if the ‘Service phone’ is enabled.
Get the equipment in local loop operation according to chapter C.1. The service phone cannot be
tested completely in the local loop mode.
1. Pick up the phone and speak. You should hear yourself clearly. If a feedback tone
occurs, you should increase the difference between input level and output level of the
service phone in the configuration.

C.14.2 Hot line direct phone

The following tests must only be done, if the operation mode ‘Hot line direct phone’ is configured.
Get the equipment in local loop operation according to chapter C.1. This operation mode cannot be
tested completely in the local loop mode.
1. Measure the voltage at open loop condition:
Disconnect phone and take the measurement.
2. Check audibility of phone:
If the chosen phone is available, test the audibility:
Pick up the phone and speak. You should hear yourself clearly. If a feedback tone
occurs, you should increase the difference between input level and output level of the
‘subscriber, direct phone’ in the configuration.
 Revision: Language: Page:
C EN 14/28 1KHL015944-EN
C.14.3 ‘Remote subscriber’
The following tests must only be done, if the operation mode ‘Remote subscriber’ is configured.
Get the equipment in local loop operation according to chapter C.1. This operation mode cannot be
tested completely in the local loop mode.
1. Measure the voltage at open loop condition:
Disconnect phone and take the measurement.
2. Check audibility of phone:
If the chosen phone is available, test the audibility:
Pick up the phone and speak. You should hear yourself clearly. If a feedback tone
occurs, you should increase the difference between input level and output level of the
‘subscriber, direct phone’ in the configuration.

C.14.4 Pax 2-wire

The following test must only be done, if the operation mode ‘Pax 2-wire’ is configured.
Get the equipment in local loop operation according to chapter C.1. Relevant AF measurements
cannot be achieved at the 2-wire interfaces in the local loop mode.
1. Check PAX-BLOCKING relay. In normal operation or local loop mode contacts at
terminal, telephony, 6b-7a should be closed and contacts at 6a-6b should be open.
Interrupt local loop according to chapter C.1, after the programmed delay time the link
alarm occurs. Now contacts at terminal, telephony, 6b-7a should be open and contacts
6a-6b should be closed.
2. Restore local loop.

C.14.5 Pax 4-wire

The following tests must only be done, if the operation mode ‘Pax 4-wire’ is configured.
Get the equipment in local loop operation according to chapter C.1
1. Toggling the M-WIRE input, E-WIRE output should toggle simultaneously.
Note, E-WIRE is a switching contact without inherent voltage source and without polarity.
2. Activate M-WIRE. If M-WIRE is configured as ‘inverted’, contacts at terminal, telephony,
4a-4b must be opened, otherwise closed.
3. Feed a 800 Hz tone, with the configured input level into AF1-IN. Take a measurement of
the output level at AF1-OUT. It should be in 1 dB range of the configured output level.
4. Check PAX-BLOCKING relay. In normal operation contacts at terminal, telephony, 6b-7a
should be closed and contacts 6a-6b should be open.
Interrupt local loop according to chapter C.1, after the programmed delay time the link
alarm occurs. Now contacts at terminal, telephony, 6b-7a should be open and contacts at
6a-6b should be closed.

C.14.6 Pax 4/2-wire

The following tests must only be done, if the operation mode ‘Pax 4/2wire’ is configured. .
Get the equipment in local loop operation according to chapter C.1
1. Toggling the M-WIRE input, E-WIRE output should toggle simultaneously.
Note, E-WIRE is a switching contact without inherent voltage source and without polarity.
2. Activate M-WIRE. If M-WIRE is configured as ‘inverted’, contacts at terminal, telephony,
4a-4b must be opened, otherwise closed.
Note: It is assumed, that LOCAL/TRANSIT is deactivated.
3. Feed a 800 Hz tone, with the configured input level into AF1-IN.
4. Take a measurement of the output level at AF1-OUT of the local equipment. It should be
in 1 dB range of the configured output level from the local equipment.
5. Take a measurement of the output level at P2W-OUT of the local equipment. It should be
in 1 dB range of the configured output level from the local equipment.
6. Activate LOCAL/TRANSIT equipment. If LOCAL/TRANSIT is configured as ‘inverted’,
contacts at terminal, telephony, 5a-4b must be opened, otherwise closed.
7. Feed again a 800 Hz tone, with the configured input level into AF1-IN.
8. Take a measurement of the output level at AF1-OUT of the local equipment. Level of
AF1-OUT should be 40 dB below of the configured output level from the local equipment.
 Revision: Language: Page:
C EN 15/28 1KHL015944-EN
9. Check PAX-BLOCKING relay. In normal operation contacts at terminal, telephony, 6b-7a
should be closed and contacts at 6a-6b should be open.
Interrupt local loop according to chapter C.1, after the programmed delay time the link
alarm occurs. Now contacts at terminal, telephony, 6b-7a should be open and contacts at
6a-6b should be closed.

C.14.7 Transit mode for E&M wire

The following tests must be done only, if the operation mode ‘Transit mode for E&M wire’ is
configured at the local equipment.
Get the equipment in local loop operation according to chapter C.1
1. Toggling the M-WIRE input, E-WIRE output should toggle simultaneously.
Note, E-WIRE is a switching contact without inherent voltage source and without polarity.

C.14.8 Testing the teleoperation ports

For testing the teleoperation ports, first nominal signal levels must be fed into the teleoperation
input port with a level generator. The output level at the other side of the link must then be
measured and compared to the nominal output level. An example of a equipment configuration is
given below.
Get the equipment in local loop operation according to chapter C.1
1. The Reference signal level input, listed in the configuration printout should be fed into
AFx-IN.
2. The Reference signal level output of AFx-OUT, listed in the configuration printout is the
expected output level.
3. Take the measurement with a selective level meter.

Example:
Applying above method to the configuration given below, a sinus with –9.0 dBm is fed into AFx-IN.
The tone is expected with –9.0 dBm at AFx-OUT of local equipment.

Equipment:
TELEOPERATION
Port AFx: Disconnectable at CH1
Squelch: Disabled
Reference signal: 600 Bd FSK
Reference signal level input: -9.00 dBm (RMS)
Reference signal level output: -9.00 dBm (RMS)
Weight of port: 0.71
Max. output level: 4.34 dBm (PEP)
Relative input level: -4.0 dBr
Relative output level: -4.0 dBr
Input filter: None
Output filter: None

C.14.9 Teleoperation port AF1

If the port AF1 is not used for a telephony application. Also if the port is switched to ’On -
disconnectable’ or ‘On - non disconnectable’, take the measurement, described in C.14.8.

C.14.10 Teleoperation port AF2

If the port is switched to ’On - disconnectable’ or ‘On - non disconnectable’, take the
measurement, described in C.14.8.

C.14.11 Teleoperation port AF3

If the port is switched to ’On - disconnectable’ or ‘On - non disconnectable’, take the
measurement, described in C.14.8.

C.14.12 Teleoperation port AF4

If the port is switched to ’On - disconnectable’ or ‘On - non disconnectable’, take the
measurement, described in C.14.8.
 Revision: Language: Page:
C EN 16/28 1KHL015944-EN
C.14.13 Teleoperation AF4 used for ext. Teleprotection
After measurement of C.14.12 is done.
1. Recalculate expected output level of AF4-OUT by adding the NSD70 boost value,
shown in the configuration printout.
2. Activate the EXT-BOOST input. If EXT-BOOST is configured as ‘inverted’, contacts at
terminal, teleoperation, 9a-9b must be opened, otherwise closed.
3. Take the measurement at AF4-OUT.

C.15 Documentation
After the testing is complete, take a printout of the configuration and status data.
1. Click the green Upload arrow in the toolbar with the left mouse button. This starts the
upload configuration and upload status from the equipment. The status is displayed in the
window.
2. From the File menu, click Print. This prints the status data.
3. From the View menu, click Display configuration.
4. From the File menu, click Print.
Save the 'mmi' file on a disk with the Serial No. of ETL coded in the file name.
e.g.HE400327C0.MMI:

C.16 Manual reset

Press the reset button on the front plate of P4LQ and wait until all alarms disappear.
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 Commissioning Report EN C1/C12 HE
Test Permissible Test
No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

C.1 General

C.1.1 Checking the line of

communication
Line attenuation dB [ ]
Return loss Ar dB [ ]

C.1.2 Visual checks

Proper wiring of protective earth P7LA, P7LC PE wired [ ]
Proper wiring of protective earth Cubicle PE wired [ ]
Proper wiring of power supply P7LA, P7LC polarity ok [ ]
Proper settings on power supply B5LA, B5LC jumpers & *
upper lower
modules fuses ok [ ] [ ]D
If the positive pole (+) of the Cubicle supply [ ]
battery is grounded, place an earth terminals
jumper to the positive pole (+) of
the cubicle supply
For ETL505: Grounding cable Jumper AA on G1DA [ ] D not set [ ]
shield of RF line [ ] set

C.2. Power supply for channel rack

P7LA upper* lower
C.2.1 Battery supply 48V DC B5LA (BAT-0V) -46 to –56 V DC [ ] [ ]D
C.2.2 Mains supply 230V AC B5LC (UR-0V) -46 to –52 V DC [ ] [ ]D
C.2.3 Mains supply 115V AC B5LC (UR-0V) -46 to –52 V DC [ ] [ ]D
C.2.4 Ripple on 48V DC B5LA (BAT-0V) <1 V rms [ ] [ ]D
C.2.5 Ripple on UR (Mains) B5LC (UR-0V) <1 V rms [ ] [ ]D

C.3 Upload Configuration [ ]

C.4 Changing Configuration, if [ ]

necessary

*
‘upper’ und ‘lower’ stands for upper rack / lower rack and applies to 80 W equipment ETL580 only.
© ABB Power Automation Ltd Form 1KHL015944-EN
Rev. C
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 Commissioning Report EN C2/C12 HE
Test Permissible Test
No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

C.4.1 Reducing Output power, if

necessary
Determine Ar min = minimal value of Ar min = dB
Ar as measured in C.1.1 ___________
Calculate output power reduction Ared = dB
Ared: ___________
No reduction, if Ar min ³ 12 dB:
Ared = max(0, (3 - Ar min / 4 ))
Decrease Max. power PEP by Ared MMI500: System [ ]
configuration, channel
settings, Max. power
PEP
Measure RF level of testtone at Dummy load P3LK MMI500: dBm
dummy load View / Display __________
configuration:
Tx test tone
level ± 1dB

C.5 Transmitter ETL540/580

C.5.1 Adjust Tx RF level

Dialog box: Adjust Tx RF level RF hybrid (P11 - P13) value [ ]
Click Activate test tone indicated in
dialog box

C.5.2 Adjust Tx alarm threshold level,

if necessary
Dialog box: Adjust Tx RF level
Activate Tx alarm. RF hybrid & P3LC/D in LED to be ON [ ]
case of 80W
State of HW alarm relay after Pins 2/3 of V9MQ cable Closed [ ]
programmed delay.
Deactivate Tx alarm. RF hybrid & P3LC/D in LED to be [ ]
case of 80W OFF
State of HW alarm relay after Pins 2/3 of V9MQ cable Open [ ]
programmed delay.

C.6 Receiver ETL540/580

C.6.1 Adjust Rx RF level

Menu: Equipment, Commissioning
and maintenance, dialog box:
Adjust Rx RF level
Line attenuation Dialog box __________ dB
Neighboring transmitters with Dialog box [ ] none
frequency spacing of 8 kHz [ ] 1 neighb.
[ ] 2 neighb.
RF hybrid type P3DA used Dialog box [ ] P3DA
Measured Rx RF level Dialog box £ 15 dB __________

© ABB Power Automation Ltd Form 1KHL015944-EN

Rev. C
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 Commissioning Report EN C3/C12 HE
Test Permissible Test
No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

C.6.2 Connect the RF cable to the

ETL500
If the remote equ. is operational & All RED LEDs on P4LQ OFF [ ]
the link is OK observe P4LQ for
alarms
Activate alarm monitoring of Local Alarm monitoring No Local & [ ]
& Remote equ. display on MMI500 Remote
alarms

C.6.3 Adjust hybrid P3LB, if present* [ ]

RF Coaxial cable to be connected.
Dialog box: Adjust hybrid P3LB. Dialog box Till minimum [ ]
Press 'Start measurement' & adjust is read by
the balancing network (resistor MMI.
R10 (RA/RP), the potentiometer
R8, the inductors LA - LN and the
capacitors CA - CL).

C.6.4 SNR Pilot and SNR Channel

[2 kHz] Chan. 1 Chan. 2

Upload status data of Local equ.

SNR pilot MMI500 > 21 dB [ ] [ ]
SNR channel [2 kHz] MMI500 > 15 dB [ ] [ ]

C.7 Transmitter and Receiver

ETL505

C.7.1 Adjust Tx alarm threshold level

Dialog box: Adjust Tx RF level LED [ ]
Click Activate Tx alarm level and off à on
adjust potentiometer ‘SET TX
ALARM’ on P4LS till LED on it just
lights
Tx alarm indication: LED ‘TX ALARM’ on LED to be ON [ ]
Click Activate Tx alarm level P4LS
State of HW alarm relay after Pins 2-3 of V9MQ cable Closed [ ]
programmed delay.
Click Deactivate test tone LED ‘TX ALARM’ on LED to be [ ]
P4LS OFF
State of HW alarm relay after Pins 2/3 of V9MQ cable Open [ ]
programmed delay.

C.7.2 Adjust Rx RF level

Jumper set P4LS AA [ ]D
AB [ ]
AC [ ]D

*
Note: The adjustment is not needed while using the RF hybrid type P3DA!
© ABB Power Automation Ltd Form 1KHL015944-EN
Rev. C
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 Commissioning Report EN C4/C12 HE
Test Permissible Test
No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

C.7.3 Connect the RF cable to the

ETL505
If the remote equ. is operational & All RED LEDs on P4LQ OFF [ ]
the link is OK observe P4LQ for
alarms
Activate alarm monitoring of Local Alarm monitoring No Local & [ ]
& Remote equipment display on MMI500 Remote
alarms

C.7.4 SNR Pilot and SNR Channel

[2 kHz]
Upload status data of Local equ.
SNR pilot MMI500 > 21 dB [ ]
SNR channel [2 kHz] MMI500 > 15 dB [ ]

C.8 Equalizer

C.8.1 Measure frequency response

Chan. 1 Chan. 2
In menu equipment, MMI500 [ ] [ ]
Commissioning and maintenance,
click Frequency response > click
Channel 1, respectively Channel 2

C.8.2 Select Equalizer

Chan. 1 Chan. 2
In menu equipment, MMI500 [ ] [ ]
Commissioning and maintenance,
click Select Equalizer, click
1 Channel, click …

C.9 Configure Alarm Settings

Menu: Local, Dialog box
Configure alarm settings
Alarm threshold for Pilot level Dialog box Pilot level dBu [ ]
displayed - 15

SNR [2 kHz] threshold Dialog box minimum 12 dBu [ ]

AGC blocking threshold Dialog box Alarm thresh. dBu [ ]
for Pilot – 10

C.10 R1BC, if present [ ]

Activate alarms as programmed on Corresponding N/C Closed [ ]
R1BC. contacts on R1BC.
Deactivate alarms as programmed Corresponding N/C Open [ ]
on R1BC. contacts on R1BC.

© ABB Power Automation Ltd Form 1KHL015944-EN

Rev. C
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 Commissioning Report EN C5/C12 HE
Test Permissible Test
No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

C.11 Configure Real time Clock (RTC)

C.11.1 Setting real time clock

Menu: Equipment, Commissioning
and maintenance, Eventrecorder,
Set clock
Download date/time to RTC Dialog box Actual time [ ]
and date

C.11.2 Testing external real time clock

synchronization, if available
Menu: Equipment, Commissioning
and maintenance, Eventrecorder,
Set clock
Download date/time to RTC Dialog box Wrong time
Upload date/time from RTC Dialog box Correct time [ ]
.

Test Permissible Test

No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

C.12 NSD550 / G4AI, if

present

C.12.1 Loop test

transmission time
over power line
Menu: Equipment,
Commissioning and
maintenance, NSD550
send loop test
Actual transmission MMI500 < 2*T0 ms
time TLink __________

© ABB Power Automation Ltd Form 1KHL015944-EN

Rev. C
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 Commissioning Report EN C6/C12 HE
Test Permissible Test
No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

C.12.2 Command
transmission time
Command A Terminal: Refer MMI500
Tx command A (T22/1) – (T22/2) [ ] Mean value
(T…/...) – (T.../…) [ ] £T0 ms ___________
Rx command A (T22/9) – (T22/10) [ ]
(T…/...) – (T.../…) [ ]
Command B Terminal: Refer MMI500
Tx command B (T22/3) – (T22/4) [ ] Mean value
(T…/...) – (T.../…) [ ] £T0 ms ___________
Rx command B (T22/11) – (T22/12) [ ]
(T…/...) – (T.../…) [ ]
Command C Terminal: Refer MMI500
Tx command C (T22/5) – (T22/6) [ ] Mean value
(T…/...) – (T.../…) [ ] £T0 ms ___________
Rx command C (T22/13) – (T22/14) [ ]
(T…/...) – (T.../…) [ ]
Command D Terminal: Refer MMI500
Tx command D (T22/7) – (T22/8) [ ] Mean value
(T…/...) – (T.../…) [ ] £T0 ms ___________
Rx command D (T22/15) – (T22/16) [ ]
(T…/...) – (T.../…) [ ]

C.12.3 Reset counters

Menu: Equipment,
Commissioning and
maintenance,
Eventrecorder, Reset
counter
All counters reset MMI 0 [ ]

C.13 G4AK, if present

C.13.1 LED’s on modem N22 N28 N34 N54 N71

TXD LED G4AK front plate on [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
RXD LED G4AK front plate on [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Alarm LED (only if G4AK front plate on [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
solder bridge DC is in)

C.13.2 Transmitter N22 N28 N34 N54 N71

TXD LED G4AK front plate on [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
RTS LED G4AK front plate on [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Measure TX level Jack ‘Tx’ at G4AK dBu N22: ___________
front plate (rms) N28: ___________
N34: ___________
N54: ___________
N71: ___________
Measured TX level in TX level setting dBu N22 N28 N34 N54 N71
range? +2 / -4 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

© ABB Power Automation Ltd Form 1KHL015944-EN

Rev. C
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 Commissioning Report EN C7/C12 HE
Test Permissible Test
No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

C.13.3 Receiver, mark

RXD LED G4AK front plate on N22 N28 N34 N54 N71
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
DCD LED G4AK front plate on N22 N28 N34 N54 N71
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Measure RX mark level Jack ‘Rx’ at G4AK dBu N22: ___________
front plate (rms) N28: ___________
N34: ___________
N54: ___________
N71: ___________
RX mark level in nominal RX mark dBu N22 N28 N34 N54 N71
range? level +2 / -4 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

C.13.4 Receiver, space

RXD LED G4AK front plate on N22 N28 N34 N54 N71
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
DCD LED G4AK front plate on N22 N28 N34 N54 N71
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Measure RX space Jack ‘Rx’ at G4AK dBu N22: ___________
level front plate N28: ___________
N34: ___________
N54: ___________
N71: ___________
RX space level in nominal RX dBu N22 N28 N34 N54 N71
range? space level [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
+2 / -4

C.13.5 Isochronous N22 N28 N34 N54 N71

distortion
50 to 300 Bd < 11 % [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
600 or 1200 Bd V.23 < 15 % [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
1200 Bd above speech < 17 % [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
2400 Bd < 22 % [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

C.13.6 Restoring original N22 N28 N34 N54 N71

state
Regenerator G4AK: switch S3:1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Connections to X2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

C.14 Testing of O4LE

C.14.1 Service Phone. Mark, if configured: N11 N65

[ ] [ ]
Pick up the phone and Service phone, at front talk is possible N11 N65
talk. panel without feedback. [ ] [ ]

© ABB Power Automation Ltd Form 1KHL015944-EN

Rev. C
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 Commissioning Report EN C8/C12 HE
Test Permissible Test
No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

C.14.2 Hot line direct phone Mark, if configured: N11 N65

[ ] [ ]
Pick up the phone and Direct phone talk is possible N11 N65
talk. without feedback. [ ] [ ]

C.14.3 Remote subscriber Mark, if configured: N11 N65

[ ] [ ]
Measure voltage at open 43 V … 52 V V DC
loop condition N11: ___________

N65: ___________
Pick up the phone and talk is possible N11 N65
talk. without feedback. [ ] [ ]

C.14.4 Pax 2-wire Mark, if configured: N11 N65

[ ] [ ]
PAX-BLOCKING normal Measure at terminal, 6a-6b is open N11 N65
telephony 6a-6b, 6b-7a 6b-7a is closed [ ] [ ]
PAX-BLOCKING Measure at terminal, 6a-6b is closed N11 N65
blocked telephony 6a-6b, 6b-7a 6b-7a is open [ ] [ ]
Interrupt local loop, wait
about 30 sec.

C.14.5 Pax 4-wire Mark, if configured: N11 N65

[ ] [ ]
Test E-Wire: Terminal, telephony E-Wire must N11 N65
Close and open at 3a-3b toggle [ ] [ ]
terminal, telephony
4a-4b
Measure Output level. Feed into terminal, Configured Output dBm
Feed 800 Hz with telephony 1a-1b level ±1 dB (600 W) N11: ___________
configured input level Measure at terminal, (Def: -3.5 dBm)
(Def.: -3.5 dBm). telephony 2a-2b N65: ___________
(Activate at terminal,
telephony 4a-4b)
PAX-BLOCKING normal Measure at terminal, 6a-6b is open N11 N65
telephony 6a-6b, 6b-7a 6b-7a is closed [ ] [ ]
PAX-BLOCKING Measure at terminal, 6a-6b is closed N11 N65
blocked telephony 6a-6b, 6b-7a 6b-7a is open [ ] [ ]
Interrupt local loop, wait
about 30 sec.

C.14.6 Pax 4/2-wire Mark, if configured: N11 N65

[ ] [ ]
Test E-Wire: Terminal, telephony E-Wire must N11 N65
Close and open at 3a-3b toggle [ ] [ ]
terminal, telephony
4a-4b

© ABB Power Automation Ltd Form 1KHL015944-EN

Rev. C
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 Commissioning Report EN C9/C12 HE
Test Permissible Test
No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

Measure Output level at Feed into terminal, Configured Output dBm

AF1. telephony 1a-1b level ±1 dB (600 W) N11: ___________
Feed 800 Hz with Measure at terminal, (Def: -3.5 dBm)
configured input level telephony 2a-2b N65: ___________
(Def.: -3.5 dBm).
(Activate at terminal,
telephony 4a-4b)
Measure Output level at Feed into terminal, Configured Output dBm
PAX2W. telephony 1a-1b level ±1 dB (600 W) N11: ___________
Feed 800 Hz with Measure at terminal, (Def: -7.0 dBm)
configured input level telephony 8a-8b N65: ___________
(Def.: -3.5 dBm).
(Activate at terminal,
telephony 4a-4b)
Test Local/Transit: Feed into rem. equ. at £ -40 dBm) dBm
Measure Output level at terminal, telephony 8a- (600 W) N11: ___________
AF1. 8b
Feed 800 Hz with Measure at terminal, N65: ___________
configured input level of telephony 2a-2b
PAX2W (Def: -0.0 dBm).
Activate terminal,
telephony 5a-4b and
4a-4b.
PAX-BLOCKING normal Measure at terminal, 6a-6b is open N11 N65
telephony 6a-6b, 6b-7a 6b-7a is closed [ ] [ ]
PAX-BLOCKING Measure at terminal, 6a-6b is closed N11 N65
blocked telephony 6a-6b, 6b-7a 6b-7a is open [ ] [ ]
Interrupt local loop, wait
about 30 sec.

C.14.7 Transit mode for Mark, if configured: N11 N65

E&M wire [ ] [ ]
Test E-Wire: Terminal, telephony E-Wire must N11 N65
Close and open at 3a-3b toggle [ ] [ ]
terminal, telephony
4a-4b

© ABB Power Automation Ltd Form 1KHL015944-EN

Rev. C
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 Commissioning Report EN C10/C12 HE
Test Permissible Test
No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

C.14.8 Testing the

teleoperation ports

C.14.9 Teleoperation AF1, not Mark, if configured: N11N22N28N34N54N65N71

used for telephony [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fed input level, [dBm], Expected Output Measured Output level
@ 800 Hz at AF1-IN level at AF1-OUT at AF1-OUT
N11: ___________ Feed into terminal, N11: ±1 dBm N11: ___________
telephony 1a-1b ______ (600 W)
Measure at terminal, _
N22: ___________ telephony 2a-2b N22: ±1 N22: ___________
______
_
N28: ___________ N28: ±1 N28: ___________
______
_
N34: ___________ N34: ±1 N34: ___________
______
_
N54: ___________ N54: ±1 N54: ___________
______
_
N65: ___________ N65: ±1 N65: ___________
______
_
N71: ___________ N71: ±1 N71: ___________
______
_

C.14.10 Teleoperation AF2 Mark, if configured: N11N22N28N34N54N65N71

[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fed input level, [dBm], Expected Output Measured Output level
@ 800 Hz at AF2-IN level at AF2-OUT at AF2-OUT
N11: ___________ Feed into terminal, N11: ±1 dBm N11: ___________
teleop. 3a-3b ______ (600 W)
Measure at terminal, _
N22: ___________ teleop. 4a-4b N22: ±1 N22: ___________
______
_
N28: ___________ N28: ±1 N28: ___________
______
_
N34: ___________ N34: ±1 N34: ___________
______
_
N54: ___________ N54: ±1 N54: ___________
______
_
N65: ___________ N65: ±1 N65: ___________
______
_
N71: ___________ N71: ±1 N71: ___________
______
_

© ABB Power Automation Ltd Form 1KHL015944-EN

Rev. C
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 Commissioning Report EN C11/C12 HE
Test Permissible Test
No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

C.14.11 Teleoperation AF3 Mark, if configured: N11N22N28N34N54N65N71

[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fed input level, [dBm], Expected Output Measured Output level
@ 800 Hz at AF3-IN level at AF3-OUT at AF3-OUT
N11: ___________ Feed into terminal, N11: ±1 dBm N11: ___________
teleop. 5a-5b ______ (600 W)
Measure at terminal, _
N22: ___________ teleop. 6a-6b N22: ±1 N22: ___________
______
_
N28: ___________ N28: ±1 N28: ___________
______
_
N34: ___________ N34: ±1 N34: ___________
______
_
N54: ___________ N54: ±1 N54: ___________
______
_
N65: ___________ N65: ±1 N65: ___________
______
_
N71: ___________ N71: ±1 N71: ___________
______
_

C.14.12 Teleoperation AF4 Mark, if configured: N11N22N28N34N54N65N71

[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Fed input level, [dBm], Expected Output Measured Output level
@ 800 Hz at AF4-IN level at AF4-OUT at AF4-OUT
N11: ___________ Feed into terminal, N11: ±1 dBm N11: ___________
teleop. 7a-7b ______ (600 W)
Measure at terminal, _
N22: ___________ teleop. 8a-8b N22: ±1 N22: ___________
______
_
N28: ___________ N28: ±1 N28: ___________
______
_
N34: ___________ N34: ±1 N34: ___________
______
_
N54: ___________ N54: ±1 N54: ___________
______
_
N65: ___________ N65: ±1 N65: ___________
______
_
N71: ___________ N71: ±1 N71: ___________
______
_

© ABB Power Automation Ltd Form 1KHL015944-EN

Rev. C
 Revision: Language: Page:
ETL500 Commissioning Report EN C12/C12 HE
Test Permissible Test
No. Test procedure Test point value Units result

C.14.13 Teleoperation AF4 Mark, if configured: N11 N65

used for ext. [ ] [ ]
Teleprotection
Test EXT-BOOST: Activate at terminal,
teleop. 9a-9b.
Fed input level, [dBm], Feed into terminal, Expected Output Measured Output level
@ 800 Hz at AF4-IN teleop. 7a-7b level at AF4-OUT at AF4-OUT
N11: ___________ Measure at terminal, N11: ±1 dBm N11: ___________
teleop. 8a-8b ______ (600 W)
_
N65: ___________ N65: ±1 N65: ___________
______
_

C.15 Documentation
If possible, take printout [ ]
of Configuration data
for reference.
Save the 'mmi' file on [ ]
disk with Serial No. of
ETL coded in the file
name, e.g.
‘400327C.MMI’.

C.16 Manual reset P4LQ front plate [ ]

Company: _________________________________

Department: _________________________________

Date: _________________________________

Signed: _________________________________

Visa: _________________________________

© ABB Power Automation Ltd Form 1KHL015944-EN

Rev. C
 ABB Power Automation Ltd 1KHL016075-EN
Archive No.: Rev. Date:
Programming Schedule NSK5 Modem G4AK <ETL500 Rel. 3> - A 99-06-24
Responsible Department: Prepared: Approved: Distribution: Lang.: Page:
NKT1 98-10-05 sig. TR 99-06-24 sig. RP - EN 1/4
Valid for: Derived from: Replaces: Classification-No.: File:
- - - - L16075AE Programming of
G4AK.doc

Power Line Carrier Equipment: Series ETL500

Programming Schedule NSK5 Modem G4AK <ETL500 Rel. 3>

Contents
1 Modem position............................................................................................... 2
1.1Station ............................................................................................................. 2
1.2Direction .......................................................................................................... 2
1.3Cabinet serial number ..................................................................................... 2
1.4Tier position in cabinet .................................................................................... 2
1.5Modem position in tier ..................................................................................... 2
2 Modem Programming...................................................................................... 2
2.1 Baudrate and channel ..................................................................................... 2
2.2 Transmit levels, receiver sensitivity and line termination impedance
settings....................................................................................................... 3
2.3 Receiver frequency ......................................................................................... 3
2.4 Setting of switch S3......................................................................................... 3
2.5 DTR continuously on....................................................................................... 4
2.6 RTS continuously on ....................................................................................... 4
2.7 X6 pin 15 / X2:a8 output function.................................................................... 4
2.8 Tx Clock on ..................................................................................................... 4
2.9 Signal ground connected to protective earth (bridge EA) ............................... 4
2.10 Frame ground / cable shield connected to protective earth (bridge EB) ........ 4
2.11 CTS user selectable delay .............................................................................. 4
2.12 DCD alarm contact output............................................................................... 4
2.13 Alarm supply ................................................................................................... 4
2.14 Carrier alarm ................................................................................................... 4

Designations and abbreviations used

Designation Meaning
[.....] programmed value
BW bandwidth
CTS clear to send - modem output signal
d default settings
DCD data carrier detect - modem output signal
DTR DTE ready - modem input signal
ETL power line carrier equipment
fc center frequency
fs frequency shift (deviation from center frequency)
N? position in tier
RTS request to send - modem input signal
Rx receiver
Tx transmitter
USA modem and alarm supply

The space available in this document is sufficient for one modem. For more than one modem please make additional copies of pages 2 to 4.

We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to
third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © ABB Power Automation Ltd, Switzerland.
 Revision: Language: Page:
A EN 2/4 1KHL016075-EN

1 Modem position

1.1 Station [.................................................]

1.2 Direction [.................................................]

1.3 Cabinet serial number [.................................................]

1.4 Tier position in cabinet [.................................................]

1.5 Modem position in tier N……

2 Modem Programming

Note: The MMI500 user interface gives a small support to set the switches S1, S2
and S3. If a FSK modem is configured in the menu ‘Configuration’ /
’Services’ / ‘Channel1’ or ‘2’ / ‘Number of G4AK’ then it’s possible to set the
application for the G4AK. Choose ‘Teleoperation, ext. teleprotection, FSK
modems’ in the ‘Configuration’ menu and the G4AK Nxx-tab to make the
channel settings. The ‘Manual settings on G4AK (incomplete)’ -section
shows the S1, S2 and S3 positions. These switch positions must be adjusted
to the corresponding G4AK.

2.1 Baudrate and channel

2.1.1 Setting of switch S1

channel BW fs fc 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(Bd) (Hz) (Hz) (Hz)
Tx/Rx 50 120 ± 30 off off off - - - - - [ ]
Tx/Rx 100 240 ± 60 off off on - - - - - [ ]
Tx/Rx 200 360 ± 90 off on off - - - - - [ ]
Tx/Rx 200 480 ± 120 off on on - - - - - [ ]
Tx/Rx 300 480 ± 120 on off off - - - - - [ ]
Tx/Rx 600 960 ± 240 on off on - - - - - [ ]
Tx channel center frequency (fc) [............] ON - - - [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
OFF - - - [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
or default channels:
Tx 50 V.23 120 ± 30 420 on on off off off off off off [ ]
Tx 1200 V.23 2400 ± 400 1700 on on off off off off off on [ ]
Tx/Rx 1200+Speech 1640 ± 400 2860 on on off on off off on off [ ]
Tx/Rx 2400 3200 ± 800 2000 on on on on off off on on [ ]

Programming of S1: ON [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
OFF [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
 Revision: Language: Page:
A EN 3/4 1KHL016075-EN

2.2 Transmit levels, receiver sensitivity and line termination impedance settings
Transmit level Receiver sensitivity
Baud rate Jack Tx System level Jumpers Receive Switch S2
Front panel level 1 2 3
50 Bd -22 dBu (-12 dBm0) AB, AH, CE -39 dBu on off on [ ]
100 Bd -22 dBu (-12 dBm0) AB, AH, CE -36 dBu on off off [ ]
200 Bd, 300 Bd -19 dBu (-9 dBm0) AB, AH, CD -33 dBu off on on [ ]
[.……..] Bd -16 dBu (-6 dBm0) AB, AH, CC -30 dBu off on off [ ]
600 Bd, 1200 Bd+S -13 dBu (-3 dBm0) AB, AH, CB -27 dBu off off on [ ]
1200 Bd (V.23), 2400 Bd -10 dBu (0 dBm0) AB, AH, CA -24 dBu off off off [ ]
variable
[...…...] dBu AB, AH, CF […..]dBu […...] […...] […...] [ ]
Note: Levels only valid without receive attenuation

2.3 Receiver frequency

2.3.1 Setting of switch S2

channel BW fs fc 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(Bd) (Hz) (Hz) (Hz)
Rx channel center frequency (fc) [............] ON - - - [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
OFF - - - [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
or default channels:
Rx 50 V.23 120 ± 30 420 - - - off off off off off [ ]
Rx 1200 V.23 2400 ± 400 1700 - - - off off off off on [ ]
Rx 1200+Speech 1640 ± 400 2860 - - - on off off on off [ ]
Rx 2400 3200 ± 800 2000 - - - on off off on on [ ]

Programming of S2: ON [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
OFF [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

2.3.2 Attenuation 0 dB AC [ ]d
6 dB AD [ ]
12 dB AE [ ]

2.4 Setting of switch S3

ON OFF
2.4.1 Regenerator ON / OFF (1) [ ] [ ]d

2.4.2 Regenerator synchronization polarity mark-space (2) [ ]

space-mark [ ]d

2.4.3 Equalization filter (3) [x]

(4) [x]
(5) [x]
(6) [x]
(7) [x]
(8) [x]

2.4.4 Continuous transmit supervision ON / OFF (9) [ ] [ ]d

not used (10) [x]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Programming of S3: ON [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
OFF [ ] [ ] [x] [x] [x] [x] [x] [x] [ ] [x]
 Revision: Language: Page:
A EN 4/4 1KHL016075-EN

2.5 DTR continuously on EC [ ]

2.6 RTS continuously on ED [ ]

2.7 X6 pin 15 / X2:a8 output function signal quality EE-XD [ ]

Tx clock EF-XD [ ]d

2.8 Tx Clock on EI [ ]d
remove EI [ ]

2.9 Signal ground connected to protective earth (bridge EA)

R250 R251
open - - [ ]d
110 ohm 220 ohm 220 ohm [ ]
short circuit wire bridge - [ ]

2.10 Frame ground / cable shield connected to protective earth (bridge EB)
R68 R69
open - - [ ]
110 ohm 220 ohm 220 ohm [ ]d
short circuit wire bridge - [ ]

2.11 CTS user selectable delay 0.5 ms → R209=0.33 kohm [ ]d

[...............] ms R209 [.............] kohm

2.12 DCD alarm contact output closed for no carrier DA [ ]d

open for no carrier DB [ ]

2.13 Alarm supply ETL (USA) ZA [ x ]d

2.14 Carrier alarm

2.14.1 Carrier failure indicated on common alarm DC [ ]

2.14.2 Carrier alarm contacts disabled DD [ ]

2.14.3 Carrier alarm delay time 5 sec → R199=150 kohm [ ]d

[...............] sec R199 [..............] kohm

2.14.4 Carrier alarm hold time 0.2 sec → R198=6.8 kohm [ ]d

[...............] sec R198 [..............] kohm

Note: After programming the modules are not interchangeable. When exchanging modules they must be
reprogrammed.
 ABB Power Automation Ltd 1KHL016378-EN
Archive No.: Rev. Date:
Firmware Download: <ETL500 Rel. 3> - A 99-12-03
Responsible Department: Prepared: Approved: Distribution: Lang.: Page:
NKT 99-05-31 A. Maier 99-12-22 sig. H. Benninger - EN 1/6
Valid for: Derived from: Replaces: Classification-No.: File:
- - - -

Power Line Carrier Equipment: Series ETL500

Firmware Download: <ETL500 Rel. 3>

Contents

1 Purpose of document 2
2 General 2
2.1 Necessity for a firmware download 2
2.2 Risks of a firmware download 2
2.3 Firmware download files 3
2.4 Firmware download parameters 3
2.4.1 Automatic firmware download 3
2.4.2 User controlled firmware download 3
3 Firmware download 4
3.1 Update an nonconfigured equipment 4
3.2 Update an already configured equipment 4
3.3 Modify an equipment if the configuration download detects an incompatibility 5
3.4 Extend the equipment and the MMI500 informs you about firmware incompatibilities 5
3.5 Exchange a module and the MMI500 informs you about firmware incompatibilities 5

List of equipment:
PC with Windows 95, 98 or NT
MMI500 software (Version 3.05 or higher)
Firmware download files
PC P4LQ (1:1 serial RS232) cable

Note:
• Please refer 1KHL015559 for compatibility between software MMI500, firmware and hardware of ETL500.

We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to
third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © ABB Power Automation Ltd, Switzerland.
 Revision: Language: Page:
A EN 2/6 1KHL016378-EN

1 Purpose of document
This document describes the firmware download process for the equipment ETL500 Rel. 3,
supported by the PC program MMI500 version 3.05 or higher.

2 General
The MMI500 Version 3.05 or higher supports firmware download for the modules P4LQA, O4LE
and G4AI.
The firmware download gives you the opportunity to update the equipment to the latest release or
to modify a module ordered from stock to the actual release in your equipment.
The automatic release detection in the MMI500 identifies incompatibilities between firmware
versions on the modules in an equipment before the configuration upload or download process is
executed. If any incompatibility is recognized, you will be informed that a firmware update has to be
executed. In this case a configuration download is not possible. The automatic release detection
doesn’t detect if you are using the latest release. For information about available releases and
about compatibility between software, firmware and hardware of the ETL500 sysem please refer to
the document „Compatibility requirements for ETL500“ (1KHL015559).

2.1 Necessity for a firmware download

The automatic firmware download has to be used in the following cases:
1. Update an already configured equipment with automatic backup and restore of the
configuration.
Typically, this might become necessary when firmware versions are available with new
functionality.
2. Update an nonconfigured equipment with download of the configuration settings from a file.
Typically, this might become necessary after the assembly of the equipment.
3. Modify an equipment if the configuration download (MMI500) detects an incompatibility.
Possible situations are if you download a configuration to a virgin equipment or the MMI500
has extended functionality, which is not available on the firmware in the equipment.
4. Extend the equipment and the MMI500 informs you about firmware incompatibilities.
5. Exchange a module and the MMI500 informs you about firmware incompatibilities.

2.2 Risks of a firmware download

The firmware download procedure should be performed exclusively by instructed service
personnel. The operator is not allowed to perform this operation.

Caution ACTIVATING A FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD WILL CAUSE MALFUNCTION

OF THE PLC-LINK.

Caution NEVER SWITCH OFF THE POWER TO THE EQUIPMENT WHILE A

FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD IS IN PROGRESS.

Violation of this rule will produce a system with incomplete firmware on one of
the boards, so that it will not work anymore. If this should happen, you'll have
to send back the affected board for repair, specifying the firmware version
you need.

Caution REMOVING EPROMS FROM A BOARD OR TRYING TO DO SO CAN

RESULT IN IRREPAIRABLE DAMAGE TO THE BOARD.

Caution Should the communication to the equipment be interrupted during the

download process, correct the communication problem WITHOUT switching
off the power to the equipment and restart the firmware download.
 Revision: Language: Page:
A EN 3/6 1KHL016378-EN

Caution Firmware download should only be executed from PCs with a correctly
installed Windows operating system. Do not use PCs which show signs of
instability such as premature abnormal terminations of programs.

Caution To prevent interruptions of the communication during firmware download, it

is a good idea to
- close all programs running on the PC except MMI500,
- stop any programs running on the PC in the background such as virus
scanners,
- disable the screen saver of the PC,

before starting the firmware download.

Caution Keep your hands away from keyboard and mouse while a firmware download
is in progress except when MMI500 prompts you to do so.

2.3 Firmware download files

To perform a firmware download of the system, you need the download files supplied together with
the MMI500 software. These files are stored in the release directory. You can find the release
directories in the directory 'Firmware'. Make sure that you are using the highest release if you
update your equipment.
Example for a release directory: C:\Program Files\ABB\MMI500\Firmware\Release 3.1\*.ldr

Hardware module Firmware file Example

P4LQ p4lq_***.ldr p4lq_304.ldr
O4LE o4le_***.ldr o4le_203.ldr
G4AI g4ai_***.ldr g4ai_201.ldr

2.4 Firmware download parameters

The Firmware download dialog box contains a field with download parameters. You can choose
either an automatic firmware download or a user controlled firmware download by deactivating the
check box.

2.4.1 Automatic firmware download

This is the recommended method to download the firmware. The MMI500 executes all necessary
actions for a proper operation. The checkbox Automatic firmware download has to be checked.
The download process compares the firmware version on the modules with the firmware version in
the selected download files. The download to a module is not executed if the versions are equal.
So only the modules are modified, which have not the same version as in the selected download
file.

2.4.2 User controlled firmware download

Note: Only for authorized and properly trained persons.

The user controlled download is not recommended. Please use automatic firmware download.
The user controlled firmware download gives you the opportunity to modify one selected module in
an equipment. Deactivating the checkbox for automatic firmware download enables the buttons
Backup system parameter, Reset system and Restore system parameter. Please follow the
instruction in the “Download status & progress instruction” window.
 Revision: Language: Page:
A EN 4/6 1KHL016378-EN

3 Firmware download

3.1 Update an nonconfigured equipment

1. On the File menu click Open. This opens the Open dialog box. Select the configuration file
and click Open.
2. From the Equipment menu click Connect. This opens the Connect dialog box.
3. Click Read & Write access
4. Click OK.
5. On the Equipment menu, click Commissioning and maintenance and then click Firmware
download…
6. In the following message box click YES if you are aware of a malfunction of the PLC link. This
opens the Firmware download dialog box. Otherwise click No.
7. The checkbox Automatic firmware download has to be checked.
8. Click Start firmware download to start the operation.
9. The following message box informs you which download files are used. Be sure that all files
are from the same release directory.
Click Yes to accept these files. This starts the firmware download. The MMI500 automatically
performs the update, the system reset and downloads the new system configuration.
Click No to select other files. This opens a file open dialog box for each kind of download file.
Click Cancel to stop firmware download.
10. Wait until the Cancel button changes to the active state.
11. Click Cancel to leave the firmware download dialog box.

3.2 Update an already configured equipment

On the File menu click New. This opens the Connect dialog box.
Click Logon, Equipment ID: 0
Click Read & Write access
Click Upload configuration
Click OK. This opens a MMI500 child window.

Note: If you forget to perform a configuration upload, the equipment configuration

will be lost! The firmware download takes the actual configuration in this
window. This may be either a default configuration or a configuration previosly
loaded from a file.
1. On the Equipment menu, click Commissioning and maintenance and then click Firmware
download…
2. In the following message box click YES if you are aware of a malfunction of the PLC link. This
opens the Firmware download dialog box. Otherwise click No.
3. Read the displayed Download status & progress instruction to check if it contains
- Backup system parameter. If not, you forgot uploading the configuration.
4. The checkbox Automatic firmware download has to be checked.
5. Click Start firmware download to start the operation.
The MMI500 starts the backup system parameter process.
6. The following message box informs you which download files are used. Be sure that all files
are from the same release directory.
Click Yes to accept these files. This starts the firmware download. The MMI500 automatically
performs a system reset and restores the system configuration.
Click No to select other files. This opens a file open dialog box for each kind of download file.
Click Cancel to stop firmware download.
7. Wait until the Cancel button changes to the active state.
8. Click Cancel to leave the firmware download dialog box.
 Revision: Language: Page:
A EN 5/6 1KHL016378-EN

3.3 Modify an equipment if the configuration download detects an

incompatibility
The MMI500 configuration download detects an incompatible firmware in the equipment and call for
a firmware download.

1. You are informed of the incompatibility and in some cases the MMI500 modifies the
configuration and notifies you bout it.
2. Now you have to undo these modifications of the configuration.
3. On the Equipment menu, click Commissioning and maintenance and then click Firmware
download…
4. In the following message box click YES if you are aware of a malfunction of the PLC link. This
opens the Firmware download dialog box. Otherwise click No.
5. The checkbox Automatic firmware download has to be checked.
6. Click Start firmware download to start the operation.
7. The following message box informs you which download files are used. Be sure that all files
are from the same release directory.
Click Yes to accept these files. This starts the firmware download. The MMI500 automatically
performs a system reset and downloads the new system configuration.
Click No to select other files. This opens a file open dialog box for each kind of download file.
Click Cancel to stop firmware download.
8. Wait until the Cancel button changes to the active state.
9. Click Cancel to leave the firmware download dialog box.

3.4 Extend the equipment and the MMI500 informs you about firmware
incompatibilities
1. On the File menu click New. This opens the Connect dialog box.
2. Click Logon, Equipment ID: 0
3. Click Read & Write access
4. Click Upload configuration
5. Click OK. This opens a MMI500 child window.
6. On the Configuration menu click Services and choose new services.
7. On the File menu click Save. This opens the Save as dialog box. Click Save.
8. Close the MMI500 window (File, Close)
9. Switch off the equipment.
10. Plug in the new modules.
11. Switch on the equipment.
12. On the File menu click Open. This opens the Open dialog box. Select the previously saved
configuration file and click Open.
13. From the Equipment menu click Connect. This opens the Connect dialog box.
14. Click Read & Write access
15. Click OK.
16. From the Equipment menu click Download configuration. This process automatically
checks the firmware compatibility of the new modules. If an incompatibility is detected proceed
with chapter 2.3. If not, the firmware is fully compatible to the other modules in the equipment.

3.5 Exchange a module and the MMI500 informs you about firmware
incompatibilities
If you have to exchange a module in case of any damage, switch off the equiment, replace the new
module and switch it on again. You can use the last configuration stored in a file to update the
equipment configuration.
The following steps describes the connect and configuration download process with the MMI500.
 Revision: Language: Page:
A EN 6/6 1KHL016378-EN

1. On the File menu click Open. This opens the Open dialog box. Select the configuration file
and click Open.
2. From the Equipment menu click Connect. This opens the Connect dialog box.
3. Click Read & Write access
4. Click OK.
5. From the Equipment menu click Download configuration. This process automatically
checks the firmware compatibility of the replaced module. If an incompatibility is detected
proceed with chapter 2.3. If not, the firmware is fully compatible to the other modules in the
equipment.
 ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHL016399-EN
Archive No.: Rev. Date:
Anomaly List < ETL500 Rel. 3 > - ------- -------
Responsible Department: Prepared: Approved: Distribution: Lang.: Page:
NKT 99-05-31 sig. A. Maier 02-08-23 H. Benninger - EN 1/4
Valid for: Derived from: Replaces: Classification-No.: File:
- - - -

Power Line Carrier Equipment: Series ETL500

Anomaly List < ETL500 Rel. 3 >

Contents
1 Purpose........................................................................................................... 1
2 Anomalies ....................................................................................................... 2
2.1 Port AF1 in 8 kHz mode.................................................................................. 2
2.2 Service phone in 8 kHz mode......................................................................... 2
2.3 Check Tx RF filter with ETL505 ...................................................................... 2
2.4 NSD550 looptest............................................................................................. 3
2.5 NSD550 Rx guard output................................................................................ 3
2.6 NSD550 looptest / telephony .......................................................................... 3
2.7 Channel 2 Status saved to file ........................................................................ 4

1 Purpose
This document describes the currently known anomalies in the behaviour of the ETL500 Rel. 3
system. Such anomalies express themselves in unexpected system behaviour not described in the
instruction manual ETL500 Rel. 3 (1KHL015946-EN), Edition 99-12-24.
This document is updated immediately after a new anomaly has been discovered and verified. For
that reason, the approval date instead of a revision index is used to identify consecutive versions of
this document.

We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to
third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © ABB Switzerland Ltd, Switzerland.
 Date of approval: Language: Page:
00-06-30 EN 2/4 1KHL016399-EN

2 Anomalies
For each anomaly, the following information is given:
- the types of the hardware modules and/or the versions of firmware or software taken to be
responsible for the observed anomaly,
- a description of the anomaly,
- a work around (if any).

2.1 Port AF1 in 8 kHz mode

2.1.1 Hardware types, software and/or firmware versions

- O4LE firmware version ³ 1.10

2.1.2 Description
With MMI500, configure the ETL for 8 kHz operation with the service phone disabled, download
this configuration and store it to EPROM. After having executed these steps, the port AF1 of the
O4LE board at slot N11 doesn't work.

2.1.3 Work around

The port will come into life after a system reset.

2.2 Service phone in 8 kHz mode

2.2.1 Hardware types, software and/or firmware versions

- O4LE firmware version ³ 1.10

2.2.2 Description
When in 8kHz mode an O4LE reset or an ETL500 system reset is performed while the service
phone is off hook, port AF1 will not be disabled, so that signals injected into this port will disturb the
communication over the service phone.

2.2.3 Work around

After an O4LE reset or an ETL500 system reset, put the service phones at both sides of the link on
hook for at least 4 sec.

2.3 Check Tx RF filter with ETL505

2.3.1 Hardware types, software and/or firmware versions

- MMI500 version ³ 3.12

2.3.2 Description
When in the dialogbox Tuning & Testing / Tune Tx RF filter / Check Tx RF filter, after having
pressed the button Activate f0 and having entered a value in the field Measured level and one of
buttons Activate f0–2kHz, Activate f0+2kHz, Activate f0–16kHz or Activate f0+16kHz is pressed
while the MMI500 is communicating with the ETL505, error messages such as Out of memory will
be displayed and the generated frequencies will not be correct.
 Date of approval: Language: Page:
00-06-30 EN 3/4 1KHL016399-EN
2.3.3 Work around
Press the button Activate f0 once again, correct the value in the field Measured level if necessary
and wait until the message Activate tuning tone: 100% transmitted/received appears in the
status line at the bottom of the MMI500 window before pressing any further buttons.

2.4 NSD550 looptest

2.4.1 Hardware types, software and/or firmware versions

- MMI500 version ³ 2.06

2.4.2 Description
The function Equipment / Commissioning and maintenance / NSD550 send looptest can be
executed when the NSD550 is disabled. If telephony is activated on the link, the telephones might
ring.

2.4.3 Work around

Do not execute the function Equipment / Commissioning and maintenance / NSD550 send
looptest when the NSD550 is disabled.

2.5 NSD550 Rx guard output

2.5.1 Hardware types, software and/or firmware versions

- MMI500 version ³ 2.06
- ETL500 firmware version ³ 3.03 (on P4LQ)
- G4AI firmware version ³ 1.01

2.5.2 Description
If the NSD550 is operated in mode 2+2 (2 non-coded commands A and B and 2 coded commands
C and D) with own guard signal at 2240 Hz (implying a speech cutoff frequency of 2000 Hz), the
RX guard output is fluctuating when the command combinations A+D or B+C are received.

2.5.3 Work around

Use the ETL pilot as guard signal for the NSD550. If this is not feasible for some reason, set the
speech cutoff frequency to 2200 or 2400 Hz.

2.6 NSD550 looptest / telephony

2.6.1 Hardware types, software and/or firmware versions

- MMI500 version £ 3.05

2.6.2 Description
The function NSD550 Automatic loop test can be active even when the NSD550 is disabled. This
occurs if in the menu Configuration / NSD550 / System settings the Automatic loop test is
switched on and after this the function NSD550 is disabled without first switching off the Automatic
loop test. Under these circumstances, E and M wire signalling will be disturbed intermittently
(every 5 -15 min.), thereby possibly interrupting an active telephony link.

2.6.3 Work around

Use MMI500 version 3.12 (or higher), where the anomaly has been fixed. Connect a PC with
MMI500 Version 3.12 or higher to the ETL500. Upload the configuration, change to the menu
Configuration / NSD550 / System settings and make sure that the checkbox for the Automatic
 Date of approval: Language: Page:
00-06-30 EN 4/4 1KHL016399-EN
loop test is not checked. Press the Cancel button. Download the configuration and store it to
Eprom.

2.7 Channel 2 Status saved to file

2.7.1 Hardware types, software and/or firmware versions

- MMI500 version £ 3.12

2.7.2 Description
When the equipment status of a double channel equipment is is saved to file, Channel 2 Status is
overwritten with Channel 1 Status.

2.7.3 Work around

None.
TECHNICAL DATA
ETL500 Rel.3
ETL500 complies with EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low-Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC.

ETL500 complies with or exceeds the requirements according to IEC publication 60495, second
edition, Sept. 1993, with reference to single sideband PLC equipment.

The integrated teleprotection equipment NSD550 complies with or exceeds the requirements
according to IEC publication 60834-1 "Teleprotection Equipment of Power Systems - Performance
and Testing – Part 1: Command Systems”.

System data
Operating mode Point-to point
Two wire frequency duplex

Modulation Single side band with suppressed carrier

Single conversion with direct digital synthesis (DDS)

Equipment type ETL505 ETL540 ETL580

Nominal RF output power 5W 40 W 80 W

AF bandwidth ETL505 ETL540/ETL580 ETL540/ETL580

Channel 1 300 to 4000 Hz 300 to 4000 Hz 300 to 8000 Hz
Channel 2 - 300 to 4000 Hz -

Carrier frequency range: ETL505 ETL540/ETL580

Total range 40 to 500 kHz, 24 to 500 kHz
programmable 40 to 500 kHz, 40 to 500 kHz

Carrier frequency stability ±10 x 10-6 (≤ ±5 Hz)

Nominal output impedance 75 or 125 Ohm unbalanced

Optional 150 Ohm balanced (balance to ground ≥ 40 dB)

Return loss in the

transmitter band ≥12 dB

Interface to service PC RS-232 / 9600 bps

Alarm outputs Floating changeover contacts for:

- System alarm / Cabinet alarm
- Hardware alarm
- Link alarm

ETL505 ETL540 ETL580 ETL540 ETL580 ETL540 ETL580

Number of channels 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
Nominal channel bandwidth: 4 kHz 4 kHz 4 kHz 4 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 8 kHz
Maximum line attenuation: 51 dB 60 dB 63 dB 54 dB 57 dB 57 dB 60 dB

To allow for line noise level,

the effective line attenuation
should not exceed 25 to 30 dB 35 to 40dB 38 to 43 dB 30 to 35dB 33 to 38 dB 32 to 37 dB 35 to 40 dB

ABB Power Automation Ltd. Edition 2000-01-05 1 / 18

1KHL015945-EN
 Technical data ETL500 Rel. 3
Frequency spacing
Frequency gap between channels of several equipments operating in parallel on a common line
- transmitter to its own receiver ≥ 0 kHz
- transmitter to adjacent transmitter ≥ 8 kHz
- transmitter to adjacent receiver ≥ 4 kHz
- receiver to adjacent receiver ≥ 0 kHz

Tapping loss
introduced when several sets of PLC are connected to the same coupling equipment.
- 2 transmitters with min. gap 8 kHz ≤ 1.5 dB
- Tx and Rx band adjacent typ. 1 dB

Attenuation distortion of the 4 kHz AF channel

Broadband repeater operation 0.3 to 4.00 kHz
0.3 to 4.0 kHz -0.9/+0.9 dB

Speech band without compandor

0.3 to 3.4 kHz Refer to Fig. 9, IEC 60495
0.3 to 2.4 kHz Refer to Fig. 11, IEC 60495
0.3 to 2.0 kHz Refer to Fig. 11, IEC 60495

Group delay distortion of the 4 kHz AF channel

Broadband repeater operation 0.3 to 3.84 kHz
0.3 to 3.6 kHz Refer to Fig. 10, IEC 60495

Broadband repeater operation 0.3 to 3.84 kHz with allpass filter

- 0.5 to 0.8 kHz ≤ 1.5 ms
- 0.8 to 3.6 kHz ≤ 0.2 ms

Speech band 0.3 to 3.4 kHz Refer to Fig. 10, IEC 60495

Speech band 0.3 to 2.4 kHz Refer to Fig. 12, IEC 60495

Speech band 0.3 to 2.0 kHz Refer to Fig. 12, IEC 60495

Linearity
Without compandor and limiter ≤ ±0.3 dB
referred to 0 dBm0 in the range from -10 to 0 dBm0

Compandor characteristics Complies with ITU G. 162

Nonlinear distortion Complies with IEC 60495, § 5.3.1.4

Teleoperation signals ≤ 1%

Near and far-end cross-talk

Interference level in speech band
produced by any tone
in super audio band *) ≤ -50 dBm0p

Near and far-end cross-talk attenuation

in double-channel operation *) ≥ 50 dB

Quiescent noise *) ≤ -55 dBm0p

*) Measured with an artificial line with the following attenuation for operation over one or two 4 kHz channels:
ETL505 ETL540 ETL580 ETL540 ETL580
Number of channels 1 1 1 2 2
Attenuation of artificial line 22 dB 31 dB 34 dB 25 dB 28 dB

AF frequency off-set ≈ 0 Hz

AF muting (Squelch)
- activated by SNR alarm *)
- for all speech outputs
- selectable for all teleoperation outputs

*) SNR alarm threshold: 1 to 30 dB adjustable by MMI

Transmitter data:
ETL505 ETL540 ETL580
Peak envelope power (PEP) 5W 40 W 80 W
(+37 dBm) (+46 dBm) (+49 dBm)
including pilot signal under nominal load conditions at coaxial output

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-05 2 / 18

1KHL015945-EN
 Technical data ETL500 Rel. 3
Spurious signal suppression
- at the limits of the bandwidth ≥ 60 dB
- harmonic suppression ≥ 80 dB
- suppression of unwanted sidebands ≥ 80 dB

Pilot channel
Channel bandwidth 4 kHz Channel bandwidth 8 kHz
Number of pilots 1 per channel 1
Nominal frequency 3840 Hz 7860 Hz
Available frequencies 2160 to 3840 Hz individually adjustable 7860 Hz (fixed)
by MMI in steps of 60 Hz
Level -6 dBm0 -6 dBm0
Modulation method 4-PSK 4-PSK

Receiver data
RF sensitivity referred to the
pilot level at the RF input: -30 dBm

Selectivity for the 4 kHz version

≥ 0.3 kHz from the band limits: 65 dB
≥ 4 kHz from the band limits: 75 dB

Image rejection ≥ 75 dB

Automatic gain control (AGC) AF output level variation remains within 1 dB for a +10/ -30 dB variation of RF input level.

AGC time constant 0.5 dB /sec for level increase and decrease

Equalizer
One equalizer per 4 kHz channel
Channel equalization can be initiated for both directions by MMI from either side of the link.
Equalization of Amplitude and group delay response or
Amplitude response only
Available equalizer grades low medium high
Amplitude response equalization range ≈ ±4 dB ≈ ±8 dB ≈ ±12 dB
Length of equalizer filter short medium long

MMI500 user interface program

Hardware requirements PC with Windows 95, 98 or NT

Configuration of modules RF converter P4LQ

AF interface O4LE
Teleprotection interface G4AI

Configuration file handling (File/Save, File/Open)

Channel equalization for channels with bandwidth 4 kHz

graphical display of channel amplitude response with and without equalization

Spectrum analyzer for AF signals with graphical display of measured AF spectra

AF test tone generator

Built in tuning and testing procedures for

Tx filter E5LA/B, P4LS
Rx filter P4LR, P4LS
RF hybrid P3LB, P3DA
Power amplifier P1LA, P4LS

Password protected access to equipment

Communication to the equipment via one or several of the following communication media:
Serial cable at 9600 bps
Embedded operation channel (EOC) at 100 bps
Intranet/Internet using IP with server program SVR500 (option)
Dial up telephone modem connection at 9600 bps

Element management networking address range for up to 65000 ETL500 terminals

with alarm polling facility for all terminals over all supported communication media

Log file of alarms with date/time stamp generated with alarm polling facility

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-05 3 / 18

1KHL015945-EN
 Technical data ETL500 Rel. 3
Event recorder Storage capacity: ≥ 1000 command events plus ≥ 1000 alarm events
Time resolution 1 ms with external clock synchronization
Upload of all events recorded in an equipment
Text display of events
Graphical display of events with zooming
Events can be saved to file

Built in procedure for firmware download

Alarms
Hardware alarm indicates hardware failure
Link alarm indicates link failure
System or cabinet alarm indicates hardware and/or link failure
Alarm 1, Alarm 2 Can be configured individually by MMI500 as sum (OR function) of one or several of the following
alarms:
Local equipment: P4LQ alarm Remote equipment: P4LQ alarm
Warning Warning
System alarm System alarm
Link alarm Link alarm
Hardware alarm Hardware alarm
NSD550 alarm NSD550 alarm
Pickup time hardware alarm 0.1 to 120 s in steps of 0.1 s
Hold time hardware alarm 0.1 to 120 s in steps of 0.1 s
Pickup time link alarm 0.1 to 120 s in steps of 0.1 s
Hold time link alarm 0.1 to 120 s in steps of 0.1 s
Pickup time alarm 1 0.1 to 120 s in steps of 0.1 s
Hold time alarm 1 0.1 to 120 s in steps of 0.1 s
Pickup time alarm 2 0.1 to 120 s in steps of 0.1 s
Hold time alarm 2 0.1 to 120 s in steps of 0.1 s

P4LQ alarm outputs

3 relays, one for hardware-, one for link- and one for cabinet/system-alarm.
One normally closed (NC) or normally open (NO) contact per relay.
Contact rating AC-Load:
- ohmic load 5 A/250 VAC 1)
- inductive load 3 A/250 VAC

Contact rating DC-Load: 2) 24 VDC/5 A

36 VDC/1 A
48 VDC/0.7 A
60 VDC/0.6 A
72 VDC/0.5 A
96 VDC/0.4 A
110 VDC/0.35 A
220 VDC/0.25 A
1)
Remark: Maximum switching current is 4.74 A limited by the cable, type V9MQ
2)
Remark: Nominal DC voltage range according to IEC 38

R1BC alarm outputs

8 relays, jumper programmable for system/cabinet alarm or alarms 1or 2.
One normally closed (NC) or normally open (NO) contact per relay.
Contact rating AC-Load:
- ohmic load 8 A/250 VAC 1)
- inductive load 4 A/250 VAC

Contact rating DC-Load: 2) 24 VDC/5.6 A

36 VDC/1.75 A
48 VDC/1.05 A
60 VDC/0.83 A
72 VDC/0.75 A
96 VDC/0.66 A
110 VDC/0.63 A
220 VDC/0.56 A
1)
Remark: Maximum switching current is 4.74 A limited by the cable, type V9MR
2)
Remark: Nominal DC voltage range according to IEC 38

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-05 4 / 18

1KHL015945-EN
 Technical data ETL500 Rel. 3

Telephony on AF interface O4LE in 4 kHz channel

One O4LE board can carry the telephony functions for one PLC channel.
Each PLC channel is configurable individually for one of the following telephony operation modes:
Telephony operation mode MMI500 setting equipment A MMI500 setting equipment B
Point to point hot line (direct phone) Hot Line direct telephone Hot Line direct telephone
Remote subscriber for PAX 2-wire Remote subscriber PAX 2-wire
Remote subscriber for PAX 4-wire Remote subscriber 4-wire at AF1
4-wire PAX connection
with E&M-signalling 4-wire at AF1 4-wire at AF1
4/2-wire PAX connection with
E&M signalling and hybrid control 4/2-wire at AF1 4/2-wire at AF1
Transit mode for E&M-wire Transit mode for E&M-wire Transit mode for E&M-wire
Service telephone *) Service phone enabled *) Service phone enabled *)

*) The service telephone can be used in combination with any one of the other telephony operation modes. However, these modes always
have priority over the service telephone.

4-wire PAX interface

Nominal transmit level (from O4LE) -3.5 dBm
Transmit impedance 600 Ohms balanced
Transmit level range -20 to +5.5 dBm in steps of 0.5 dB
Nominal receive level (to O4LE) -3.5 dBm
Receive impedance 600 Ohms balanced
Receive level range -20 to +4 dBm in steps of 0.5 dB
Balance to ground ≥ 40 dB
Return loss ≥ 14 dB

Control output E-wire

Type floating solid state contact (potential free)
Inversion programmable
Max. ratings 50 mA / 72 V
Off resistance ≥ 1 Mohm
On resistance ≤ 50 Ohm

Control inputs M-wire and Local/Transit

Active state Loop resistance ≤ 500 Ohm
Inactive state Loop resistance ≥ 50 kOhm
Auxiliary voltage 24 VDC ± 30 %
Inversion For both inputs individually programmable

2-wire subscriber interface

Galvanically isolated
Nominal receive level (to O4LE) 0 dBm
Impedance 600 Ohms balanced
Receive level range -17 to +4 dBm in steps of 0.5 dB
Nominal transmit level (from O4LE) -7 dBm
Transmit level range -17 to +1 dBm in steps of 0.5 dB
Balance to ground ≥ 40 dB
Return loss ≥ 14 dB
Transhybrid loss
- 300 – 500 Hz ≥ 13 dB
- 500 – 2500 Hz ≥ 18 dB
- 2500 – 3400 Hz ≥ 14 dB

2-wire PAX interface 25

Galvanically isolated
Nominal receive level (from O4LE) 0 dBm
Impedance 600 Ohms balanced 20
Receive level range -17 to +4 dBm in steps of 0.5 dB
Nominal transmit level (to O4LE) -7 dBm
Voltage [V]

15
Transmit level range -17 to +1 dBm in steps of 0.5 dB
Balance to ground ≥ 40 dB
Return loss ≥ 14 dB 10
Transhybrid loss
- 300 – 500 Hz ≥ 13 dB
5
- 500 – 2500 Hz ≥ 18 dB
- 2500 – 3400 Hz ≥ 14 dB
Impedance On Hook 0
- at DC ≥ 5 MOhm 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
- at 20 and 25 Hz ≥ 3 kOhm, ≤ 50 kOhm
DC impedance Off Hook in hatched area of figure -> Current [mA]

DC impedance Off Hook

PAX blocking output
One normally closed (NC) or normally open (NO) relay contact
Max. ratings 50 mA / 72 V
Off resistance ≥ 1 Mohm
On resistance ≤ 50 Ohm

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-05 5 / 18

1KHL015945-EN
 Technical data ETL500 Rel. 3
Speech filter
Cut-off frequency Fco 2.0 kHz to 3.4 kHz in steps of 200 Hz
Standard cut-off frequencies 2000 / 2200 / 2400 / 3400 Hz
Attenuation
- for frequencies ≥ Fco + 120 Hz ≥ 50 dB
- between 49 and 51 Hz ≥ 50 dB
- for frequencies ≤ 150 Hz ≥ 30 dB

Speech limiter
Limiter characteristics input level [dBm0] output level [dBm0]
≤ -1 linear
+3 to +15 ≤ +3

Compandor according to ITU G.162

Compression factor 2
Modes of operation Off, On, or Controlled by input Local/Transit

Ringing generator
Ringing frequency 25 or 50 Hz ± 15 Hz
Ringing voltage
- open circuit ≥ 44 Vrms, typ. 50 Vrms
- loaded with 2.333 kOhm ≥ 36 Vrms
Ringing cadence 1 sec on, 4 sec off

Ringing detector
Ringing voltage range 20 to 130 Vrms
Ringing frequency 17 to 55 Hz
Pick-up threshold Ringing voltage > 20 Vrms and
Ringing duration ≥ 200 ms and
Ringing frequency 17 to 55 Hz
Safe against pick-up Ringing voltage ≤ 10 Vrms or
Ringing duration ≤ 125 ms

Off hook detector

Pick-up threshold *) off-hook > 15 mA
Safe against pick-up on-hook < 5 mA
*) No local ringing current infeed

Ring-back tone generator

Frequency 533 Hz ± 15 Hz
Level -10 dBm0 ± 1 dB
Cadence same as ringing generator

DC Feed
Polarity
- a-wire positive
- b-wire negative
Open loop voltage 48 VDC ± 15%
Short circuit current ≥ 25 mA
Off hook nominal current ≤ 35 mA

Pulse dialling
Pulse transmission < 60 Bd, 8 - 18 pulses/ sec., make to break 1:2
Dial pulse transmission distortion ≤ 2 ms

E&M-signalling
Pulse transmission distortion ≤ 2 ms

Inband signalling
DTMF supported
MFC supported

Service telephone
Connector for 2-wire telephone set RJ11 on front panel
Galvanically isolated

Telephony on AF interface O4LE in 8 kHz channel

Only one O4LE board is configurable for the 8 kHz channel. It supports the following telephony operation mode:
Telephony operation mode MMI500 setting equipment A MMI500 setting equipment B
Service telephone Service phone enabled Service phone enabled *)

The service phone interrupts the teleoperation signals, when enabled and off hook.
Connector for 2-wire telephone set RJ11 on front panel
Galvanically isolated

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-05 6 / 18

1KHL015945-EN
 Technical data ETL500 Rel. 3

Teleoperation and external teleprotection in 4 kHz channel on AF interface O4LE

Number of teleoperation 1) or external teleprotection ports 2) 3) per O4LE board: Group delay distortion
[s]
Attenuation
dB]
- when 4-wire telephony is configured 3 4)
- without 4-wire telephony 4
1)
Each port can be configured individually for channels 1 or 2 Group delay distortion without allpass filter
2)
Port 4 is used for external teleprotection Group delay distortion with allpass filter
3)
Only 1 external teleprotection port per channel can be configured
4)
Port 1 is used for 4-wire telephony
Attenuation

AF ports
Galvanically isolated
Operation mode Off
On - disconnectable Frequency
On - non disconnectable
Measured attenuation and group delay distortion for
Input level -20 to +4 dBm in steps of 0.5 dB
teleoperation ports
Output level -20 to +8 dBm in steps of 0.5 dB
Impedance 600 Ohms balanced
Balance to ground ≥ 40 dB
Return loss ≥ 14 dB
Attenuation distortion ≤ ± 0.9 dB between 300 and 4000 Hz
Group delay distortion with allpass filter ≤ 0.2 ms between 800 and 3600 Hz
Squelch function available

Transit filters
Number of available transit filters per O4LE board
- when speech is configured 2
- when speech is not configured 4

Standard transit filters

Characteristic Bandpass without group delay equalization
Ripple in passband ≤ ± 0.9 dB
Attenuation in stopband ≥ 50 dB
Width of transition band 120 Hz
Lower boundary of passband 300 to 3720 Hz in steps of 60 Hz
Upper boundary of passband 420 to 3840 Hz in steps of 60 Hz
Width of passband 60 to 3540 Hz in steps of 60 Hz
Group delay distortion Attenuation
Group delay equalized transit filters [s] [dB]
Five filters with equalized group delay responses

Bandpass filter 2160 to 3600 Hz

Group delay distortion
- For transit connection of the band above voice with cutoff frequency of 2000 Hz
- For use with pilot frequencies of 3780 or 3840 Hz
- To be used in combination with allpass filter on P4LQ Attenuation
- Allows transit connection of the NSK5 channel ‘1200 Bd above speech’
- Ripple in passband ≤ ± 0.9 dB
- Attenuation in stopband ≥ 50 dB
- Width of transition band 120 Hz Frequency

- Group delay distortion ≤ 0.2 ms between 2340 and 3420 Hz Measured attenuation and group delay distortion with
group delay equalized bandpass filter 2160 to 3600 Hz

Bandpass filter 2340 to 3600 Hz

- For transit connection of the band above voice with cutoff frequency of 2200 Hz
- For use with pilot frequencies of 3780 or 3840 Hz
- To be used in combination with allpass filter on P4LQ
- Ripple in passband ≤ ± 0.9 dB
- Attenuation in stopband ≥ 50 dB
- Width of transition band 120 Hz
- Group delay distortion ≤ 0.2 ms between 2520 and 3420 Hz

Bandpass filter 2520 to 3600 Hz

- For transit connection of the band above voice with cutoff frequency of 2400 Hz
- For use with pilot frequencies of 3780 or 3840 Hz
- To be used in combination with allpass filter on P4LQ
- Ripple in passband ≤ ± 0.9 dB
- Attenuation in stopband ≥ 50 dB
- Width of transition band 120 Hz
- Group delay distortion ≤ 0.2 ms between 2700 and 3420 Hz

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-05 7 / 18

1KHL015945-EN
 Technical data ETL500 Rel. 3
Lowpass filter 3600 Hz
- For transit connection of the entire AF band excluding pilot
- For use with pilot frequencies of 3780 or 3840 Hz
- To be used in combination with allpass filter on P4LQ
- Allows transit connection of NSD550 with own guard signal
- Allows transit connection of NSK5 2400 Bd or 1200 Bd V.23 channels
- Ripple in passband ≤ ± 0.9 dB between 300 and 3600 Hz
- Attenuation in stopband ≥ 50 dB
- Width of transition band 120 Hz
- Group delay distortion ≤ 0.2 ms between 800 and 3360 Hz

Special purpose lowpass filter 0 to 3600 Hz

- For one transit connection of the entire AF band excluding pilot
- Compensates group delay distortion of two ETL500 links
- For use with pilot frequencies of 3780 or 3840 Hz
- Not available for two channel equipment
- Not to be used in combination with allpass filter on P4LQ
- Allows transit connection of NSD550 with own guard signal
- Ripple in passband (2 links) ≤ ± 1.8 dB between 300 and 3600 Hz
- Attenuation in stopband ≥ 50 dB
- Width of transition band 120 Hz
- Group delay distortion (2 links) ≤ 0.4 ms between 800 and 3360 Hz

External boost control input

Inactive state Loop resistance ≤ 500 Ohm
Active state Loop resistance ≥ 50 kOhm
Auxiliary voltage 24 VDC ± 30 %
Inversion programmable

Teleoperation in 8 kHz channel on AF interface O4LE

Only one O4LE board is configurable for the 8 kHz channel. It supports a single AF port.

AF port
Galvanically isolated
Input level -20 to +4 dBm in steps of 0.5 dB
Output level -20 to +8 dBm in steps of 0.5 dB
Impedance 600 Ohms balanced
Balance to ground ≥ 40 dB
Return loss ≥ 14 dB
Attenuation distortion ≤ ± 1.8 dB between 300 and 8000 Hz
Squelch function available

Transit lowpass filter 7640 Hz

- For transit connection of the entire AF band excluding pilot
- Ripple in passband ≤ ± 1.8 dB between 300 and 7640 Hz
- Attenuation in stopband ≥ 50 dB
- Width of transition band 120 Hz

Event Recorder
Recording of start time Transmitted NSD550 commands
and end time of Received NSD550 commands
NSD550 unblocking pulses
Alarms
Storage medium Nonvolatile memory
Separate buffers for alarms and commands
No. of recordable events before overflow 2600
Event interval resolution 1 ms
Accuracy of time stamp synchronized on external GPS receiver (option)
Display text and graphical max. 4 graphical views on screen
single view setting independent configurable

External synchronization input for event recorder clock on O4LE, slot N11
Synchronisation signal format IRIG-B unmodulated
Input logic states ‘LOW’ ‘HIGH’
Voltage levels -30 to + 0.8 V + 2 to + 30 V
Input resistance ≥ 5 kOhm
Maximum input voltage ± 75 VDC
Precision of synchronization ± 0.5 ms

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-05 8 / 18

1KHL015945-EN
 Technical data ETL500 Rel. 3

NSD550
Commands for operating mode “2+2” A, B, A+B (non-coded) 2
(“2 non-coded + 2 coded”) C, D, C+D (coded) 2
C+B, D+A (coded) (special combinations)

Commands for operating mode “3+1” A, B, C (non-coded) 3

(“3 non-coded + 1 coded”) D (coded) 1

Command duration without alarm < 10 s

back to guard state (with alarm) > 10 s

Command assignment to trip frequencies:

Op.mode "2+2" Op.mode "3+1" f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 f6 f7 f8
Test Test x
A A x
B B x
A+B C x
C x x
D D x x
C+D x x
A+D x x
B+C x x

Priority rules:
Injected commands Transmitted commands Transmission mode
Op.mode "2+2" Op.mode "3+1" Op.mode "2+2" Op.mode "3+1"
A A A non-coded non-coded
B B B non-coded non-coded
A+B A+B D non-coded coded
C C C coded non-coded
D D D coded coded
C+D C+D D coded coded
A+C C D coded coded
A+D A+D D coded coded
B+C B+C D coded coded
B+D D D coded coded
A+B+C B+C D coded coded
A+B+D A+D D coded coded
A+C+D C+D D coded coded
B+C+D C+D D coded coded
A+B+C+D C+D D coded coded

Test signal frequency f1 427 Hz

Trip signal frequencies f2 640 Hz
f3 853 Hz
f4 1067 Hz
f5 1280 Hz
f6 1493 Hz
f7 1707 Hz
f8 1920 Hz

Signal evaluation time Tev Tev1 : 4.7 ms

Tev2 : 9.4 ms
Tev3 : 18.8 ms

Nominal transmission times including PLC equipment

delay and operating times of the relay interface:
Relay interface contact type:
solid state heavy duty

Nominal transmission time T0 non-coded tripping T01: 10 ms 18 ms

signals T02: 14 ms 22 ms
T03: 20 ms 28 ms
coded tripping T01: 16 ms 24 ms
signals T02: 26 ms 34 ms
T03: 46 ms 54 ms

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-05 9 / 18

1KHL015945-EN
 Technical data ETL500 Rel. 3
Security: 2 steps dependable secure
non-coded tripping T01: Puc<10-4 10-6
(Puc according to IEC 60834-1 signals T02: Puc<10-6 10-10
with 200 ms noise bursts / 200 ms pause) T03: Puc<10-9 10-15
coded tripping T01: Puc<10-8 10-12
signals T02: Puc<10-12 10-20
T03: Puc<10-18 10-30

Dependability: 2 steps dependable *) secure *)

non-coded tripping T01: 6 dB 9 dB
(required SNR in 4 kHz signals T02: 3 dB 6 dB
bandwidth for Pmc < 1 % in 1.3 T0) T03: 0 dB 3 dB
coded tripping T01: 6 dB 9 dB
signals T02: 3 dB 6 dB
T03: 0 dB 3 dB

*) Remark: If NSD550 is used with AMX500 in 8 kHz bandwidth, the dependability figures have to be increased by +1 dB for non-coded
tripping signals and by +2 dB for coded tripping signals.

Transmitter
Level guard signal: ETL pilot -6 dBm0
or separate guard signal -6 dBm0
normal tripping signal 0 dBm0
test signal 0 dBm0

Spurious signal suppression 0.3 ... 4 kHz > 80 dB

> 4 kHz > 80 dB

Signal boosting continuously adjustable 0 to 10 dB

depending on the channel
load in the PLC equipment

Receiver
Level guard signal -6 dBm0
normal tripping signal 0 dBm0
test signal 0 dBm0

Dynamic range 30 dB
minimum level -15 dBm0
maximum level +15 dBm0
Guard signal frequencies
ETL pilot programmable 2160 Hz … 3840 Hz
in steps of 60 Hz
standard setting 3840 Hz

Separate NSD550 guard depending on speech bandwidth 2240 Hz / 2440 Hz / 2640 Hz

guard channel bandwidth 480 Hz

Command prolongation continuously variable 0 … 3 s (resolution 1 ms)

(trip extension) default non-coded signals 0 ms
default coded signals 100 ms

Unblocking
Threshold level 1 (default) -14 dBm0
level 2 -10 dBm0
Delay after loss of Rx signal typical 12 ms
till switching a relay contact maximum 20 ms
Extra delay adjustable 1 ms ... 100 ms
standard setting 1 ms
Pulse duration adjustable 50 ms ... 1000 ms
standard setting 200 ms

Alarms
Guard signal level from nominal > ± 3 dB
detection time <1s
SNR alarm threshold depending on T0 and security setting:
3 dB above Pmc < 1 % value
Tx single component failure from relay interface after > 1 s
Rx single component failure 2 criteria supervision after > 1 s
Checksum error PROM failure instantaneous
Loop test error > 3 attempts
System error watchdog >1s
Tx continuous command sending guard signal 1 to 15 s (default: 10 s)

Alarm relay delay setting range 1.0 to 15 s

default 10 s

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-05 10 / 18

1KHL015945-EN
 Technical data ETL500 Rel. 3
Alarm relay reset setting range 1.0 to 15 s
default 1s

Command outputs while NSD550 link alarm

(SNR/level; state according configuration)
Pick-up time setting range 0 to 15 s
default 5s
Hold time setting range 0 to 15 s
default 0s

Counters
Range commands transmitted > 109
commands received > 109
unblocking > 109
Possibility of reset each single counter via MMI500

Built-in test facilities

Cyclic loop test configurable interval (hours) off / 3 / 6 (default) / 12 / 24
alarm after 3 unsuccessful trials
duration of transmission max. 100 ms (depending on T0)
reception window (8 … 100) ms
event recording sent / replied / failed
Manual loop test activated via MMI500
MMI window shows test result actual measured transmission
time (Tac) of one direction

Immunity against disturbance frequencies in the speech band

Secure against DTMF signalling
MFC signalling

Teleprotection interface type G4AI

Signal inputs
No. of inputs 4 (galvanically isolated by opto couplers)
Method of tripping contact and battery or contact only
(internal aux. supply voltage)
Nominal battery voltage (24, 48, 60, 110, 125, 220, 250) VDC
Input voltage ranges 4, programmable with jumpers:
Jumper Voltage range
.A 24 VDC to < 48 VDC
.B 48 VDC to < 110 VDC
.C 110 VDC to < 220 VDC
.D 220 VDC to 250 VDC
Operating thresholds input operates at:
Jumper Voltage
.A min. 19V
.B min. 36V
.C min. 83V
.D min. 165V

Contact burden 2 ... 10 mA

Operating time < 750 µs
Reverse polarity protection 400 VDC

Signal outputs (solid state)

No. of outputs 4 (galvanically isolated)
Normally Open contact solid-state relay, bounce-free
Tripping command 5…250 VDC
Tripping current ≤ 2 A;
ON / OFF ratio ≤ 1/3 up to 5 min./15 min. max.
Continuous command ≤1A
Current limitation approx. 3 A, typ. 2.6 A
Short circuit cut off after approx. 6 ms for 0.75 s
Leakage current ≤ 200 µA; at 312 V / 70°C
Operating time ≤ 250 µs (typ. 60 µs)
Reverse polarity protection 400 VDC

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-05 11 / 18

1KHL015945-EN
 Technical data ETL500 Rel. 3
Signal outputs (Relay)

No. of outputs 2 (galvanically isolated)

Normally Open contact Mono stable,
or Normally Closed contact electromechanical relay,
programmable with jumpers
Tripping command 5...250 VDC
Rated current ≤ 5 A carry (up to 45°C)
Operating time < 8 ms (typ. 5 ms)
Bounce < 1 ms (typ. 0.2 ms)
Reset time < 4 ms (typ. 3.6 ms)

NSK5 modem G4AK

Refer to the 'Instruction Manual NSK5', 1KHL015989.

MTBF
According to MIL-HDBK 217 Revision F, Notice 2, February 1995

Conditions: 40°C, Ground Benign ETL505 1) ETL540 2) ETL580 3)

MTBF 18.2 years 16.3 years 13.2 years
1)
ETL505 consisting of: Subrack P7LC with B4LE, O4LE, G4AI, P4LQ, P4LS
2)
ETL540 consisting of: Subrack P7LA with P1LA, B5LA, E5LB, P3LB +
Subrack P7LC with B4LE, O4LE, G4AI, P4LQ, P4LR
3)
ETL580 consisting of: Subrack P7LA with P1LA, B5LA, E5LB, P3LB +
Subrack P7LA with P1LA, B5LA, E5LB, P3LC +
Subrack P7LC with B4LE, O4LE, G4AI, P4LQ, P4LR

Power supply
Equipment type ETL505 ETL540 ETL580 ETL540 ETL580
Number of channels 1 1 1 2 2

AC supply 115/230 VAC 115/230 VAC 115/230 VAC 115/230 VAC

+10/-15% +10/-15% +10/-15% +10/-15%
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
± 5% ± 5% ± 5% ± 5%
AC power consumption
- Normal operation *) 180 VA 235 VA 190 VA 245 VA
- Single tone 335 VA 475 VA 345 VA 485 VA

Battery supply 48 VDC 48 VDC 48 VDC 48 VDC 48 VDC

+20/-15% +20/-15% +20/-15% +20/-15% +20/-15%
Ripple (peak to peak) ≤5% ≤5% ≤5% ≤5% ≤5%
DC power consumption
- Normal operation *) 110 W 125 W 165 W 135 W 175 W
- Single tone 130 W 235 W 325 W 245 W 335 W

*) Typical use of each channel: speech + 600 Bd + pilot

Electromagnetic compatibility and insulation

The equipment meets the EMC requirements for:
Emission EN 50081-2: 1993 (EN 55022 class A)
Immunity EN 50082-2: 1995

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-05 12 / 18

1KHL015945-EN
 Technical data ETL500 Rel. 3
DC (station battery) supply input
Insulation test voltage between terminals and ground
IEC 60255-5 710 VDC, 1 min

Insulation resistance
IEC 60255-5 ≥ 100 MOhm, 500 VDC

Impulse withstand test 1.2/50µs Common mode Differential mode

IEC 60255-5 5 kV 5 kV

High frequency disturbance test 1 MHz, 400 Hz repetition rate, 2 s burst duration
IEC 60255-22-1 Common mode Differential mode
IEC 61000-4-12 2.5 kV 1.25 kV

Fast transient burst 5/50 ns, 5 kHz repetition rate

IEC 61000-4-4 4 kV

Surge immunity test Common mode Differential mode

IEC 61000-4-5 0.5 kV 0.5 kV

Conducted radio frequency interference 0.15 to 80 MHz, AM 1kHz/80%

IEC 61000-4-6 10 V (e.m.f.)

Conducted common mode disturbance frequency 50 Hz, continuous mode

IEC 61000-4-16 30 Vrms

Conducted emission 150 kHz to 30 MHz

EN 55022 Class A

Spark test
SS 5361503 8 kV (PL 4)

AC supply input
Insulation test voltage
IEC 60255-5 2 kVrms, 50 Hz, 1 min

Insulation resistance
IEC 60255-5 ≥ 100 MOhm, 500 VDC

Impulse withstand test 1.2/50µs Common mode Differential mode

IEC 60255-5 5 kV 5 kV

High frequency disturbance test 1 MHz, 400 Hz repetition rate, 2 s burst duration
IEC 60255-22-1 Common mode Differential mode
IEC 61000-4-12 2.5 kV 1.25 kV

Fast transient burst 5/50 ns, 5 kHz repetition rate

IEC 61000-4-4 4 kV

Surge immunity test Common mode Differential mode

IEC 61000-4-5 4 kV 2 kV

Conducted radio frequency interference 0.15 to 80 MHz, AM 1kHz/80%

IEC 61000-4-6 10 V (e.m.f.)

Conducted common mode disturbance frequency 50 Hz, continuous mode

IEC 61000-4-16 30 Vrms

Conducted emission 150 kHz to 30 MHz

EN 55022 Class A

Spark test
SS 5361503 8 kV (PL 4)

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-05 13 / 18

1KHL015945-EN
 Technical data ETL500 Rel. 3
Unbalanced carrier input/output
Impulse withstand test 1.2/50µs between terminals and ground
IEC 60255-5 5 kV

High frequency disturbance test 1 MHz, 400 Hz repetition rate, 2 s burst duration
IEC 60255-22-1 2.5 kV

Fast transient burst 5/50 ns, 5 kHz repetition rate

IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV

Surge immunity test Common mode

IEC 61000-4-5 2 kV

Conducted radio frequency interference 0.15 to 80 MHz, AM 1kHz/80%

IEC 61000-4-6 10 V (e.m.f.)

Conducted common mode disturbance frequency 50 Hz, continuous mode

IEC 61000-4-16 30 Vrms

Spark test
SS 5361503 8 kV (PL 4)

Balanced carrier input/output

Insulation test voltage
IEC 60255-5 2 kVrms, 50 Hz, 1 min

Insulation resistance
IEC 60255-5 ≥ 100 MOhm, 500 VDC

Impulse withstand test 1.2/50µs Common mode Differential mode

IEC 60255-5 5 kV 5 kV

High frequency disturbance test 1 MHz, 400 Hz repetition rate, 2 s burst duration
IEC 60255-22-1 Common mode Differential mode
2.5 kV 1 kV

Fast transient burst 5/50 ns, 5 kHz repetition rate

IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV

Surge immunity test Common mode

IEC 61000-4-5 2 kV

Conducted radio frequency interference 0.15 to 80 MHz, AM 1kHz/80%

IEC 61000-4-6 10 V (e.m.f.)

Conducted common mode disturbance frequency 50 Hz, continuous mode

IEC 61000-4-16 30 Vrms

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-05 14 / 18

1KHL015945-EN
 Technical data ETL500 Rel. 3
Speech and AF inputs and outputs including service phone
Insulation test voltage
IEC 60255-5 500 Vrms, 50 Hz, 1 min

Insulation test voltage *)

IEC 60255-5 1 kVrms, 50 Hz, 1 min

Insulation resistance
IEC 60255-5 ≥ 100 MOhm, 500 VDC

Impulse withstand test 1.2/50µs Common mode Differential mode

IEC 60255-5 1 kV 1 kV

High frequency disturbance test 1 MHz, 400 Hz repetition rate, 2 s burst duration
IEC 60255-22-1 Common mode Differential mode
1 kV 0.5 kV

Fast transient burst **) 5/50 ns, 5 kHz repetition rate

IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV

Surge immunity test **) Common mode Differential mode

IEC 61000-4-5 2 kV 1 kV

Surge immunity test 10/700 µs *) Common mode

IEC 61000-4-5 1.5 kV

Conducted radio frequency interference 0.15 to 80 MHz, AM 1kHz/80% **)

IEC 61000-4-6 10 V (e.m.f.)

Conducted common mode disturbance frequency 50 Hz, continuous mode **)

IEC 61000-4-16 10 Vrms

Spark test **)

SS 5361503 6 kV (PL 3+)

*) For subscriber side and PAX side 2 wire interfaces only

**) Not for service phone

Signalling and control interfaces

Insulation test voltage
IEC 60255-5 500 Vrms, 50 Hz, 1 min

Insulation test voltage *)

IEC 60255-5 1 kVrms, 50 Hz, 1 min

Insulation resistance
IEC 60255-5 ≥ 100 MOhm, 500 VDC

Impulse withstand test 1.2/50µs Common mode Differential mode

IEC 60255-5 1 kV 1 kV

High frequency disturbance test 1 MHz, 400 Hz repetition rate, 2 s burst duration
IEC 60255-22-1 Common mode Differential mode
1 kV 0.5 kV

Fast transient burst 5/50 ns, 5 kHz repetition rate

IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV

Surge immunity test Common mode Differential mode **)

IEC 61000-4-5 2 kV 1 kV

Conducted radio frequency interference 0.15 to 80 MHz, AM 1kHz/80%

IEC 61000-4-6 10 V (e.m.f.)

Conducted common mode disturbance frequency 50 Hz, continuous mode

IEC 61000-4-16 10 Vrms

Spark test
SS 5361503 8 kV (PL 4)

*) For E-wire and PAX blocking outputs only

**) Not for PAX blocking

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-05 15 / 18

1KHL015945-EN
 Technical data ETL500 Rel. 3
Teleprotection inputs and outputs on G4AI
Insulation test voltage against other teleprotection inputs or outputs and against equipment electronics
IEC 60255-5 3 kVrms, 50 Hz, 1 min

Insulation test voltage against earth

IEC 60255-5 2.5 kVrms, 50 Hz, 1 min

Insulation resistance
IEC 60255-5 ≥ 100 MOhm, 500 VDC

Impulse withstand test 1.2/50µs Common mode Differential mode *) Differential mode **)
IEC 60255-5 5 kV 5 kV *) 1 kV **)

Fast transient burst 5/50 ns, 5 kHz repetition rate

IEC 61000-4-4 4 kV

Surge immunity test Common mode Differential mode *) Differential mode **)
IEC 61000-4-5 4 kV 2 kV *) 1 kV **)

Conducted radio frequency interference 0.15 to 80 MHz, AM 1kHz/80%

IEC 61000-4-6 10 V (e.m.f.)

High frequency disturbance test 1 MHz, 400 Hz repetition rate, 2 s burst duration
IEC 61000-4-12 Common mode Differential mode
2.5 kV 1.25 kV

Conducted common mode disturbance frequency 50 Hz, continuous mode

IEC 61000-4-16 30 Vrms

Spark test
SS 5361503 8 kV (PL 4)

*) Not for relay outputs

**) For relay outputs

Alarm contacts on P4LQ and R1BC

Insulation test voltage
IEC 60255-5 2 kVrms, 50 Hz, 1 min

Insulation resistance
IEC 60255-5 ≥ 100 MOhm, 500 VDC

Impulse withstand test 1.2/50µs *) Common mode Differential mode

IEC 60255-5 5 kV 1.4 kV

Impulse withstand test 1.2/50µs **) Common mode Differential mode

IEC 60255-5 5 kV 1.2 kV

High frequency disturbance test 1 MHz, 400 Hz repetition rate, 2 s burst duration
IEC 60255-22-1 Common mode Differential mode
2.5 kV 1.25 kV

Fast transient burst 5/50 ns, 5 kHz repetition rate

IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV

Surge immunity test Common mode

IEC 61000-4-5 2 kV

Conducted radio frequency interference 0.15 to 80 MHz, AM 1kHz/80%

IEC 61000-4-6 10 V (e.m.f.)

Conducted common mode disturbance frequency 50 Hz, continuous mode

IEC 61000-4-16 30 Vrms

Spark test
SS 5361503 8 kV (PL 4)

*) For P4LQ
**) For R1BC

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-05 16 / 18

1KHL015945-EN
 Technical data ETL500 Rel. 3
Frontplate connector to service PC, G4AK data interface
Insulation test voltage
IEC 60255-5 500 Vrms, 50 Hz, 1 min

Insulation resistance
IEC 60255-5 ≥ 100 MOhm, 500 VDC

Impulse withstand test 1.2/50µs Common mode

IEC 60255-5 1 kV

High frequency disturbance test 1 MHz, 400 Hz repetition rate, 2 s burst duration
IEC 60255-22-1 Common mode
1 kV

Fast transient burst 5/50 ns, 5 kHz repetition rate

IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV

Surge immunity test *) Common mode

IEC 61000-4-5 2 kV

Conducted radio frequency interference 0.15 to 80 MHz, AM 1kHz/80%

IEC 61000-4-6 10 V (e.m.f.)

Conducted common mode disturbance frequency 50 Hz, continuous mode *)

IEC 61000-4-16 10 Vrms

Spark test **)

SS 5361503 8 kV (PL 4)

*) Not for G4AK data interface

**) Not for frontplate connector to service PC

Frontplate elements (LEDs, push buttons, test sockets, connectors)

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) contact *) air discharge
IEC 61000-4-2 6 kV 8 kV

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) **) contact air discharge

IEC 61000-4-2 8 kV 15 kV

*) Not for test sockets

**) For teleprotection interface G4AI only

Equipment

Radiated electromagnetic field 27 to 1000 MHz, 80% AM, 1 kHz repetition rate
IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m

Radiated electromagnetic field 1.4 … 2.0 GHz, 80% AM, 1 kHz repetition rate
IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m

Radiated electromagnetic field 900 ±5 MHz, 50% PM, 200 Hz repetition rate
ENV 50204 10 V/m

Radiated emission 30 MHz to 1000 MHz

EN 55022 Class A

Electrical safety
Meets the safety requirements according to IEC 60950 / EN 60950

Mechanical data, dimensions and weights

Equipment subracks: 19" wide conforming to standards IEC 60297 and DIN 41494
Subrack P7LA 3 units high (1 unit = 44.45 mm)
Subrack P7LC 6 units high

ETL505 ETL540 ETL580

Height 400 mm 533 mm 711 mm
Width 482 mm 482 mm 482 mm
Depth 350 mm 350 mm 350 mm
Weight fully equipped
without cables: 16 kg 26 kg 38 kg

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-05 17 / 18

1KHL015945-EN
 Technical data ETL500 Rel. 3

Ambient conditions
Operation
Climatic conditions: Complies with IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3K5

Within specification:
- Temperature range -5 to +45 °C
- Relative humidity ≤ 95%, <28 g/m3

Operational: +55 °C

Mechanical conditions Complies with IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3M1

Vibration sinusoidal Complies with IEC 60068-2-6
Shock Complies with IEC 60068-2-27

Transport (equipment not energized)

Climatic conditions Complies with IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2K4
Mechanical conditions Complies with IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2M1
Vibration sinusoidal Complies with IEC 60068-2-6
Shock Complies with IEC 60068-2-27
Free fall
(0.25 m / equipment is packed) Complies with IEC 60068-2-32

Storage
Climatic conditions Complies with IEC 60721-3-1, Class 1K5
Mechanical conditions Complies with IEC 60721-3-1, Class 1M1

All technical data are subject to change without notice.

ABB Power Automation Ltd

Utility Communication Systems
Department NK
CH-5300 Turgi/Switzerland

Call Center: +41 845 844 844

E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.abb.ch/chpau

ABB Power Automation Ltd Edition 2000-01-05 18 / 18

1KHL015945-EN